G1280-Z-MA-001 Complete PDF - G1280-Z-MA-001 - Rev 0 - Bulk System

User Manual Bulk System
Customer References:
Customer:
Rig / Hull: West Jupiter (Seadrill 8)
Tag Number:
National Oilwell Varco References:

SO Number / Project Number: G1280
Document Number: G1280-Z-MA-001
Revision: 0
www.nov.com
Document number G1280-Z-MA-001
Revision 0
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
0 16-Sep-2013 For Information MADA EIMO HEOL

Rev Date Reason for issue Prepared Checked Approved
(dd.mm.yyyy)
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Document Number: G1280-Z-MA-001 TOC
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title Remarks

Section
1 Introduction
2 Data sheet
2.1 Main Equipment List
2.2 Instrument Index
2.3 Valve Index
2.4 Product/Mechanical Data Sheet
2.5 Instrument Data Sheet
2.6 Valve Data Sheet
3 Technical Description
4 Operating Instructions
5 Maintenance Instructions
5.1 Maintenance Instructions
5.2 Manual Sounding Table
5.3 Installation Procedure
5.4 Handling, Preservation & Storage Procedure
6 Spare Parts List
7 Drawings & Parts Lists
7.1 General Arrangement Diagram
7.2 Block Diagram
7.3 Assembly Drawings
8 SUB Vendor User Manuals
8.1 Pressure Safety Valve
8.2 Pressure Transmitter
8.3 Level Switch
8.4 Load Cell
8.5 Pressure Gauge
8.6 Butterfly Valve
8.7 Ball Valve
8.8 Knife Gate Valve
8.9 Sampling Unit
8.10 Flexible Bellows
www.nov.com
Document Number: G1280-Z-MA-001 TOC section 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

Section
1 Introduction
Introduction for User Manual, Bulk System BS-Z-MA-016 2
www.nov.com
Introduction for User Manual
Bulk System
RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

BS Bulk Systems
ADDITIONAL CODE SDRL CODE TOTAL PGS
A1 8 6 This document contains proprietary and confidential National Oilwell Varco Norway AS
information which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is Blakstadmarka 26
REMARKS loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property
of National Oilwell Varco. Reproduction, in whole or in 1386 ASKER
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE part; or use of this design or distribution of this information Norway
to others is not permitted without the express written
consent of National Oilwell Varco. This document is to be
CLIENT PO NUMBER returned to National Oilwell Varco upon request and in Phone +47 64 00 50 00
any event upon completion of the use for which it was Fax +47 66 90 23 53
loaned.
© Copyright National Oilwell Varco - 2010
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
BS-Z-MA-016 2
www.nov.com
Document number BS-Z-MA-016
Revision 2
Page 3 of 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 USER MANUAL INTRODUCTION.................................................................................... 4

1.1 General Information about the User Manual ........................................................... 4
1.2 Safety Summary ..................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Safety and Service Bulletins (Product Information Bulletins) .................................. 4
1.4 Restriction in Use .................................................................................................... 4
1.5 Warranty Conditions ............................................................................................... 5
1.6 Preparation ............................................................................................................. 6
1.7 Supplier Support ..................................................................................................... 6
www.nov.com
Revision 2
Page 4 of 6
1 USER MANUAL INTRODUCTION
1.1 General Information about the User Manual
This user manual is based on the NS 5820 (Supplier’s Documentation of Equipment)

documentation standard, and contains the required information for safe operation and
maintenance.
1.2 Safety Summary
The hazards and protective measures (cautions, warnings and notes) applicable to this
equipment are summarized at the beginning, or marked throughout, in the Operation
Instructions and Maintenance Instructions.
1.3 Safety and Service Bulletins (Product Information Bulletins)
If supplier, after the equipment is taken into use, becomes aware of urgent equipment
information needed by user for safe operation, this information will be submitted in the
form of safety or service bulletins.
Safety bulletins are used when immediate corrective action is needed to secure the
safety of operators and maintenance personnel. Service bulletins are used when
immediate corrective action is needed to prevent damage or malfunction of the
equipment.
Upon receipt of a safety or service bulletin, user is required to confirm that the content is
read and understood, and will be implemented soonest.
1.4 Restriction in Use
1) Personnel performing maintenance or operation activities (on a daily to annual

basis) are required to have the relevant statutory schooling and training specific to
the equipment.
2) All servicing, repair and modification must be performed according to the guidelines
in the instructions.
3) Lead sealings must not be broken without written approval from National Oilwell
Varco.
4) Only genuine National Oilwell Varco (NOV) parts or parts recommended by NOV
shall be used.
5) No repairs, modifications, adjustments etc. beyond normal maintenance activities

shall be performed without prior written approval from NOV.
www.nov.com
Revision 2
Page 5 of 6
6) The equipment shall not be used beyond its scope and limits of operation - its design
criteria e.g. environmental conditions, heavy lifts etc.
7) The equipment shall be stored / transported in accordance with instructions if so

issued.
8) The equipment shall not be exposed to external influences outside design criteria
such as sandblasting, chemicals etc. unless this is part of normal inspections and
maintenance
9) When defined as applicable for equipment:

All maintenance activities performed must be logged as entries in a logbook. The
information has to contain all relevant information regarding the procedure such as
date, running hours, parts used and who performed the service. The log can either
be in a paper or electronic format. NOV reserves the right to ask for this logbook.
Logbook references to the procedure performed could be a critical factor in deciding
warranty applicability.
Recommendation
During the first year of operation, NOV recommends a full service performed by the
manufacturer supplier. Manufacturer Supplier will go through maintenance routines,
take oil samples and perform all necessary maintenance. Based on this NOV will create
a report that includes the equipment status and if necessary, recommend actions that
should be taken either to restore the equipment to a good running condition or propose
changes in maintenance routines.
1.5 Warranty Conditions
From the time the equipment is delivered until end of warranty period the following
applies unless otherwise agreed upon the contract:
Warranty covers the following:
Qualification: Warranty claim from purchaser is accepted by National Oilwell Varco

(NOV).
1) Repair or replacement of a documented defect as required by the contract during

normal working hours.
Warranty does not cover the following:
1) Waiting time.
2) Express deliveries.
3) Overtime.
4) Personnel beyond agreements in contract.
5) Travel expenses and shipment beyond the scope of what is agreed upon in the
contract.
www.nov.com
Revision 2
Page 6 of 6
General:
All claims shall be addressed to NOV immediately after the error has occurred. The
claim shall be in writing with a detailed explanation regarding what has happened, and
an argument why the purchaser considers this to be warranty applicable.
Repairs shall not be performed without written approval from NOV.
1.6 Preparation
Preparation instructions are prepared in separate documents if preparation is part of

National Oilwell Varco scope of work.
1.7 Supplier Support
Subject equipment is supplied by National Oilwell Varco Norway AS.
The below contact information applies for support from supplier. Always refer to
supplier’s project number when contacting supplier for assistance.
National Oilwell Varco Norway AS

Service box 168
N-1371 Asker
NORWAY
Switchboard phone: +47 64005000

Service fax: +47 66902353
24 hours service phone: +47 64005001
Spare parts phone: +47 64005019
Spare parts fax: +47 66902353
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title

Section
2 Data sheet
2.3 Valve Index
www.nov.com
Document Number: G1280-Z-MA-001 TOC section 2.1
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Main Equipment List, Bulk System G1280-Z-LA-003 0
www.nov.com
Main Equipment List
Bulk System

West Jupiter (Seadrill 8) G1280 Bulk System
3 This document contains proprietary and confidential National Oilwell Varco Norway AS
information which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is P.O. Box 168, Drengsrudhagen 4
of National Oilwell Varco. Reproduction, in whole or in N-1371 ASKER
Sub-Contract Seadrill # 8 any event upon completion of the use for which it was Fax +47 38 19 48 12
loaned.
G1280-Z-LA-003 0
Document number G1280-Z-LA-003
Revision 0
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
0 18.07.2013 For Information HEOL EIMO HEOL

Rev Date (dd.mm.yyyy) Reason for issue Prepared Checked Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision Change description

0
Document number G1280-Z-LA-003
Revision 0
Page 3
NOV
Tag no. Type Equipment Name General Arr. drawing P&ID
Qty.
No.
3D21501A/B 2 DP40 Surge Tank G1280-DP40-G0001/2 NA
3D21401A//D, 3D21301A//C,
8 DP45 Bulk Tank G1280-DP45-G0001/2 NA
3D21302
3D21402A/B 2 DP45 Day Tank G1280-DP45-G0004/7 NA
3D21901//3 3 DP46 Dust Cyclone/Collector VG1280-DP46-G0001 NA
3D21201A/B
4 DP47 Rock Catcher G1280-DP47-G0001 NA
3D21204A/B
3D21202A/B 2 DP44 Sampling Unit G1280-DP44-G0001 NA
See instrument index
- DP42 Instruments NA NA
(G1280-E-LA-002)
See valve index
- DP41 Bulk transfer valves G1280-GAD-001 NA
(G1280-L-LA-005)
NA 58 DP42 Flexible bellows NA NA
For more information regarding data necessary for understanding the equipments mode of operation, please see in chapters for
Operating Instructions and Maintenance.
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Instrument Index, Bulk System G1280-E-LA-002 0
www.nov.com
Instrument Index
Bulk System

ADDITIONAL CODE SDRL CODE TOTAL PGS This document contains proprietary and confidential information National Oilwell Varco Norway AS
which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is loaned for limited
6.14 4 Drengsrudhagen 4
purposes only and remains the property of National Oilwell
REMARKS
Varco. Reproduction, in whole or in part; or use of this design
1386 ASKER
or distribution of this information to others is not permitted Norway
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE without the express written consent of National Oilwell Varco. Phone +47 64 00 50 00
This document is to be returned to National Oilwell Varco upon Fax +47 38 19 48 12
request and in any event upon completion of the use for which
CLIENT PO NUMBER
it was loaned.
© Copyright National Oilwell Varco
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REVISION
G1280-E-LA-002 0
www.nov.com
Document Number: G1280-E-LA-002
Revision: 0
REVISION HISTORY
0 11.12.2012 For Information CECJ YOSE ROEK

Rev. Date (dd.mm.yyyy) Reason for issue Prep. Check Appr.
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0 First issue.
Revision: 0
FIELD TAG Assebly Drawing Loop PART OF EQUIPMENT INSTRUMENT TYPE MODEL NO. RANGE Ex Protection IP Protection Datasheet ITEM NO. Notes
Diagram MIN MAX UNIT No.
3D21-WE006A G1280-DP40-A0001 G1279-MCS-E0231 Surge Tank 1 (6m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-5T 0 5 Tonn NA IP68 100398
3D21-WE006B G1280-DP40-A0001 G1279-MCS-E0231 Surge Tank 1 (6m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-5T 0 5 Tonn NA IP68 100398
3D21-WE006C G1280-DP40-A0001 G1279-MCS-E0231 Surge Tank 1 (6m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-5T 0 5 Tonn NA IP68 100398
3D21-LSH006 G1280-DP40-A0001 NA Surge Tank 1 (6m3) Vegavib 62 Level Switch VB62.XXTGCZKMX NA NA IP66 DS-157279 157279 480mm
3D21-PT017 G1280-DP40-A0001 NA Surge Tank 1 (6m3) Vegabar 54 Pressure Transmitter BR54.XXGA1GHKMAS 0 10 bar NA IP66 DS-169521 169521 R=3/4" 0,2% with display
3D21-WE005A G1280-DP40-A0002 G1279-MCS-E0230 Surge Tank 2 (6m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-5T 0 5 Tonn NA IP68 100398
3D21-WE005B G1280-DP40-A0002 G1279-MCS-E0230 Surge Tank 2 (6m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-5T 0 5 Tonn NA IP68 100398
3D21-WE005C G1280-DP40-A0002 G1279-MCS-E0230 Surge Tank 2 (6m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-5T 0 5 Tonn NA IP68 100398
3D21-LSH005 G1280-DP40-A0002 NA Surge Tank 2 (6m3) Vegavib 62 Level Switch VB62.XXTGCZKMX NA NA IP66 DS-157279 157279 480mm
3D21-PT014 G1280-DP40-A0002 NA Surge Tank 2 (6m3) Vegabar 54 Pressure Transmitter BR54.XXGA1GHKMAS 0 10 bar NA IP66 DS-169521 169521 R=3/4" 0,2% with display
3D21-WE001A G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0221 Barite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-WE001B G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0221 Barite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-WE001C G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0221 Barite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-WE001D G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0221 Barite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-LSH001 G1280-DP45-A0013 NA Barite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) Vegavib 62 Level Switch VB62.CXTGCZKMX NA ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-157479 157479 1260mm
3D21-PT002 G1280-DP45-A0013 NA Barite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) Vegabar 54 Pressure Transmitter BR54.CXGA1GHKMAE 0 10 bar ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-192895 192895 R=3/4" 0,1% with display
3D21-WE004A G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0220 Bentonite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-WE004B G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0220 Bentonite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-WE004C G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0220 Bentonite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-WE004D G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0220 Bentonite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-LSH004 G1280-DP45-A0013 NA Bentonite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) Vegavib 62 Level Switch VB62.CXTGCZKMX NA ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-157479 157479 1260mm
3D21-PT011 G1280-DP45-A0013 NA Bentonite Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) Vegabar 54 Pressure Transmitter BR54.CXGA1GHKMAE 0 10 bar ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-192895 192895 R=3/4" 0,1% with display
3D21-WE101A G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0224 Cement Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-WE101B G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0224 Cement Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-WE101C G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0224 Cement Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-WE101D G1280-DP45-A0013 G1279-MCS-E0224 Cement Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-100TE 0 100 Tonn ATEX Eexn IP68 209385
3D21-LSH104 G1280-DP45-A0013 NA Cement Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) Vegavib 62 Level Switch VB62.CXTGCZKMX NA ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-157479 157479 1260mm
3D21-PT111 G1280-DP45-A0013 NA Cement Bulk Tank 1 (113m3) Vegabar 54 Pressure Transmitter BR54.CXGA1GHKMAE 0 10 bar ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-192895 192895 R=3/4" 0,1% with display
Revision: 0
FIELD TAG Assebly Drawing Loop PART OF EQUIPMENT INSTRUMENT TYPE MODEL NO. RANGE Ex Protection IP Protection Datasheet ITEM NO. Notes
Diagram MIN MAX UNIT No.
3D21-WE105A G1280-DP45-A0004 G1279-MCS-E0232 Cement Day Tank 1 (40m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-50T 0 50 Tonn NA IP68 209723
3D21-WE105B G1280-DP45-A0004 G1279-MCS-E0232 Cement Day Tank 1 (40m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-50T 0 50 Tonn NA IP68 209723
3D21-WE105C G1280-DP45-A0004 G1279-MCS-E0232 Cement Day Tank 1 (40m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-50T 0 50 Tonn NA IP68 209723
3D21-LSH105 G1280-DP45-A0004 NA Cement Day Tank 1 (40m3) Vegavib 62 Level Switch VB62.XXTGCZKMX NA NA IP66 DS-157279 157279 480mm R=1"
3D21-PT114 G1280-DP45-A0004 NA Cement Day Tank 1 (40m3) Vegabar 54 Pressure Transmitter BR54.XXGA1GHKMAS 0 10 bar NA IP66 DS-169521 169521 R=3/4" 0,2% with display
3D21-WE106A G1280-DP45-A0007 G1279-MCS-E0233 Cement Day Tank 2 (40m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-50T 0 50 Tonn NA IP68 209723
3D21-WE106B G1280-DP45-A0007 G1279-MCS-E0233 Cement Day Tank 2 (40m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-50T 0 50 Tonn NA IP68 209723
3D21-WE106C G1280-DP45-A0007 G1279-MCS-E0233 Cement Day Tank 2 (40m3) VC 3500 Load Cell VC3500-50T 0 50 Tonn NA IP68 209723
3D21-LSH106 G1280-DP45-A0007 NA Cement Day Tank 2 (40m3) Vegavib 62 Level Switch VB62.XXTGCZKMX NA NA IP66 DS-157279 157279 480mm R=1"
3D21-PT117 G1280-DP45-A0007 NA Cement Day Tank 2 (40m3) Vegabar 54 Pressure Transmitter BR54.XXGA1GHKMAS 0 10 bar NA IP66 DS-169521 169521 R=3/4" 0,2% with display
3D21-LSH008 G1280-DP46-A0001 NA Barite Dust Collector Tank Vegavib 63 Level Switch VB63.CXAGCZKMX NA ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-192874 192874 480mm R=1"
3D21-PT023 G1280-DP46-A0001 NA Barite Dust Collector Tank Vegabar 54 Pressure Transmitter BR54.CXGA1GHKMAE 0 10 bar ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-192895 192895 R=3/4" 0,1% with display
3D21-LSH007 G1280-DP46-A0001 NA Bentonite Dust Collector Tank Vegavib 63 Level Switch VB63.CXAGCZKMX NA ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-192874 192874 480mm R=1"
3D21-PT020 G1280-DP46-A0001 NA Bentonite Dust Collector Tank Vegabar 54 Pressure Transmitter BR54.CXGA1GHKMAE 0 10 bar ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-192895 192895 R=3/4" 0,1% with display
3D21-LSH108 G1280-DP46-A0001 NA Cement Dust Collector Tank Vegavib 63 Level Switch VB63.CXAGCZKMX NA ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-192874 192874 480mm R=1"
3D21-PT123 G1280-DP46-A0001 NA Cement Dust Collector Tank Vegabar 54 Pressure Transmitter BR54.CXGA1GHKMAE 0 10 bar ATEX Eexi IP66 DS-192895 192895 R=3/4" 0,1% with display
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section
2.3 Valve Index

Valve Index, Bulk System G1280-L-LA-005 0
www.nov.com
Valve Index
Bulk System
West Jupiter (Seadrill 8) G1280 Bulk Systems

4 which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is loaned for limited P.O. Box 168, Drengsrudhagen 4
REMARKS N-1371 ASKER
Norway
or distribution of this information to others is not permitted
CLIENT PO NUMBER request and in any event upon completion of the use for which
it was loaned.
G1280-L-LA-005 0
www.nov.com
Document Number: G1280-L-LA-005
Revision: 0
REVISION HISTORY
0 25.02.2013 For Information MADA RUPE ROEK

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0 First issue
Remarks table
#1 Butterfly valve Fig. 14

#2 Butterfly valve Fig. 15
#3 Ball valve Fig. 190
#4 Pneumatic actuator Fig. 79E-002
#4A Pneumatic actuator Fig. 79E-003S
#8 Pneumatic actuator Fig. 79E-024S
#8A Pneumatic actuator Fig. 79E-036
#11 Pneumatic actuator PremiAir-009
#12 Pneumatic actuator PremiAir-014
#13 Pneumatic actuator PremiAir-014s (spring return)
#14 Pneumatic actuator PremiAir-037s (spring return)
#15 Position Monitors, Avid ZR Plus
#16 Analoge positioner Smartcall
#17 Larox valve PVE 125 AK/N10
Valves
Package Weight
Field_Tag Type Description Size Type Valve Type NOV Item Number Drawing no. Datasheet No. Remarks/Comments Package No.
(kg)
3D21-HCV049 Ball Valve (pneu.act.) 50 RF 4-20mA 97538 7090-RBBAA-03 G1280-L-DS-001 #3, #4A, #16 20
3D21-HV001 Butterfly Valve (pneu.act.) 125 RF On/Off 216300 7090-RBBAA-03 G1280-L-DS-001 #1, #6, #15 17
3D21-HV024 Butterfly Valve (pneu.act.) 80 RF On/Off 216298 7090-RBBAA-03 G1280-L-DS-001 #1, #5, #15 10,3
3D21-HV065 Knife Gate Valve (pneu.act.) 125 On/Off 209015 7090-RBBAA-03 NA
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Product Data Sheet, Bulk System G1280-Z-DS-001 0
www.nov.com
Product Data Sheet
Bulk System

6.2 7 This document contains proprietary and confidential National Oilwell Varco Norway AS
information which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is Drengsrudhagen 4
loaned.
G1280-Z-DS-001 0
Document number G1280-Z-DS-001
Revision 0
Page 2 of 7
REVISION HISTORY
0 29.11.2012 For Information ROEK ALTO ROEK

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
Revision 0
Page 3 of 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 SURGE TANK ................................................................................................................... 4

2 BULK TANK...................................................................................................................... 5
3 DUST COLLECTOR & CYCLONE .................................................................................. 6
4 DAY TANK ........................................................................................................................ 7
Revision 0
Page 4 of 7
1 SURGE TANK
DESIGN DATA
1. Service Storage of dry bulk powder
2. Area classification Safe Zone
3. Design standards ASME section VIII division 1
4. General Arrangement Drawing G1280-DP40-G0001/2
5. Serial number DP40-313/314
6. Rules and regulations DNV Drill
7. Certifying authority DNV
8. Environmental loads See reaction force document
G1280-N-RD-001
9. Design temperature -10/+50°C
10. Operating temperature -10/+50°C
11. Design pressure 5,5 barg.
12. Max. Operating pressure 5,0 barg.
13. Corrosion allowance 1.0 mm
14. Safety Devices Pressure safety valve
Set point: 5,5barg
3
Capacity: 2286 Nm /h@5.5barg
15. Weight, dry See General Arrangement drawing
16. Weight, operating See General Arrangement drawing
3
17. Total volume 8,5 m
3
18. Operating volume 7,0 m
19. Equipment shipment size ( L x W x H) See General Arrangement drawing
20. UTILITY CONSUMPTIONS
21. Max. air consumption Limited by the PSV capacity
22. Min. air consumption Not specified
23. Air dew point -40°C (recommended)
24. Power consumption Load cells: not specified
High level switch: 0,7W
Pressure transmitter: 0,5W
25. Voltage Load cells 10-18V
High level switch: 10-36 VDC
Pressure transmitter: 12-36VDC
26. INSTRUMENTATION
27. Load cell VC3500 – 10T for level monitoring, 3 each unit
28. High level switch Vegavib 62 for high level alarm, 1 each unit
29. Pressure transmitter with indicator Vegabar 54 for pressure monitoring, 1 each unit
30. Pressure safety valve Kunkle 6010 for overpressure relief, 1 each unit
31. SURFACE PROTECTION
1
32. Blast cleaning SA 2 /2
33. Paint Specification and System No. External: HLA-4A System no. 1 (300µm DFT)
Internal: HLA-4A System no. 5 (40µm DFT)
34. Top Coat Color RAL 9002
35. LUBRICATION
36. Grease type N/A
Revision 0
Page 5 of 7
2 BULK TANK
DESIGN DATA
1. Service Storage and pneumatic transport of dry bulk powder
2. Area classification Zone 2
5. Serial number DP45-1114/1115/1116/1117/1118/1119/1120/1121
G1280-N-RD-001
Set point: 5,5barg
3
3
17. Total volume 113m
3
18. Operating volume 105m
26. INSTRUMENTATION
30. Pressure safety valve Kunkle 6010 for overpressure protection, 1 each unit
1
35. LUBRICATION
36. Grease type N/A
Revision 0
Page 6 of 7
3 DUST COLLECTOR & CYCLONE
DESIGN DATA
1. Service Separation and storage of dust particles from air
used in pneumatic transport of dry bulk powder
2. Area classification Zone 2
4. General Arrangement Drawing G1280-DP46-G0001
5. Serial number DP46-384/385/386
G1280-N-RD-001
Set point: 5,5barg
3
3 (
17. Total volume 2m Collector tank)
3
18. Operating volume 1,8m (Collector tank)
24. Power consumption High level switch: 0,7W
25. Voltage High level switch: 10-36 VDC
26. MANUFACTURER MAIN ITEMS
30. Manual/actuated knife gate valve Orbinox Ex
1
35. LUBRICATION
36. Grease type N/A
Revision 0
Page 7 of 7
4 DAY TANK
DESIGN DATA
1. Service Storage and pneumatic transport of dry bulk powder
2. Area classification Safe Zone
5. Serial number DP45-1122/1123
G1280-N-RD-001
Set point: 5,5barg
3
3
17. Total volume 40m
3
18. Operating volume 37m
26. INSTRUMENTATION
1
35. LUBRICATION
36. Grease type N/A
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Instrument Data Sheet, Bulk System G1280-E-DS-002 0
www.nov.com
Instrument Data Sheet
Bulk System

6.2 7 which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is loaned for limited Drengsrudhagen 4
REMARKS 1386 ASKER
Norway
it was loaned.
G1280-E-DS-002 0
www.nov.com
Document Number: G1280-E-DS-002
Revision: 0
REVISION HISTORY
0 11.12.2012 For Information CECJ YOSE ROEK

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0 First issue
NORSOK INSTRUMENT DATASHEET L06 DS-157279
LEVEL SWITCH VIBRATING FORK
Tag number : TBA

Service description : Set/Alarm Point :
P&ID : Area :
Line/equipment no. : P. O. Number :
1 GENERAL 3 NOTES
1.01 Type : Vibrating level switch
1.02 Manufacturer : Vega Grieshaber KG 1 Min. alarm mode:
1.03 Manufacturer model no : VB62.XXTGCZKMX Vibrating element uncovered - 16 mA ± 1 mA
1.04 Operating Temp. Limits : ÷20/+80°C Vibrating element covered - 8 mA ± 1 mA
1.05 Operating Press. Limit : ÷1/+16 bar
1.06 Mounting : Top Max. alarm mode:
1.07 Weight : 3,5 Kg Vibrating element uncovered - 8 mA ± 1 mA
1.08 Other : Vibrating element covered - 16 mA ± 1 mA
2 SWITCH
2.01 Repeatability : 1 mm
2.02 Fork insertion length : 480 mm
2.03 Fork material : 316L
2.04 Sour service spec. :
2.05 Process conn. size/type : R 1"
2.06 Pressure rating : ÷1/+16 bar
2.07 Connection material : 316L
2.08 Housing Dimension : ø77 x 112
2.09 Housing Material : PBT
2.10 Cable connection : Terminals
2.11 Cable entry : M20 x 1,5
2.12 Enclosure protection : IP 66/67
2.13 Ex. classification : NA
2.14 Protective coating : NA
2.15 Supply voltage : 10-36 VDC
2.16 Consumption : 0,7 W
2.17 Reset; automatic or manual : auto
2.18 Deadband or differential : 4 mm mounted in vertical position
2.19 Alarm at increase/decrease : See NOTE 1
2.20 Contact configuration : DPDT relay
2.21 Contact material : N.A.
2.22 Contact rating : N.A.
2.23 Contact action on alarm : See NOTE 1
2.24 Other :
Rev Date Issue/description Prepared Checked Approved Datasheet no. Page

Tag number : TBA

P&ID : Area :
1 GENERAL 3 NOTES
1.03 Manufacturer model no : VB62.CXTGCZKMX Vibrating element uncovered - 16 mA ± 1 mA
1.06 Mounting : Top Max. alarm mode:
1.07 Weight : 3,5 Kg Vibrating element uncovered - 8 mA ± 1 mA
2 SWITCH
2.13 Ex. classification : ATEX II 1G, 1/2G, 2G Eex ia IIC T6
2.24 Other :

NORSOK INSTRUMENT DATASHEET P01 DS-169521
PRESSURE INSTRUMENT ELECTRIC
Tag number : Scale Range :

P&ID : Area :
1 GENERAL 5 TRANSMITTER
1.01 Type : Pressure transmitter 5.01 Indicator : Installed
1.02 Manufacturer : Vega Grieshaber KG 5.02 Output signal : 4-20 mA
1.03 Manufacturer model no : BR54.XXGA1GHKMAS 5.03 Communication : HART
1.04 Operating Temp. Limits : -20 to +120°C 5.05 Consumption : 0,5 watt
1.05 Mounting : any direction 5.06 Load limitation : 450 ohm at 24 VDC supply
1.06 Weight : 0,8 kg 5.07 Other :
1.07 Other :
6 SWITCH
2 INSTRUMENT CHARACTERISTICS 6.01 Reset; automatic or manual :
2.01 Calibrated input range : 0-10 barg 6.02 Deadband or differential :
2.02 Characteristic : linear 6.03 Alarm at increase/decrease :
2.03 Accuracy : 0.2% of FS 6.04 Contact configuration :
2.04 Repeatability : 0.02% of FS 6.05 Contact material :
2.05 Lower / upper range limits : ÷1/12 barg 6.06 Contact rating :
2.06 Min / max span : 1/12 barg 6.07 Contact action on alarm :
2.07 Zero adjustment : -1 barg to +11 barg 6.08 Other :
2.08 Overpressure protect. to : 90 bar
2.09 Max static pressure : NA
2.10 Other : 7 CHEMICAL SEAL
7.01 Type :
7.02 Material, upper/lower part :
3 ELEMENT / SENSOR 7.03 Material, bolts / nuts :
3.01 Type : Capacitive 7.04 Material, diaphragm :
3.02 Material, element (sensor) : Ceramic, diaphragm 7.05 Fill fluid :
3.03 Material, socket (inlet port) : DIN 1.4435 (316L) 7.06 Capillary length/diameter :
3.04 Material, sensor bolts/nuts : NA 7.07 Material, capillary/armour :
3.05 Process conn. size/type : 3/4"BSP threads 7.08 Process conn. size/type :
3.06 Sour service spec. : NA 7.09 Other :
3.07 Other :
8 ACCESSORIES
4 HOUSING 8.01 Mounting bracket :
4.01 Dimension : ø77 x 125 8.02 Material, mounting bracket :
4.02 Material : PBT 8.03 Overpr. protection valve :
4.03 Cable connection : terminals 8.04 Material, overpr. prot. valve :
4.04 Cable entry : M20 x 1,5 8.05 Pulsation damper :
4.05 Enclosure protection : IP66 8.06 Material, pulsation damper :
4.06 Ex. classification : NA 8.07 Other :
4.08 Other :
9 NOTES

NORSOK INSTRUMENT DATASHEET P01 DS-192895
PRESSURE INSTRUMENT ELECTRIC
Tag number : Scale Range :

P&ID : Area :
1 GENERAL 5 TRANSMITTER
1.01 Type : Pressure transmitter 5.01 Indicator : Installed
1.02 Manufacturer : Vega Grieshaber KG 5.02 Output signal : 4-20 mA
1.03 Manufacturer model no : BR54.CXGA1GHKMAE 5.03 Communication : HART
1.04 Operating Temp. Limits : -20 to +120°C 5.05 Consumption : 0,5 watt
1.05 Mounting : any direction 5.06 Load limitation : 450 ohm at 24 VDC supply
1.06 Weight : 0,8 kg 5.07 Other :
1.07 Other :
6 SWITCH
2 INSTRUMENT CHARACTERISTICS 6.01 Reset; automatic or manual :
2.01 Calibrated input range : 0-10 barg 6.02 Deadband or differential :
2.02 Characteristic : linear 6.03 Alarm at increase/decrease :
2.03 Accuracy : 0.2% of FS 6.04 Contact configuration :
2.04 Repeatability : 0.02% of FS 6.05 Contact material :
2.05 Lower / upper range limits : ÷1/12 barg 6.06 Contact rating :
2.06 Min / max span : 1/12 barg 6.07 Contact action on alarm :
2.07 Zero adjustment : -1 barg to +11 barg 6.08 Other :
2.08 Overpressure protect. to : 90 bar
2.09 Max static pressure : NA
2.10 Other : 7 CHEMICAL SEAL
7.01 Type :
7.02 Material, upper/lower part :
3 ELEMENT / SENSOR 7.03 Material, bolts / nuts :
3.01 Type : Capacitive 7.04 Material, diaphragm :
3.02 Material, element (sensor) : Ceramic, diaphragm 7.05 Fill fluid :
3.03 Material, socket (inlet port) : DIN 1.4435 (316L) 7.06 Capillary length/diameter :
3.04 Material, sensor bolts/nuts : NA 7.07 Material, capillary/armour :
3.05 Process conn. size/type : 3/4"BSP threads 7.08 Process conn. size/type :
3.07 Other :
8 ACCESSORIES
4 HOUSING 8.01 Mounting bracket :
4.01 Dimension : ø77 x 125 8.02 Material, mounting bracket :
4.02 Material : PBT 8.03 Overpr. protection valve :
4.03 Cable connection : terminals 8.04 Material, overpr. prot. valve :
4.04 Cable entry : M20 x 1,5 8.05 Pulsation damper :
4.05 Enclosure protection : IP66 8.06 Material, pulsation damper :
4.06 Ex. classification : ATEX II 1G,1/2G, 2G , EEx ia IICT6 8.07 Other :
4.08 Other :
9 NOTES

Tag number : NA
P&ID : Area :
1 GENERAL 3 NOTES
1.03 Manufacturer model no : VB63.CXAGCZKMX Vibrating element uncovered - 16 mA ± 1 mA
1.06 Mounting : All positions Max. alarm mode:
1.07 Weight : 2 kg Vibrating element uncovered - 8 mA ± 1 mA
2 SWITCH
2.13 Ex. classification : ATEX II 1G,1/2G, 2G , EEx ia IICT6
2.24 Other :

TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Valve Data Sheet, Bulk System G1280-L-DS-001 0
www.nov.com
Valve Data Sheet
Bulk System
West Jupiter (Seadrill 8) G1280 Bulk Systems

6.2 7 which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is loaned for limited Drengsrudhagen 4
REMARKS 1385 ASKER
Norway
it was loaned.
G1280-L-DS-001 0
www.nov.com
Document Number: G1280-L-DS-001
Revision: 0
REVISION HISTORY
0 25.02.2013 For Information MADA RUPE ROEK

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0 First issue.
Item 216298 INSTRUMENT DATASHEET V01
BLOCK (ON-OFF) VALVE
1 GENERAL 5 HYDRAULIC/PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR

1.01 Type : Butterfly Valve 3" 5.01 Supply medium : Instrument Air
1.02 Norsok Valve Data Sheet : NA 5.02 Volume per stroke : 0,346 Litre
1.03 Operating Temp. Limits : (-15 + 100)C 5.03 Supply press. min/norm/max : 5/6/10 Bar
1.04 Operating Press. Limit : 16 bar 5.04 Diaphragm/piston size : NA
1.05 Max shut-off diff. press. : 16 bar 5.05 Material diaphragm/piston : Aluminium
1.06 Drain valve included : NA 5.06 Supply/return connection : Iso 228/-G 1/4"" BSP x10 Dp
1.08 Complete assembly : VLV/ACT/SOL/LIMITSWITCHES
1.09 Mounting : Wafer/Inline 6 ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR
1.10 Weight : 6.01 Cable conn. signal/power : NA
1.11 Other : 6.02 Cable entry signal/power : NA
6.03 Enclosure protection : NA
2 BODY 6.04 Ex. classification : NA
2.01 Manufacturer : Keystone 6.05 Input signal : NA
2.02 Manufacturer model no : Fig. 14 6.06 Communication : NA
2.03 Nominal size : 80 6.07 Supply voltage/frequency : NA
2.04 Process conn. size/type : Wafer 6.08 Consumption : NA
2.05 Pressure rating : PN 16 6.09 Other : NA
2.06 Face to face dimension : 46 mm
2.07 Bonnet type : NA 7 LIMIT SWITCH
2.08 Material, body/bonnet : Ductile Iron 7.01 Type : SPDT Magnetic Reed switches
2.09 Material , gaskets : NA 7.02 Manufacturer : Tyco
2.10 Material, packing : NBR 7.03 Manufacturer model no : SW-050128UK
2.11 Material, bolts/nuts : A4 7.04 Number of switches : 2
2.12 Protective coating : Siloxane Epoxy 7.05 Cable connection : Flying lead
2.13 Other : 7.06 Cable entry :
7.07 Enclosure protection : IP67
3 TRIM 7.08 Ex. classification : Ex mb e IIC T6 Gb
3.01 Type : Trim 673 7.09 Cont. action when activated : open/close indication
3.02 Valve characteristic : 90 7.10 Contact material : NA
3.03 Max flow coefficient : Kv=492 7.11 Contact rating : IP 67
3.04 Stem travel : 90° 7.12 Current when activated : 2A / 120VAC, 1.5A / 24VDC,
3.05 Seat leakage class : Bubble-tight shut off 1.0A / 230VAC
3.06 Material, seat : NBR 7.13 Current when not activated :
3.07 Material, trim (moving part) : Ductile Iron 7.14 Working voltage range :
3.08 Material, stem : AISI316 7.15 Material, housing : Engineered Resin
3.09 Other : 7.16 Protective coating : NA
7.17 Other : Hi-Vue indicator
4 ACTUATOR (GENERAL)
4.01 Type : Double Acting 8 Solenoid
4.02 Manufacturer : Keystone 8.01 Manufacturer : Westlock
4.03 Manufacturer model no : 79E-006-double acting 8.02 Manufacturer model no : B-VA-031003UK
4.04 Orientation : Inline 8.03 Enclosure protection : IP 68
4.05 Dimension : 167x103x93 8.04 Ex. classification : Ex mb e IIC T6 Gb
4.06 Connection actuator/body : Direct mounted/Bolted 8,05 Pwr. Consumption : 2 watts (VDC)
4.07 Conn. actuator/valve stem : Adaptor
4.08 Max required torque/thrust : 36 Nm 9 Misc.
4.09 Torque at 5/8bar : 63Nm@5 bar supl/103Nm @ 8bar su9.01 Manufacturer : Westlock
4.10 Thrust at min/max supply : NA 9.02 Manufacturer model no : ZR-7E202CS3F-AU-AR1
4.11 Valve opening time : < 1 Sec 9.03 Visual indicator : 0-90O
4.12 Valve closing time : < 1 Sec 9.04 Ex. classification : Ex mb e IIC T6 Gb
4.13 Failure action : NA 9.05 Atex cert.no. : Sira 08ATEX5351X
4.14 Material yoke : NA 9.06 Protection : IP67
4.15 Material, stem : Carbon Steel 9.07 Cable connection : 9 point terminal strip
4.16 Material, bolts/nuts : A4 stainless steel 9.08 Cable entry : 1xM20 & 1xM25
4.17 Material casing : Hardanodised Aluminium
4.18 Material, spring : NA Westlock ZR plus, position monitor:
4.19 Protective coating : Electro spray powder coating Limit switches, solenoid, visual indication in one unit
4.20 Other : Tyco p/n: SBXTZH2Z8Z2XXFM
1 16.01.2012 As built AT KE AJ
Rev Date Prepared Checked Approved

4.09 Torque at 5/8bar : 123Nm@5 bar supl/200Nm @ 8bar s9.01 Manufacturer : Westlock

1.03 Operating Temp. Limits : (-15 + 100)C 5.03 Supply press. min/norm/max : 5,5/6/10 Bar
4.01 Type : Single Acting 8 Solenoid
4.03 Manufacturer model no : 79E-024-single acting 8.02 Manufacturer model no : B-VA-031003UK
4.09 Torque at 5/8bar : 142Nm@5,5 bar supl/284Nm @ 8,3b9.01 Manufacturer : Westlock

1.08 Complete assembly : Valve/Lever
4.09 Torque at 5/8bar : 33Nm@5 bar supl/54Nm @ 8bar sup9.01 Manufacturer : Westlock
Item No. 97538 INSTRUMENT DATASHEET V01
REGULATING VALVE

1.01 Type : Ball valve 2" 5.01 Supply medium : Instrument Air
1.02 Norsok Valve Data Sheet : NA 5.02 Volume per stroke : 0.750 Litre
1.03 Operating Temp. Limits : (-29 + 200)C 5.03 Supply press. min/norm/max : 5,5/6/8,3 Bar
1.08 Complete assembly : VLV/ACT/POSITIONER
1.09 Mounting : Flanged (Raised Face) 6 ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR
2.01 Manufacturer : Tyco 6.05 Input signal : NA
2.04 Process conn. size/type : Flanged ANSI B16.5 6.08 Consumption : NA
2.08 Material, body/bonnet : ASTM A351 (SS) Gr. CF8M 7.01 Type : NA
2.09 Material , gaskets : NA 7.02 Manufacturer : NA
2.10 Material, packing : PTFE 7.03 Manufacturer model no : NA
2.11 Material, bolts/nuts : A4 stainless steel 7.04 Number of switches : NA
2.12 Protective coating : NA 7.05 Cable connection : NA
2.13 Other : 7.06 Cable entry : 1xM20
3 TRIM 7.08 Ex. classification : NA
3.01 Type : Trim T92 7.09 Cont. action when activated : NA
3.02 Valve characteristic : Linear 7.10 Contact material : NA
3.03 Max flow coefficient : 7.11 Contact rating : NA
3.04 Stem travel : 90° 7.12 Current when activated : NA
3.05 Seat leakage class : Bubble-tight shut off NA
3.06 Material, seat : PTFE 7.13 Current when not activated : NA
3.07 Material, trim (moving part) : ASTM A351 (SS) Gr. CF8M 7.14 Working voltage range : NA
3.08 Material, stem : A276 Type 316 7.15 Material, housing : NA
7.17 Other : SmartCal
4.01 Type : Single Acting 8 Solenoid
4.02 Manufacturer : Keystone 8.01 Manufacturer : NA
4.03 Manufacturer model no : PremiAir 014-fail close 8.02 Manufacturer model no : NA
4.04 Orientation : Inline 8.03 Enclosure protection : NA
4.05 Dimension : 206x138x133 8.04 Ex. classification : NA
4.06 Connection actuator/body : Direct mounted/Bolted 8,05 Pwr. Consumption : NA
4.09 Torque at min/max supply : 17Nm@4 bar supl/107Nm @ 7bar su9.01 Manufacturer : Westlock
4.10 Thrust at min/max supply : NA 9.02 Manufacturer model no : SM-I2DD0B
4.12 Valve closing time : < 1 Sec 9.04 Ex. classification : ATEX II 2 G EEx ib IIC T4-IP66
4.13 Failure action : NA 9.05 Atex cert.no. : 135130X
4.14 Material yoke : NA
4.15 Material, stem : Carbon Steel
4.16 Material, bolts/nuts : A4 stainless steel Westlock SmartCal, intelligent positioner.
4.18 Material, spring : NA
4.19 Protective coating : Electro spray powder coating
4.20 Other :

TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section
3 Technical Description
Technical/Functional Description, Bulk System G1280-Z-SA-001 0
www.nov.com
Technical/Functional
Description
Bulk System

loaned.
G1280-Z-SA-001 0
Document number G1280-Z-SA-001
Revision 0
Page 2 of 23
REVISION HISTORY
0 25.04.2013 For Information ROEK HANJ ROEK

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
Revision 0
Page 3 of 23
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 5
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 5
1.2 The control system .................................................................................................. 5
1.3 Abbreviations .......................................................................................................... 5
1.4 Document references .............................................................................................. 6
1.5 Tag number references ........................................................................................... 6
2 BARITE/BENTONITE SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 7
2.1 General description ................................................................................................. 7
2.2 Automatic transfers ................................................................................................. 7
2.3 Safety functions: ..................................................................................................... 8
2.4 Operator input: ........................................................................................................ 8
2.5 Status indication...................................................................................................... 8
2.6 Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 8
2.7 Transferring between bulk tanks and from bulk tanks to boat / surge tanks ........... 8
2.7.1 General description ...................................................................................... 8
2.7.2 Manual transfer ............................................................................................ 8
2.7.3 Manual transfer of barite to cement surge tank.......................................... 10
2.8 Refill of surge tanks .............................................................................................. 11
2.8.1 General description .................................................................................... 11
2.8.2 Manual filling .............................................................................................. 11
2.8.3 Automatic filling.......................................................................................... 11
2.9 Filling from loading stations................................................................................... 13
2.9.2 Manual transfer .......................................................................................... 13
2.10 Dust Collector ....................................................................................................... 14
2.10.1 General description .................................................................................. 14
2.10.2 Manual emptying of dust collector ........................................................... 14
2.10.3 Automatic emptying of dust collector ....................................................... 15
3 CEMENT BULK SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 16
3.1 General description ............................................................................................... 16
3.2 Automatic transfers ............................................................................................... 16
3.3 Safety functions: ................................................................................................... 17
Revision 0
Page 4 of 23
3.4 Operator input: ...................................................................................................... 17

3.5 Status indication.................................................................................................... 17
3.6 Alarms ................................................................................................................... 17
3.7 Transferring between bulk tanks and from bulk tanks to boat/day tanks ............... 18
3.7.2 Manual transfer .......................................................................................... 18
3.8 Filling from loading stations................................................................................... 19
3.8.2 Manual transfer .......................................................................................... 19
3.9 Refill of day tanks.................................................................................................. 19
3.9.2 Manual filling .............................................................................................. 19
3.9.3 Automatic filling.......................................................................................... 20
3.10 Refill of surge tank ................................................................................................ 21
3.10.2 Manual filling ............................................................................................ 21
3.11 Dust Collector ....................................................................................................... 22
3.11.2 Manual emptying of dust collector ........................................................... 22
3.11.3 Automatic emptying of dust collector ....................................................... 23
Revision 0
Page 5 of 23
1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
This document describes all the functions of the Bulk System (BS). It is intended used for all
personnel that will operate the system and for those that need a detailed understanding of how
the system functions/works.
The processes/system contains the following equipment:
Barite/Bentonite Storage Tanks
Barite/Bentonite Surge Tanks
Cement Storage Tanks
Cement Day Tanks
Dust collectors with cyclones
Instrumentation and Valves for Storage handling
1.2 The control system

The control of the barite/bentonite system is done from the VDU placed in the sackstore and
the mud lab. The control of the cement system is done from the VDU in the cement room.
For a more detailed description see doc.: G1279-Z-SA-001
1.3 Abbreviations
MCS Mud Control System
MMS Mud Mixing System
BS Bulk System
MT Mud Treatment
P&ID Process and Instrument Diagrams
GA General Arrangement Drawings
HMI Human Machine Interface (In Touch application.)
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
VDU Video Display Unit
Vess
Revision 0
Page 6 of 23
1.4 Document references

For a complete understanding of the system functions, the following documents are required:
Doc. No Description
SHI-7111-RBBAA-02 P&ID BULK BARITE/BENTONITE/CEMENT SYSTEM
G1280-PID-001 P&ID MUD MIXING EQUIPMENT
G1280-BS-E0001/0002 BLOCK DIAGRAM BULK WEIGHING SYSTEM
G1279-Z-SA-001 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION FOR MCS
G1281-Z-SA-003 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION FOR MMS
G1279-Z-MA-007 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MCS
G1281-Z-MA-007 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR MMS
1.5 Tag number references

Tag numbers for equipments that are refered to in this document.
Tag no. Description

3D29-701/702/703 PC Screen (PC)
3D21-301A/B/C Barite Storage Tanks
3D21-302 Bentonite Storage Tank
3D21-501A Barite Surge Tank
3D21-501B Bentonite Surge Tank
3D21-401A/B/C/D Cement Storage Tanks
3D21-402A/B Cement Day Tanks
3D21-901/902/903 Dust Collectors
Revision 0
Page 7 of 23
2 BARITE/BENTONITE SYSTEM
Reference is made to P&ID’s:
SHI-7111-RBBAA-02, P&ID BULK BARITE/BENTONITE SYSTEM
The Barite/Bentonite bulk system contains the following main equipment:

1 of Bentonite storage tank
3 of Barite storage tanks
1 of Bentonite surge tank
1 of Barite surge tank
2 of Barite/Bentonite dust cyclones w/collectors
1 of Sampling unit
2 of Rock catchers
2.1 General description

The bulk tanks are used to store approx.113m3 each of Barite/Bentonite. The MCS contains
logic to transfer material from the bulk tanks to the surge tanks, between bulk tanks, from the
loading stations to the bulk tanks, from bulk tanks to loading stations or emptying the dust
collector. Transportation of bulk is done by:
Pressurizing the bulk tank
Routing up applicable valves between source and receive tank
Opening purge valve
Opening bulk tank discharge valve
2.2 Automatic transfers

The transfers listed here are the different possibilities for automatic transfers/refills/lineups. All
other transfers/refills/lineups must be operated manually.
Line Up no. From Tank To Tank

BB 1 BULK TANK 3D21-302 SURGE TANK 3D21-501A
BB 2 BULK TANK 3D21-301A SURGE TANK 3D21-501A
BB 3 BULK TANK 3D21-301B SURGE TANK 3D21-501A
BB 4 BULK TANK 3D21-301C SURGE TANK 3D21-501A
BB 5 BULK TANK 3D21-302 SURGE TANK 3D21-501B
BB 6 BULK TANK 3D21-301A SURGE TANK 3D21-501B
BB 7 BULK TANK 3D21-301B SURGE TANK 3D21-501B
BB 8 BULK TANK 3D21-301C SURGE TANK 3D21-501B
BB 9 DUST COLLECTOR 3D21-901 BULK TANK 3D21-301A
BB 10 DUST COLLECTOR 3D21-901 BULK TANK 3D21-301B
BB 11 DUST COLLECTOR 3D21-901 BULK TANK 3D21-301C
BB 12 DUST COLLECTOR 3D21-902 BULK TANK 3D21-302
Destination tanks that are pressurized are disabled from the different popups. It is not possible
to automatically line up and transfer to a tank that is pressurized.
Revision 0
Page 8 of 23
2.3 Safety functions:

Pressure safety relief valves
2.4 Operator input:

Manually operations of valves (ref.: G1279-Z-SA-001).
Selection of contents in tanks (ref.: G1279-Z-SA-001).
The “VDU” have one “pop-up” for each surge tank regarding refill.
2.5 Status indication

Valve status (ref.: G1279-Z-SA-001)
Current pressure in bulk/surge tanks and dust collector.
Current weight in bulk/surge tanks.
Current calculated level in bulk/surge tanks and dust collector as a bar graph (in % of max
volume)
2.6 Alarms
Normal valve alarms (ref.: G1279-Z-SA-001)
Analogue display alarms (ref.: G1279-Z-SA-001)
Level switch to detect Hi level on bulk/surge tanks and dust collector.
Fill alarm (if an automatic refill is in progress and there is no weight gain in the destination
tank within one minute).
2.7 Transferring between bulk tanks and from bulk tanks to boat / surge tanks
2.7.1 General description

Transferring between bulk tanks and from bulk tanks to boats is only possible by manual line-
up. This requires the use of valves/piping that may interfere with other operations/automatic
sequences. Manual refill mode must therefore be selected for refilling of Barite/Bentonite surge
tank before manual transfer or filling of bulk tanks from boat is possible.
2.7.2 Manual transfer

Manual transfer is possible by lining up the valves manually by means of “pop-up” windows
described in G1279-Z-SA-001. Note that manual operations are inhibited if this interferes with
an automatic sequence already started.
The following procedure should be followed:

Check the whole route from source tank to destination tank/boat to see that no automatic
sequences are in progress.
Close ventilation valve and discharge valve on source tank
Open pressurization valve on the source bulk tank to pressurize the tank.
Open valve between dust cyclone and dust collector.
Open ventilation valve and close discharge valve on destination tank/boat
When destination tank/boat is depressurized:
Open line valves from source tank to destination tank/boat.
Revision 0
Page 9 of 23
When pressure in source tank reach 4,4 bar (pressure to be tuned during commissioning):
Open line purge valve to 30%.
Open discharge valve on source tank.
Transfer of Barite/Bentonite takes place:
When desired level in destination tank/boat is reached:

Close source tank discharge valve.
Close source tank pressurization valve.
Open line purge valve to 100% (the pipe is now cleaned).
After approx. 20sec. (time to be determined during commissioning):

Close line purge valve.
Close line valves from source tank to destination tank.
Depressurize source tank.
When source tank is depressurized close remaining applicable valves.
Revision 0
Page 10 of 23
2.7.3 Manual transfer of barite to cement surge tank

Manual transfer of barite to cement surge tank is possible by temporarily hook-up a pipe
insertion piece and then lining up the valves manually by means of “pop-up” windows

Hook up the “pipe insertion piece” (ref. P&ID BULK BARITE / BENTONITE SYSTEM)
Check the whole route from source tank to cement surge tank to see that no automatic
Open valve between cement dust cyclone and dust collector.
Open ventilation valve and close discharge valve on cement surge tank
When cement surge tank is depressurized:

Open line valves from source tank to cement surge tank.
Open discharge valve on source tank.
Transfer of Barite takes place
When desired level in destination is reached:

After approx. 20sec.(time to be determined during commissioning):

When the refill is completed the hooked up “pipe insertion piece” must be removed. It
should under no circumstances be permanent hooked up.
Revision 0
Page 11 of 23
2.8 Refill of surge tanks

The Barite / Bentonite surge tanks are represented on the “VDU”. From these objects the
operator has access to a “pop-up” window giving him the following options:
Selection of which bulk tank he wants automatically refill from.
Upper fill level (% of max. surge tank volume)
Lower fill level (% of max. surge tank volume)
2.8.2 Manual filling

See section 2.7.2.
2.8.3 Automatic filling

If automatic refill mode is chosen all valves that interfere with the automatic transfer route
selected are inhibited for manual operations.
In automatic refill mode, operation of valves is determined by the level (0-100%) in the surge
tank and by the upper and lower fill limits. Once the tank level falls below the lower fill level,
transfer is initiated. Once the level reaches the upper fill level the discharge valve is closed and
a cleaning cycle is completed (blow the line free for Barite / Bentonite).
The following preparations can be done manually prior to an automatic transfer to save time
during startup of an automatic refill sequence.
When automatic refill is initiated the following will occur (NOTE: Does not depend on the level
in surge tank):
All valves that may interfere with automatic transfer sequence are forced to their normal
condition (closed) and set in Auto mode, preventing them for manual operation.
Ventilation valve on surge tank is opened.
Ventilation valve on bulk tank is closed.
Pressurization valve on bulk tank is opened.
All valves on route from bulk tank to the surge tank apart from bulk tank discharge valve
and line purge valve are opened automatically.
Once all valves give correct feedback:

If the pressure in the bulk tank is higher than the minimum transfer pressure (pressure to be
determined during commissioning), automatic transfer will take place when the level falls below
the low-limit (operator input). The transfer sequence is as follows:
The line purge valve opens to a predefined opening degree (to be tuned during
commissioning).
When the purge valve has reached its set point:

Bulk tank discharge valve opens (i.e. transfer will now start)
Revision 0
Page 12 of 23
Bulk material is now being transferred from the bulk tank to the surge tank. When the level has
reached the upper fill limit (operator input):
Bulk tank discharge valve closes
The purge valve opens fully (100 %) for a fixed time period (time to be determined during
commissioning) and then closes.
System waits for the surge tank level to drop below the lower filling limit, which will trigger a
new filling sequence.
Automatic refilling is stopped when:

Operator aborts the automatic refilling sequence.
Pressure in bulk tank drops below the minimum transfer pressure.
HiHi level in surge tank is triggered.
There has been too little weight increase (amount to be determined during commissioning)
in surge tank within 1 minute intervals.
If a refill is in progress when it is stopped the following sequence is initiated:

Discharge valve on bulk tank is closed.
Pressurization valve on bulk tank is closed.
The purge valve opens 100% for a fixed time period (time to be determined during
commissioning).
All valves on route from actual bulk tank to actual surge tank are closed.
Ventilation valve on surge tank is closed.
All valves inhibited at start of automatic refill are released (valves will remain closed).
Revision 0
Page 13 of 23
2.9 Filling from loading stations

Filling bulk tanks from loading stations are possible by manual line-up. This requires the use of
valves/piping that may interfere with other operations/automatic sequences. Manual refill mode
must therefore be selected for refilling of Barite/Bentonite surge tank before manual transfer or
filling of bulk tanks from boat is possible.


Check the whole route from boat to destination tank to see that no automatic sequences
are in progress.
Confirm discharge valve on destination tank is closed and open ventilation valve.
When destination tank is depressurized:
Open line valves between loading station and destination tank.
When desired level in destination tank (source tank is empty) is reached:

Give message to boat to stop the transfer.
After purging the line:

Close line valves from loading station to destination tank.
Revision 0
Page 14 of 23
2.10 Dust Collector

The dust collectors are described in this chapter.
They can be emptied manually as described in chap. 2.10.2. Since there can be a combination
of materials in the dust collector, the operator should empty the dust collector before changing
material in a transfer. Thus preventing the dust collector containing a mix of materials, making
it difficult to empty this later.
The dust collectors are also equipped with a high level sensor that indicates when the dust
collector is full.
2.10.2 Manual emptying of dust collector
Before manual emptying of dust collector can take place, stop all transfers that interfere with
the line up and close all valves that may interfere with emptying process.
Check the route from dust collector and to applicable bulk/surge tank to see that no
automatic sequences are in progress.
Close valve between dust cyclone and dust collector.
Check that dust collector discharge valve is closed.
Pressurize dust collector.
When pressure in dust collector reach approx. 4,4 bar:

Open ventilation valve on desired bulk tank.
Open inlet valve and intermediate valves to selected bulk tank.
Open discharge valve from dust collector.
Transfer of Barite / Bentonite to bulk tank takes place.
When dust collector is empty (collector is considered empty when the pressure drops below
1,2 bar):
Close pressurization valve.
When the dust collector is depressurized:
Close transfer valves.
Open valve between cyclone and dust collector.
The dust collector is now ready to receive more dust.

Revision 0
Page 15 of 23
2.10.3 Automatic emptying of dust collector
2.10.3.1 General description

The dust collectors can be automatically emptied.
2.10.3.2 Operator input

Selection of which tank to automatically empty to
2.10.3.3 Status indication

Display if a sequence is initiated
2.10.3.4 Interlocks
The destination tank must not be pressurized
The destination tank Hi Level switch must not be triggered
2.10.3.5 Auto sequence

By clicking on the “Auto Empty” button next to the Dust Collector on the VDU a ““pop-up””
appear. From her you can select which tank to empty to.
When automatic emptying is initiated the following will occur:

Valves between selected tank and the dust collector are opened (except the discharge
valve)
All other valves / sequences that may interfere with the emptying sequence are inhibited
Valve between dust cyclone and dust collector is closed
Dust collector is pressurized (pressure to be commissioned)
When pressure in dust collector is 4,5bar discharge valve from dust collector is opened.
Transfer from dust collector to bulk tank takes place.
The dust collector is considered empty when the pressure drops below a certain level (to be
commissioned). When Dust Collector is empty the following will occur:
When pressure in dust collector drops below 1bar (to be commissioned) pressurization
valve is closed
Transfer valves are closed when pressure drops below 0,1bar (to be certain that collector is
depressurized before valve to cyclone is opened if a refill is in progress)
All valves / sequences that were inhibited at start are released
When a sequence is started it is not possible to cancel it.

Revision 0
Page 16 of 23
3 CEMENT BULK SYSTEM
Reference is made to P&ID’s:

SHI-7111-RBBAA-02 P&ID BULK CEMENT SYSTEM
The Cement bulk system contains the following main equipment:

4 of Cement storage tanks
2 of Cement day tanks
1 of Cement surge tank (Not NOV supply)
1 of Cement dust collector
1 of Sampling unit
2 of Rock catchers
3.1 General description

The storage tanks are used to store approx. 113m3 each of Cement. The MCS contains logic
to transfer material from the bulk tanks to the day tanks, to the surge tank, from day tank to
surge tank, between bulk tanks, from the loading stations to the bulk tanks or emptying the
dust collector. Transportation from a bulk tank to a day-/surge tank is done by
Pressurizing the bulk tank
Routing up applicable valves between bulk tank and day-/surge tank
Opening purge valve
Opening bulk tank discharge valve
Discharge from the cement surge tank by cement unit vendor.
3.2 Automatic transfers

The transfers listed here are the different possibilities for automatic transfers/refills/lineups. All
other transfers/refills/lineups must be operated manually.
Line Up no. From Tank To Tank

CEM 1 BULK TANK 3D21-401A DAY TANK 3D21-402A
CEM 2 BULK TANK 3D21-401B DAY TANK 3D21-402A
CEM 3 BULK TANK 3D21-401C DAY TANK 3D21-402A
CEM 4 BULK TANK 3D21-401D DAY TANK 3D21-402A
CEM 5 BULK TANK 3D21-401A DAY TANK 3D21-402B
CEM 6 BULK TANK 3D21-401B DAY TANK 3D21-402B
CEM 7 BULK TANK 3D21-401C DAY TANK 3D21-402B
CEM 8 BULK TANK 3D21-401D DAY TANK 3D21-402B
CEM 9 DUST COLLECTOR 3D21-903 BULK TANK 3D21-401A
CEM 10 DUST COLLECTOR 3D21-903 BULK TANK 3D21-401B
CEM 11 DUST COLLECTOR 3D21-903 BULK TANK 3D21-401C
CEM 12 DUST COLLECTOR 3D21-903 BULK TANK 3D21-401D
Destination tanks that are pressurized are disabled from the different pop-ups. It is not possible
to automatically line up and transfer to a tank that is pressurized.
Revision 0
Page 17 of 23
3.3 Safety functions:

Pressure safety relief valves
3.4 Operator input:

Manually operations of valves (ref.: G1279-Z-SA-001).
Selection of contents in tanks (ref.: G1279-Z-SA-001).
The “VDU” have one “pop-up” for the day tank regarding refill.
3.5 Status indication

Valve status (ref.: G1279-Z-SA-001)
Current pressure in bulk/day tanks and dust collector.
Current weight in bulk/day tanks.
Current calculated level in bulk/day tanks as a bar graph (in % of max volume)
The cement surge tank is represented on the “VDU”. This object can indicate weight and
pressure in cement surge tank if signals are provided from cement unit supplier.
3.6 Alarms
Normal valve alarms (ref.: G1279-Z-SA-001)
Analogue display alarms (ref.: G1279-Z-SA-001)
Level switch to detect Hi level on bulk/day tanks and dust collector
Fill alarm. If an automatic refill is in progress and there is no weight gain in the destination
tank within one minute.
Revision 0
Page 18 of 23
3.7 Transferring between bulk tanks and from bulk tanks to boat/day tanks

Transferring between bulk tanks and from bulk tanks to boats is only possible by manual line-
up. This requires the use of valves and piping that may interfere with other operations.


Check the whole route from source tank to destination tank/boat to see that no automatic
Confirm discharge valve on destination tank is closed and open ventilation valve on
destination tank/boat
When destination tank/boat is depressurized:
Open line valves from source tank to destination tank/boat.
Open discharge valve on source tank (valve is positional and the opening degree can be
adjusted).
Transfer of Cement takes place:
When desired level in destination tank/boat (source tank is empty) is reached:

After approx. 20sec. (time to be determined during commissioning):

Revision 0
Page 19 of 23
3.8 Filling from loading stations

Filling bulk tanks from loading stations are possible by manual line-up. This requires the use of
valves and piping that may interfere with other operations.

described in G1279-Z-SA-001.

Check the whole route from boat to destination tank to see that no other sequences are in
progress.
Confirm discharge valve on destination tank is closed and open ventilation valve.
When destination tank is depressurized:
Open line valves between loading station and destination tank.
When desired level in destination tank (source tank is empty) is reached:

Give message to boat to stop the transfer.
After purging the line:

Close line valves from loading station to destination tank.
3.9 Refill of day tanks

The Cement day tanks are represented on the “VDU”. From these objects the operator has
access to a “FILL pop-up” window giving him the following options:
Selection of which bulk tank he wants automatically refill from.
Level to refill to in %.

See section 3.8.2.
Revision 0
Page 20 of 23
3.9.3 Automatic filling

If automatic refill mode is chosen all valves that interfere with the automatic transfer route
selected are inhibited for manual operations.
From the “VDU” the operator have access to a “pop-up” window giving him the following
options:
Selection of source tank to transfer from
Level to fill to in % (stop level)
Start button
Stop/cancellation button
The following preparations can be done manually prior to an automatic transfer to save time
during startup of an automatic refill sequence.
When automatic refill is initiated the following will occur:

All valves that may interfere with automatic transfer sequence are forced to their normal
condition (closed), preventing them for manual operation.
Ventilation valve on day tank is opened.
Ventilation valve on bulk tank is closed.
Pressurization valve on bulk tank is opened.
All valves on route from bulk tank to the day tank apart from bulk tank discharge valve and
line purge valve are opened automatically.
Once all valves above give correct feedback and the pressure reaches the operating level
the purge valve opens (30%).
When the purge valve has reached its set point:

Bulk tank discharge valve opens (i.e. transfer will now start)
Automatic refilling is stopped when:

Amount to transfer is reached.
Operator aborts the automatic refilling sequence.
Pressure in bulk tank drops below the minimum transfer pressure.
HiHi level in day tank is triggered.
There has been too little weight increase in day tank within 1 minute intervals.
If a refill is in progress when it is stopped the following sequence is initiated:

Discharge valve on bulk tank is closed.
Pressurization valve on bulk tank is closed.
The purge valve opens 100% for a fixed time period (time to be determined during
commissioning).
All valves on route from actual bulk tank to actual day tank are closed when cleaning is
finished.
Ventilation valve on day tank is closed.
All valves inhibited at start of automatic refill are released (valves will remain closed).
Revision 0
Page 21 of 23
3.10 Refill of surge tank

The cement surge tank is represented on the “VDU”. This object can indicate weight and
pressure in cement surge tank if signals are provided from cement unit supplier.

See section 3.7.2.
Revision 0
Page 22 of 23
3.11 Dust Collector

The dust collector is described in this chapter.
It can be emptied manually as described in section 3.11.2. Since there can be a combination of
materials in the dust collector, the operator should empty the dust collector before changing
material in a transfer. Thus to preventing that the dust collector can contain a mix of materials,
making it difficult to empty this later.
The dust collector is also equipped with a high level sensor that indicates when the dust
collector is full.
3.11.2 Manual emptying of dust collector

Before manual emptying of dust collector can take place, stop all transfers that interfere with
the line up and close all valves that may interfere with emptying process.
Check the whole route from dust collector and to applicable bulk/surge tank to see that no
other colliding sequences are in progress.
Close valve between dust cyclone and dust collector
Check that dust collector discharge valve is closed
Pressurize dust collector
When pressure in dust collector reach approx. 4,4 bar.

Open ventilation valve on desired bulk tank
Open inlet valve and intermediate valves to selected bulk tank
Open discharge valve from dust collector
Transfer of Cement to bulk tank takes place.
When dust collector is empty (collector is considered empty when the pressure drops below
1,2 bar):
Close pressurization valve
When the dust collector is depressurized,
Close transfer valves
Open valve between cyclone and dust collector

Revision 0
Page 23 of 23
3.11.3 Automatic emptying of dust collector
3.11.3.1 General description

The dust collectors can be automatically emptied.
3.11.3.2 Operator input

Selection of which tank to automatically empty to
3.11.3.3 Status indication

Display if a sequence is initiated
3.11.3.4 Interlocks
The destination tank must not be pressurized
The destination tank Hi Level switch must not be triggered
3.11.3.5 Auto sequence

By clicking on the “Auto Empty” button next to the Dust Collector on the VDU a ““pop-up””
appear. From her you can select which tank to empty to.
When automatic emptying is initiated the following will occur:

Valves between selected tank and the dust collector are opened (except the discharge
valve)
All other valves / sequences that may interfere with the emptying sequence are inhibited
Valve between dust cyclone and dust collector is closed
Dust collector is pressurized (pressure to be commissioned)
When pressure in dust collector is 4,5bar discharge valve from dust collector is opened.
Transfer from dust collector to bulk tank takes place.
The dust collector is considered empty when the pressure drops below a certain level (to be
commissioned). When Dust Collector is empty the following will occur:
When pressure in dust collector drops below 1bar (to be commissioned) pressurization
valve is closed
Transfer valves are closed when pressure drops below 0,1bar (to be certain that collector is
depressurized before valve to cyclone is opened if a refill is in progress)
All valves / sequences that were inhibited at start are released
When a sequence is started it is not possible to cancel it.

TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section
4 Operating Instructions
Operating Instructions, Bulk System G1280-Z-MA-007 0
www.nov.com
Operating Instructions
Bulk System

loaned.
G1280-Z-MA-007 0
Revision 0
Page 2 of 19
REVISION HISTORY
0 20.06.2013 For Information ROEK AFH ROEK

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
Revision 0
Page 3 of 19
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 4
1.2 Safety ...................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Abbreviations .......................................................................................................... 5
1.4 References.............................................................................................................. 5
2 OPERATION ..................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 Operating limitation ................................................................................................. 6
2.2 NOV Mud Control System ....................................................................................... 6
2.3 Bulk Valves ............................................................................................................. 7
2.4 Bulk Tanks .............................................................................................................. 8
2.4.1 Typical schematic of bulk tank ..................................................................... 8
2.4.2 Transferring to a bulk tank ........................................................................... 9
2.4.3 Transferring from a bulk tank ....................................................................... 9
2.5 Surge Tank ........................................................................................................... 11
2.5.1 Typical schematic of surge tank (with feeder) ............................................ 11
2.5.2 Transferring to a surge tank ....................................................................... 12
2.5.3 Transferring from a surge tank (option) ..................................................... 12
2.5.4 Feeding from a surge tank ......................................................................... 13
2.6 Dust Collector & Cyclone ...................................................................................... 14
2.6.1 Typical schematic of Dust collector & cyclone ........................................... 14
2.6.2 Cleaning of air during pneumatic transport ................................................ 15
2.6.3 Emptying of the collector tank .................................................................... 15
2.7 Rock Catcher ........................................................................................................ 16
2.7.1 Rock Catching ........................................................................................... 16
2.8 Sampling Unit........................................................................................................ 17
2.8.1 Powder sampling ....................................................................................... 17
2.9 Trouble shooting ................................................................................................... 18
2.9.1 Transfer rates ............................................................................................ 18
2.9.2 Emptying degree ........................................................................................ 18
2.9.3 Dust emission ............................................................................................ 19
Revision 0
Page 4 of 19
1 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure proper operation of the equipment without
damage to equipment or injuring incidents to personnel.
This document covers a standard NOV Bulk System and may contain information that is
not applicable for this delivery.
All personnel that will operate the equipment need to be trained for the task(s) /
operation(s) before any operation of equipment is performed. This is to ensure that
operations are performed safely, correctly and efficiently. The operators should also
have the necessary background knowledge for bulk system before operation
1.2 Safety
Be aware of the hazards of compressed air;
Never open any air supply before the system is ready for operation
Never open any manhole or flange while the tank is pressurized
Never open the manhole to surge tank while the surge tank feeder is operating. There is
a significant risk of crushing in the Surge Tank Feeder.
Do not perform maintenance on any equipment while it is still in an operating condition.

Always make sure to disconnect air and power supply before starting maintenance.
Never enter a pressure vessel without ensuring that all necessary safety precautions
have been taken care off. All rig safety regulation shall also be adhered to before
opening/entering any pressure vessel.
Revision 0
Page 5 of 19
Reference relevant maintenance instructions before performing maintenance on any

Bulk System equipment
1.3 Abbreviations
BS Bulk System
MCS Mud Control System
MMS Mud Mix System
P&ID Process and Instrument Diagrams
GA General Arrangement Drawings
VDU Visual Display Unit
1.4 References
GA Drawings (included in user manual for the Bulk System)
Electrical Drawings (included in user manual for the Bulk System)
Maintenance Instructions (included in the user manual for the Bulk System)
Operating instructions for Mud Mix System
Operating instructions for Mud Control System
User manual for the Bulk System
Revision 0
Page 6 of 19
2 OPERATION
The units in the NOV Bulk System do not normally act as single stand-alone units, but
operate in the total system for transferring dry bulk material. These operating
instructions are prepared for operation of the units alone. For operation of the total
system, please refer to relevant operating instructions. When the units in this procedure
operates together, it is necessary to have read and understood the all the relevant
chapters for equipment involved in the operation.
These operating instructions are prepared for manual operation of the Bulk System
equipment. It describes the typical functions for a NOV Bulk System controlled by a
NOV Mud Control System. For details regarding all automated functions of the Bulk
System reference the operating instructions for the NOV Mud Control System. Note that
some of the functions described in this procedure are an optional feature, and may not
be included in the actual delivery.
If the bulk equipment is controlled and/or monitored by another control system (not the
NOV Mud Control System), reference procedure for the relevant control system for
correct operation
2.1 Operating limitation
The equipment is designed to store the weight of material with a specified density. Do
not fill the tank with material with higher density than specified.
Do not operate the equipment without the specified design criteria’s for temperature and
pressure.
2.2 NOV Mud Control System
For all functions described as controlled or monitored in this procedure, detailed

operation instructions are included in the procedure for the Mud Control System. These
functions are typical for the NOV Bulk System and is not necessary included in the
actual delivery.
The notation “VDU” in this procedure refers to the screens at the control station for the
NOV Mud Control system.
For a NOV Bulk System controlled by a NOV Mud Control System the following
functions are available as an option
Automatic refill of surge tanks

Automatic line up of valves on predefined pipe lines
Automatic emptying of dust collectors
Automatic transfer between bulk tanks
Remote control and monitoring of all process function
Revision 0
Page 7 of 19
Remote monitoring of all process signals and alarms (pressure, weight, level,
position etc.)
Heave/tilt compensating of weight signals if equipment is subject to external
accelerations
2.3 Bulk Valves
Manual valves are operated by a hand lever or a hand wheel directly on the valve
Remote controlled valves are operated from the VDU. Remote controlled valves are
either ON/OFF valves (valve in either open or closed position) or regulating valves
(valve proportional positioned between open and closed position)
All remote controlled valve that are pneumatically activated has a manual override
located on the valve
All remote controlled valves are also remote monitored. Feedback for valve position will
be displayed in the VDU. ON/OFF valves for open or closed position, and regulating
valves for percentage opening
Manual valves can also be remote monitored (option)
If any of the automated functions of the Bulk System is chosen as an option, the valves
will line up and operate according to the predefined sequence in the control system.
These functions are described in the operating instructions for the control system
For detailed information about the valves, actuators, positioners and position monitors
reference relevant instructions in the sub-vendors section of the Bulk System user
manual.
Typical actuated butterfly valve

Revision 0
Page 8 of 19
2.4 Bulk Tanks
The bulk tank functions as a storage tank for dry bulk material. Pneumatic transport of
dry bulk material can be arranged both to and from the tank
2.4.1 Typical schematic of bulk tank

Revision 0
Page 9 of 19
2.4.2 Transferring to a bulk tank
Transferring to a tank cannot take place if there is an ongoing transfer from the tank or
any other interfering operations in the system
1) Open the vent valve. Make sure the tank is ventilated to atmosphere through the
vent line piping. The vent line piping should be routed through a dust collecting
system before released into atmosphere. The NOV dust cyclone & collector is the
recommended dust collecting system
2) Check that the dust collecting system is prepared for operation
3) Check that all other valves into the tank are closed
4) Line up the valves in the piping from the dispatching location (except the outlet
valve on the dispatching location)
5) Check that the dispatching location is prepared for pneumatic transport according
to relevant instructions
6) Start the transfer by opening the outlet valve on the dispatching location
7) Monitor the filling of the tank
The weight in the tank will be monitored by the load cells. The weight and
volume reading will be displayed in the VDU
A high level will be detected by the high level switch. A high level alarm will be
displayed the VDU
The pressure in the tank will be monitored by the pressure transmitter. The
pressure reading will be displayed in the VDU
The pressure can also be monitored locally on the pressure gauge on the tank
8) Stop the transfer at required level by closing of the outlet valve on the dispatching
location. Be aware that material still in the pipeline must be transferred into the
tank after closing the outlet valve. A cleaning connection for the line must be
available.
Do not overfill the tank
2.4.3 Transferring from a bulk tank
Transferring from a tank cannot take place if there is an ongoing transfer to the tank or
any other interfering operations in the system.
1) Close all valves into the tank

2) Check that the receiving location is prepared to receive the volume intended to be
transferred.
3) Open the air inlet valve to pressurize the tank to specified operating pressure
4) Line up the valves to the receiving location (except for the tank discharge valve)
5) Open the purge air valve to specified setting (if available)
6) Start the transfer by opening the tank discharge valve
7) Monitor the emptying of the tank
Revision 0
Page 10 of 19
8) Stop the transfer at required level by closing of the discharge valve on the tank. Be
aware that material still in the pipeline must be transferred into the receiving
location after closing the discharge valve
9) Close the air inlet valve
10) Close the purge air valve after all material in the pipelines has been transferred
into the receiving tank. If a purge air line is not available, a cleaning connection
should be utilized to blow the remaining powder in the pipe lines into the receiving
location.
11) Open the vent valve to depressurize the tank. Be aware that the compressed air
inside the tank can cause the bulk material to escape through the vent line with the
air. The probability of this happening increases with the height of the powder level.
It is recommended to insert a restriction in the vent line piping to reduce the
velocity of the escaping air
Revision 0
Page 11 of 19
2.5 Surge Tank
The surge tank functions as a storage tank for dry bulk material. Pneumatic transport of
dry bulk material can be arranged to the tank (pneumatic transfer from a tank can only
be arranged if a discharge connection is a chosen as an option).
Accurate dosing from the surge tank is executed by the surge tank feeder. Reference
operating instructions for the Mud mix system
2.5.1 Typical schematic of surge tank (with feeder)
Note; discharge line from the Surge tank is an option, and may not be included in
this delivery. Operation of the Surge tank feeder is described in the operating
instructions for the Mud mix system
Revision 0
Page 12 of 19
2.5.2 Transferring to a surge tank
Transferring to a tank cannot take place if there is an ongoing transfer from the tank
(transfer from the tank is only possible if the discharge connection is chosen as an
option), or any other interfering operations in the system
1) Open the vent valve. Make sure the tank is ventilated to atmosphere through the
vent line piping. The vent line piping should be routed through a dust collecting
system before released into atmosphere. The NOV dust cyclone & collector is the
recommended dust collecting system
2) Check that the dust collecting system is prepared for operation
3) Check that all other valves into the tank are closed
4) Check that the surge tank feeder is prepared according to operating instructions
for the Mud mix system (The surge tank feeder discharge valve must be closed)
5) Line up the valves in the piping from the dispatching location (except the outlet
valve on the dispatching location)
6) Check that the dispatching location is prepared for pneumatic transport according
to relevant instructions
7) Start the transfer by opening the outlet valve on the dispatching location
8) Monitor the filling of the tank.
A high level will be detected by the high level switch. A high level alarm will be
displayed the VDU
9) Stop the transfer at required level by closing of the outlet valve on the dispatching
location. Be aware that material still in the pipeline must be transferred into the
tank after closing the outlet valve. A cleaning connection for the line must be
available.
Do not overfill the tank
2.5.3 Transferring from a surge tank (option)
Transferring from a tank cannot take place if there is an ongoing transfer to the tank,
feeding from the surge tank feeder or any other interfering operations in the system.
1) Close all valves into the tank

2) Check that the surge tank feeder is prepared according to operating instructions
for the Mud mix system (The surge tank feeder discharge valve must be closed)
transferred.
Revision 0
Page 13 of 19

9) Stop the transfer at required level by closing of the discharge valve on the tank. Be
aware that material still in the pipeline must be transferred into the receiving
location after closing the discharge valve.
11) Close the purge air valve after all material in the pipelines has been transferred
into the receiving tank. If a purge air line is not available, a cleaning connection
should be utilized to blow the remaining powder in the pipe lines into the receiving
location
12) Open the vent valve to depressurize the tank. Be aware that the compressed air
inside the tank can cause the bulk material to escape through the vent line with the
air. The probability of this happening increases with the height of the powder level.
It is recommended to insert a restriction in the vent line piping to reduce the
velocity of the escaping air
2.5.4 Feeding from a surge tank
Feeding from the surge tank is performed by the NOV Surge tank feeder. Reference
operating instructions for the Mud mix system.
Feeding from the surge tank cannot take place if there is an ongoing transfer from the
tank (transfer from the tank is only possible if the discharge connection is chosen as an
option), or any other interfering operations in the system
If material has been stored inside the surge tank for a long period, the powder can be
fluidized to make it easier to handle for the feeder. Keep the vent valve on the tank
open, and open the air inlet valve to the tank. Let the air blow through the powder for a
few minutes before operating the feeder.
Revision 0
Page 14 of 19
2.6 Dust Collector & Cyclone
The cyclone functions as a separation unit of powder particles from air used in
pneumatic transport. The cyclone is located in the vent line piping after equipment that
receives pneumatic transferred dry bulk material
The Collector functions as a collecting tank for powder separated by the cyclone. The
powder collected can be pneumatically transported out of the tank
2.6.1 Typical schematic of Dust collector & cyclone

Revision 0
Page 15 of 19
2.6.2 Cleaning of air during pneumatic transport
The Dust collector & cyclone unit is prepared for operation when
1) All vent line valves are lined up from the receiving tank to the cyclone
2) The isolation valve between the collector and cyclone is open
3) All other valves into the collector is closed
4) The collector has enough capacity to receive the amount of powder particles
expected to be present in the transport air
The isolation valve is either remote operated from the VDU or manually operated by
hand wheel at the unit. Feedback from the valve position will be displayed in the VDU.
For additional information regarding operation of the isolation valve reference the
suppliers operating instructions in sub-vendors section of the Bulk System user manual.
The Dust collector and cyclone unit will perform continuously through a transfer until the
collector tank is full. The high level will be detected by the high level switch. A high level
alarm will be displayed the VDU
The pressure in the tank will be monitored by the pressure transmitter. The pressure
reading will be displayed in the VDU
2.6.3 Emptying of the collector tank
1) Close the isolation valve between the collector and cyclone

2) Check that all other valves into the tank is closed
transferred.
9) Close the discharge valve after the collector has been emptied. The collector is
empty when the pressure has dropped and stabilized on a low pressure (This
pressure is depending on the flow resistance in the pipe lines)
11) Close the purge air valve (if available).
12) Open the isolation valve to depressurize the tank
The Dust collector & cyclone unit are now prepared for cleaning air from
pneumatic transport
Revision 0
Page 16 of 19
2.7 Rock Catcher
The Rock Catcher collects rocks or large objects present in the dry bulk material which
can create damage to equipment
2.7.1 Rock Catching
The Rock Catcher is prepared for operation when the filter is inserted in the pipe line
and the Victaulic snap joint is closed.
The Rock Catcher will operate continuously through a pneumatic transfer. After
operation the filter must be cleaned for collected objects. Reference Maintenance
instructions for the Bulk System.
Revision 0
Page 17 of 19
2.8 Sampling Unit
The Sampling unit collects powder samples from transferred dry bulk material.
2.8.1 Powder sampling
The sampling unit collects the powder sample during a pneumatic transfer. The manual
air valve on the local control panel operates the unit. The powder sample is collected in
the connected sampling bottle which can be detached to take for analysis
For additional information regarding operation of the sampling unit reference the
suppliers operating instructions in sub-vendors section of the Bulk System user manual.
Revision 0
Page 18 of 19
2.9 Trouble shooting
2.9.1 Transfer rates
The transfer rate for dry bulk material is depending on the operating pressure, available
air capacity and the total flow resistance in the pipe line (in addition to powder
properties)
The transfer rate will normally drop when the powder level reaches the bottom section of
the tank. This is due to the low density of powder particle around the discharge pipe.
Most likely, the compressor may not be able to keep the pressure in the tank stabile
through this phase
If the rate of transferred powder drops below what to be expected, verify that the
following is according to the requirements;
1) The system pressure is according to specified operating pressure. Increasing the

pressure will increase the transfer rates. Do not exceed the maximum operating
pressure specified for the equipment
2) The available air capacity from the compressor is according to specification. Verify
that no other operation is consuming the air intended for the transfer. The pressure
in the tank should remain stabile during the transfer (except for the last phase)
3) The purge air valve is set according to optimized position (purge air valve opening
is decided on commissioning). The purge air valve should be set as low a possible
without clogging the pipe line. To much purge air will decrease the transfer rate.
4) There are no foreign restrictions in the pipe line that increases the flow resistance.
Increased flow resistance will decrease the transfer rates
5) Pipe line-up is correct and without leakage
6) Air inlet valve on tank is fully open and the pressure in the tank is stabile
7) There are no moisture in the tank causing the powder to sediment into large rocks,
and the air is dried according to requirement
2.9.2 Emptying degree
The amount of left powder in a bulk tank is depending on the tank shape and diameter
Too much powder left in the tank can be caused by damage to the internal canvas
fabric, or leakage around the fabric castle. Leakages are identified as noticeable craters
in the powder surface due to the concentrated air flow. The powder surface should be
flat and even due to the air distribution through the canvas fabric. The craters are most
likely to occur in the inner or outer circumferential of the tank. Replace the canvas or
gaskets to seal the leakages
To increase the emptying degree of the tank, it is recommended to pulse the canvas
fabric towards the end of the transfer. Pulsing is done by shutting of the air inlet valve
for short intervals
Revision 0
Page 19 of 19
2.9.3 Dust emission
Extensive dust emission is most like to occur because of;
1) The Dust collector tank is full. Empty the collector tank

2) The isolation valve is closed. Make sure the valve is fully open
3) There are foreign restrictions in the vent piping. Remove restrictions and verify the
vent piping is clear and routed to atmosphere.
4) Sharp bends, valves or other restrictions are present in the piping in front of the
cyclone causing turbulence in the air flowing through the cyclone. A 2,0 meter
straight pipe is recommended in front of the cyclone inlet.
At low powder levels in the dispatching tank, the amount of particles in the vent air
will increase due to the change in the air/powder ratio. During the last faze of the
emptying of a bulk tank a higher dust emission is likely to occur
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title

Section
5 Maintenance Instructions
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Maintenance instructions, Bulk System G1280-Z-MA-005 0
www.nov.com
Maintenance instructions
Bulk System

loaned.
G1280-Z-MA-005 0
Revision 0
Page 2 of 27
REVISION HISTORY

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
Revision 0
Page 3 of 27
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 4
1.1 General ................................................................................................................. 4
1.2 Referenced documents and drawings ................................................................... 4
1.3 Lifting and handling ............................................................................................... 4
1.4 Preservation and storage of equipment when removed from use .......................... 4
1.5 Spare parts ........................................................................................................... 4
2 SAFETY .......................................................................................................................... 5
3 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS................................................................................... 8
3.1 General ................................................................................................................. 8
3.2 Surge Tank ......................................................................................................... 10
3.2.1 Maintenance of instruments, valves and accessories ............................... 11
3.2.2 Maintenance of internal fluidization system .............................................. 11
3.2.3 Maintenance of the surge tank feeder ...................................................... 12
3.3 Bulk tank ............................................................................................................. 13
3.3.2 Maintenance of internal fluidization system (Cone bottom tank) ............... 14
3.4 Dust Collector and Cyclone ................................................................................. 16
3.5 Rock Catcher ...................................................................................................... 17
3.6 Sampling Unit...................................................................................................... 18
3.7 Accessories......................................................................................................... 19
3.7.1 Gaskets for flanges and man ways ........................................................... 19
3.7.2 Pressure safety valve (PSV)..................................................................... 19
3.7.3 Pressure gauge ........................................................................................ 20
3.7.4 High level switch ...................................................................................... 21
3.7.5 Pressure transmitters ............................................................................... 22
3.7.6 Knife gate valve (between Dust Collector and Cyclone) ........................... 23
3.7.7 Load cell .................................................................................................. 24
3.7.8 Flexible bellows ........................................................................................ 25
3.7.9 Bulk transfer valves .................................................................................. 26
Revision 0
Page 4 of 27
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 General
The purpose of this document is to describe the measures and activities necessary to
maintain the NOV Bulk System in optimum condition, minimize downtime and maximize
system performance.
The level of details in this manual is intended to be useful for a first time maintenance
operator, but also as a reference for skilled personnel. It is assumed that the reader is
familiar with basic drilling activities. The document should be read in conjunction with
the document Operating Instructions in the User Manual.
1.2 Referenced documents and drawings

All referenced documents and drawings are available in the Bulk System User Manual.
It is recommended to read the documentation for the complete system to obtain the full
understanding of how the Bulk System operates.
Documentation for the motors, pumps, valves, accessories and instrumentation is

enclosed in separate sections of the User Manual.
1.3 Lifting and handling

Reference the Handling, Preservation & Storage procedure in the Bulk System User
Manual for lifting and handling instructions.
1.4 Preservation and storage of equipment when removed from use

Reference the Handling, Preservation & Storage procedure in the Bulk System User
Manual for preservation and storage instructions.
1.5 Spare parts

Reference the Spare Parts List in the Bulk System User Manual for spare parts
evaluation and purchase.
It is recommended to stock enough spares to perform a complete overhaul or change-

out of all valves, instruments, gaskets and rubber expansions joints.
Please feel free to contact National Oilwell for consultancy regarding the need for spare
parts.
Revision 0
Page 5 of 27
2 SAFETY
Warning; never perform any maintenance on equipment that is in operation.
Be aware of the hazards of compressed air.

Never attempt to open any man way or flange on a pressure tank while the tank
is pressurized.
Never open any air supply to equipment during maintenance.
Be aware of the hazards of electric/pneumatic energized equipment

Never perform service or maintenance on actuated equipment before all
electricity and air is shut off.
Never perform service maintenance inside the Surge tank before the Surge Tank
Feeder is electricity is shut off.
Never perform maintenance inside the Collector tank before the power to the
isolation valve is shut off.
Revision 0
Page 6 of 27
Be aware of the Hazards contact and inhalation of irritating chemicals.

Never perform any service or maintenance inside the Bulk, Surge or Dust
Collector tank without using correct personal protection gear, protective suit and
filtration mask. Data sheet for chemicals should be available before maintenance.
Make sure all involved/surrounding personnel are aware of the possibility of
exposure of dust when opening a tank man way or flange.
Take necessary precautions to prevent unintentionally transfer/filling of powder
during maintenance.
Never open a man way or flange if the powder level in the tank is above the
opening. Always perform a manual sounding to ensure the level in tank is in
accordance with instrument readings.
Be aware of the Hazards of suffocation inside the tank

Make sure the level of oxygen is sufficient during maintenance inside a tank. An
oxygen meter should be utilized at all time by personnel located inside the tank.
Make sure the level of supervision is sufficient for personnel performing
maintenance inside a tank. As a minimum, an entering guard should supervise
the maintenance operation from outside the tank. The guard must be familiar with
the rig alarm routines in case of an incident.
Make sure all personnel have left the tank before closing the man way.
Important; no maintenance that requires entering or opening of bulk pressure

tanks shall be performed before necessary permits have been obtained, ref. rig
regulations.
Revision 0
Page 7 of 27
Be aware of the Hazards working in height

Make sure all personnel and equipment are secured at all time, when
maintenance is performed on top of the tank.
Make sure no personnel are situated below a maintenance operation performed
on top of the tank.
Make sure all personnel is properly secured when entering a tank from a man
way. Man ways may be located in significantly height above the inner tank
foundation. Personnel safety straps should be utilized.
SAFETY SIGN – WEAR HARNESS
In any maintenance requiring hot work, further precautions must be taken. Please
reference rig specific requirements.
Make sure all necessary permits are obtained before entering a pressure tank.
After maintenance, inform the operator prior to start up and make sure neither personnel
nor tools are in dangerous locations. Check if the equipment is correct and fully
assembled, and make sure all safety equipments are back in place.
Revision 0
Page 8 of 27
3 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
3.1 General
The maintenance required on NOV Bulk Equipment is dependent on the actual

environments at the site, the degree of operation of the system and the quality of bulk
materials and air. The proposed maintenance and maintenance intervals in this
documentation are therefore to be considered as guidance only, and the operator is
requested to develop an appropriate extent of maintenance to suit the variables at site.
Maintenance of the bulk system is related with multiple hazards such as pressure build
up, actuated and rotating equipment, contact with chemicals, oxygen shortage and
falling objects. Make sure to follow all the instructions given in this procedure at all time
to avoid damage to equipment and injury to personnel.
Maintenance on a pressure vessel can be divided into three categories depending on

the degree of precautions;
1. Maintenance performed outside the tank which not requires opening flanges or
man ways into the pressure vessel
2. Maintenance performed outside the tank which requires opening flanges or man
ways into the pressure vessel. This also includes removing equipment from the
pipe lines connected to the pressure vessel where a pressure build up is possible
3. Maintenance inside the tank which requires personnel to enter the pressure
vessel
Maintenance outside the tank can be performed as long as it doesn’t interfere with any
operation on the system.
Before performing maintenance which requires opening a man way or a flange into the
pressure vessel, the following steps must be followed as a minimum;
Check the system for any interfering operation. No transfer operation should be
performed during the maintenance period.
The tank must be emptied to the extent necessary for the required maintenance.
The vent valve must be open, and the vent line routed to atmosphere. This is to
make sure the tank is relieved of any pressure, and prevent any pressure build
up during the maintenance period.
The filling valve must be closed and secured in this position to prevent
unintentional filling while a tank is open and personnel is working around the
tank. Preferably all air and power to this valve should be shut off.
The air inlet valve must be closed and secured in this position to prevent
unintentional airflow through the tank while personnel are working around the
tank. Blowing air through the tank will create dust which can exit through an open
man way or flange. Blowing air will only be necessary when performing leakage
test of the internal fluidization system in the bulk tanks.
All other valves into the tank should be closed and remain closed during the
maintenance period.
Revision 0
Page 9 of 27
Verify against local pressure indicator or pressure reading in the control system
that the tank is de-pressurized.
Loosen the bolts uniformly and crosswise around the flange and listen for any
leakage. Never loosen a bolt entirely before you are certain there is no pressure
inside the tank.
Before performing maintenance inside the tank the following steps must also be
followed as a minimum;
The surge tank feeder must be electrically disconnected to prevent

unintentionally rotating while personnel are located inside the tank (applicable
only for the surge tank)
The filling valve must be locked in closed position. All air and power must be shut
off to avoid unintentionally filling while personnel are located inside the tank.
All safety aspects in chapter 2 of this procedure must also have been evaluated
and the necessary precaution must have been taken. If uncertain, read this
chapter again before opening and entering a pressure vessel.
Revision 0
Page 10 of 27
3.2 Surge Tank
Typical NOV Surge tank with feeder

Revision 0
Page 11 of 27
3.2.1 Maintenance of instruments, valves and accessories
All accessories (pressure transmitters, level switches, load cells, pressure safety valves,
pressure gauges, gaskets etc.) should be maintained according to relevant chapters
under accessories in this procedure.
3.2.2 Maintenance of internal fluidization system
This maintenance operation requires personnel to enter the tank. Make sure all
requirements in this procedure have been adhered to before starting maintenance.
Warning; working inside a surge tank is connected with great danger
Internal view from top
The internal fluidization fabric/canvas should be inspected for damage once a year and
be replaced if necessary. The inspection requires the tank to be completely empty for
personnel to operate inside the tank. Sufficient work light and ventilation must be
arranged for the inspection.
Only the same type of fluidization fabric as originally supplied should be utilized. The
quality and permeability of the fabric provides great impact to the performance of the
system.
Inside the tank there are three internal frames, each with a canvas pad clamped toward
a perforated plate. To change a damages fabric follow the steps below and the
exploded view below;
Revision 0
Page 12 of 27
Exploded view of the fluidization system
1. Loosen the clamping bolts.

2. Remove the clamping frame, damaged canvas and perforated plate. It is
recommended to mark all items with the original position on the structural frames.
This will ease the re-assembly since not all items may fit on a different frame
sections.
3. Remove all bulk material (if any) from the inside of the tank frame using a broom or a
vacuum cleaner.
4. Cut the holes in the new canvas fabric to fit the hole pattern on the clamping frame.
Cutting the fabric has to be performed by using a soldering iron, hot knife, hot string
or similar, in order to ensure the fabric melts together along the cutting edge making
the fabric “unwoven-proof”.
5. Install the perforated plate, new canvas fabric, clamping frame and bolts back in
successive order. New ny-lock nuts should be utilized to prevent fasteners to loosen.
3.2.3 Maintenance of the surge tank feeder
For maintenance of the surge tank feeder, reference relevant maintenance instructions
in the User Manual for the Mud Mix System.
Revision 0
Page 13 of 27
3.3 Bulk tank
Typical NOV Bulk Tank Accessories on top of tank
Revision 0
Page 14 of 27
3.3.2 Maintenance of internal fluidization system (Cone bottom tank)
This maintenance operation requires personnel to enter the tank. Make sure all
Warning; working inside a bulk tank is connected with great danger.
Internal view of the fluidization system
The internal fluidization fabric/canvas should be inspected for damage once a year and
be replaced if necessary. The inspection requires the tank to be completely empty for
personnel to operate inside the tank. Sufficient work light and ventilation must be
arranged for the inspection.
Only the same type of fluidization fabric as originally supplied should be utilized. The
quality and permeability of the fabric provides great impact to the performance of the
system.
Inside the tank there are 4 internal frames with canvas fabric clamped. To change a
damaged fabric, follow the steps and the exploded view below;
Revision 0
Page 15 of 27
1. Loosen the clamping nuts.

2. Remove all clamping bars and damaged canvas. It is recommended to mark all
items with the original position on the structural frame. This will ease the re-
assembly since not all items may fit on a different section of the frame.
3. Remove all bulk material (if any) from the inside of the frame using a broom or a
vacuum cleaner.
4. Cut the holes in the new canvas fabric to fit the hole pattern of the bolts welded to
the frame. Cutting the fabric has to be performed by using a soldering iron, hot knife,
hot string or similar, in order to ensure the fabric melts together along the cutting
edge making the fabric “unwoven-proof”.
5. Install the clamping bars back in original.
6. Tighten all nuts. New ny-lock nuts should be utilized to prevent fasteners to loosen
during operation.
7. Check that the clamping bars are firmly pressing the cloth down to the structure all
the way around the frame.
Revision 0
Page 16 of 27
3.4 Dust Collector and Cyclone
Typical NOV Dust Collector and Cyclone
The Dust Collector & Cyclone unit requires no additional maintenance.

Revision 0
Page 17 of 27
3.5 Rock Catcher
This maintenance operation may require personnel to open the Rock Catcher which
leads into the pipe line. Make sure all requirements in this procedure have been
adhered to before starting maintenance.
Warning; Opening pressure pipe lines is connected with danger.
The Rock Catcher filter should be cleaned after transfer. Open the Victaulic joint, take
out the filter and remove all objects collected in the filter. Install the filter and Victaulic
joint back in successive order.
Revision 0
Page 18 of 27
3.6 Sampling Unit
This maintenance operation may require personnel to dismounted probe pipe from the
pre-mounted pipe spool which will open into the pipe line. Make sure all requirements in
this procedure have been adhered to before starting maintenance.
The sampling probe is pneumatically actuated so the air supply must be disconnected
before any work is performed on the unit which requires access to the moving parts.
For additional requirements ref. the suppliers manual in the sub vendor section of the
User manual.
Revision 0
Page 19 of 27
3.7 Accessories
All tank accessories (instruments, PSV, valves and load cells etc.), should in addition to
instructions below be maintained according to related documents in the sub-vendors
section of the User manual. Where additional instructions are available, these will be
referenced in the applicable chapter.
The necessary maintenance intervals should be established based on the extent of use
of the equipment. The maintenance intervals in this chapter are recommended as a
minimum.
3.7.1 Gaskets for flanges and man ways
This maintenance operation requires personnel to open the tank. Make sure all
Warning; Opening a pressure vessel is connected with danger
Inspect once a year. Replace if necessary.
Remove all remains of the old gasket and clean the surfaces before installing a new
gasket. Pay attention to not opening a man way before ensuring the powder level in the
tank is below the height of the opening.
3.7.2 Pressure safety valve (PSV)
This maintenance operation may require personnel to open the tank. Make sure all
requirements in this procedure have been adhered to before starting the maintenance.
Warning; Opening a pressure vessel is connected with danger.

Revision 0
Page 20 of 27
Inspect every six months. Verify that the PSV is undamaged, free from foreign which
can impact on the PSV performance. Replace if necessary.
When replacing a damaged PSV, only the valve can be replaced while flanges and
threaded fittings can be re-used. Utilize grease paste on the threads when re-
assembling.
Re-calibration must be evaluated based on the rig requirements.
User manual.
3.7.3 Pressure gauge
Inspect every year. Replace if damaged.
Re-calibration must be evaluated based on the rig requirements.
When replacing a damaged pressure gauge, only the gauge can be replaced while the
flange can be re-used. Utilize grease paste on the threads when re-assembling.
Revision 0
Page 21 of 27
3.7.4 High level switch
Depending of dust in the tank, powder particles can stick to the vibrating probe causing
a false high level alarm. Clean the vibrating probe for powder by a piece of cloth.
When replacing a damaged level switch, only the instrument can be replaced while the
flange can be re-used. Utilize grease paste on the threads when re-assembling.
User manual.
Revision 0
Page 22 of 27
3.7.5 Pressure transmitters
When replacing a damaged pressure transmitter, only the instrument can be replaced
while the flange can be re-used. Utilize grease paste on the threads when re-
assembling.
Re-calibration must be evaluated based on rig requirements.
User manual.
Revision 0
Page 23 of 27
3.7.6 Knife gate valve (between Dust Collector and Cyclone)
If an actuated valve is taken of the Collector or the maintenance operation enables

access to the rotating parts of the valve, make sure all air and power is disconnected
before any work is done. There is a risk of crushing if the stem moves unintentionally.
Do not enter the Collector tank before the knife gate valve has been disconnected
from air and power.
Actuated valve Manual valve
Inspect every year. Replace seat if necessary.
User manual.
Revision 0
Page 24 of 27
3.7.7 Load cell
This maintenance operation does not require personnel to open the tank. However,
make sure there are no interfering operations and that necessary means have been
taken to support the tank before starting maintenance.
Warning; replacing a load cell is connected with danger.
To replace a load cell the tank must be supported by external means. It is

recommended to use a hydraulic jack on the tank jacking point. The holding screws can
be utilized as a second means of support while changing the cell.
When replacing a damaged load cell, only the cell can be replaced while the brackets
can be re-used.
Revision 0
Page 25 of 27
To replace the cell, remove the pins and loading shafts. Take out the cell and install the
new cell in successive order. Pay attention to avoid crushing of hands while removing
the cell from the brackets. The load cell is constructed of high quality stainless steel and
is a heavy instrument. Apply high pressure grease on the load cell loading shafts and
the contact area between the top bracket and the load cell. Make sure the contact areas
are clean before applying the grease.
The load cell must be centred in the assembly with no sideways contact with the
brackets.
User manual. It is also recommended to read the relevant chapter for load cells in the
installation procedure for a better understanding of the best installation of a new load
cell.
3.7.8 Flexible bellows
This maintenance operation may require personnel to remove the flexible bellow from
the pipe line. Make sure all requirements in this procedure have been adhered to before
starting maintenance.
User manual.
Revision 0
Page 26 of 27
3.7.9 Bulk transfer valves
This maintenance operation may require personnel to remove the valve from the pipe
line. Make sure all requirements in this procedure have been adhered to before starting
maintenance.
If an actuated valve is taken out of the pipe line or the maintenance operation enables
access to the moving parts of the valve, make sure all air and power is disconnected
before any work is done. There is a risk of crushing if the valve operates unintentionally.
Typical butterfly valve

Revision 0
Page 27 of 27
Typical pinch valve
Typical ball valve
Inspect every year. Replace seat if necessary.
User manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Technical Document, Manual Sounding Table G1280-Z-KA-010 0
www.nov.com
Technical Document
Manual Sounding Table

loaned.
G1280-Z-KA-010 0
Document number G1280-Z-KA-010
Revision 0
Page 2 of 2
REVISION HISTORY

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
Manual sounding of Bulk Tank
To perform manual sounding on the bulk tank follow the instructions below
1. Make sure the tank is de pressurized!
2. Remove the blind flange from the manual sounding nozzle
3. Use a solder to sound the distance from the flange surface to the material level. Measure the distance
4. Use the manual sounding table or manual sounding graph to find the estimated volume
5. Multiply the volume with the specific gravity to find the estimated weight
5. Install the blind flange back in original position after completion
Project data
NOV reference number G1280
General Arrangement Drawing G1280‐DP45‐G0001/2
Total volume of the tank 113 m3
OD of the tank Ø3700 mm
Material Barite/bentonite/cement
Specific gravity of material (SG) 2,16/0,96/1,4 ton/m3
Notes
1. The calculated volumes are teoretical, assuming a flat and even distribution of the material over
the tank section
Manual sounding table
Height measured from flange face on Calculated volume of
manual sounding nozzle remaining material [m3]
1000 110,8
2000 100,2
3000 89,6
4000 78,9
5000 68,3
6000 57,7
7000 47,1
8000 36,5
9000 25,9
10000 15,3
11000 5,1
12000 0,4
Manual sounding graph
Calculated volume of remaining material [m3]
120,0
100,0
80,0
60,0
40,0
20,0
0,0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
Distance measured from manual sounding nozzle flange face [mm]
Manual sounding of Day Tank
Project data
Total volume of the tank 40 m3
Material Cement
Specific gravity of material (SG) 1,4 ton/m3
Notes
the tank section
500 39,1
1000 33,6
1500 27,4
2000 21,2
2500 15,0
3000 8,9
3500 4,2
4000 1,5
4500 0,3
45,0
40,0
35,0
30,0
25,0
20,0
15,0
10,0
5,0
0,0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
Manual sounding of Surge Tank
Project data
Total volume of the tank 8,5 m3
Material Barite/bentonite
Specific gravity of material (SG) 2,16/0,96 ton/m3
Notes
the tank section
500 7,8
750 6,7
1000 5,6
1250 4,4
1500 3,3
1750 2,2
2000 1,3
2250 0,7
2500 0,3
9,0
8,0
7,0
6,0
5,0
4,0
3,0
2,0
1,0
0,0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Installation Procedure, Bulk System G1280-Z-KA-003 0
www.nov.com
Installation Procedure
Bulk System

7.3 25 + attach This document contains proprietary and confidential National Oilwell Varco Norway AS
information which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is Blakstadmarka 26
loaned.
G1280-Z-KA-003 0
Revision 0
Page 2 of 25
REVISION HISTORY

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
Revision 0
Page 3 of 25
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Purpose................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Safety ...................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 References.............................................................................................................. 4
1.4 Precautions ............................................................................................................. 4
2 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 Foundation and installation bolts............................................................................. 5
2.2 Surge tank............................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 Surge tank standing on frame/skid .............................................................. 7
2.3 Bulk tank ................................................................................................................. 9
2.4 Dust Collector and Cyclone................................................................................... 13
2.5 Accessories........................................................................................................... 16
2.5.1 Load cells................................................................................................... 16
2.5.2 Instruments ................................................................................................ 19
2.5.3 Pressure safety valves ............................................................................... 19
2.5.4 Flexible bellows ......................................................................................... 20
2.5.5 Junction boxes ........................................................................................... 21
2.6 Rock Catcher ........................................................................................................ 22
2.7 Pipe spools ........................................................................................................... 22
2.8 Butterfly valves ...................................................................................................... 23
2.9 Sampling unit ........................................................................................................ 24
3 ATTACHMENTS ............................................................................................................. 25
Revision 0
Page 4 of 25
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure a proper installation of the equipment without
any damage to the equipment or injuring incident to personnel.
This procedure covers a complete NOV bulk system and may contain information that is
not applicable for this delivery.
1.2 Safety
All instructions listed in this document and rig regulations shall be adhered to during all
installation activities.
All Involved personnel shall be familiar with the content of this procedure. Only qualified
personnel shall perform installation work.
Only certified lifting equipment should be utilized. Ref. Handling, Preservation & Storage
procedure.
Make sure all necessary permits have been obtained before entering a tank, ref.
rig regulations.
Be aware of the Hazards working in height;

Make sure all personnel and equipment are secured at all time, for installation
above ground level.
Make sure no personnel are situated below an installation operation performed
above ground level.
Be aware of the Hazards of suffocation inside the tank

Make sure the level of oxygen is sufficient during installation inside a tank.
Make sure the level of supervision is sufficient for personnel performing
installation inside a tank.
Make sure all personnel have left the tank before closing the man way.
To avoid any damage to equipment it is recommended to have a National Oilwell Varco

Supervisor present during installation.
1.3 References
Reference the Customer Master Document List (CMDL) for project specific General
Arrangement drawings, P&ID’s, El drawings, procedures, etc.
For details about handling weights and lifting operation, please refer to the handling,
preservation and storage procedure and GA drawings.
1.4 Precautions
To keep the machinery in the best possible condition, it is advised that as much as
possible of the preservation material remains on the equipment during and after
installation.
Revision 0
Page 5 of 25
2 INSTALLATION
2.1 Foundation and installation bolts
Installation bolts from M12 and upwards to be grade 8.8 HDG.

Installation bolts from M10 and downwards to be grade A4-80 stainless steel
Plain washer to be utilized under nut and bolt head on all bolted connections
All foundation bolts towards the rig structure are yard supply
For a bolt of grade 8.8 minimum effective length of contact for threads in a plate
of grade S355* is 1.0xD, and 1.5xD in a plate of grade S235*.
All installation and foundation bolts shall be tightened according to the table
below unless otherwise noted
Nominal torque table for metric bolts

Revision 0
Page 6 of 25
2.2 Surge tank
The surge tank is installed on load cells which monitor the weight of content in the tank.
It is important that mechanical installation of the tank and cell is done correctly to reduce
the errors in the weighing system.
Important;
the chapter regarding load cells must be read and understood before
installation
Equipment resting on load cell must not be fixed to surrounding structure.
All connections to equipment must be flexible.
Warning; do not do any welding on equipment before it is properly grounded to

prevent the welding current to pass through electrical equipment.
The load cells are extremely sensitive to welding current
Welding should as far as possible be performed before the load cell is
installed
If welding on equipment, the ground connector of welding apparatus must
also be connected to the equipment, and not the deck structure.
If welding on the deck structure, the ground connector of welding
apparatus should be connected close to the welding area.
Revision 0
Page 7 of 25
2.2.1 Surge tank standing on frame/skid
1. Install the frame on its intended location on the rig structure. Make sure the load cell
mounting pad s are straight and in level.
2. Install the foundation bolts (yard supply) between frame and the rig structure
3. Place a yard supplied temporary spacer device (yard supply) on the load cell mounting
pads. The spacer devices need to be able to hold the weight of the tank and have
approximately the same height as the load cell assembly
4. Lift the tank onto the spacer devices
Warning: Make sure the tank does not tilt!
5. Jack up each leg, remove the spacer device, and place the load cell assemblies on the
mounting pads. Use the designated jacking points
Revision 0
Page 8 of 25
6. Install the mounting bolts between the load cell assembly lower bracket and the
mounting pad
7. Carefully lower each leg down towards the load cell assembly top bracket. The holding
screws can be adjusted to protect the load cell from shock.
8. Check the load cells are centred and free from contact with the side brackets in the
assembly.
9. Install the mounting bolts between load cell top brackets and the tank pad
10. Loosen all holding screws on the load cell assembly, leaving the tank resting entirely
on the load cells.
11. Connect all earth straps
12. Install the NOV Surge Tank Feeder to the tank. Ref. installation procedure for the Mud
Mix System
13. Install all piping connections to the tank. Make sure all connections are fitted with
flexible connections. Ref. separate chapter in this procedure. Make sure the flexible
connections are not stretched or compressed in any direction
14. Install all instruments, PSVs, junction boxes and other accessories to the tank. Ref.
separate chapters in this procedure.
15. Install the electrical connections to the load cell according to project specific electro
drawings.
16. Check that the load of the tank is distributed evenly on all legs, ref. applicable chapter
for load cells in this procedure
Notes;
if the tank is lifted directly onto the load cell assemblies, extreme caution must
be taken to prevent chock on the load cells
if the frame is hanging from the rig structure, install the tank and the load cell
assemblies on the frame before carefully lifting the complete unit towards the
intended location of installation
Revision 0
Page 9 of 25
2.3 Bulk tank
The bulk tank is installed on load cells which monitor the weight of content in the tank. It
is important that mechanical installation of the tank and cell is done correctly to reduce
Important;
the chapter regarding load cells must be read and understood before
installation
Equipment resting on load cell must not be fixed to surrounding structure.
All connections to equipment must be flexible.
Warning; do not do any welding on equipment before it is properly grounded to

prevent the welding current to pass through electrical equipment.
The load cells are extremely sensitive to welding current
Welding should as far as possible be performed before the load cell is
installed
If welding on equipment, the ground connector of welding apparatus must
also be connected to the equipment, and not the deck structure.
If welding on the deck structure, the ground connector of welding
apparatus should be connected close to the welding area.
Revision 0
Page 10 of 25
1. Make sure the yard mounting pad for the tank are straight and in level.
2. Place a temporary spacer device on the mounting pads. The spacer devices need to
be able to hold the weight of the tank and have approximately the same height as the
load cell assembly
3. Lift the tank onto the spacer devices
Warning: Make sure the tank does not tilt!
4. Jack up each leg, remove the spacer device and place the load cell assemblies on the
mounting pads. Use the designated jacking points
Revision 0
Page 11 of 25
5. Install mounting bolts (yard supply) between the load cell assembly lower bracket and
the mounting pad
6. Carefully lower each leg down towards the load cell assembly top bracket. The holding
screws can be adjusted to protect the load cell from shock (if available).
7. Check the load cells are centred and free from contact with the side brackets in the
assembly.
8. Install the mounting bolts between load cell top brackets and the tank pad
9. Loosen all holding screws on the load cell assembly, leaving the tank resting entirely
on the load cells.
10. Connect all earth straps.
11. Install the top support bolt (yard supply?). The bolts should be centred in the hole
without sideways contact with the tank, or the rig structure
Revision 0
Page 12 of 25
12. Install all piping connections to the tank. Make sure all connections are fitted with
flexible connections. Ref. separate chapter in this procedure. Make sure the flexible
connections are not stretched or compressed in any direction
13. Install all instruments, PSVs, junction boxes and other accessories to the tank. Ref.
separate chapters in this procedure.
14. Install the electrical connections to the load cell according to project specific electro
drawings.
15. Check that the load of the tank is distributed evenly on all legs, ref. applicable chapter
for load cells in this procedure
16. If shimming is required, make sure to check that the shimming process does not impact
the installation of the top support bolt or flexible bellows. If so, take actions to ensure
the requirements for these components are adhered to.
Notes;
if the tank is lifted directly onto the load cell assemblies, extreme caution must
be taken to prevent chock on the load cells
Revision 0
Page 13 of 25
Typical overview of main components
1. Lift the collector tank onto its intended location on the yard structure
2. Install the mounting bolts (yard supply) between the foundation pad and the yard
structure
3. Install the isolation valve on the dust collector inlet flange. Use the ¾ UNC tap bolts to
guide the valve into correct position. Tighten the bolts gently to avoid breaking the
threads (do not use nominal torque value for metric bolts). Use the 5” gasket between
the valve and collector tank.
Revision 0
Page 14 of 25
4. Lift the cyclone onto the separation valve. Use the ¾ UNC tap bolts to guide the
cyclone into correct position. Tighten the bolts gently to avoid breaking the threads (do
not use nominal torque value for metric bolts). Use the 5” gasket between the valve
and the cyclone
5. Install the M20 stud bolts in the four remaining bolt holes between the collector tank
flange and the cyclone flange.
6. Tighten all ¾ UNC bolts to the valve gently to avoid breaking the threads (do not use
nominal torque value for metric bolts).
7. Lift the cyclone support on the mounting pads on the dust collector. Make sure the
cyclone is protected from the clamp by the clamp gasket.
8. Install the mounting bolts between the dust collector and the cyclone support
9. Install the clamp bolts on the cyclone support.
Warning: If the cyclone support and the cyclone are installed together, take great
care to prevent either falling down during installation, causing injury to people or
equipment.
10. Install all piping connections to the equipment
Important notes;
A minimum 2,0m straight piping in front of cyclone inlet is recommended to achieve
optimized effect.
The PSV discharge pipe must under no circumstances be connected to other
process piping that can allow process medium to enter the PSV from the outlet side
or a pressure build up after the PSV of more than 10% of the set pressure
11. Connect all earth straps (only the strap between cyclone and collector tank is NOV
supply)
Revision 0
Page 15 of 25
Note; It is recommended to install all valves and instruments on the main

equipment after all mechanical installation and hot works are completed.
12. Install the pressure gauge, pressure transmitter, pressure safety valve and high level
switch on its correct location according to the general arrangement drawing. Use the 2”
gasket between the flanges. Tighten all the M16 stud bolt connections uniformly and
crosswise.
Please reference the separate manuals from the suppliers of valves and instruments for
additional information regarding installation
13. Install all electrical connections according to suppliers manual

14. Install the air connection to the actuated valve (if applicable) according to suppliers
manual.
Make sure the air supply lines are flushed before connected to the valve to prevent
debris entering the solenoids, position monitors or actuators. Use supply air quality
according to ISO 8573-1 class 3A, 3B and 3C. No oil lubrication is to be utilized
Make sure that neither people nor equipment is in danger of being crushed by the
isolation valve sliding gate
Warning; be aware of the hazards of electric/pneumatic energized equipment

Revision 0
Page 16 of 25
2.5 Accessories
For correct location of the accessories, please reference project specific General
Arrangement drawings
It is recommended to install all accessories on the main equipment after all mechanical
installation and hot works are completed.
For additional information about installation of accessories, reference supplier

documents under attachments.
2.5.1 Load cells
For equipment installed on load cells which monitor the weight of content in the tank, it
is important that mechanical installation of the tank and cell is done correctly to reduce
To achieve the best possible weight reading and avoid damage to the load cell it
is important that the following is adhered to;
1. Equipment resting on load cells must be supported by a solid metal foundation with
minimal deflection in the structure to achieve a uniform weight distribution
2. Mounting surfaces against the load cell assembly must be straight and in level (both
against the top and bottom bracket). Inclined support may introduce side forces to the
cell which will decrease the accuracy of the load reading
3. No fixed structure to the tank is allowed. The tank shall rest entirely on the load cells for
correct readings. All piping connections must be equipped with flexible bellows/joints.
4. During installation the holding screws must be fastened to protect the load cell from
impact (only applicable for standing load cells). Chock may destroy the load cell
Revision 0
Page 17 of 25
5. No welding shall be performed around the load cell without proper grounding or
isolation which prevents the welding current to pass through the load cell. Welding
current passing through the cell will destroy the internal electronics.
6. The load cell must not be in contact with the side brackets in the assembly after
installation. This will introduce side forces to the cell which will decrease the accuracy
of the load reading. The cell shall be centred in the assembly
7. Do not use the electric cable for lifting purpose. This will destroy the load cell
8. The load cell shafts and contact areas are greased and protected from debris from the
supplier. Keep the debris protection intact as long as possible to protect the cell from
surrounding mechanical work
9. Ref. the suppliers technical manual for additional requirements and better
understanding of the installation of the load cell (attachment 1)
The accuracy of the load cell signal is depending on a variety of parameters related to
the mechanical installation. After the mechanical installation is complete it is necessary
to perform a check of the load distribution between the cells.
To verify correct load cell distribution compare the mV output signal from all the cells on
each tank, following the instructions below;
1. Disconnect the signal output cables for each load cell in the load cell junction box
(green and yellow cables)
2. Apply the supply voltage to the cells (red and blue cables)
3. Measure the mV signal from each of the cells over the green and yellow cable.
The deviation between the signals should be within 1% of the maximum output
signal for each cell. The maximum output signal can be calculated by the formula
below
Revision 0
Page 18 of 25
Uc x mV/V=mVmax.
Uc is the supply voltage (normally between 6 and 10 VDC), and mV/V is

sensitivity of the cell. This value can be found in the attached technical manual
(standard 2mV/V). For a 2mV/V and 10V DC the maximum output signal is
20mV. A 1% deviation will give a maximum variation in the measured signals of
0,1mV
If the tank is resting on four load cells there is a risk that all the weight is taken by three
of the cells while the forth has practically no weight. For this configuration it is very
important to get the mechanical installation correct. If the output signals from the load
cells shows that one cell absorbs very little load, the load cell opposite must be
shimmed. If in doubt, contact the NOV Asker aftermarket department or the NOV site
manager for assistance.
After correct load distribution is obtained the load cell signal must be calibrated
correctly into the PLC. This must be done by NOV personnel. Please contact the NOV
Asker aftermarket department or the NOV site manager for assistance.
Note; it is possible to postpone the load distribution check/adjustment and load cell
calibration to pre-commissioning faze if not all required utilities are in place/available.
Revision 0
Page 19 of 25
2.5.2 Instruments
1. Install the instruments on its correct location according to project specific GA

drawings and P&IDs. High level switches, pressure transmitters and pressure
gauges are mounted on 2” ANSI flanges.
2. Use a 2” gasket between the flanges.
3. Tighten all M16 stud bolt connections uniformly and crosswise.
4. Install all electrical connections according to project specific El. drawings.
2.5.3 Pressure safety valves
1. Install the PSV on its intended location according to project specific GA drawings
and P&IDs. The PSVs are mounted on 2” ANSI flanges.
2. Use the 2” gasket between the flanges.
3. Tighten all M16 stud bolt connections uniformly and crosswise
4. The PSV discharge pipe must under no circumstances be connected to other
process piping that can allow process medium to enter the PSV from the outlet
side or a pressure build up after the PSV of more than 10% of the set pressure
5. Ref. the supplier installation and operating instructions for additional
requirements regarding the installation of the PSV (attachment 2)
Revision 0
Page 20 of 25
2.5.4 Flexible bellows
1. Install the flexible bellows on its intended location according to project specific
GA drawings and P&IDs.
2. Ref. the supplier installation and maintenance advice for additional requirements
regarding installation of the NOV supplied flexible bellows (attachment 3)
If the flexible bellows are not NOV supply, the same requirements is valid for these
bellows to ensure proper function of the weighing system
The flexible bellows are not intended to be used to compensate for misalignment or
inaccuracy in piping installation. Nor shall the flexible bellows be used for piping
support. All piping must be properly supported by other means.
Flange interface according to ANSI B16.5 150lbs

Revision 0
Page 21 of 25
2.5.5 Junction boxes
1. Mount all junctions on their intended location. Reference project specific GA

drawings
2. Necessary bolts will be provided with the cabinets
3. Install all electrical connections according to project specific El. drawings.
Revision 0
Page 22 of 25
2.6 Rock Catcher
1. Install the Rock Catcher on its intended location. Reference project specific GA
drawings and P&ID's.
2. Connect the yard supplied Victaulic joints
3. Make sure the Rock Cather is installed with the filter in the correct flow direction
The rock catcher can be installed on a downwards vertical pipe line, or a horizontal pipe
line. Installed on a horizontal pipe line the filter can be turned around so the rock catcher
can be utilized in both direction.
2.7 Pipe spools
1. Install the pipe spools on its intended location. Reference project specific GA
2. Connect the yard supplied Victaulic joints or flange connections
Revision 0
Page 23 of 25
2.8 Butterfly valves

1. Install the butterfly valves on their intended location. Reference project specific
P&ID's.
2. Ref. the suppliers installation and maintenance instructions for additional
requirements regarding installation of the butterfly valve (attachment 5)
3. Connect all electrical connections according to project specific El. drawings
4. Connect all pneumatic connections according to project specific P&ID's. Make sure
all air supply lines are flushed before connected to the valve to prevent debris
entering the solenoids, position monitors or actuators. No oil lubrication is to be
utilized in the supply air.
Important;
Do not use the air tubes for lifting and handling purpose
Pay attention to not damage positioner/ switch box, solenoid and actuator
Make sure the quality of the supplied air meets the requirement of the
component. If nothing is specified ISO 8573-1 class 3A, 3B and 3C should be
utilized
Revision 0
Page 24 of 25
2.9 Sampling unit

1. Install the sampling unit on its intended location. Reference project specific GA
2. Ref. the supplier installation, operation and maintenance manual for additional
requirements regarding installation of the sampling unit (attachment 6). Note that the
actuator must also be supported from the actuator bracket.
3. Connect all pneumatic connections according to project specific P&ID's. Piping
between air control panel and actuator is yard supply.
Revision 0
Page 25 of 25
3 ATTACHMENTS
Attachment index
1. Load cells – technical manual (10 pages)

2. PSV – installation and operating instructions (1 page)
3. Flexible bellows – installation and maintenance advise (5 pages)
4. Knife gate valves – operating instructions (10 pages)
5. Butterfly valves – installation and maintenance instructions (8 pages)
6. Sampling unit – installation, operating and maintenance manual (20 pages)
(Read only) 32039917 -id70672195 (Read only) 32039917 -id70672195
issue Date: 10/05/2007
VC3500 Series Load Cell Assembly for Offshore Vessel Weighing
Capacities 2t to 200t
• Stainless Steel Load Sensor

• Mud and Chemical Resistant Integral Cable (20 metres long)
• Low Cost Installation
• Low Profile
• Integrated Lift Off Prevention
• 5 Year Warranty
• Resistant To ‘Off Axis’ Loading
• Fully Welded Construction IP68
• Vessel Expansion & Contraction Compensation
• Galvanised or Stainless Steel Loading Assembly
Vessel weighing problems solved simply and cost effectively. The VC3500 incorporates
lift off prevention,and holding bolts for routine maintenance.
The VC3500 is available with intrinsically safe (ATEX) certification EEx ia llC T6 to
CENELEC standard EN50020 : 1995, and also with Ex nA 11 T6 for Zone 2, Class 2
applications.
Page 1 of 10
Index
VC3500 SERIES LOAD CELL ASSEMBLY FOR OFFSHORE VESSEL WEIGHING 1
INDEX 2
VC3500 SERIES LOAD CELL ASSEMBLY 3
INSTALLATION (GENERAL) 4
SIDE LOADS 4
MOUNTING VARIATIONS 4
LOAD CELL INSTALLATION 5
LOAD CELL CAPACITY SELECTION 5
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS 6
DIMENSIONAL DETAILS 7
INSTRUCTIONS FOR VC3500 ASSEMBLY 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SHEET 10
Page 2 of 10
VC3500 Series Load Cell Assembly
The VC3500 family of Load Cells are available in capacities ranging from 2,000KG to
200,000KG. They are especially suitable for high capacity vessel weighing and feature
a combined error specification of < +/- 0.05%.
The loading assembly is an integral part of the VC3500 and (in most cases) eliminates
the need for vessel restraints or check rods (except in extreme environmental
conditions).
The critical sensor element of the VC3500 unit is a fully welded double ended shear
beam, manufactured from high tensile 17-4PH stainless steel, and heat treated to give
a high ultimate tensile strength. This treatment provides an extremely stable platform
for the strain gauges.
In common with all Thames Side Sensors Ltd Load Cells, the strain gauged element is
temperature compensated to ensure accuracy is maintained throughout a wide
temperature range. Stainless steel diaphragms are TIG welded in to position to provide
total environmental sealing.
The specialist method of construction allows Thames Side Sensors Ltd to offer a five
year warranty on the complete unit.
Page 3 of 10
Vessel Design And Support Structures (General)
When designing support structures for vessel weighing, the following should be
considered:
• Thermal expansion and contraction of the vessel can induce significant errors.
Where large temperature changes are expected, steps should be taken to reduce
the effect on the Load Cells.
• Support structures should be rigid, with minimal deflection under full vessel load.
Flexible structures have lower natural frequencies which could result in unstable
weight indications. Furthermore, deflection of the support structure under load will
change the angle of the force through the cell assembly, resulting in additional
errors. Any unavoidable deflection in the support structure shou ld be uniform in
character.
• Unstable or non-uniform flooring under a tank support structure can cause a shift of
the structure under load, which could induce side loading.
Installation (General)
SIDE LOADS
Side loads will cause errors in a Load Cell installation and care must be taken to avoid or
minimise possible causes:
• All pipe work to and from the vessel, including electrical conduit and trunking, should
be installed using flexible connections. Where flexible connections are not possible an
unrestrained horizontal length of pipe work could be used (a length of at least twenty
times the diameters of the pipe is usually considered a minimum ).
• Common catwalks and other shared structure may cause interaction between vessels
and should be avoided or isolated as far as practicable. Ladders and other
attachments to the vessel should be included as part of the weighed system (not
connected to ground or non-weighed structure).
MOUNTING VARIATIONS
• Most applications that use Load Cells in compression have either three or four support
points, depending on vessel geometry. Vertical cylindrical vessels can utilise a three or
four point support, whereas square vessels demand a four point support (unless
mounted on to a circular base frame). If possible, the cells should be mounted such
that the line across the cell, along the length of the loading pin, passes through t he
geometric centre of the tank (see page 8)
• To achieve the greatest accuracy with horizontal or cylindrical vessels, cells should be
mounted under all supports. In order to minimise the effects of vessel deflection the
Load Cell should be aligned parallel to the length of the vessel.
Page 4 of 10
Load Cell Installation
• Loading assemblies should be level. A solid metal foundation is preferred. Mounting

surfaces must be level. It is important to ensure that the loading assemblies are level at
both the upper and lower interface points (i.e. where the vessel support leg meets the
top mounting surface, and where the assembly base meets the foundation structure).
• Ensure the cell is located in the assembly with adequate clearance on all vertical faces.
(errors could be introduced if the cell is allowed to rub against the loading assembly ).
• Use high pressure grease on all pins.
• Removal or replacement of a Load Cell is best achieved when the vessel is empty or
close to empty. For safety, at any one time, only one Load Cell should be removed
from the vessel. The four holding screws provided in the top bracket are intended to
provide secondary support to the vessel during installation or Load Cell replacement.
First, using a suitable and safe external means, take the weight off the vessel leg or
support, then lower the four holding screws until they make contact with the top face of
the loading shaft support pillars on the Base Bracket, thus providing additional security
whilst the Load Cell is out of its bracket.
Load Cell Capacity Selection
To determine the capacity requirements of compression cells:
• Determine the empty weight of the vessel, including any fixed equipment such as
motors, agitators and piping. This is generally known as the DEAD WEIGHT or TARE
WEIGHT.
• Determine the weight of the MAXIMUM contents of the vessel, not the normal or
operating capacity. This is usually referred to as the LIVE WEIGHT.
• Add the two figures to obtain the GROSS WEIGHT. Divide this figure by the number of
vessel support points. The resulting number is the LOWEST capacity cell that should
be specified. In general, no more than 80% of the cell capacity should be utilised in
order to accommodate possible unequal load distribution, errors in weight estimates,
and the effects of agitators, mixers, wind forces and shock loading. If extreme
environmental factors are to be considered (such as high wind loading or seismic
effects) it may be necessary to incorporate Load Cells of a higher capacity.
Page 5 of 10
Environmental Considerations
The range of conditions to which a weighing system is exposed is as wide and varied
as the industry itself. To ensure a long and dependable service life, it is important to
consider wider aspects of the application:
• Is the weighing system exposed to chemical or corrosive agents (airborne or

spillage potential)?
• Does the presence of chemicals in the tank or surrounding area create a

potentially hazardous environment?
• Will the tank weighing system see extremes in temperature or humidity?
• Will the Load Cells be located in an area where flooding can occur?
• Can vehicles, cranes, or other mobile machinery impact with any part of the
weighing system?
• Is the vessel subject to wind loading, shock or seismic activity?
• Is the vessel located in an area where lightning strikes occur frequently?
If in any doubt engineering advice should be sought from NOV
National Oilwell Norway AS

P.O.Box 168, Blakstadmarka 26
N-1371 Asker
Norway
Telephone no. : +47 66 76 07 50

Service phone : +47 66 76 07 51
Fax no. : +47 66 90 23 53
Page 6 of 10
Dimensional Details
Page 7 of 10
VC3500 3 X Load Cell Installation VC3500 4 X Load Cell Installation
VC3500 3 x Load Cell installation VC3500 4 x Load Cell installation
Assembly deflection and Due to the unique design of the VC3500, Transverse and Non
Axial misalignment errors are minimised
expansion
VC3500 Capacities 2 - 200t
The unit is manufactured in 5 shell sizes as follows :
Capacity t Deflection mm Expansion across
Load Cell assembly Shell size 1 : 2 - 20t
'0.20 +/- 5 mm Shell size 2 : 30 - 50t
2, 5,
Shell size 3 : 75t
10 '0.25 +/- 5 mm Shell size 4 : 100t
Shell size 5 : 150t & 200t
15 '0.30 +/- 5 mm
20 '0.40 +/- 5 mm The standard mounting kit is fabricated from Galvanised steel.
A Stainless steel mounting assembly is available as an option.
30 '0.30 +/- 9 mm
The bi-directional freedom of movement of the top plate allows for

50 '0.50 +/- 9 mm
a high degree of mis-alignment in the structure. This is
75 '0.80 +/- 9 mm particularly important in large structures where dimensional
accuracy, rigidity and angular conformity cannot be guaranteed,
100 '0.80 +/- 12 mm or where large changes in ambient temperature are anticipated.
150/200 '0.90 +/- 12 mm

The complete assembly incorporates integral ‘lift off’ protection,
reducing the need for additional restraints. Integrated holding
bolts facilitate routine maintenance and calibration, providing a
very cost effective total solution.
+/- 5°
+/- 3°
Page 8 of 10
Instructions for VC3500 Assembly
Parts List
1x VC3500 Type Load Cell

1x Top Bracket
1x Base Bracket
1x Lift Off Shaft
2x Loading Shaft
6x R-Clip/Split Pin
4x Hex Head Screw
4x Hex Lock (Thin) Nut
1. The jacking arrangement screws need to be installed first (not applicable to 100t, 150t &
200t variants). Coat the screw threads with grease and wind the Hex Lock Nuts fully home
on each. Wind the Hex Head Screws into the underside of the Top Bracket until the shaft
ends are just below the upper loading face of the Bracket. If at any time during service the
Load Cell is to be removed from it’s mount, the weight should first be taken off the silo leg
by safe external means (for safety only one Load Cell should be removed at any one
time). The screws are then lowered (unwound) until their heads rest against the top face
of the loading shaft support pillars on the Base Bracket, and the lock nuts tightened
against the Top Bracket (this feature provides additional security, and enables the bracket
assembly to stay in position while the Load Cell is safely removed or replaced).
2. With the Base Bracket in position the Load Cell is installed between the loading shaft
plates until its loading shaft holes align with those in the Base Bracket. Please ensure that
the Load Cell is orientated correctly, with the loading holes (A) at the bottom of the
bracket. If installed incorrectly the Load Cell will fail under load.
3. Once the base plate and Load Cell are aligned the two Loading Shafts should be inserted.
Ensure the bars are central to the Base Bracket pillars (when viewed from the end of the
bracket).
4. The Loading Shafts have a hole at each end which will accommodate the R-Clips/Split
Pins provided.
5. The Top Bracket is now placed centrally over the Load Cell/Base Bracket assembly.
6. The Lift Off Prevention Shaft is then inserted through the two holes in the down legs of the
Top Bracket, passing under the Load Cell.
7. R-Clips/Split Pins are now installed in the Lift Off Shaft to secure it in position. During
Load Cell removal or installation this shaft must first be removed to allow the Top Bracket
to be raised to provide clearance for the Load Cell.
LOAD CELL
BASE
BRACKET
Page 9 of 10
Technical Specification Sheet
units
Standard Load Ranges 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30,
50, 75, 100, 150 & 200. t
Full Load Output 2.0 (+/- 0.25%) mV/V
Excitation Recommended 10 V
Excitation Maximum 18 V
Safe Service Load 150 %
Ultimate load 300 %
Side Load without Accuracy Degradation 30 %
Maximum Operating Side Load 100 %
Maximum lift off protection 30 %
Combined Error < +/- 0.05 %
Repeatability < +/- 0.02 %
Output at Zero load < +/- 2.0 %
Input Resistance 785 +/- 20 ohms
Output Resistance 700 +/- 5 ohms
Operational Temperature Range -50 to +80 ºC
Compensated Temperature Range -10 to +40 ºC
Temperature Coefficient on Zero < +/- 0.005 %/ºC
Temperature Coefficient on Span < +/- 0.003 %/ºC
Environmental Protection IP 68 Insulation
>500 at 100 VDC M ohms
All percentages are related to Full Rated Load.

Mechanical Interface
via 8 off attachment holes (12 holes on 75t, 100t, 150t & 200t capacities)
Construction
Sensor Element High Strength Stainless Steel Type 17 - 4 PH
Mounting assembly Galvanised Steel.
Stainless Steel is available as an option.
Shafts High Strength Stainless Steel Type 17 - 4 PH
Electrical Connections
4 Core 16/ 0.2 mm, screened polyurethane, mud and chemical resistant cable.
Cable length 20m.
Screen not connected to Load Cell body.
-ve
Page 10 of 10
Planning, Installation and Maintenance Instructions for
Types 39, 45, 46, 48, 49, 50, 51, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57
WILLBRANDT rubber compensators are supplied ready IMPORTANT

for installation and are fitted with one-piece rotary metal When conveying abrasive media (liquids containing solids,
flanges in conformity with the standard connection (DIN, e.g. water/sand) the compensators must not be directly
ASA, BS, etc.). attached to the pump connecting piece (suction/pressure
side), due to a risk of the compensators being damaged by
The flanges should fit neatly, without any burr, within the the relatively high speeds associated with the twist and
clamping range of the rubber bellow with a rubber sealing whirl formations in the pump connecting piece. This also
surface protruding about 2 - 10 mm, depending on the applies to bent pipes and tailings.
nominal width.
EB 7
The installation space between the pump connecting piece
Planning instructions and compensator must be 1 to 1.5 times the nominal
The lines must be designed in such a manner that the diameter (DN). Pump operation against a totally or partially
compensators are guided by fixed bearings (FP) or sliding closed gate or flap valve must be avoided. Cavitation must
bearings (GL); see: also be avoided as this can result in the rapid destruction
of the compensator.
Installation example 1
Compensating of axial expansion with unbraced EB 8 (Axial prestress)
compensators. With axial prestress it is necessary to ensure that the
compensators are prestressed by not more than
Installation example 2 maximum 10 mm when in a non-installed state. For
Compensating lateral and axial expansion with an unbraced higher prestresses a compensator in conformity with
compensator. EB 8 must be used, i.e. the compensator must be first
fully installed after which the corresponding prestress
Installation example 3 is generated with the firmly installed compensator.
Compensating of lateral and axial expansion with unbraced
compensators at an outgoing pipe. Reason: With a higher prestress in a non-installed state,
the sealing bead can spring out of the holder of the steel
Installation example 4 backing flange and damage the sealing bead in the
Compensating of axial expansion by angular movement process.
reversal with braced compensators. Advantage: Large axial
expansions can only be absorbed by two compensators. EB 8 (Lateral prestress)
For compensator arrangement, it must be ensured when
Installation example 5 dimensioning the pipe that any necessary lateral prestress
Arrangement of pipe hinge compensators in three hinge must be applied only with a securely installed compensator
systems for absorbing expansion in two directions. by means of pipe misalignment (EB 8a). A lateral prestress
Advantage: High expansion absorbing rates, low adjusting of only 5mm is possible prior to installation. It must
forces, a soft corner. however be ensured that the rubber bead is not pulled
out of the groove in the steel backing flange.
Installation example 6
Use of rubber compensators with pumps. In this case Safety measures
compensators in the pressure line should always be braced The pipes must be protected against impermissible over-
to ensure that internal pressure does not overload the pressure, excessive rise of temperature and uncontrolled
pump connecting piece. A vacuum bearing ring should be vacuum. The limiting values for the respective settings are
used on the suction side if the negative pressure exceeds shown in the data sheets of our catalogue relating to the
0.8 bar, absolute. respective types. In addition, appropriate drain and venting
options should be provided to prevent water impact and
Bracing examples: vacuum failures, which can also cause compensator
Rubber compensators must be installed between fixed damage.
points, as described above, in order to take up axial
expansion. The axial and lateral expansion must be
transformed where this is not possible so that braced
rubber compensators can be used to neutralize the arising
reaction forces (inside surface of the compensator
multiplied by the operating pressure). In this arrangement
only appropriate sliding bearings can be used for correct
introduction of the expansion.
An extensive range of rubber compensator bracings is

listed in our catalogue.
59
Medium safety 5. Tightening with a torque wrench
Evenly tighten all screws manually (stage 1) (ensure
Since the inside of the compensator comes into contact parallelism with the sealing surfaces). The tightening
with the media, it must be ensured that only media is torques specified in Table 1 are sufficient for an
pumped as specified in the resistance list as suitable for operating pressure of 16/25 bar. These values should
the inner rubber. be increased by 30% for an operating pressure of
25 bar. After the third stage, 30 minutes should be
If other media are used we should be notified of the same allowed to pass before retightening to the final torque
together with the relevant data in accordance with the specified in stage 3. Further tightening of the screws
safety data sheet for chemical substances and preparation is unnecessary, particularly since this could destroy
as per DIN 52900, Item 1 to 2.13, in order that we may the surface seal.
ascertain whether the inner rubber of the compensator is
suitable. Table 1
Stage 3
Flow rates DN Stage 2 16 bar 25 bar
With high flow rates it is necessary to clarify whether the 20 - 80 50 Nm 80 Nm 150 Nm

compensators have to be installed with or without a guiding 100 - 300 50 Nm 100 Nm 160 Nm
pipe to avoid wear as a result of excessive whirling. 350 - 500 50 Nm 130 Nm 170 Nm
600 100 Nm 210 Nm 280 Nm
Mating flanges 700 100 Nm 250 Nm 325 Nm
750 100 Nm 280 Nm 370 Nm
Mating flanges must conform in their design with EB 9 to 800 100 Nm 300 Nm 400 Nm
ensure reliable sealing and clamping of the rubber 900 100 Nm 310 Nm 410 Nm
compensators. 1000 100 Nm 340 Nm 440 Nm
Installation Attention: Bellow

Bellow must not be painted or insulated.
1. Check the packaging of the rubber compensators
for damage. Damaged compensators must never
be released for installation. Pressure test
2. Check the envisaged installation gap. The mating The rubber compensator is not a proper pressure vessel,
flange must be installed in true alignment. The but is classified according to the Pressure Equipment
maximum deviation within the installation gap in Directive as a "pipe accessory" (pipe component). When
relation to the compensator is +10 mm, minus the including the compensator is the pipeline, sealing does not
corresponding expansion specifications. The take place via a separate seal, but directly on the integrated
maximum lateral deviation of the flange is 5 mm. surface seal of the rubber bellow.
Note: If it is not possible to observe the above A one hundred per cent pressure test of the rubber
tolerances then proceed with an axial/lateral compensators at the manufacturer can adversely influence
prestress as defined by EB 8 / EB 8a. the integrated rubber sealing surface. For this reason,
pressure testing of the rubber compensators at the
3. Arrangement of the screws EB 10 manufacturer takes place only at the special request of
For compensators that have through-holes the screw the customer with the utmost care.
heads must face the bellow to avoid damaging the
bellow body when under pressure. For compensators The pressure test is normally carried out only after the
with threaded holes in the flange, the screws must fit rubber compensators have been fully installed in the
flush with the inner side of the flange in relation to the pipeline system. The information contained in these
bellow so that protruding screws cannot damage the installation instructions should be observed prior to the
bellow when under pressure. pressure test.
4. The flange screws must be evenly tightened in

alter-nation as shown in Table 1. It must also be
ensured that the sealing bead does not tilt. The
entire protruding sealing surface must be uniformly
compressed. The screws must be evenly tightened
crosswise 3-4 times.
60
Advice Storage
1. After the compensators have been installed they should See DIN 7716 - guidelines for the storage of rubber parts:
be protected in an appropriate manner against damage, Rubber compensators must be stored free of stress,
and the protection should only be removed just before deformation and bending. Rubber compensators with
putting into operation. steel flanges must be stored upright on the flanges
(to avoid the risk of crushing).
2. Cover the rubber bellows when carrying out welding
and torch-cutting work; temperatures in excess of 80°C Storage room
can cause damage.
The storage room must be cool, dry, dust-free and
3. The rubber parts must not be over-painted. Solvents moderately ventilated.
and chemicals will attack the surface and destroy the
bellow. Oxygen and ozone
4. The compensators must not be insulated as this can Rubber parts must be protected from draughts. If necessary
result in overheating and drying the bellow and damage they should be covered. Do not operate any ozone-
to the same. generating facilities in the storage room, e.g. electric
motors, fluorescent lamps, etc.
5. The best operating results are achieved when the
compensator operates stress-free under operating Other jointly stored media
conditions (take appropriate prestressing into account
during installation). Do not store solvents, fuels, chemicals or similar
substances in the same storage room.
6. The fixed points must be checked to see whether they
are suitable for absorbing the reaction force from the
non-braced compensator or whether the adjusting
forces and initiation of expansion with appropriate Supplementary installation and mounting
sliding bearings takes place at the correct distance instructions for type 45 - 46 (EB 11)
from the compensator.
The type 46 rubber compensator should be installed free
7. Compensators braced with tie rods should be appropria- of any tension. Screws should always be tightened with
tely adjusted following installation. The tie rods should two wrenches to avoid damaging torsions being transmitted
be able to be turned hand-tight. All hexagon nuts must to the compensator; see EB 11.
subsequently be locked with lock nuts.
Installation procedure
1. Attach the screw-joining parts to the pipe and check

the installation gap! The installation gap must equal
Maintenance the compensator length (130 mm +5mm).
1. Rubber compensators do not require any 2. Insert the compensator and tighten with two wrenches.
maintenance, but they must be regarded as wearing
parts. Nominal diameters DN 20 - 25
The front screw-in part is used as a steady while the union
2. It is important that the installed parts are regularly nut is tightened (to avoid the transmission of torsions to
inspected for initial signs of ageing, leakage and blister the bellow).
formation. In the event of major maintenance work on
the plant, the condition of the interior lining should also Nominal diameters DN 32 - 50
be inspected (e.g. check for swelling, hardening, wash- The rear screw-in part is used as a steady while the union
out and cracks). nut is tightened (to avoid the transmission of torsion to the
bellow).
See main installation instructions for all other installation

points.
61
Installation Examples
EB 1 EB 6
EB 2
EB 7
EB 3
EB 8
EB 4
EB 5 EB 8 a
62
EB 9 EB 10

EB 11
DN 20/25 Type 46 / DN 20 - 50 Type 50
DN 32 - 50 Type 46

63
INSTALLATION, OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MODEL EX
ORBINOX SPAIN Pol.Ind. s/n-20270 ANOETA. Tel:+34 943 698030 Fax:+34 943 653066 e-mail:orbinox@orbinox.com
ORBINOX CANADA, ORBINOX USA, ORBINOX COMERCIAL, ORBINOX UK, ORBINOX FRANCE, ORBINOX GERMANY,
ORBINOX INDIA, ORBINOX CHINA.
www.orbinox.com
MODEL EX
INDEX Page
0.- Description .........................………................................ 2

1.- Handling ..................................……….......................... 2
2.- Installation .................................………......................... 3
3.- Actuators .....................................………....................... 5
4.- Maintenance .....................................……….................. 6
4.1.- Gland packing replacement …….………............ 6
4.2.- Seal replacement......………....…....……............ 7
4.3.- PTFE seal replacement ..…....…..........…............ 8
4.4.- Lubrication …………………….……………..…… 9
5.- Storage …………................................…..………........... 9
6.- Parts list & drawing ..................................………........... 10
0.- DESCRIPTION
The EX model knife gate is a uni-directional wafer valve designed for general industrial service
applications. The design of the body and seat assures non-clogging shut-off with suspended solids.
The EX valve complies with the following European directives:
- DIR 98/37/EC (machines)

- DIR 97/23/EC (PED) Fluid: Group 1 (b), 2 (Cat. I, mod.A)
It may also comply with the directive:
- DIR 94/9/EC (Explosive Atmospheres)

The EX valve may comply with the directive regarding equipment and protective systems for their
use in explosive atmospheres. In these cases, the logotype shall appear on the identification
label of the valve. This label shows the exact classification of the zone where the valve can be
used. The user will be liable for its use in any other zone.
This directive only applies in the following atmospheric conditions:
0,8 bar ≤ P ≤ 1,2 bar
-20ºC < T < 60ºC
Any increase in temperature due to frictional warmth is negligible, since the relative speed of
the moving parts is extremely low.
The risk analysis associated to this directive does not take into account the fluid that goes
through the valve, even when such fluid produces an explosive atmosphere. The user must take
into account the risks that the fluid generates, such as:
- heating of the valve surface.
- generation of electrostatic charges caused by displacement of the fluid.
- shock waves caused by the installation (water hammer), internal crashes generated by the
pellets or the risks due to foreign bodies susceptible of being present in the installation.
1.- HANDLING
When handling an Orbinox valve please pay attention to the following points:
• Do NOT attach lifting gear to the valve actuators or gate guards. They are not designed to
bear the weight, and could easily be damaged.
• Do NOT lift the valve by the valve bore.
This can cause damage to the seating surfaces and seals.
.
2009 EDITION
www.orbinox.com EX-2/10
MODEL EX
Ideally when using lifting gear to move an Orbinox valve, it should be supported by two or more
eyebolts screwed into the tapped fixing holes in the valve body.
SAFETY WARNING:
• Check that the lifting gear is rated to carry the weight of the valve.
• Make sure the eyebolts have the same thread as the boltholes and that they are well secured.
During installation it is recommended to lift the valve via soft straps. These can be to the upper part of
the valve body.
2.- INSTALLATION
To avoid personal injury or damage to property from the release of process fluid:
- Those in charge of handling and maintenance of the valve must be qualified and trained in
valve operations.
- Use appropriate personal protection equipment (gloves, safety shoes, etc).
- Shut off all operating lines to the valve and place a warning sign.
- Isolate the valve completely from the process.
- Release process pressure.
- Drain the process fluid from the valve.
- According to EN 13463-1 (15), during installation and maintenance operations, use hand
tools (non electric) with Working Allowance.
Before installation, inspect the valve body and components for any damage that may have
occurred during shipping or storage. Make sure the internal cavities within the valve body are
clean. Inspect the pipeline and mating flanges, making sure the pipe is free of foreign material and
that the flanges are clean.
The valve is unidirectional. It should be installed with pressure exerted against the seat. The words
“SEAT SIDE” are marked on the valve body to indicate the position of the valve seat. Installation
and the correct orientation with respect to the direction of the flow is the responsibility of the user.
It should be noted that the direction of flow and differential pressure, do not always coincide.
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
Special care should be taken to maintain the correct distance between the flanges and to ensure
that they are parallel to the valve body. Incorrect alignment of the valve can cause deformations,
which can lead to difficulties in operation.
The following table gives the maximum torque values for the valve fixing bolts. Also shown is the
maximum depth (T) allowed for the tapped blind boltholes drilled into the valve body.
DN 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000
T (mm) 10 10 10 10 10 14 14 18 18 22 24 24 24 24 20 20 20 20
Kg.m 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 11 11 15 15 19 19 23 23 28 28 34
The valve can be mounted in any position with regard to the pipe. However, it is advisable to place
it vertically in horizontal pipeline (A) if the installation allows it. (Please consult the technical
department at Orbinox).
With larger diameters (> 300 mm), heavy actuators (pneumatic, electric, etc.), or with the valve
installed horizontally (B) or at an angle (C) on a horizontal pipeline, the installation will require the
construction of suitable supports. (See the following diagram and consult the technical department
at Orbinox).
C C
B B
C* C*
A*
* For these positions please consult Orbinox.
In vertical pipelines, the construction of suitable supports is always required (for further information
please consult the technical department at Orbinox).
Once the valve is installed, test that the flanges have been fastened correctly and that all electrical
and/or pneumatic connections have been properly made.
Where electric accessories are mounted on the valve (i.e. solenoid valves, electro-pneumatic
positioners, etc.), or is in an ATEX zone, the corresponding earth connections must be made before
it is put into operation.
The operation of automated valves is limited only with fitted gate covers.
First, operate the valve with no flow in the pipeline. Then test operation and valve seal with flow. It
should be noted that the packing material might settle in shipping/storage, which can cause minor
leakage. This can be remedied by tightening the gland follower (5) during installation.
The nuts shall be tightened gradually and crosswise until the leakage stops (see the next figure).
Check that there is no metal contact between the glandfollower (5) and the gate (2).
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
2 3
1
4
If the glandfollower nuts are pulled to hard, the force needed to operate the valve will increase, the
valve function will be affected and the box packing lifetime will be shortened.
The table below shows the maximum torque value for tightening the glandfollower nuts.
DN Torque (N.m)
50 - 100 20
125 - 200 30
250 - 1000 35
Once performance has been tested, the valve can be put into operation.
In an ATEX zone, the continuity between the body of the valve and the pipe must be checked (test
in accordance with EN 12266-2 Standard, annex B, points B.2.2.2. and B.2.3.1).
It must also be verified that the pipe is connected to earth and that there is electrical conductivity
between the two pipes (outlet/inlet).
Approximate weight of the handwheel-operated valve (rising stem):
DN 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1200
Weight(Kg) 7 8 9 11 15 18 30 44 58 96 124 168 192 245 405 455 512 680 865 1055
3.- ACTUATORS
3.1.- Handwheel
To open the valve turn the handwheel (11) anticlockwise. To close turn the handwheel
clockwise.
3.2.- Lever
To operate the valve with this device, first loosen the locking clamp located on the top of the
yoke (8). Then either open or close the valve by moving the lever in the desired direction.
Finally, fix the position of the lever with the locking clamp.
3.3.- Pneumatic
Valves are usually supplied with a double acting pneumatic actuator although, upon request,
we can supply single-acting actuators. In either case the feed pressure can vary between 3,5
and 10 Kg/cm2.However, the size of the actuator for each valve has been designed for a feed
pressure of 6 Kg/cm2.
It is essential for a good maintenance of the cylinder that air should be well dried, filtered and
lubricated.
It is recommended to actuate the cylinder 3-4 times before the start up, once it is installed in the
pipeline.
3.4.- Electric actuator

Depending on the type or make of the electric actuator, specific instructions (i.e. a
manufacturer’s manual) will be supplied.
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
4.- MAINTENANCE
The valve must not undergo any modifications without a previous agreement with ORBINOX.
ORBINOX shall not be liable for any damages that may arise due to the use of non original parts or
components
valve operations.
In an ATEX zone, there may be electrostatic charges in the internal parts of the valve. These
electrostatic charges, caused by the evacuation of the fluid, may entail a risk of explosion. It is the
responsibility of the user to take extreme precautions to minimize this risk.
Safety in an ATEX zone:

- The maintenance personnel must be made fully aware of the risks of explosion, and it is
advisable that they receive specific training regarding ATEX.
- Should the fluid transported create an internal explosive atmosphere, the user must check
periodically the correct water-tightness of the installation
- Clean the valve periodically to prevent dust accumulation.
- Assembly at the end of the line is not allowed.
- Avoid repainting the products supplied.
The only maintenance required is to change the gland packing (4) or the seal (3) if the valve is a
resilient seated type.
The life of these elements will depend on the working conditions of the valve such as: pressure,
temperature, abrasion, chemical action, number of operations, etc.
4.1. - Replacement of the gland packing (4):

1) Depressurise the circuit and place the valve in close position.
2) Remove the gate guards (for automatically actuated valves only).
3) - Rising stem valves.Photo 1: Release the spindle or stem (6) from the gate (2).
- Non rising stem.Photo 2: Release the stem nut from the gate (2).
Photo 1 Photo 2
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
4) Loosen the screws of the yoke (8) and remove it (without loosing the actuator).
5) Loosen the nuts of the gland follower (5) and remove it. (Photo 3)
6) Remove the old packing rings (4) and clean the stuffing box.
7) Insert the new packing rings (4), making sure that the ring joints alternate (the first on one
side of the gate, the next on the other and so on). (Photo 4)
8) Once the necessary packing rings (4) have been inserted, proceed with a steady initial
tightening of the gland follower (5).(Photo 3)
9) Place the yoke (8) (with the actuator) and screw it.
10) Fix the stem (6) to the gate (2)( Rising stem valves.Photo 1) or fix the stem nut to the
gate.(Non rising stem.Photo 2).
11) Remount the gate guards.
12) Carry out some operations with a loaded circuit and then re-tighten the gland follower (5)
to prevent leakage.
Photo 3 Photo 4
4.2.- Replacement of the seal (3) (only applicable to resilient seated valves):
1) Remove the valve from the pipeline.
3) Release the spindle or stem (6) from the gate (2).(Rising stem valves.Photo 1) or release the
stem nut from the gate.(Non rising stem.Photo 2).
5) Loosen the nuts of the gland follower (5) and remove it.(Photo 3)
6) Remove the old packing (4) and the gate (2) and clean the stuffing box.
7) Remove the seal retainer ring (10) which support the seals (3).
8) Remove the worn seal (3) and clean the seal housing.
9) Once the new seal (3) is cut according to size, insert it into the seat housing (making sure
that the union of the seal is at the top). (Photos 5 and 6)
If the valve has PTFE seal (3), follow the point 4.3.
Seal lengths
DN 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600
Lengths (mm) 205 255 295 365 440 510 680 860 1020 1190 1350 1510 1630 2010
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
Photo 5 Photo 6
10) Insert the seal retainer ring (10) by hammering gently around the edge. (Photos 7 and 8)
Photo 7 Photo 8
11) Remount the gate (2).

tightening of the gland follower (5).(Photo 3) following the steps of point 4.1.
4.3. - Replacement of the PTFE seal (3):

Follow the same procedure as point 4.2 but with following notes:
1. To obtain a tighter shut off in stainless steel valves (CF8M body), the machined housing of
the seat is sealed with a plastic glue. This is not necessary in cast iron valves (GG25).
With the seal in this position:
2. Make a circle, joining the ends and making a heart-shaped form (see the following
diagram).
3. Insert both ends of the seal in the upper side of

the machined housing of the seat (adjacent to
the gland follower (5)), and pushing the
arched part with a finger, insert the seal into
the housing.
If the diameter of the valve is small (DN≤150),
a vice can be used.
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
4.4. - Lubrication:
Twice a year, it is recommended to remove the protection cap (12) and fill up the stem
protector (13) halfway with a calcium-based grease with the following characteristics: highly
water resistant, low ash content, and excellent adherence.
After maintenance, and in an ATEX zone, it is obligatory to verify the electrical continuity between
the pipe and the different valve components, such as the body, the gate, the supports,... (test in
accordance with EN 12266-2 Standard, annex B, points B.2.2.2. and B.2.3.1).
5.- STORAGE
For long periods it is recommended to store the valves in a well-ventilated room. Valves should not
be exposed to temperatures higher than 30ºC, as some soft seal materials can be damaged when
exposed to higher temperatures.
If outdoor storage cannot be avoided, cover the valve and protect it from sources of heat or direct
sunlight. Provide good ventilation to avoid moisture.
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
6.- PARTS LIST & DRAWINGS
1.- BODY 8.- YOKE

2.- GATE 9.- COLLAR
3.- SEAL 10.- SEAL RETAINER RING
4.- PACKING RING 11.- HANDWHEEL
5.- GLAND FOLLOWER 12.- CAP
6.- STEM 13.- STEM PROTECTOR
7.- STEM NUT 14.- FRICTION WASHER
.
2009 EDITION
Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Model PR
Automatic Sampler
SPD 18.2.1 Rev. 4 11/09
SENTRY EQUIPMENT CORP

PO Box 127
Oconomowoc, WI 53066 USA
Phone: 262.567.7256
Fax: 262.567.4523
Email: sales@sentry-equip.com
www.sentry-equip.com
Model PR Automatic Sampler SPD 18.2.1 Rev. 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................... iii
1.0 General Description................................................................................................... 1
2.0 Installation ................................................................................................................. 1
3.0 Operation .................................................................................................................. 4
4.0 Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 6
5.0 Factory Assistance .................................................................................................. 13
6.0 Standard Warranty .................................................................................................. 14
SENTRY EQUIPMENT CORP • 262.567.7256 • Fax: 262.567.4523 • sales@sentry-equip.com • www.sentry-equip. com i

WARNING notices as used in this manual apply to hazards or unsafe practices, which could
result in personal injury or death.
CAUTION notices apply to hazards or unsafe practices which could result in minor personal
injury or property damage.
NOTES highlight procedures and contain information which assists the operator in
understanding the information contained in this manual.
WARNING
Do not install, maintain, or operate this equipment without reading, understanding

and following the proper Sentry Equipment Corp. instructions. Otherwise, injury
or damage or both may result.
NOTICE
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Sentry Equipment Corp, its employees, agents, and the authors of and contributors to this
document specifically disclaim all liabilities and warranties, express and implied (including
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose), for the accuracy, currency,
completeness, and/or reliability of the information contained herein and/or for the fitness for any
particular use and/or for the performance of any material and/or equipment selected in whole or
part with the user of/or in reliance upon information contained herein. Selection of materials
and/or equipment is at the sole risk of the user of this publication.
This document contains proprietary information. No part of this document may be photocopied
or reproduced without the prior written consent of Sentry Equipment Corp.
Sentry Equipment Corp

966 Blue Ribbon Circle North
PO Box 127
Oconomowoc, WI 53066
Phone: 262.567.7256
Fax: 262.567.4523
Normal business hours: 8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. CST (U.S. Central Time), Monday
through Friday
SENTRY EQUIPMENT CORP • 262.567.7256 • Fax: 262.567.4523 • sales@sentry-equip.com • www.sentry-equip. com ii

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read the entire manual before attempting to unpack, set up or operate this product. Pay careful
attention to all warnings, cautions and notes. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury or
equipment damage.
Use of Hazard Information

If multiple hazards exist, the signal word corresponding to the greatest hazard shall be used.
Definitions
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, may result in property damage.
NOTE
Information that requires special emphasis
SHALL
This word understood to be mandatory
SHOULD
This word understood to be advisory
SENTRY EQUIPMENT CORP • 262.567.7256 • Fax: 262.567.4523 • sales@sentry-equip.com • www.sentry-equip. com iii
It is solely the responsibility of the user, through its own analysis and testing, to
select products suitable for their specific application requirements, ensure they
are properly installed, ensure that they are safely applied, ensure they are
properly maintained, and limit their use to their intended purpose.
Improper selection, installation, or use can cause personal injury or property

damage.
Sentry does not warrant against erosion and corrosion. Sentry makes no claims
regarding suitability for specific use, and provides no warrantee regarding
material compatibility of elastomers in specific services.
Hot Surfaces! This equipment may have very hot surfaces. If an operator
contacts a hot surface, injury may occur. Use protective clothing to prevent
injury. If other equipment comes in contact with a hot surface, damage to the
equipment may occur. Ensure the area around this equipment is kept clear to
prevent damage from occurring.
High Pressures! This equipment may contain fluids at very high pressures. Prior
to installing, removing or maintaining this equipment, ensure that the equipment
is isolated from all connecting piping, the equipment is de-pressurized, the
contents have been drained and the equipment is cool.
This equipment contains moving parts! All drive guards and doors must be
secured in place when this machine is being operated.
Follow proper local, state and federal regulations for proper installation and
operational requirements.
SENTRY EQUIPMENT CORP • 262.567.7256 • Fax: 262.567.4523 • sales@sentry-equip.com • www.sentry-equip. com iv

1.0 General Description
The standard Model PR samples dilute and dense material from positive or negative air
conveying lines. A sample is taken when a solenoid-controlled air cylinder moves a
sample probe in and out of the product stream. The sample is then discharged to a
collection container.
Product characteristics are not changed by the sampler because no moving parts
convey the product to the sample container. Sample size and frequency can be changed
at the controller.
Please have this manual accessible when contacting the customer service
representative for the area.
2.0 Installation
Sampler shall be supported in two planes to prevent bending of the sample tube and
to prevent personal and property damage.
SUPPORT BRACKET
1. Choose a location for your sampler where the product is evenly dispersed in the
material line. Make sure that the sampler is mounted six to eight feet beyond all
elbows or line irregularities.
2. If the sampler is premounted at the factory, remove a section of the conveying line
equal to the length of pipe in which the sampler is mounted. Insert the sample tube
facing into the product flow. Clamp or bolt sampler in position.
3. If the sampler comes with mounting adaptors, you will have to drill a hole in the
conveying line. Cut a 2” diameter hole in the conveying line to accommodate the
sample tube. The hole must be 30°-60° down from the horizontal plane of the line in
the horizontal mounts. For angular conveying line, cut a hole on the bottom side of
the line. (See Figure 1). For vertical applications, cut a hole, which will be elliptical in
shape, based on a 2” diameter circle projected at a 45-degree angle.
SENTRY EQUIPMENT CORP • 262.567.7256 • Fax: 262.567.4523 • sales@sentry-equip.com • www.sentry-equip. com 1

NOTE
When placing the sampler in position for mounting, make sure the
sample tube slot faces the flow of material so the sample can enter
into the tube. Also, be sure the product discharge is facing down.
4. Mount adaptor wraps on the conveying line, making sure the hole in the adaptor lines
up with the hole in the conveying line. Then secure with the bolts.
5. Mount and fasten the sampler to mounting adaptors with included hardware.
NOTE
The packing nut MUST be hand tight using the spanner wrench
before the unit is started. Instructions for doing this are in section
3.0 Operation / Adjustments.
6. Mount the sample bottle assembly in any convenient location below the sampler.
NOTE
Best results are obtained when, in the sampling position, the
discharge of the sampler is in direct line with the intake of the
sample bottle.
Figure 1.
Various Mounts
ANGULAR CONVEYING LINE

HORTIZONTAL CONVEYING LINE
30°MIN.
60°MAX.
30°MIN.
60°MAX.
DISCHARGE
DISCHARGE
7. Connect a flexible hose from the sample discharge to the sample collection
container. See Figure 2. In certain applications rigid, metal tubing can be used
following a short length of hose attached to the discharge.
8. Mount the filter-regulator and the solenoid-valve with the bowl in a vertical position
as close as possible to the sampler. See Figure 2. Air pressure of 60 to 80 PSI is

normally recommended (3.9 to 5.6 kilograms per square centimeters). The regulator
and the restrictors are preset at the factory.
9. Connect the lines from the solenoid-valve marked C1 and C2 to the corresponding
C1 and C2 marks on the air cylinders. See Figure 2.
10. Cut a length of 3/8” (approximately 9.5 mm) O.D. poly tube and run a line from the
filter-regulator to the solenoid-valve.
11. Connect your air supply to the inlet of the filter-regulators. See Figure 2.
NOTE
A clean air supply should be used. Oil and Moisture filters should
be used before the sampler filter- regulator if necessary.
NOTE
The air lines should not be so long that sharp bends or kinks
develop in the lines.
NOTE
If an air lubricant is added to the system, it should be placed
immediately after the filter-regulator.
Figure 2. Air Line Connections

C1
C2
Air lines
C1
C2
Filter / Regulator
12. Mount controller (if supplied) in a location easily accessible. Surge suppression and
filtering is recommended but not required. The controller should be hard wired to

instrument-quality power using appropriate certified conduit, fittings, and wiring or

cable. A suitable external over-current protection device, such as a fuse or circuit
breaker (15 A), and disconnect device is recommended. The over-current protection
and disconnect devices shall be installed on both the hot (L) and neutral (N) leads.
The disconnect device shall be located near the equipment and marked with
appropriate ON(1) OFF(O) markings as specified by local codes. For fixed wiring
methods, the ground conductor shall have green with a yellow stripe as the
insulation. Installation should be performed by qualified personal in accordance with
local codes and procedures. Mount the controller in a vibration-free location and
have a qualified electrician wire the controller to the motor and electrical supply. If
the controller is to be mounted near the sampler, then the controller must meet the
National Electrical Code for the area.
NOTE
When penetrating the enclosure controller, use tubes & fittings
that maintain the environmental rating of the enclosure.
13. Connect solenoid coil leads to controller using appropriate weatherproof cable or
wire and conduit. Minimum wire size - 14 ga. copper with a 60°C rating.
14. Remote Enable Connector (if used).
Customer supplied normally open (N.O.) dry contact to enable a sample control
should be wired per Electrical wiring diagram provided. Remove jumper supplied with
controller.
3.0 Operation
1. Sample Bottle Assembly

The pressure relief valve on the sample bottle assembly is used to release pressure
in the container. See Figure 3. It may be opened very slightly to allow pressure to
bleed slowly between sampling cycles.
If closed during sampling, it should be opened to release container

pressure before removing the container. Under no circumstances should
the relief valve be more than very slightly open during sampling since fine
material may escape, biasing the sample and possibly causing personal
injury.
NOTE
The pressure relief valve must be closed when sampling on a
vacuum line.

NOTE
Check the pressure relief valve on the pressurized container. The
screw should be turned down (clockwise) as far as possible.
Figure 3.
Pressure Relief
Valve Adjustment
Adjustments
Sample Probe Speed

The speed with which the sample probe rotates can be increased or decreased by
turning the flow controls on the four-way valve. See Figure 4. Each screw regulates the
air supply to the cylinder. Turn the screw clockwise to decrease cylinder speed. When
shipped from the factory, the advancing and retracting speeds are equal.
NOTE
If you make an adjustment to the four-way valve, you might have to
adjust the timers in the controller.
Figure 4.
Four-way Valve
MAIN AIR SUPPLY
DECREASE SPEED DECREASE SPEED
SOLENOID COIL FLOW CONTROL

FLOW CONTROL RETRACT ADVANCE

The length of time the probe will stay in the line to collect each sample is increased or
decreased by turning the dial on the solenoid time delay. The solenoid time delay is
located on the inside of the controller and is adjustable from .15-5 seconds.
Seal Adjustment
Remove the top cover plate to adjust the seals. Using the spanner wrench, turn the
packing nut (Figure 5) clockwise ¼ to1/2 revolution. The packing nut should be hand
tight using the spanner wrench supplied. Never loosen the packing nut. Let the sampler
stroke 3 to 4 times and readjust as needed.
NOTE
Glass-filled Teflon seals will be slightly harder to slip the probe
through, but once they are in, the probe will move freely.
Sentry Equip. Corp strongly suggests that seal adjustments should be on a periodic
maintenance schedule. Frequency of adjustments will depend on your specific
application and sampling procedure
C1
Figure 5.
Premature failure of the

sampler will occur if break-in
instructions are not followed.
Packing nut should be
tightened while the sample
tube is being stroked out of the
PACKING NUT housing, using not

to get hand pinched
4.0 Maintenance
1. If an air lubricant is added to the system, it should be placed immediately after the
filter-regulator.
2. Drain the filter/regulator once a week by turning the drain on the bottom of the bowl.
See figure 6. Draining frequency depends upon quality of air supply and may be
required daily.

Figure 6.
Filter Regulator
PUSH IN DRAIN, FINGERTIP

TOUCH TO DRAIN
DO NOT use carbon tetrachloride, trichloroethylene, thinner, acetone or similar

solvents. Use only household soap to clean the bowl. Reassemble the regulator and
turn the air supply on.
3. Excessive pressure drops or a visible coating on the filter element indicates cleaning
of the filter-regulator is necessary. Shut off the air supply and remove the bowl.
Unscrew the lower gasket, allowing the filter element to fall out. Wash the filter
element with denatured alcohol. Do not use carbon tetrachloride, trichloroethylene,
thinner, acetone or similar solvents. Use only household soap to clean the bowl.
Reassemble the regulator and turn the air supply on.
4. Replaceable items for the filter-regulator are: filters, bowls and gauges.
5. Wash and blow out restrictors once a month or, whenever necessary. Replace spool
assembly if O-rings are grooved.
6. Replaceable items for the four-way valve are: solenoid, spool assembly, and
restrictors. See figure 7.

Figure 7.
Four-way Valve
SOLENOID
MANUAL FOUR-WAY VALVE

OVERRIDE
SPOOL ASSEMBLY
MUFFLERS
7. If the seals become worn, you must remove and replace them. The following steps
are necessary to remove the seal housing.
a. Loosen nuts and bolts marked (A). See Figure 8.
b. Remove the packing nut and packing plate. See Figure 9.
c. Remove the seals and insert spacers.
d. Install new seals as shown in exploded view Figure10.
e. Replace the packing plate and packing nut.
f. Slide seal housing on and tighten all nuts and bolts removed in Step 1.
g. Adjust seals according to SECTION 3.0 - SEAL ADJUSTMENTS section.
NOTE
Never remove the housing spacer part # 88531000 for 6” or 8”
units when changing the inner seals and inserting spacers.

Figure 8. Housing Assembly Figure 9. Packing Assembly
Pre-Troubleshooting Checklist
The following information is a synopsis of the problems you may encounter prior to
troubleshooting your equipment. Divide the unit into three sections and try solving the
problem before you continue on.
Potential Problems
Electrical
· Timers
· Connections
· Circuit Breaker
· Solenoid
Pneumatic
· Air Pressure
· Filter-Regulator
· Restrictors
· Four-way Valves
· Air Cylinder
· Air Lines
Mechanical
· Alignment
· Packings

Figure 10.
Exploded view
Item # Description Quanity

1 Mount Gasket 1
2 Housing Weldment Modification 1
3 Seal Ring, Male 3
4 Pressure Ring 11
5 Seal Ring, Female 3
6 Purge Spacer 1
7 Discharge Spacer 1
8 Back Spacer 1
9 Packing Plate 1
10 Packing Nut 1
11 Model PR Side Plate 2
12 Body Back Flange 1
13 Model PR Threaded Spacer Rod 2
14 Model PR Spacer Pipe 2
15 Air Cylinder 1
NOTE 16 Sample Tube 1
This Figure is for Reference Only. 17 Fitting (for C1 & C2) 2
18 Cover Gasket 2
Always refer to the Final Assembly 19 Model PR Cover Plate 2
Dwg. And the General 20 Support Bracket 1
Arrangement Dwg. included with 21 .125 NPT SS Cap 1
your sampler purchase, for 22 Spanner Wrench 1
specific part #’s used on your 23 Nameplate 1
24 Caution Label 2
sampler. 25 Danger Label 1

Troubleshooting
Do not attempt any adjustments or disassembly unless main power to

controller is disconnected.
Figure 11.
Troubleshooting Sequence
1,2,3,4 Controller
5 Solenoid
6 Air Kinks
7 Air Pressure
8 Restrictors
9 Spool Assembly
10 Air Cylinder
11 Packing
12 Alignment

Electrical
(1) Check main power supply and other user supplied electrical control for tripped
circuit breaker or other power indicator.
(2) If the sampler does not function, check controller settings in controller manual.
(3) Check terminals for loose connections.
(4,5) If solenoid timer delay is functional, it will energize the solenoid on the four-
way valve. If the solenoid does not function, check connections and settings
on Solenoid valve. Be sure the red dot on the valve is pointed to “0”.
Pneumatic
(6,7,8,9) Check air lines for kinks, breaks, etc. Air pressure to the filter/regulator should
be 60-80 PSI. If higher air pressure is required to activate the cylinder, then
there is a possibility that the probe is bound or the four-way valve needs
cleaning. Look at the air restrictors and make sure they are open and not
clogged. Clean and/or replace spool assembly in the solenoid when
necessary.
(10) If the probe slows up or stops when entering or retracting from the material
line, the air cylinder seals may need replacing. If the main seal is worn, you
may be able to hear air escaping around it.
Mechanical
(11) If the probe still does not function properly, check the seals for excessive wear
or improper fit. If they need adjustment, see ADJUSTMENTS.
(12) If the sampler properly runs mechanically, but still does not function correctly,
then remove it from the line. Check for obstructions in the tube. Reassemble
and check for operation. If any other problems arise, please contact factory
service.

5.0 Factory Assistance
Sentry Equipment Corp. has been a pioneer in sampling equipment. From single point
sampling to complex multifunction, automated sampling control systems, Sentry has
been at the forefront to assist utilities and industry.
Please do not return any equipment or system components before discussing your
application problem with a Sentry representative and obtaining a return authorization.
The Service Department at Sentry Equipment or your Sentry representative is available
for your assistance.
For other sampling applications, your Sentry representative or Sentry Equipment Corp.
is eager to help you. Please feel free to call your representative or the number below to
discuss our application.

PO Box 127
Phone: 262.567.7256
Fax: 262.567.4523
E-mail: sales@sentry-equip.com

6.0 Standard Warranty
Warranty
Seller warrants products manufactured by it and supplied hereunder to be free from defects in
materials and workmanship for a period of eighteen months from date of shipment or twelve
months from start up (which ever occurs first). If within such period any such products shall be
proved to Seller’s satisfaction to be defective, such products shall be repaired or replaced at
Seller’s option. Seller’s obligation and Buyer’s exclusive remedy hereunder shall be limited to
such repair and replacement and shall be conditioned upon Seller’s receiving written notice of
any alleged defect within 10 days after its discovery and, at Seller’s option, return of such
product to Seller, ex-works Sentry’s factory.
The foregoing warranties are exclusive and in lieu of all other express and implied warranties
except in title, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for
purpose. Seller shall not be subject to any other obligations or liabilities whatsoever with respect
to products manufactured or furnished by it, or any undertakings, acts or omissions relating
thereto.
Warranty Conditions & Limitations

This Warranty shall not apply to any Sentry product which, in the opinion of Sentry Equipment
Corp, has been (a) altered or repaired in a manner affecting the efficiency of performance of the
unit or (b) incorrectly installed or operated or (c) damaged in shipment or (d) damaged by flood
or fire or (e) if the serial number is missing, altered or defaced.
Any materials proposed to be used by Sentry Equipment Corp. (“Seller”) are based on
published reference literature and/or customer recommendations, and customer assumes sole
responsibility for the selection of such materials. Any references are based on third-party
studies, and may not correlate directly with the end user's intended usage or process (i.e.
chemical composition, concentrations, temperatures, etc.).
EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN, SELLER HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS (EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, ORAL OR WRITTEN), INCLUDING ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE WHETHER OR NOT SELLER
KNOWS, OR HAS REASON TO KNOW, HAS BEEN ADVISED, OR IS OTHERWISE IN FACT
AWARE OF ANY SUCH PURPOSE, WHETHER ALLEGED TO ARISE BY LAW, BY REASON
OF CUSTOM OR USAGE IN THE TRADE, OR BY COURSE OF DEALING OR
PERFORMANCE. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Seller makes no warranty
regarding ability of products sold hereunder to withstand erosion or corrosion, or regarding
material compatibility of elastomers in specific services, and no warranty made hereunder shall
apply to products which have been subjected to adverse storage
The owner shall be responsible for maintenance of his equipment. Wear or damage caused by
lack of normal maintenance or by misuse of the equipment shall not be considered as defective
workmanship and material.
Sentry reserves the right to make product design changes or improvements without notice and
without imposing any obligation upon itself to install these changes or improvements on its
products previously manufactured.
This warranty is for the sole benefit of the original purchaser and is not transferable unless
agreed to in writing by Sentry Equipment Corp.

Receiving Shipments (including loss or damage by transportation)

It is the customer’s responsibility to check for missing cartons and sign of damage to cartons. If
found, customer should note missing and/or damaged cartons on the delivery receipt and have
delivery receipt signed by the representative of the transportation company. If unpacking
discloses concealed damage from rough handling, the customer should request a concealed
damage inspection from the transportation company.
The Sentry Customer Service Department will aid your organization in any claim proceeding for
shortages or damages in shipment, but it is the receiver’s responsibility to file claim with the
carrier for damage or loss.
Customer Actions For Claims on Products During the Warranty Period
1. Contact the Customer Service Department, Sentry Equipment Corp., Oconomowoc,

WI, Telephone: 262-567-7256, to obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA)
number.
2. You will be sent an “RMA” and a “Decontamination Statement” that is required to be
filled out and returned with the equipment.
3. The following information must appear on the outside of the package:
a. RMA number marked on outside of box.
b. Decontamination Statement filled out and attached to outside of box.
4. Return defective equipment FREIGHT PREPAID. Collect shipments will be refused.
5. The factory will not process warranty claims until the customer has properly
accomplished the above items.
6. The Sentry factory may accept the entire claim, a part of the claim or none of the
claim if our inspection of returned parts proves the failure was for reasons other than
defective material or factory workmanship.
Important Notes:
1. Sentry will not be responsible for damage incurred during the return shipment.
2. All returns subject to inspection and a minimum $100.00 evaluation fee.
3. This RMA is not authorization for credit. Credits and/or replacements will be issued
upon evaluation of returned goods.
4. RMA is valid for thirty (30) days from issue date.

TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Handling, Preservation & Storage Procedure, Bulk System G1280-Z-KA-002A 0
Handling, Preservation & Storage Procedure, Bulk System Valves G1280-Z-KA-002B 0
www.nov.com
Handling, Preservation &
Storage Procedure
Bulk System

loaned.
G1280-Z-KA-002A 0
Document number G1280-Z-KA-002A
Revision 0
Page 2 of 23
REVISION HISTORY

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
Revision 0
Page 3 of 23
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Purpose................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 General ................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Safety ...................................................................................................................... 4
2 LIFTING AND HANDLING ................................................................................................ 5
2.1 General ................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Surge Tank ............................................................................................................. 6
2.3 Bulk Tank ................................................................................................................ 7
2.4 Dust Collector and Cyclone................................................................................... 11
2.5 Rock Catcher ........................................................................................................ 12
2.6 Sampling Unit........................................................................................................ 13
2.7 Valves ................................................................................................................... 13
2.8 Load Cells ............................................................................................................. 14
2.9 Accessories........................................................................................................... 14
3 PRESERVATION ............................................................................................................ 15
3.1 Factory preservation ............................................................................................. 15
3.1.1 Main equipment ......................................................................................... 15
3.1.2 Accessories ............................................................................................... 15
3.2 Site preservation ................................................................................................... 16
3.2.1 Inspection of preservation on receipt ......................................................... 16
3.2.2 Installation and commissioning period ....................................................... 16
3.2.3 Short time preservation during operation ................................................... 16
3.2.4 Long time preservation during operation ................................................... 16
4 PACKING ........................................................................................................................ 17
4.1 Packing method .................................................................................................... 17
4.2 Wood Requirements ............................................................................................. 18
5 STORAGE ....................................................................................................................... 19
5.1 Inspection of received equipment ......................................................................... 19
5.2 General ................................................................................................................. 19
6 PRESERVATION CHECK RECORD MECHANICAL AND
ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT .................................................................................................... 20
7 PRESERVATION LABEL ............................................................................................... 23
Revision 0
Page 4 of 23
INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to ensure that the quality of the equipment is
maintained through the phases from completed production at supplier to completed
commissioning at the client.
This includes preservation, packing, handling and storage of the equipment until
received and taken over by the client.
It is an information base for all personnel involved in these processes to reduce any
decrease in the functional or aesthetic value of the equipment to a minimum.
1.2 General
A copy of this procedure will be attached to the equipment during transport ensuring
availability at receipt of the equipment. The initial preservation is performed shortly after
FAT and before transport.
A copy of the preservation records with initial preservation date shall be attached to the
equipment at the start of the preservation period. The updated log file is kept by the
preservation responsible.
NOTE: This procedure cover the complete NOV product range of dry bulk related
products. Thus there might be information in this document which is not relevant
for the actual scope of supply.
1.3 Safety
Only certified/authorized personnel trained for lifting and handling of the equipment are
allowed to take part of the lifting operation. All other personnel shall be kept at a safe
distance. Only certified lifting gear should be utilized.
To avoid injuring incidents to personnel and damage to the equipment, the lifting
procedure described shall be adhered to.
Initial preservation, re-preservation and de-preservation may involve usage of solvents

that may be harmful to humans. These solvents are only harmful if personnel are
exposed to them for extended periods. Personnel performing preservation should be
wearing required protection equipment.
Revision 0
Page 5 of 23
2 LIFTING AND HANDLING
2.1 General
Only dedicated pad eyes and lugs shall be utilized for lifting and strapping purposes.
Pad eyes and lugs marked and dedicated for lifting shall not be used for transport
strapping
Pad eyes and lugs marked and dedicated for sea fastening shall not be used for
lifting
Use soft slings to avoid damage to surface treatment.

Great attention should be paid to avoid any hazards while handling the equipment.
Only certified/authorized personnel must participate in lifting activities.
Only certified lifting slings should be utilized for lifting purposes.
All cranes used for lifting needs to be certified to handle the whole weight of the
equipment.
Nozzles should under no circumstances be utilized for lifting or strapping purposes.
Pay attention to the risk of lifting gear snapping and damaging nozzles.
Pay attention to avoid damaging appurtenant/attached instruments, valves, pipes,
tubes etc.
When lowering the equipment to the ground, ensure that the wooden planks are put
under the interface surfaces.
All equipment should be packed to endure the loads that may occur during transport.
For information regarding equipment weight, please see project-specific GA drawings.

Revision 0
Page 6 of 23
2.2 Surge Tank
When lifting or handling a Surge Tank;
Use shackles in all three lifting lugs on top of the tank and soft slings around the tank
neck when lifting a horizontal tank.
Use two cranes for turning the tank. Use shackles in all three lifting lugs on top of the
tank for crane A and soft slings around the tank neck for crane B.
Use shackles in all three lifting lugs on top of the tank when lifting a vertical tank. Max.
30 degrees vertical angle on the slings.
Pay attention to avoid damage to piping or installed accessories (instruments, valves
etc.).
Use wooden foundation for protection if the tank is resting on the bottom flange or the
tank pads.
Do not carry out any work on the tank before it is secured from tilting.
Horizontal lifting
Vertical lifting
Revision 0
Page 7 of 23
2.3 Bulk Tank
Use shackles in all three lifting lugs on top of tank, and on bottom lifting lug when lifting
horizontal tank. If only one crane is utilized the maximum vertical angle of all slings are
30 degrees.
Revision 0
Page 8 of 23
Use two cranes for turning the tank. Use shackles in all three lifting lugs on top of tank
for crane A. All three slings on tank top head must be same length. Maximum 45 degree
angle between the two lower slings. Use shackles in bottom lifting lug for crane B.
Revision 0
Page 9 of 23
Use shackles in three lifting lugs on top of tank when lifting vertical tank. Max. 30
degrees vertical angle on slings.
Revision 0
Page 10 of 23
Pay attention to avoid damage to piping or installed accessories (instruments, load cells
etc.)
Use wooden foundation for protection if the tank is resting on the load cell mounting
surface
Do not carry out any work on tank before it is secured from tilting
Revision 0
Page 11 of 23
Use shackles in all three lifting lugs on top of the collector tank. Max. 30 degrees
vertical angle on the slings. Alternatively, use a forklift if the collector is strapped to a
pallet.
Use shackles in both lifting lugs on top of the cyclone. Max. 30 degrees vertical angle
on the slings. Secure the cyclone support to the cyclone to prevent it from falling off if
they are lifted together. Alternatively, use a forklift if the cyclone is strapped to a pallet.
Pay attention to avoid damage to piping or installed accessories (instruments, valves
etc.).
Do not carry out any work on the equipment before it is secured from tilting.
Never lift the Cyclone by its lifting lug while it is installed on a Dust Collector Tank.
Dust Collector Tank Cyclone w/ support

Revision 0
Page 12 of 23
2.5 Rock Catcher
Use soft slings around the body. Alternatively, use a forklift if it is strapped to a pallet.
Pay Attention to nozzles and flanges.
Revision 0
Page 13 of 23
2.6 Sampling Unit
Use soft slings around the body. Alternatively, use a forklift if it is strapped to a pallet.
Pay Attention to nozzles and flanges.
Pay attention to avoid bending the actuator and the actuator pipe.
Pay attention to vulnerable items on the air control panel, such as pressure gauge,
solenoid, filter regulator and air piping
2.7 Valves
Use soft slings in the lifting lugs. Alternatively, use a forklift if it is strapped to a pallet.
Pay attention to vulnerable items such as actuator, positioner/ switch box, solenoid and
air tube.
Do not use air tubes for lifting or handling.
Butterfly valve
Revision 0
Page 14 of 23
2.8 Load Cells
Use soft slings around the brackets or in the bolt holes. Alternatively, use a forklift if it is
strapped to a pallet.
Pay attention to avoid shock on the load cell
Do not use the electric cable for lifting or handling.
2.9 Accessories
All accessories such as pressure safety valves, pressure gauges, instruments,
and flexible bellows should be handled in their original boxes with a forklift as
long as possible.
Pay attention to vulnerable items such as electrical components, nozzles and
flanges etc.
Revision 0
Page 15 of 23
3 PRESERVATION
3.1 Factory preservation
Before shipment, the supplier is required to fill out and sign the preservation
record sheet.
A preservation log label is to be attached to the equipment, signed by the
3.1.1 Main equipment
All equipment to be cleaned and dried out thoroughly both internally and
externally after completed inspection and testing.
Touch up of painting shall be performed if necessary.
All nozzles must be blinded with blind flanges, plugs or plates of water resistant
plywood. Water resistant tape wrapped around the nozzle circumference shall be
used as extra precaution to avoid ingress of moisture.
All nozzles shall be protected from mechanical damage by necessary means.
All flange surfaces or exposed carbon steel shall be covered with tectyl 506.
Internal piping where priming is not specified or possible should be sprayed with
oil film.
Special attention should be paid to avoid moisture in the fluidization
fabric/canvas, if applicable.
3.1.2 Accessories
All accessories as e.g. valves, instrumentation and junction boxes will be preserved
according to factory specification. If the preserved electrical equipment has been
exposed to open air, a re-preservation is necessary immediately. If not, a re-
preservation of electrical equipment is not necessary before 24 months after the
preservation date.
Revision 0
Page 16 of 23
3.2 Site preservation
3.2.1 Inspection of preservation on receipt

All equipment is initially preserved from the supplier. Upon receipt the condition of the
preservation shall be checked. If necessary, a re-preservation shall be performed.
3.2.2 Installation and commissioning period
It is recommended to keep the preservation intact as long as possible during the

installation and commissioning period. The de-preservation schedule should be
evaluated in connection with the installation and commissioning activities.
3.2.3 Short time preservation during operation

For stop in operation up to 6 - 12 months, no preservation is needed if normal
maintenance is performed.
3.2.4 Long time preservation during operation

For stop in operation that exceeds 6 - 12 months or longer periods without carrying out
normal maintenance, the equipment should be preserved according to requirements’ in
this chapter.
Revision 0
Page 17 of 23
4 PACKING
After completed packing, the supplier shall submit a complete packing list to NOV with
the following information;
Gross weight and dimension of all packages

Unit weight of all components packed and reference to which package the
component is included
Country of origin for all equipment
A component is a separate part in a package without any mechanical connection to any

other equipment (welded, bolted, screwed etc.) in the same package. Components that
are strapped together must be considered as separate components in the packing list
4.1 Packing method
The bulk tanks shall be packed in horizontal position in a wooden cradle. The cradle
shall have sufficient strength to hold the weight of the tank. Sufficient strapping to hold
the tank in position shall be utilized. Neither cradle nor strapping must be in such
manner that it can cause damage to the surface treatment (painting etc.) during the
transportation.
The surge tank can be packed horizontal in a wooden cradle or strapped in vertical
position to a pallet. Cradle, pallet or strapping must not be in such manner that it can
cause damage to the surface treatment (painting etc.) during the transportation.
The dust collector tanks shall be strapped in vertical position to a pallet, separate from
the cyclone and support. Neither pallet nor strapping must be in such manner that it can
cause damage to the surface treatment (painting etc.) during the transportation.
The cyclone and support shall be strapped in vertical position to a pallet, separate from
the Dust Collector Tank. Neither pallet nor strapping must be in such manner that it can
cause damage to the surface treatment (painting etc.) during the transportation
The rock catcher, Y pipe spools, sampling unit, valves, load cell and loading hoses shall
be packed in wooden crates. Equipment shall be firmly secured inside the crate to avoid
any relocation and damage during the transportation
Accessories such at pressure transmitters, high level switches, pressure safety valves,
pressure gauges can be packed in card board boxes. Equipment shall be firmly secured
inside the box to avoid any relocation and damage during the transportation.
All equipment shall be packed for export shipment unless otherwise noted on the
purchase order. All wood used in packing shall comply with requirements below
Revision 0
Page 18 of 23
4.2 Wood Requirements

All wooden pallets and crates used for packing shall conform to the IPPC/ISPM 15
regulation.
The International Plant Protection Convention (IPPC) is a multilateral treaty to

harmonize regulations governing imports that could impact the physical condition of
forests and crops.
ISPM 15:
This section of the IPPC describes phytosanitary measures to reduce the risk of
introduction and/or spread of quarantine pests associated with wood packaging
material, made of coniferous and no coniferous raw wood, in use in international trade.
The pests of particular concern are the pinewood nematode (found in the United States,
Canada, Mexico and Japan where it is not a threat due to the existence of natural
predators) and the Asian Long-Horned Beetle (which is found in China and several
other locations and is a threat to United States forests).
Why:
The goal of the IPPC is to protect crops and forests by eliminating the importation of
foreign pests without impeding international commerce.
Wood packaging material should be heated in a schedule that achieves a minimum core
temperature of 56ºC for a minimum of 30 minutes.
The wood should be supplied with a certificate stating the above.
NOTE: ISPM 15 requirements apply to all species of coniferous (softwood) and non-
coniferous (hardwood) packaging materials.
Revision 0
Page 19 of 23
5 STORAGE
5.1 Inspection of received equipment

All equipment shall on receipt be inspected for any sign of damage. Any damages must
immediately be reported to National Oilwell Varco Norway AS by the consignee
organization. The report must state the extent of the damage. If in doubt of the damage
seriousness, please call for supplier’s assistance.
The consignee organisation shall be solely responsible for the care and treatment of the
equipment during off-loading, handling and storage period. The consignee organisation
shall furthermore ensure a standard of care for the equipment, which shall be no less
than detailed in this procedure.
5.2 General
All mechanical equipment should preferably be stored under roof. The storage humidity
should be less than 90% relative and storage temperatures between -10 /+50 degree
Celsius.
All accessories such as electrical cabinets, junction boxes, instruments and valves shall
be stored indoors in heated and humidity-controlled environment less than 50% relative.
All equipment shall as long as possible be stored in their original packaging and in
accordance with belonging documentation.
A monthly check of all equipment preservation as a minimum is required.
All equipment shall by suitable means be protected from weld- and grinding spatter and
other activities that can damage the function or the visual finish of the equipment.
Revision 0
Page 20 of 23
6 PRESERVATION CHECK RECORD MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT

Revision 0
Page 21 of 23
PRESERVATION SPECIFICATION & RECORD – MECHANICAL

Record No.: Tag No.: Description:
Date/Sign Date/Sign Date/Sign Date/Sign

Activity Intervals Initial
Description of Preservation Activity Preservative Preserved Preserved Preserved Preserved
No.: (Months) Preservation
(2) (3) (4) (5)
All unpainted steel surface and flanges coated with
1 3
preservatives
Open-end nozzles plugged or capped properly. Nozzle
2 3
face coated with preservatives
All loose items/removed parts preserved, stored and
3 3
marked
4 3 All painting undamaged. Unless do repair painting
5 3 All Man way bolts greased
6 - Inside tank is dried out before closing man way hatch

Inspect tank inside for corrosion and moisture – if so,
7 3
dry up and repair, ensure tight sealing of all nozzles
8 3 Carbon steel pipe nozzles internally preserved
Comments:
Specified requirements HL/A-4A

Performed by: Accepted by:
and
Date/Sign: ________________________________ Date/Sign: ________________________________
Norsok Standard Z-006
Revision 0
Page 22 of 23
PRESERVATION SPECIFICATION & RECORD – ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT


(2) (3) (4) (5)
All sensitive instruments exposed to damage are
1 2
protected
All cabinets, panels and JB boxes exposed to humidity
2 3 protected with desiccant. Replace desiccant if
necessary
Inspect internals for corrosion and moisture – If so, dry
3 2
up and repair, add desiccant and ensure tight sealing
All spare cable entrances in panels and boxes plugged.
4 3 If not vertical installed with drain plug down – seal drain
plug
Open nipples and glands in panels and junction boxes
5 3
to be sealed off
All non-terminated cable ends fitted with shrinking
6 3
shroud
7 3 Check for physical damages to cable trays etc.
Gasket in panels or junction box doors to be protected
8 5
with preservatives, if stored outdoors
Comments:

and
7 PRESERVATION LABEL
Handling, Preservation &
Storage Procedure
Bulk System Valves

loaned.
G1280-Z-KA-002B 0
www.nov.com
Document number G1280-Z-KA-002B
Revision 0
Page 2 of 15
REVISION HISTORY

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 3 of 15
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Purpose................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 General ................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Safety ...................................................................................................................... 4
1.4 Inspection................................................................................................................ 4
2 LIFTING AND HANDLING ................................................................................................ 5
2.1 General ................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Butterfly valves ........................................................................................................ 6
2.3 Larox valves ............................................................................................................ 7
2.4 Ball valves ............................................................................................................... 8
2.5 Knife Gate valves .................................................................................................... 9
3 PRESERVATION ............................................................................................................ 10
3.1 Factory preservation ............................................................................................. 10
3.1.1 Main equipment ......................................................................................... 10
3.2 Site preservation ................................................................................................... 10
3.2.1 Inspection of preservation on receipt ......................................................... 10
3.2.2 Short time preservation .............................................................................. 10
3.2.3 Long time preservation .............................................................................. 10
4 PACKING ........................................................................................................................ 11
4.1 Wood Requirements ............................................................................................. 11
5 STORAGE ....................................................................................................................... 12
5.1 Receipt of equipment ............................................................................................ 12
5.2 General ................................................................................................................. 12
5.3 Installation period .................................................................................................. 12
6 DEPRESERVATION ....................................................................................................... 12
7 PRESERVATION CHECK RECORD MECHANICAL AND
ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT .................................................................................................... 12
8 PRESERVATION LABEL ............................................................................................... 15
www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 4 of 15
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to establish an information base applicable for the
delivery and storage phases of the equipment. These phases involve handling, storage
and preservation of the equipment.
NOTE: There might be some information in this document which is not in the
scope of supply.
1.2 General
A copy of this procedure will be attached to the equipment during transport ensuring
availability at receipt of the equipment. The initial preservation is performed shortly after
FAT and before transport.
A copy of the preservation records with initial preservation date shall be attached to the
equipment at the start of the preservation period. The updated log file is kept by the
1.3 Safety
This procedure describes how to handle the referred equipment and what gear to use
for safe handling. Handling of the equipment involves lifting operations. Only certified
lifting gear shall be used. To avoid injuring incident to personnel and damage to the
equipment, the lifting procedure described shall be adhered to.
Forklift may be used. On equipment suited for handling by forklift, the cases or
framework are marked where to put the forks. Lighter equipment can be forklift handled
provided that the steel framework is not damaged by the forks; i.e. wooden bars or
similar are put between the steel framework and the forks and hoses/piping/instruments
are protected from being clamped. It is important to comply with the above instructions
to avoid any damage to the equipment by forklift handling.
Only personnel trained for handling of heavy equipment are allowed to enter the lifting
operation area. All other personnel shall be kept at a safe distance. If verbal warnings
are not sufficient, the area should be closed off by hazard tape.
Initial preservation, re-preservation and de-preservation may involve usage of solvents

that may be harmful to humans. These solvents are only harmful if personnel are
exposed to them for extended periods. Personnel performing this procedure should be
wearing required protection equipment.
1.4 Inspection
Inspect all delivered items carefully for any sign of damage. Inspect crates containing
instruments for external damage. If external damages of crates or any other information
gives reason for suspecting contents to be damaged, open crate and inspect contained
parts.
If any damage, immediately report to National Oilwell Norway AS. If in doubt of damage
seriousness, please call for supplier’s assistance.
www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 5 of 15
2 LIFTING AND HANDLING
2.1 General
Only pad eyes and lifting lugs shall be utilized for lifting and strapping purposes.
Use soft slings to avoid damage to surface treatment.
Great attention should be paid to avoid any hazards while handling the equipment.
Only certified/authorized personnel must participate in lifting activities.
Only certified lifting slings should be utilized for lifting purposes.
All cranes used for lifting needs to be certified to take the whole weight of the
equipment.
The vertical angle for the lifting sling shall be max 30 degrees.
Pay attention to avoid damaging appurtenant/attached instruments
When lowering the equipment to the ground, ensure that wooden planks are put
under the equipment.
All equipment should be packed to endure the loads that may occur during transport.
For information regarding equipment weight, please see project-specific Valve Index.
www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 6 of 15
2.2 Butterfly valves
Use soft slings in the lifting lugs. Alternatively, use forklift if strapped to a pallet.
air tube.
www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 7 of 15
2.3 Larox valves
Use soft slings in the lifting lugs. Alternatively, use forklift if strapped to a pallet.
air tube.
www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 8 of 15
2.4 Ball valves
Use soft slings for lifting. Alternatively, use forklift if strapped to a pallet.
Pay attention to vulnerable items such as actuator, positioner/ switchbox, solenoid and
air tube.
www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 9 of 15
2.5 Knife Gate valves
Use soft slings for lifting. Alternatively, use forklift if strapped to a pallet.
Pay attention to vulnerable items such as actuator, positioner/ switchbox, solenoid and
air tube.
www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 10 of 15
3 PRESERVATION
3.1 Factory preservation
Before shipment, the supplier is required to fill out and sign the preservation
record sheet.
A preservation log label is to be attached to equipment, signed by the
3.1.1 Main equipment
All equipment to be cleaned and dried out thoroughly both internally and
externally after completing inspection and testing.
Touch up of painting shall be performed if necessary.
All flange surfaces or exposed carbon steel shall be covered with tectyl 506.
If the preserved electrical equipment has been exposed to open air, a re-
preservation is necessary immediately. If not, a re-preservation of electrical
equipment is not necessary before 24 months after the preservation date.
3.2 Site preservation
3.2.1 Inspection of preservation on receipt

All equipment is initially preserved from the supplier. Upon receipt and before storage in
the next phase, the condition of the preservation shall be checked. If necessary, a re-
preservation of badly preserved areas shall be performed. Use the check records as a
guide. The correct preserving agent is also listed on the check records.
3.2.2 Short time preservation

For stop in operation up to 6 - 12 months, no preservation is needed if normal
maintenance is performed.
3.2.3 Long time preservation

For stop in operation that exceeds 6 - 12 months or longer periods without carrying out
normal maintenance, equipment has to be preserved according to section 3.1.
www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 11 of 15
4 PACKING
4.1 Wood Requirements

All wooden pallets and crates used for packing shall conform to the IPPC/ISPM 15
regulation
The International Plant Protection Convention (IPPC) is a multilateral treaty to

harmonize regulations governing imports that could impact the physical condition of
forests and crops.
ISPM 15:
This section of the IPPC describes phytosanitary measures to reduce the risk of
introduction and/or spread of quarantine pests associated with wood packaging
material, made of coniferous and no coniferous raw wood, in use in international trade.
The pests of particular concern are the pinewood nematode (found in the United States,
Canada, Mexico and Japan where it is not a threat due to the existence of natural
predators) and the Asian Long-Horned Beetle (which is found in China and several
other locations and is a threat to United States forests).
Why:
The goal of the IPPC is to protect crops and forests by eliminating the importation of
foreign pests without impeding international commerce.
Wood packaging material should be heated in a schedule that achieves a minimum core
temperature of 56ºC for a minimum of 30 minutes.
The wood should be supplied with a certificate stating the above.
NOTE: ISPM 15 requirements apply to all species of coniferous (softwood) and non-
coniferous (hardwood) packaging materials
www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 12 of 15
5 STORAGE
5.1 Receipt of equipment

Upon receipt of the equipment, it shall be checked for transport damage. If transport
damage is discovered, the consignee organisation shall send a report back to the
supplier detailing the extent of the damage within seven working days.
The consignee organisation shall be solely responsible for the care and treatment of the
equipment during off-loading, handling and storage period. The consignee organisation
shall furthermore ensure a standard of care for the equipment, which shall be no less
than detailed in this procedure.
5.2 General
All valves and instruments shall be stored indoors in heated and humidity-controlled
environment less than 50% relative and storage temperatures between -10 /+50 degree
Celsius.
All equipment shall as long as possible be stored in their original packaging and in
accordance with belonging documentation.
A monthly check of all equipment preservation as a minimum is required.
All equipment shall by suitable means be protected from weld- and grinding spatter and
other activities that can damage the function or the visual finish of the equipment.
5.3 Installation period

The care keeping of the equipment shall continue during installation and after
installation onboard. All the above outlined rules for the storage period shall be
governing for the installation period.
6 DEPRESERVATION
De-preservation must be done prior to commissioning start-up. The commissioning
activities comprise of preoperational checking, functional activities and operational
activities.
The preoperational checking and functional activities must be performed in the same
phase, but the operational activities may be performed in a later phase than the
functional activities depending on installation completion. If commissioning is performed
during multiple phases, the equipment shall be preserved when functional activities are
completed. Subsequently, de-preservation must be performed prior to commissioning
operational activities. Normally, handover to operation or client is accomplished shortly
after commissioning completion. Preservation is normally not repeated in this phase.
7 PRESERVATION CHECK RECORD MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL/INSTRUMENT

www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 13 of 15
PRESERVATION SPECIFICATION & RECORD – MECHANICAL


(2) (3) (4) (5)
All unpainted steel surface and flanges coated with
1 3
preservatives
Open-end nozzles plugged or capped properly. Nozzle
2 3
face coated with preservatives
All loose items/removed parts preserved, stored and
3 3
marked
4 3 All painting undamaged. Unless do repair painting
Comments:

and
www.nov.com
Revision 0
Page 14 of 15
PRESERVATION SPECIFICATION & RECORD – ELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT


(2) (3) (4) (5)
All sensitive instruments exposed to damage are
1 2
protected
All cabinets, panels and JB boxes exposed to humidity
2 3 protected with desiccant. Replace desiccant if
necessary
Inspect internals for corrosion and moisture – If so, dry
3 2
up and repair, add desiccant and ensure tight sealings
Open nipples and glands in panels and junction boxes
4 3
to be sealed off
Gasket in panels or junction box doors to be protected
5 5
with preservatives, if stored outdoors
Comments:

and
www.nov.com
8 PRESERVATION LABEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section
6 Spare Parts List

Spare Parts List (Recommended 2 Years Operation), Bulk System G1280-Z-MC-001 0
www.nov.com
Spare Parts List
(Recommended 2 Years
Operation)
Bulk System

loaned.
G1280-Z-MC-001 0
Document number G1280-Z-MC-001
Revision 0
Page 3
EXPLANATIONS
The sections below describe the three different categories of recommended spare parts
used in the spare parts list.
Commissioning spare
If it is presumed that this equipment has to be replaced once or several times during or
after commissioning it’s indicated in this column.
Operational spare
If it is presumed that this equipment has to be replaced once or several times during the
first two years of operation it’s indicated in this column.
Insurance spare
If it is recommended that the client have this equipment available on Rig/Plant due to
criticality in case of failure, it’s indicated in this column.
Document number: G1280-Z-MC-001
Revision: 0
Page: 4
Name of main Tag no. of main No. of del. Drawing no. Pos. no. Tag. no of Spare parts description NOV Item no. No. incl. in Opr. spare Com. Ins. spare Del. time Price each
equipment equipment units equipment each unit spare weeks unit
M01 NA Gasket for 24" manway 214252 1 1 1 0 2 On request

M02 NA Gasket for 2" flanges 154742 3 4 0 0 2 On request
H02 NA Canvas rectangular section (735x330) 198184 3 0 0 3 6 On request
WE006A/B/C
E01 Load Cell 10 ton (without brackets) 177670 3 0 1 1 8 On request
DP40 3D21501A G1280-DP40-A0001 WE005A/B/C
2 Incl in PSV016 PSV Kunkle, set point 80 psi (without flanges and
Surge Tank 3D21501B G1280-DP40-A0002 156286 1 0 0 1 8 On request
H01 PSV013 fittings)
LSH006
E02 High Level Switch 480 mm (without flange) 157279 1 0 0 1 4 On request
LSH005
PIT017
E03 Pressure Transmitter, EEx ia (without flange) 192895 1 0 1 1 4 On request
PIT014
www.nov.com
G1280-Z-MC-001
Revision: 0
Page: 5
Name of main Tag no. of main No. of del. Drawing no. Pos. no. Tag. no of Spare parts description NOV Item no. No. incl. in Opr. spare Com. Ins. Del. time Price each
equipment equipment units equipment each unit spare spare weeks unit
M01 NA Gasket for 24" manway 214252 1 1 1 2 On request

WE105A/B/C
E03 Load Cell 50 ton (without brackets) 209720 3 0 1 1 8 On request
DP45 WE106A/B/C
3D21402A G1280-DP45-A0004
Day Tank 2 PSV113
3D21402B G1280-DP45-A0007 Incl in H01 PSV Kunkle, set point 80 psi (without flanges and fittings) 156286 1 0 0 1 8 On request
40m3 PSV116
LSH105
E02 High Level Switch 480 mm (without flange) 157279 1 0 0 1 4 On request
LSH106
PIT114
E01 Pressure Transmitter (without flange) 169521 1 0 0 1 4 On request
PIT117
www.nov.com
Revision: 0
Page: 6
Name of main Tag no. of main No. of del. Drawing no. Pos. no. Tag. no of equipment Spare parts description NOV Item no. No. incl. in Opr. spare Com. Ins. spare Del. time Price each
equipment equipment units each unit spare weeks unit

WE101A/B/C/D
WE102A/B/C/D
WE103A/B/C/D
WE104A/B/C/D
E01 Load Cell 100 ton, EEx nA (without brackets) 170006 4 0 1 3 8 On request
WE001A/B/C/D
WE002A/B/C/D
WE003A/B/C/D
WE004A/B/C/D
DP45 3D21401A/B/C/D PSV101
Bulk Tank 32D21301A/B/C 8 G1280-DP45-A0013 PSV104
113m3 3D21302 Incl in H01 PSV107 PSV Kunkle, set point 80 psi (without flanges and fittings) 156286 1 0 0 1 8 On request
PSV110
PSV001/002/003/004
LSH101
LSH102
E02 LSH103 High Level Switch 1260 mm (without flange) 157479 1 0 0 1 4 On request
LSH104
LSH001/002/003/004
PIT102
PIT105
E03 PIT108 Pressure Transmitter, EEx ia (without flange) 192895 1 0 1 1 4 On request
PIT111
PIT002/005/008/011
www.nov.com
Revision: 0
Page: 7
Name of main Tag no. of main No. of del. Tag. no of NOV Item No. incl. in each Comm. Insur. Del. time
Drawing no. Pos. no. Spare parts description Oper. spare Price each unit
equipment equipment units equipment no. unit spare spare weeks
4 NA PKG Ring Press Teflon 1-1/2" (set of 11 ea) 169910 11 1 set (11 ea) 0 0 2 On request
3 NA PKG Ring Male Teflon 1-1/2" (set of 3 ea) 169911 3 1 set (3 ea) 0 0 2 On request
7-03204D 5 NA PKG Ring female teflon 1-1/2" (set of 3 ea) 169912 3 1 set (3 ea) 0 0 2 On request
16 NA Tube, Sample, L to R flow path, w/QPQ 169913 1 1 0 0 4 On request
15 NA Cylinder, Air 4"bx4" stroke 169926 1 1 0 0 4 On request
3D21203A NA NA Sample bottle bracket w/ hose nozzle 208967 2 0 0 0 3 On request
Sampling Unit 2
3D21202 NA NA Sample bottle w/ cap 208968 2 0 0 0 3 On request
NA NA Sample hose 208969 1 0 0 0 3 On request
G1280-DP44-G0001 NA NA Lever valve 209021 1 0 0 0 5 On request
NA NA Exhaust control muffler for lever valve 209024 2 0 0 0 5 On request
NA NA Filter regulator w/gauge 209022 1 0 0 0 5 On request
NA NA Pressure gauge (gauge only) 209023 - 0 0 0 5 On request
Revision: 0
Page: 8
Name of main Tag no. of main No. of del. Drawing no. Pos. no. Tag. no of Spare parts description NOV Item no. No. incl. in Opr. spare Com. Ins. spare Del. time Price each
equipment equipment units equipment each unit spare weeks unit

Incl in H01 PSV019/022/122 PSV Kunkle, set point 80 psi (without flanges and fittings) 156286 1 0 0 1 8 On request
E01 LSH007/008/108 High Level Switch 480 mm, EEx ia (without flange) 192874 1 0 1 1 8 On request
E02 PIT020/023/123 Pressure Transmitter, EEx ia (without flange) 192895 1 0 1 1 8 On request
H02 NA Knife gate valve 5" Assy on/off EEXME 216314 0 0 0 0 8 On request
Collector valve, Packing 216257 1 1 0 0 2 On request
DP46 Collector valve, Seat NBR 216255 1 1 0 0 2 On request
Dust collector & 3D21901/902/903 3 G1280-DP46-A0001 Collector valve, Seat Ring 216256 1 1 0 0 2 On request
Cyclone Collector valve, Gate 216258 1 0 0 1 2 On request
Collector valve, Seal kit incl, Scraper for actuator 216259 1 1 0 0 2 On request
Collector valve, piston for actuator 216260 1 0 0 1 2 On request
Incl. in H02 NA
Collector valve, guide bush for actuator 216261 1 0 0 1 2 On request
Collector valve, Air hose 500mm incl. Couplings 216262 1 0 0 1 2 On request
Collector valve, Air hose 285mm incl. Couplings 216263 2 0 0 1 2 On request
Collector valve, Position Monitor (Eexme) 216295 1 0 0 1 4 On request
Collector valve, Solenoid valve Falcon II S316 216296 1 1 0 0 4 On request
Collector valve, Air Silencer 156420 2 2 0 0 2 On request
www.nov.com
Revision: 0
Page: 9
No. Of del. units Drawing no. Pos. Tag. No Spare Parts Description NOV Item No. No. incl. in Each Opr. Com. Ins. Del. Time Weeks Price Each
Name of Equipment
Unit Spare Spare Spare Unit
DP47
3D21201A/B
4 1 1 0 0 4 On request
Rock Catcher 4 G1280-DP47-A0001 Cement
3D21204A/B 8" VICTAULIC FLEXIBLE COUPLING 75 (incl gasket) 205361
incl. In 04 Barite/Bentonite VICTAULIC GASKET 8" (NBR) 179339 1 1 0 0 2 On request
www.nov.com
Revision: 0
Page: 10
BULK VALVES & INSTRUMENTATION

No. Of del. Drawing no. Pos. Tag. No Spare Parts Description NOV Item No. incl. in Each Oper. Comm. Insur. Del. Time Price Each
Name of Equipment
units No. Unit Spare Spare Spare Weeks Unit
BUTTERFLY VALVE 5" COMPLETE ASSEMBLY 216300 0 0 1 8 On request

BUTTERFLY VALVE 5" F14, GG40 216391 1 3 0 0 4 On request
Butterfly Valve 5" SEAT NBR F/B'FLY VALVE 5" F14 101124 1 6 3 0 2 On request
Double acting actuator Ref. Valve index Ref. project specific Ref. Valve index ACTUATOR, PNEUM. DBL ACTING F79E-012 96529 1 3 0 0 2 On request
68
ZR+ position monitor G1280-L-LA-005 P&ID's G1280-L-LA-005 SPARES KIT F/ACTUATOR F79E-012 101173 KIT 6 1 0 2 On request
Spring return solenoid valve POSITION CONTROL MONITOR ZR+ EEXME 216295 1 3 0 0 4 On request
SOLENOID VALVE FALCON II SS316 216296 1 6 1 0 4 On request
AIR SILENCER 1/4" BSP SST 156420 2 14 4 0 2 On request
Spring return actuator Ref. Valve index Ref. project specific Ref. Valve index ACTUATOR PNEUM. SGL. ACT. 79E024S 156426 1 1 0 0 2 On request
10
3
12
Ball Valve 2" F190 SS316 97538 1 0 1 8 On request
Ball Valve 2" BALL VALVE 2" F190 SS316 ANSI 150 97533 1 1 0 0 4 On request
Ref. Valve index Ref. project specific Ref. Valve index ACTUATOR, PNEUM. SA PREMIAIR-014 156428 1 1 0 0 2 On request
Spring return actuator 6
G1280-L-LA-005 P&ID's G1280-L-LA-005 POSITIONER SMARTCAL EEXIA ICT4 IP66 4-20 96561 1 1 0 0 2 On request
Smartcal positioner SPARES KIT F/ACTUATOR SA PREMIAIR-014 209887 KIT 1 1 0 2 On request
SILENCER FOR SMARTCAL 150252 2 1 2 0 2 On request
Document Number: G1280-Z-MC-001
Revision: 0
Page: 11
No. Of del. units Drawing no. Pos. Tag. No Spare Parts Description NOV Item No. incl. in Each Opr. Spare Com. Ins. Del. Time Price Each Unit
Name of Equipment
No. Unit Spare Spare Weeks
Flexible bellow 3" 24 NA NA NA Flexible bellow 3" 101729 NA 4 0 0 2 On request

Flexible bellow 5" 34 NA NA NA Flexible bellow 5" 148442 NA 5 0 0 2 On request
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title

Section
7 Drawings & Parts Lists

7.2 Block Diagram
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

General Arrangement Drawing, Surge tank Barite 8,5m3 G1280-DP40-G0001 0
Seadrill West Jupiter
General Arrangement Drawing, Surge tank Bentonite 8,5m3 G1280-DP40-G0002 0
General Arrangement Drawing, Bulk System Valves G1280-DP41-G0001 0
General Arrangement Drawing, Sampling Unit Tag# 3D21203A / 3D21202 G1280-DP44-G0001 0
General Arrangement Drawing, Bulktank Cement 113 m3 incl. Reaction forces G1280-DP45-G0001 0
General Arrangement Drawing, Bulktank Barite/Bentonite 113m3 incl. Reaction G1280-DP45-G0002 0
forces, Seadrill West Jupiter
General Arrangement Drawing, Fastening of bulk tanks to bulkhead G1280-DP45-G0003 0
General Arrangement Drawing, Bulktank Cement daytank 40m3 incl. Reaction G1280-DP45-G0004 0
General Arrangement Drawing, Bulktank Cement daytank 40m3 incl. Reaction G1280-DP45-G0007 0
General Arrangement Drawing, Dust Collector and Cyclone 2m3 for G1280-DP46-G0001 1
Cement/Barite/Bentonite, Seadrill West Jupiter
General Arrangement Drawing, Rock Catcher G1280-DP47-G0001 0
www.nov.com
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
1200 2859
100
315
Note 4
E02 N02
N07 01
N01
N06 E03
H01
Note 3
G G
Center of Gravity N08

Note 1 N05
2492
Bracket for Junction Box
2972
C.O.G. (Dry) = 1665
F F
Z
774
N09
N04
X
03 Note 5
Z
Datum point
Datum point
N03 Note 2
E Y E
E04
Junction Box for load cells
NOTES
1. Name Plate
2. Earthing Boss (x10)
3. Lifting Lugs (x3)
A ( 1 : 5 ) TYPICAL FOOTPRINT 4. Maintenance area
5. Jacking point (for empty tank only)
2269
D D
GENERAL NOTES
200 30
- All connected piping to be equipped with
A flexibles/bellows, NOV supply
30
- All foundation bolts are yard supply
Design Data: - Pads, tank support and cable tray is yard supply
- Access to manway is yard supply
Design Code: ASME VIII div. 1 - The tank must move freely on loadcells
200
Classification society: DNV Drill - Recommended 5D bend on all transfer lines
Datum Point PSV Capacity: 2286 Nm3/h @ 5,5 barg - Recommended 3D bend on all vent lines
PSV set point: 5,5 barg - All flanges to straddle horizontal and vertical axis
Content: Barite 2,16 t/m3
/Bentonite 0,96t/m3
C Design pressure: 5,5 barg C
4 x n25 Max. operating pressure: 5,0 barg
2590
Corr. Allowance: 1,0 mm

Design temp: -10°C to +50°C Tag List
Qty. Pos. Description/Dimension Tag #
Volume, Weight and Size 1 01 Surge Tank 3D21501A
1 03 Manway N/A
Total volume: 8,5 m3
3 E01 Load Cell WE006A/B/C
Operation volume 7,0 m3 Surface Treatment
Dry weight (including frame, approx.): 2 755 kg Outside: 1 E02 Level Switch LSH006
Dry weight (excluding frame, approx.): 1 980 kg NOV spec. HLA-4A System no. 1 1 E03 Pressure Transmitter PIT017
Oper. weight Barite (approx.): 18 000 kg Inside: with Indicator
Oper. weight Bentonite (approx.): 9 500 kg NOV spec. HLA-4A System no. 5 1 E04 Junction Box N/A
B B
1 H01 PSV PSV016
250
Y
Note 4 0 12.04.2012 Issued for Approval OFI SGIN ROEK
Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.
400 NOZZLE TABLE This doc ument contains proprietary and confidential information w hich
800
belongs to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS. It is loaned for lim ited purposes
X NOZZLE SIZE DESIGN FACE DESCRIPTION X Y Z only and rem ains the property of National Oilwell N orway AS.
R eproduc tion, in whole or in part, or use of this des ign or distribution of
N01 5" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Filling line 155 900 3184 this inform ation to others is not perm itted w ithout the expres s written
consent of National Oilw ell N orw ay AS. T his docum ent is to be returned
Note 4 N02 5" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Vent line -155 280 3454 to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS upon request and in any event upon
com pletion of the use for w hich it w as loaned.
Servicebox 401, Lundsiden
N-4604 Kristiansand, Norway
N03 DN600 N/A N/A Discharge 0 0 0 Title:
N04 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Air inlet 586 -448 380 General Arrangement Drawing
N05 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF PSV inlet 0 -350 3082 Surge tank Barite 8,5m3
1000 N06 3" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF PSV outlet 0 -500 3209
N07 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF High level switch -450 0 3082
A Scale: Projection: Size: Main Part: A
Pressure transmitter 1:20 A1
N08 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF 350 0 3082
with indicator Drawing Number: Sheet: Revision:
N09 24" N/A N/A Man way 0 -1403 1904 G1280-DP40-G0001 1/1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H 1200 2859 H
315
Note 4
100
H01
E02 N02
N06
N07
Note 3
N05
G E03 G
2492
N01 N08
Note 1
01
2972
Center of Gravity Bracket for Junction Box
C.O.G. (Dry)= 1666
E04
F F
Z N04
Z
Junction Box
774
N09
X
X
03 Note 5
Datum Point
N03 E01
Datum Point
E E
Note 2
2269
NOTES
A 1. Name plate
2. Earthing boss (x10)
D 3. Lifting Lugs (x3) D
4. Maintenance area
A ( 1 : 5 ) TYPICAL FOOTPRINT 5. Jacking point (for empty tank only)
GENERAL NOTES
Datum Point 200 30
Design Data: - All connected piping to be equipped with
flexibles/bellows, NOV supply
- All foundation bolts are yard supply
30
Design Code: ASME VIII div. 1
Clasification society: DNV Drill - Pads, tank support and cable tray is yard supply
2590
PSV Capacity: 2286Nm3/h@5,5barg - Access to manway is yard supply

PSV set point : 5,5 barg - The tank must move freely on loadcells
- Recommended 5D bend on all transfer lines
200
Content: Barite 2,16 t/m3
C /Bentonite 0,96t/m3 - Recommended 3D bend on all vent lines C
Design pressure: 5,5 barg - All flange bolt holes to straddle horizontal and vertical axis
Max. operating pressure: 5,0 barg
Corr. Allowance: 1,0 mm
Tag List
4 x n25 Design temp: -10°C to +50°C
Qty. Pos. Description/Dimension TAG #
1 01 Tank Shell 3D21501B
Volume, Weight and Size 1 03 Manway N/A
Y Total volume: 8,5 m3 Surface Treatment 3 E01 Load Cell WE005A/B/C
1 E02 High Level Switch LSH005
250
Operation volume 7,0 m3 Outside:

Dry weight (including frame, approx.): 2 755 kg NOV spec. HLA-4A System no. 1 1 E03 Pressure Transmitter PIT014
Dry weight (excluding frame, approx.): 1 980 kg Inside: with Indicator
400
X Note 4 Oper. weight Barite (approx.): 18 000 kg NOV spec. HLA-4A System no. 5 1 E04 Junction Box N/A
B B
800
Oper. weight Bentonite (approx.): 9 500 kg 1 H01 Pressure Safety Valve PSV013
Note 4 0 12.04.2012 Issued for Approval OFI SGIN ROEK

NOZZLE TABLE This doc ument contains proprietary and confidential information w hich
NOZZLE SIZE DESIGN FACE DESCRIPTION X Y Z only and rem ains the property of National Oilwell N orway AS.
1000 N01 5" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Filling line 155 900 3184 this inform ation to others is not perm itted w ithout the expres s written
N02 5" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Vent line -155 280 3454 to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS upon request and in any event upon
N03 DN600 N/A N/A Discharge 0 0 0 Title:
N04 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Air inlet 586 -448 380 General Arrangement Drawing
N05 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF PSV inlet 0 -350 3082 Surge tank Bentonite 8,5m3
N06 3" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF PSV outlet 0 -500 3209
N07 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF High level switch 350 0 3082
Pressure transmitter 1:20 A1
N08 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF -450 0 3082
with indicator Drawing Number: Sheet: Revision:
N09 24" Davit N/A Man way 0 1402 1904 G1280-DP40-G0002 1/1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
General Arrangement Drawing
Bulk System Valves

loaned.
G1280-DP41-G0001 0
Document number G1280-DP41-G0001
Revision 0
Page 2 of 2
REVISION HISTORY
0 15.07.2013 Issued for Approval EIMO HEOL EIMO

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
72 TYP
TOP VIEW N06 N07 N08 SECTION D-D E01
E02
H01
H Note 4 1835 125 Note 5 H
4240 4486
Ø3700
1818
Note 7
Reaction forces
(Survival cond.)
1200
Note 3 Note 3
Note 3 Fx = ± 212kN
100 Datum point
4059
0 Fy = ± 35kN
Fz = 0kN
2400
G G
Note 3
Reaction forces
(Survival cond.)
E D D Fx = ± 212kN
1950
Fy = ± 35kN
Fz = 0kN
E Y
01
X N05
F N02 N01 F
N09 4218
SECTION G-G SECTION F-F

3" blind flange SCALE ( 1 : 20 )
DETAIL A
SCALE ( 1 : 10 )
Earthing Boss
6 x n26,5 Note 6 M10
200
E E
SECTION E-E
400
310
SCALE (1 : 10)
Ø120
150 TYP 82,5 TYP Ø65
12400 to top of tank
45 TYP
465
13393
5 C.O.G. Operating E03
80
170
11210
GENERAL NOTES
Ø50
11245
Center of Gravity
D Operating - Inside of tank have ladder for access to fluidizing system. D
39 C.O.G. Empty - All interface nozzles to be equipped with flexible bellows.
Center of Gravity
2500 - Pads (note 6), tank support, foundation bolts and cable tray
FOOTPRINT is yard supply.
DESIGN DATA - Access to manway is yard supply.
CLASSIFICATION SOCIETY… DNV Drill - The tank must move freely on loadcells.
G G A CODE…………………………... ASME sect. VIII div.1 - All instruments suitable for Zone II
PRESSURE, OPERATING…... 5,0 barg - Surface treatment:
DESIGN………... 5,5 barg Bulk Tank:
Reaction forces Reaction forces CARGO, DESCRIPTION... Cement
(Survival cond.) (Survival cond.) Outside: NOV HLA-4A System No. 1, RAL 9002.
DENSITY………. 1,5 t/m3 Inside: NOV HLA-4A System No. 5.
Fx = ± 70kN Fx = ± 70kN DESIGN TEMP. RANGE………. -10° to +50°
Fy = ± 12kN Platform: NOV HLA-4A System No. 1, RAL 1023.
Fy = ± 12kN CORROSION ALLOWANCE….. 1,0 mm
Fz = -544kN Fz = -544kN Tag List
5943 C.O.G. Operating
C Note 2 PSV CAPACITY: 2286 Nm3/h at 5,5 barg Qty. Pos. Description/Dimension Tag # C
N10
5721 C.O.G. Empty
2600
1 01 Tank Shell 3D21401A/B/C/D
VOLUME, WEIGHT AND SIZE 1 E01 Pressure Transmitter PIT102/105/108/111
Reaction forces Reaction forces VOLUM, NET……………. 113 m3 with Indicator
Note 1 F (Survival cond.) (Survival cond.) OPERATING….. 105 m3 1 E02 High Level Switch LSH101/102/103/104
F Fx = ± 70kN Fx = ± 70kN WEIGHT, BULK TANK....... ca. 18,6 ton 4 E03 Loadcell 100 Tonnes WE101A/B/C/D
Fy = ± 12kN Fy = ± 12kN PLATFORM....... ca. 0,9 ton
Fz = -544kN Fz = -544kN WE102A/B/C/D
N03 TOT. DRY…….. ca. 20,6 ton
OPERATING….. ca. 178,1 ton WE103A/B/C/D
OPERATING LEVEL APPROX. 93% OF TANK VOLUME WE104A/B/C/D
OPERATING LEVEL HEIGHT ~11000 mm FROM DATUM POINT 1 H01 PSV PSV101/104/107/110
Tolerances except as noted Welding except as noted Total weight
N04 ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2
ISO 2768-mK-E EN ISO 15614-1/2
B Note 3 ASME Section IX B
n 54
NOTES
0 12.04.2012 Issued for Approval OFI SGIN ROEK
NOZZLE TABLE
(477)
1. Name Plate Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.

NOZZLE SIZE DESIGN FACE DESCRIPTION X Y Z This doc ument contains proprietary and confidential information w hich
289
2. Earthing Boss (2x) belongs to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS. It is loaned for lim ited purposes
70
3. Lifting Lugs top (3x) N01 5" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Vent line 1126 650 12505 only and rem ains the property of National Oilwell N orway AS.
Z Lifting Lug bottom (1x) N02 5" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Filling line 1256 336 12505 this inform ation to others is not perm itted w ithout the expres s written
c1 consent of National Oilw ell N orw ay AS. T his docum ent is to be returned
N03 5" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Discharge 1732 -1000 1145 tocomNational Oilw ell N orw ay AS upon request and in any event upon Servicebox 401, Lundsiden
4. Maintenance area pletion of the use for w hich it w as loaned. N-4604 Kristiansand, Norway
Datum point N04 3" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Air Inlet 2001 0 710 Title:
Z Datum point 5. Handrail to be mounted to tank 3D21401D
N05 3" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF PSV (Outlet) 769 919 12632 General Arrangement Drawing
Note 8 6. 4 x Load Cell Pads with 6xM24 hole pattern
Pressure Transmitter with
Y
to be supplied by yard N06 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF -850 -300 12505 Bulktank Cement 113 m3 incl. Reaction forces
Indicator
7. Handrail to be mounted to tank 3D21401A N07 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF High level switch -850 0
12505 Scale:
A 8. Yard pads recommended to be c 1 Projection: Size: Main Part: A
X N08 3" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Manual sounding (Blinded) -850 300 12505 1:30 A1
N09 24" Hinged N/A Man way top 1006 -581 12446 Drawing Number: Sheet: Revision:
N10 24" Davit N/A Man way bottom -1030 -1784 2450 G1280-DP45-G0001 1/1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
72 TYP
TOP VIEW N08 N07 N06 SECTION D-D H01 E02 E01
Note 4
H H
1835 125 Note 5
4240 4486
Ø3700
Note 7
1818
Reaction forces
Note 3 (Survival cond.)
1200
Note 3 Datum point Note 3 Fx = ± 314kN
0
1 00
4059
Fy = ± 51kN
Fz = 0kN
G G
2400
Reaction forces
D D (Survival cond.)
E Note 3
Fx = ± 314kN
1950
Y Fy = ± 51kN
Fz = 0kN
E
X
N05
F N01 N02 N09 F
4218
SECTION G-G SECTION F-F

3" blind flange SCALE ( 1:30 )
N10
A ( 1 : 10 ) Earthing boss
M10
6 x n26,5
200
Note 6
Note 1
E E
SECTION E-E
400
310
SCALE (1 : 10)
Ø120
12400 to top of tank
Ø65
150 TYP 82,5 TYP
45 TYP
13393
5 C.O.G. Operating
80
465 E03
170
11210
GENERAL NOTES
Ø50
11245
Center of Gravity
D Operating - Inside of tank have ladder for access to fluidizing system. D
Center of Gravity - All interface nozzles to be equipped with flexible bellows.
39 C.O.G. Empty
FOOTPRINT 2500 - Pads (note 6), tank support, foundation bolts and cable tray
is yard supply.
DESIGN DATA - Access to manway is yard supply.
CLASSIFICATION SOCIETY… DNV Drill - The tank must move freely on loadcells.
CODE…………………………... ASME sect. VIII div.1
G G A PRESSURE, OPERATING…... 5,0 barg
- All instruments suitable for Zone II
- Surface treatment:
DESIGN………... 5,5 barg Bulk Tank:
CARGO, DESCRIPTION... Barite Outside: NOV HLA-4A System No. 1, RAL 9002.
Reaction forces Reaction forces DENSITY………. 2,16 t/m3 Inside: NOV HLA-4A System No. 5.
(Survival cond.) (Survival cond.) DESIGN TEMP. RANGE………. -10° to +50° Platform: NOV HLA-4A System No. 1, RAL 1023.
Fx = ± 103kN
Fx = ± 103kN CORROSION ALLOWANCE….. 1,0 mm

Fy = ± 18kN Fy = ± 18kN Tag List
C Fz = -806kN Fz = -806kN Note 2 Qty. Pos. Description/Dimension Tag # C
5724 C.O.G. Empty
PSV CAPACITY: 2286 Nm3/h at 5,5 barg

1 01 Tank Shell 3D21301A/B/C,3D21302
2600
VOLUME, WEIGHT AND SIZE 1 E01 Pressure Transmitter PIT002/005/008/011

Reaction forces Reaction forces VOLUM, NET……………. 113 m3 with Indicator
F (Survival cond.) (Survival cond.) OPERATING….. 105 m3 1 E02 High Level Switch LSH001/002/003/004
WEIGHT, BULK TANK....... ca. 18,6 ton
F Fx = ± 103kN Fx = ± 103kN
PLATFORM....... ca. 0,9 ton
4 E03 Loadcell 100 Tonnes WE001A/B/C/D
Fy = ± 18kN Fy = ± 18kN WE002A/B/C/D
Fz = -806kN Fz = -806kN TOT. DRY…….. ca. 20,6 ton
OPERATING….. ca. 249 ton WE003A/B/C/D
N03 WE004A/B/C/D
OPERATING LEVEL APPROX. 93% OF TANK VOLUME
OPERATING LEVEL HEIGHT ~11000 mm FROM DATUM POINT 1 H01 PSV PSV001/002/003/004
N04 ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2

ISO 2768-mK-E EN ISO 15614-1/2
B ASME Section IX B
Note 3
n 54
NOTES
NOZZLE TABLE
(477)
1. Name Plate NOZZLE SIZE DESIGN FACE DESCRIPTION X Y

Rev. Date Description
Z This doc ument contains proprietary and confidential information w hich
Made Checked Appr.
289
2. Earthing Boss (2x) belongs to National Oilw ell Varco Norw ay AS. It is loaned for lim ited
70
N01 5" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Vent line 1126 -650 12505 purposes only and rem ains the property of N ational Oilwell Varco N orw ay
3. Lifting Lugs top (3x) N02 5" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Filling line
AS. R eproduc tion, in w hole or in part, or use of this des ign or distribution
1256 -336 12505 ofconsent
Z this information to others is not perm itted without the expres s written
c1 Lifting Lug bottom (1x) N03 5" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Discharge 1732 1000 1145 returned
of National Oilw ell Varco Norw ay AS. T his document is to be
to National O ilw ell Varco Norw ay A S upon request and in any Servicebox 401, Lundsiden
Datum point 4. Maintenance area N04 3" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Air Inlet 2001 0
event upon com pletion of the use for w hich it w as loaned.
710 Title:
Z Datum point 5. Handrail to be mounted to tank 3D21302 N05 3" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF PSV (Outlet) 769 -919 12632 General Arrangement Drawing
Note 8 6. 4 x Load Cell Pads with 6xM24 hole pattern Pressure Transmitter with
Y
to be supplied by yard N06 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF -850 300 12505 Bulktank Barite/Bentonite 113m3 incl. Reaction
Indicator
7. Handrail to be mounted to tank 3D21301C N07 2" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF High level switch -850 0
12505 Scale:
A Projection: Size: Main Part: A
X 8. Yard pads recommended to be c 1 N08 3" ANSI B16.5 150lbs RF Manual sounding (Blinded) -850 -300 12505 1:30 A1
N09 24" Hinged N/A Man way top 1006 581 12446 Drawing Number: Sheet: Revision:
N10 24" Davit N/A Man way bottom -1030 1784 2450 G1280-DP45-G0002 1/1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Note 4
Ø4000
DETAIL A ISO VIEW
H SCALE ( 1 : 5 ) H
SCALE ( 1:40 )
100
H01
325
37,5 TYP.
4 x n22 THRU
n 54 Note 3 E01
E02
R3589
R678 C C
250
175
01
G Center of Gravity Note 6 G

Operating
Note 1
Note 5 175 75
5223
4713
Center of Gravity R350

56,49 C.O.G Empty 40°
F SECTION D-D ( 1 : 10 ) F
2012 C.O.G. Empty

Note 2
E03
Note 3 D DESIGN DATA
200
R1100 CLASSIFICATION SOCIETY… DNV Drill
n 54 CODE…………………………... ASME sect. VIII div. 1
(445)
Z Z PRESSURE, OPERATING…... 5,0 barg
215
DESIGN………... 5,5 barg

CARGO, DESCRIPTION... Cement
80
70
25
Datum point
c1
D DENSITY………. 1,5 t/m3
X Y DESIGN TEMP. RANGE………. -10° to +50°
E Note 7 Note 2 CORROSION ALLOWANCE….. 1,0 mm E
PSV SET POINT: 5,5 barg

TOP VIEW VOLUME AND WEIGHT
N8
N5 FOOTPRINT SECTION C-C
N3 VOLUM, NET……………. 40 m3
OPERATING….. 37 m3
WEIGHT, DRY…………… ca. 11 ton
OPERATING….. 63 ton
N4 OPERATING LEVEL HEIGHT ~4200 mm FROM DATUM POINT
32 5
D D
TY
P.
N2 GENERAL NOTES
220
N1 n 3640
0
- Inside of tank have ladder for access to fluidizing system.
Reaction forces Reaction forces - Nozzle N1, N2, N3, N4, N5 to be equipped with flexible bellows,
(Survival cond.) (Survival cond.) . NOV supply.
YP - Pads (note 5), tank support, foundation bolts and cable tray is
Fx = ± 27kN Fx = ± 27kN 250 T
Fy = ± 110kN Fy = ± 110kN yard supply.
Fz = +483 / -52kN Fz = +483 / -52kN - Access to manway is yard supply.
0
100 - The tank must move freely on loadcells.
Datum point - Surface treatment:
Outside: NOV HLA-4A System No. 1, RAL 9002.
C C
Inside: NOV HLA-4A System No. 5.
Reaction forces
(Survival cond.) Tag List
Fx = ± 27kN Qty. Pos. Description/Dimension Tag #
Fy = ± 110kN 0 1 01 Tank Shell 3D21402A
Fz = +483 / -52kN 2 20
1 E02 Level Switch LSH105
120
1 E01 Pressure Transmitter PIT114

°
with Indicator
M1 1 H01 PSV PSV113
N6 3 E03 Loadcell 50 tonnes WE105A/B/C
ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2
N7 ISO 2768-mK-E EN ISO 15614-1/2
B ASME Section IX B
Y
A
X NO ZZLE S CHE DULE Coordinates relative to datum point 0 12.04.2012 Issued for Approval OFI SGIN ROEK
NOTES Noz z le loc ation Rev. Date Description
This doc ument contains proprietary and confidential information w hich
Made Checked Appr.
Nozz le No Des cription S ize Rating Ty pe X Y Z belongs to National Oilw ell Varco Norw ay AS. It is loaned for lim ited
Note 4 N1 V ent line 5" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF 1000 200 4850
purposes only and rem ains the property of N ational Oilwell Varco N orw ay
AS. R eproduc tion, in w hole or in part, or use of this des ign or distribution
1. Name Plate N2 F illing line 5" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF -1000 200 4850
of this information to others is not perm itted without the expres s written
consent of National Oilw ell Varco Norw ay AS. T his document is to be
2. Earthing Boss (2x) N3 Dis c harge 5" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF -1230 1824 2270
returned to National O ilw ell Varco Norw ay A S upon request and in any
event upon com pletion of the use for w hich it w as loaned. N-4604 Kristiansand, Norway
3. Lifting Lugs top (3x) N4 A ir Inlet 3" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF 1801 1261 1070 Title:
Lifting Lug bottom (1x) N5 P S V (O utlet) 3" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF 294 556 5045 General Arrangement Drawing
4. Maintenance area P res sure trans m itter Bulktank Cement daytank 40m3 incl. Reaction
5. 3 x Load Cell pads with 4xM20 hole N6
N7
with Indic ator
High level s witc h
2"
2"
150ps i
150ps i
A NS I B 16,5 RF
A NS I B 16,5 RF
400
400
-450
-750
4815
4815
A pattern to be supplied by yard Scale: Projection: Size: Main Part: A
M anual S ounding 1:25 A1
6. NR-13 Plate
N8 w/B lind F lange 3" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF 0 400 4850 Drawing Number: Revision:
7. Yard pads recommended to be c 1
Sheet:
M1 M anhole 24" N/A N/A -1732 -1000 3170 G1280-DP45-G0004 1/1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Note 4
ISO VIEW
100
H
Ø4000
DETAIL A SCALE ( 1:40 ) H
SCALE ( 1 : 5 ) E01
75 TYP.
250 E02 H01
n54 4 x n 22 -THRU
Note 3
R3589
C R678 C 01
325
175
G G
Note 6
Note 1
175 37,5 TYP.

5223
65 C.O.G. Empty Note 5

4573
4713
Center of Gravity
Operating Center of Gravity
R350

F Center of Gravity 40° F
SECTION D-D ( 1:10 )
2012 C.O.G. Empty

Note 2
E03
200
D R1100
DESIGN DATA
CLASSIFICATION SOCIETY… DNV Drill
Z Z
CODE…………………………... ASME sect. VIII div. 1
210
PRESSURE, OPERATING…... 5,0 barg
70
DESIGN………... 5,5 barg
25
80
E X
Note 2 D c1 Note 7 Y
CARGO, DESCRIPTION... Cement E
DENSITY………. 1,5 t/m3
Datum point
DESIGN TEMP. RANGE………. -10° to +50°
CORROSION ALLOWANCE….. 1,0 mm
PSV SET POINT: 5,5 barg

TOPVIEW FOOTPRINT SECTION C-C
N2 VOLUME, WEIGHT AND SIZE
N4 VOLUM, NET……………. 40 m3
325 OPERATING….. 37 m3
T YP WEIGHT, DRY…………… ca. 11 ton
. OPERATING….. 63 ton
.
T YP
D D
N8 OPERATING LEVEL HEIGHT ~4200 mm FROM DATUM POINT
250
N5 GENERAL NOTES
Reaction forces - Inside of tank have ladder for access to fluidizing system.
0
220
(Survival cond.) - Nozzle N1, N2, N3, N4, N5 to be equipped with flexible bellows,
N6 Fx = ± 27kN NOV supply.
A Fy = ± 110kN
n 3640 - Pads (note 5), tank support, foundation bolts and cable tray is
Datum point Fz = +483 / -52kN yard supply.
- Access to manway is yard supply.
- The tank must move freely on loadcells.
Reaction forces - Surface treatment:
(Survival cond.) Outside: NOV HLA-4A System No. 1, RAL 9002.
C Inside: NOV HLA-4A System No. 5. C
Fx = ± 27kN
Fy = ± 110kN Reaction forces
Fz = +483 / -52kN (Survival cond.) TAG List
0
Fx = ± 27kN 220 Qty. Pos. Description/Dimension TAG #
N7 Fy = ± 110kN 3 E03 Loadcell 50 tonnes WE106A/B/C
Fz = +483 / -52kN 1 H01 PSV PSV116
N3 1 E01 Pressure Transmitter PIT117
with Indicator
0
100
1 E02 Level Switch LSH106

Note 2
120 1 01 Tank Shell 3D21402B
°T Tolerances except as noted Welding except as noted Total weight
YP ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2
.
N1 ISO 2768-mK-E EN ISO 15614-1/2
B ASME Section IX B
M1 NO ZZLE S CHE DULE Coordinates relative to datum point 0 12.04.2012 Issued for Approval OFI SGIN ROEK
NOTES Noz z le loc ation Rev. Date Description
Made Checked Appr.
X Noz z le No Des c ription S iz e Rating Ty pe X Y Z belongs to National Oilw ell Varco Norw ay AS. It is loaned for lim ited
purposes only and rem ains the property of N ational Oilwell Varco N orw ay
N1 V ent line 5" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF 200 -1000 4850 AS. R eproduc tion, in w hole or in part, or use of this des ign or distribution
Note 4 1. Name Plate of this information to others is not perm itted without the expres s written
N2 F illing line 5" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF 200 1000 4850 consent of National Oilw ell Varco Norw ay AS. T his document is to be
returned to National O ilw ell Varco Norw ay A S upon request and in any
2. Earthing Boss (2x) N3 Dis c harge 5" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF 1824 -1230 2270 event upon com pletion of the use for w hich it w as loaned. N-4604 Kristiansand, Norway
3. Lifting Lugs top (3x) N4 A ir Inlet 3" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF -1261 1801 1070 Title:
Lifting Lug bottom (1x) N5 P S V (O utlet) 3" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF 556 -294 5045 General Arrangement Drawing
4. Maintenance area P res s ure trans m itter Bulktank Cement daytank 40m3 incl. Reaction
5. Load Cell pads with 4xM20 hole N6
N7
with Indic ator
High level s witch
2"
2"
150ps i
150ps i
A NS I B 16,5 RF
A NS I B 16,5 RF
-450
-750
-400
-400
4815
4815
A pattern to be supplied by yard Scale: Projection: Size: Main Part: A
M anual S ounding 1:25 A1
6. NR-13 Plate N8 w/B lind F lange 3" 150ps i A NS I B 16,5 RF 400 0 4850 Drawing Number: Sheet: Revision:
7. Yard pads recommended to be c 1 M1 M anhole 24" N/A N/A -1000 -1732 3170 G1280-DP45-G0007 1/1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Noz z le sch e dule (coordin a te s re la tive to da tum po int)
Noz z le no Noz z le des ign S iz e Rating F ac ing X Y Z
H General Revision Note: Dus t Inlet N1 A NS I 16.5 B 5" #150 RF 0 0 1873 H
Dus t O utlet N2 A NS I 16.5 B 5" #150 RF -488 696 730
-Position numbers revised like Seadrill #4
-Nozzle schedule revised like Seadrill #4 High Level S witc h N3 A NS I 16.5 B 2" #150 RF 0 400 1838
1 A ir Inlet N4 A NS I 16.5 B 2" #150 RF 693 -400 660
P S V O ut N5 A NS I 16.5 B 3" #150 RF -389 -389 1994
P res s ure trans m itter
with Indic at or N6 A NS I 16.5 B 2" #150 RF -283 283 1838
Drain N7 A NS I 16.5 B 2" #150 RF 432 -417 110
M anway N8 A NS I 16.5 B 24" #150 RF 220 815 968
n450 Cy c lone
Dus t Inlet N9 A NS I 16.5 B 5" #150 RF -625 159 3697
G A N11 Dus t O utlet N10 A NS I 16.5 B 5" #150 RF 0 0 1932 G
489
V ent line N11 A NS I 16.5 B 5" #150 RF 0 0 3920
12 0°
15°
N2 35°
N9 N8 5
°
10
N3
F F
1 Manhole bolts Torque: 385Nm
N6 Manhole gasket: 3mm Nitrile
N10
698
2
N5
15°
N1
159
n1400
6
E E
Maint. space assembly
of PSV
30 °
100
4
N4
3
N5
3919
53
N7
3696
D D
A Design Data:
Classification society DNV drill
N10 Bracket for name plate Design Code: ASME sect. VIII Div.1
Total volume: 2m3
183 Operation volume 1,8 m3
Min. design pressure: 5,5bar
COG dry 60° Max. Operating pressure: 5,0bar
60°
COG dry PSV capacity: 2286Nm3/h at 5,5 barg
Operation temp: Amb.
Design temp -10/+50°C
200 Design pressure Cyclone: Amb
Corr. Allowance 1,0 mm
140 Dry weight (approx.): 1350 kg
C C
Content/Density Barite(2,16kg/dm^3)
1993
Bentonite(0,96kg/dm^3)
1878
Cement(1,4kg/dm^3)
140
200
1 6 Collector Tank 3D21901/902/903 738 kg
1 5 Cyclone 3D21901/902/903 200 kg
1391
n18 1 4 Pressure Transmitter PIT020/023/123 4 kg
with Indicator
1 3 Level Switch High
LSH007/008/108 4 kg
1 2 Knife gate valve
3D21-HV- 23 kg
967
065/066/067
1 1 PSV PSV019/022/122 13 kg
B B
Qty. Pos. Description/Dimension Tag No Unit wt.
Z Z
B B n 1400 1 20.06.2012 Reissued for Approval MFOD ALTO SGIN

179
Contour tank shell Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.

X Y belongs to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS. It is loaned for lim ited purposes
109
only and rem ains the property of National Oilwell N orway AS.
24

Y X this inform ation to others is not perm itted w ithout the expres s written
to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS upon request and in any event upon P.O. Box 168, Blakstadmarka 26
N-1371 Asker, Norway
3x Earth boss n45 l=50 M10
Title:
thr General Arrangement Drawing

Foot Print Dust Collector and Cyclone 2m3 for
Cement/Barite/Bentonite, Seadrill West Jupiter
A B-B ( 1 : 10 ) All instruments suitable for Zone II
Scale:
1:10
Projection: Size:
A1
Main Part: A
Drawing Number: Sheet: Revision:
G1280-DP46-G0001 1/1 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
355 8" Victaulic flexible coupling
220
Maintenance & 8" Victaulic Cap

G G
320
operation space
Filter Expanded Metal
259
F F
433
73
COG
8" Victaulic System Roll Grooved end

900
E "Rock Catcher" Housing E
5" Victaulic System Roll Grooved end
D D
DESIGN DATA
Design code: ASME B31.3
263
Max operating pressure: 116 PSI (8 barg)

Design temp.: -10/+50°C
Surface treatment external: Norsok system no. 1
Colour Code: Ral 9002
NOTES
C -Weight of housing: Approx. 115lbs (52kg) C
-Weight of cap: Approx. 13lbs (6,0kg)
-Weight of filter: Approx. 7lbs (3,0kg)
Screen Mesh Size: 38 x 17 mm
GENERAL NOTES
Tag No.:
-If the system requires rock catching in one direction only, vertical
mounting with flow direction downwards is recommended.
Cement: Tag# 3D21201A/B -If the system requires rock catching in both directions,
Barite/Bentonite: Tag# 3D21204A/B the Rock Catcher must be mounted horizontally. Recommended
direction for removal of filter is upwards.
B Victaulic Standard Roll Groove Specifications 5" ISO 13920-AE
ISO 2768-mK-E
EN 287-1/2
EN ISO 15614-1/2 54 kg
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Nom. Dimensions - Inches/millimeters 0 12.04.2012 Issued for Approval OFI SGIN ROEK
Pipe Pipe Outside Dia. O.D. Gasket Grv. Groove Dia. - C Groove Min. Max. This doc ument contains proprietary and confidential information w hich
Size Seat - A Width - B Tol. Depth Allow. Allow. this inform ation to others is not perm itted w ithout the expres s written
to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS upon request and in any event upon
com pletion of the use for w hich it w as loaned. N-4604 Kristiansand, Norway
Inches Tolerances ±0.03 ±0.03 +0.000 D Wall Thk. Flare Title:
General Arrangement Drawing

mm Basic + - ±0,76 ±0,76 Basic +0.00 (ref.) T Dia. Rock Catcher
A 5 5.563 0.056 0.031 0.625 0.344 5.395 -0.022 0.084 0.109 5.66 Scale:
1:5
Projection: Size:
A1
Main Part: A
125 141,3 1,42 0,79 15,88 8,74 137,03 -0,56 2,13 2,77 143,8 Drawing Number:
G1280-DP47-G0001
Sheet:
1/1
Revision:
0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section
7.2 Block Diagram

Block Diagram, Bulk Weighing System Bulktank Area G1280-BS-E0001 0
Block Diagram, Bulk Weighing System Sackstore G1280-BS-E0002 1
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Assembly Drawing, Surge tank 8,5m3 G1280-DP40-A0001 1
Assembly Drawing, Surge tank 8,5m3 G1280-DP40-A0002 1
Assembly Drawing, 40m3 Day tank G1280-DP45-A0004 0
Assembly Drawing, 40m3 Day tank G1280-DP45-A0007 0
Assembly Drawing, Bulk Tanks 8x 113m3 G1280-DP45-A0013 0
Complete Assembly
Assembly Drawing, Dust collector & Cyclone G1280-DP46-A0001 0
Assembly Drawing, Rock Catcher 5" G1280-DP47-A0001 0
www.nov.com
Customer Parts List
Drawing No.: G1280-DP40-A0001 Drawing Name: Remarks:
Revision: 0 Surge tank 8,5m3
Part No: XG1280DP40A0001 Seadrill West Jupiter
Updated 17.04.2012 ASSEMBLY DRAWING
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:
Qty Part No. / Alternate ID Drawing Reference / Remarks

Pos
Unit Wgt. Part Name Tag No.
1 XDP40S0029 DP40-S0029
01
Surge tank 8,5 m3;Ø2400, 1mm
2050,00
CA;STRUCTURAL STEEL DETAIL DRAWING
1 XDP40S0031 DP40-S0031
02
Surge tank frame;For Ø2400 surge tank;STEEL
848,00
ASSEMBLY
1 XBSS0002 BS-S0002
03
264,00 Manway 24" Left;;STEEL ASSEMBLY
1 190997
04
0,17 MACHINE TAG SIGN, 180X120
1 180209
05
0,10 Sticker, NOV logo, package
1 202940
06
0,00 WARNING SIGN -COMPRESSED AIR
1 202939
07
0,01 WARNING SIGN -SUFFOCATION
1 202873
08
0,01 WARNING SIGN -HARMFUL MATERIALS
1 202871
09
0,07 WARNING SIGN - ROTATING PARTS
3 173067
E01
20,00 LOAD CELL 10 TON W/GALV.BRACKETS
1 157279
E02
2,20 VIBRATING LEVEL SWITCH, VEGAVIB 62
1 192895
E03
0,80 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 0-10BAR
1 161588
E04
3,00 JUNCTION BOX COMPL.BUILD STAHL
1 157480
E05
2,00 FLANGE FOR VEGAVIB
1 157269
E06
2,00 FLANGE FOR VEGABAR 54
www.nov.com PDFPartslist.exe (1.32.4568.11126) (XAL) 30.11.2012 16:13:43 Page: 1 of 2

Customer Parts List
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 159794
H01
12,70 SPRING SAFETY VALVE ASSY 1,5X2" 80PSI
3 198184
H02
0,90 CANVAS FLUIDIZING FABRIC
1 214252 BS-S0002
M01
0,50 GASKET FOR MANWAY HATCH
3 154742
M02
1,50 GRAPHITE/METAL LAMINATE GASKET, 2"
12 154944
M03
0,10 STUD BOLT, M16 X 060MM
24 25159 / 10375569-001
M04
0,10 BOLT, HEX, M16 X 050MM
24 26644 / 10377759-001
M05
0,03 NUT, M16
48 26556 / 10377739-001
M06
0,01 WASHER, M16, HDG
4 25217 / 10375603-001
M07
4 14837 / 10360305-001
M08
0,00 WASHER, M06, A4-80
Total weight 3257,68

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
A 01
G G
C
04 02
3581
F F
03
B C ( 1 : 10 )
E E
M01
06 05
1 E01
07
08 M06 M04
09
D D
A(1:5)
2859
B ( 1 : 10 )
H02
C H01 C
M03 M06 M05 GENERAL NOTES:
E05 E02
E03 E06 - Ref. separate parts list
- All name plates/equipment signs to be fastened with stainless
steel pop rivets, builder supply
M03 M06 M05 - For installation of tank accessories ref. installation instructions
M05 M06 M03 for Bulk System doc. G1280-Z-KA-003
2400

ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2
E04 M07 M08 ISO 2768-mK-E EN ISO 15614-1/2 3248 kg
B ASME Section IX B
M02 M02
TIGHTENING OF BOLTS
ALL BOLTS SLIGHTLY OILED 1 30.11.2012 Reissued for Construction OFI SGIN EIMO
Excerpt from HL/TP-15
0 17.04.2012 Issued for Construction OFI SGIN ROEK
Torque [Nm]
M02 Size Grade 8.8, Grade 10.9, A4-80
HDG Phosphated belongs to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS. It is loaned for lim ited purposes
M8 26 28 22 R eproduc tion, in whole or in part, or use of this des ign or distribution of
M10 50 56 44 this inform ation to others is not perm itted w ithout the expres s written
M12 87 98 76 to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS upon request and in any event upon P.O. Box 168, Drengsrudhagen 4
M14 137 156 121 com pletion of the use for w hich it w as loaned. N-1371 Asker, Norway
M16 211 238 187 Title:
M18
M20
294
412
332
465
260
364
Assembly Drawing
M22 554 626 490 Surge tank 8,5m3
M24
M27
712
1028
804
1161
629
909
A M30 1402 1582 1240
Scale: Projection: Size: Main Part: A
M33 1894 2133 1670 1:20 A1
M36 2440 2761 2160
M39 3135 3543 2770 G1280-DP40-A0001 1/1 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Customer Parts List
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 XDP40S0028 DP40-S0028
01
Surge tank 8,5 m3;Ø2400, 1mm
2047,00
1 XDP40S0031 DP40-S0031
02
Surge tank frame;For Ø2400 surge tank;STEEL
848,00
ASSEMBLY
1 XBSS0002 BS-S0002
03
1 190997
04
1 180209
05
1 202940
06
1 202939
07
1 202873
08
1 202871
09
3 173067
E01
20,00 LOAD CELL 10 TON W/GALV.BRACKETS
1 157279
E02
1 192895
E03
1 161588
E04
1 157480
E05
1 157269
E06

Customer Parts List
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 159794
H01
3 198184
H02
0,90 CANVAS FLUIDIZING FABRIC
1 214252 BS-S0002
M01
3 154742
M02
12 154944
M03
24 25159 / 10375569-001
M04
24 26644 / 10377759-001
M05
0,03 NUT, M16
48 26556 / 10377739-001
M06
0,01 WASHER, M16, HDG
4 25217 / 10375603-001
M07
4 14837 / 10360305-001
M08
0,00 WASHER, M06, A4-80

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
A
01
C
G G
04
3581
02
F F
03
C ( 1 : 10 )
E E
05 M01
1 E01
06
M06 M04
07
08 E04 M07 M08
09
D D
A(1:5)
B ( 1 : 10 )
H01
H02
E05 E02
C C
M03 M06 M05
E03 E06
GENERAL NOTES:
2859
M05 M06 M03 M03 M06 M05 - Ref. separate parts list
- All name plates/equipment signs to be fastened with stainless
steel pop rivets, builder supply
- For installation of tank accessories ref. installation instructions
for Bulk System doc. G1280-Z-KA-003

ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2
ISO 2768-mK-E EN ISO 15614-1/2 3246 kg
B M02 M02 ASME Section IX B
M02 TIGHTENING OF BOLTS

ALL BOLTS SLIGHTLY OILED 1 30.11.2012 Reissued for Construction OFI SGIN EIMO
Excerpt from HL/TP-15 0 17.04.2012 Issued for Construction OFI SGIN ROEK
Torque [Nm] Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.
2400 Size Grade 8.8, Grade 10.9, A4-80 This doc ument contains proprietary and confidential information w hich
M10 50 56 44 this inform ation to others is not perm itted w ithout the expres s written
M12 87 98 76 to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS upon request and in any event upon P.O. Box 168, Drengsrudhagen 4
M14 137 156 121 com pletion of the use for w hich it w as loaned. N-1371 Asker, Norway
M16 211 238 187 Title:
M18
M20
294
412
332
465
260
364
Assembly Drawing
M22 554 626 490 Surge tank 8,5m3
M24
M27
712
1028
804
1161
629
909
M30 1402 1582 1240
M33 1894 2133 1670
1:20 A1
M36 2440 2761 2160
M39 3135 3543 2770 G1280-DP40-A0002 1/1 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Customer Parts List
Revision: 0 40m3 Day tank
Item No: XG1280DP45A0004 Seadrill West Jupiter
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:
Qty Item No. Drawing Reference / Remarks

Pos
Unit Wgt. Item Name Tag No.
1 XDP45S0042 DP45-S0042
01
Day Tank 40m3;Ø4000 - Conical bottom, 1mm
10155,00
1 XBSS0002 BS-S0002
02
1 169521
E01
3,50 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 0-10BAR, 4-20mA
1 157279
E02
3 209723
E03
60,00 LOAD CELL ASSEMBLY 50T
1 161588
E04
1 157480
E05
1 157269
E06
1 159794
H01
4 150449
H02
3,70 CANVAS F/BULK STORAGE TANKS
1 214252 BS-S0002
M01
3 154742
M02
12 154944
M03
24 26556
M04
0,01 WASHER, M16
24 26644
M05
0,03 NUT, M16

Customer Parts List
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
12 26558
M06
0,02 WASHER, M20
12 25174
M07
1 175211
M08
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO STICKER
0,48
QUARDRAT
1 190997
M09
4 25217
M10
4 14837
M11
0,00 WASHER, M06, A4-80
1 202940
M12
1 202939
M13
1 202873
M14
1 211738
M15
0,01 SAFETY STICKER - WEAR HARNESS

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Ø4000
DETAIL D
H H
SECTION A-A ( 1 : 20 )
A
01
DETAIL C
G G
02
5223
M08
M09
F F
DETAIL B
DETAIL E
E E
DETAIL E ( 1 : 10 )
230
Earth boss
A
DETAIL A
DETAIL B ( 1 : 10 )
DETAIL A ( 1 : 10 ) M12
D D
H02
M13
M14
DETAIL C ( 1 : 10 )
E03 M15
M06 M07
45
M01
39
C C
DETAIL D ( 1 : 10 ) GENERAL NOTES:
H01 M02
- Ref. separate parts list
- All name plates/equipment signs to be fastened with
M03 M04 M05 E01 M02 E06
stainless steel pop rivets, builder supply
- For installation of tank accessories ref. Installation
procedure for Bulk System doc. G1280-Z-KA-003
M03 M04 M05
- Pos. E04, M10 and M11 not shown in drawing

ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2
ISO 2768-mK-E EN ISO 15614-1/2 10619 kg
B ASME Section IX B
E02 M02 E05
TIGHTENING OF BOLTS
ALL BOLTS SLIGHTLY OILED
Excerpt from HL/TP-15 0 17.04.2012 Issued for Construction OFI SGIN ROEK
Torque [Nm] Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.
Size Grade 8.8, Grade 10.9, A4-80 This doc ument contains proprietary and confidential information w hich
this inform ation to others is not perm itted w ithout the expres s written
M10 50 56 44 consent of National Oilw ell N orw ay AS. T his docum ent is to be returned
M12 87 98 76 to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS upon request and in any event upon Servicebox 401, Lundsiden
M14 137 156 121
Title:
M16 211 238 187
M18 294 332 260 Assembly Drawing
M03 M04 M05 M20 412 465 364
40m3 Day tank
M22 554 626 490
M24 712 804 629 Seadrill West Jupiter
A M27 1028 1161 909 Scale: Projection: Size: Main Part: A
M30 1402 1582 1240 1:20 A1
M33 1894 2133 1670 Drawing Number: Sheet: Revision:
M36 2440 2761 2160
M39 3135 3543 2770 G1280-DP45-A0004 1/1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Customer Parts List
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 XDP45S0043 DP45-S0043
01
Day Tank 40m3;Ø4000 - Conical bottom, 1mm
10155,00
1 XBSS0002 BS-S0002
02
1 169521
E01
3,50 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 0-10BAR, 4-20mA
1 157279
E02
3 209723
E03
60,00 LOAD CELL ASSEMBLY 50T
1 161588
E04
1 157480
E05
1 157269
E06
1 159794
H01
4 150449
H02
1 214252 BS-S0002
M01
3 154742
M02
12 154944
M03
24 26556
M04
0,01 WASHER, M16
24 26644
M05
0,03 NUT, M16

Customer Parts List
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
12 26558
M06
0,02 WASHER, M20
12 25174
M07
1 175211
M08
0,48
QUARDRAT
1 190997
M09
4 25217
M10
4 14837
M11
0,00 WASHER, M06, A4-80
1 202940
M12
1 202939
M13
1 202873
M14
1 211738
M15

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
n4000
H SECTION A-A H
A
DETAIL D
01
DETAIL C DETAIL E
G G
02
M09
5223
F DETAIL B F
E M08 E
230
Earth boss
A
DETAIL C ( 1 : 10 ) DETAIL A
DETAIL B ( 1 : 10 )
D D
H02
DETAIL A ( 1 : 10 )
M01
E03
42
98
M06 M07 GENERAL NOTES:
C C
DETAIL E ( 1 : 10 ) - For installation of tank accessories ref. installation
DETAIL D ( 1 : 10 )
H01 M02 procedure for Bulk System doc. G1280-Z-KA-003
- Pos. E04, M10 and M11 not shown in drawing
M03 M04 M05 E01 M02 E06
M03 M04 M05 M12

ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2
ISO 2768-mK-E EN ISO 15614-1/2 10619 kg
B M13 ASME Section IX B
TIGHTENING OF BOLTS
M14 ALL BOLTS SLIGHTLY OILED
Torque [Nm] 0 17.04.2012 Issued for Construction OFI SGIN ROEK
Size Grade 8.8, Grade 10.9, A4-80 Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.
M15 HDG Phosphated This doc ument contains proprietary and confidential information w hich
M8 26 28 22
E02 M02 E05 M10 50 56 44
M12 87 98 76 consent of National Oilw ell N orw ay AS. T his docum ent is to be returned
to National Oilw ell N orw ay AS upon request and in any event upon Servicebox 401, Lundsiden
M14 137 156 121 com pletion of the use for w hich it w as loaned. N-4604 Kristiansand, Norway
M16 211 238 187 Title:
M18 294 332 260
M03 M04 M05 M22
M24
554
712
626
804
490
629
40m3 Day tank
M33 1894 2133 1670 1:20 A1
M39 3135 3543 2770
G1280-DP45-A0007 1/1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Customer Parts List
Revision: 0 Bulk Tanks 8x 113m3
Item No: XG1280DP45A0013 Complete Assembly
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
4 XDP45S0040 DP45-S0040
01 Bulk Tank 113m3;Ø3700 - Conical bottom,
18607,00 1mm CA;STRUCTURAL STEEL DETAIL
DRAWING
4 XDP45S0041 DP45-S0041
02 Bulk Tank 113m3;Ø3700 - Conical bottom,
18607,00 1mm CA;STRUCTURAL STEEL DETAIL
DRAWING
2 XDP45S0027 DP45-S0027
03
Bulk Tank Platform;;STRUCTURAL STEEL
1927,00
DETAIL DRAWING
2 XDP45S0031 DP45-S0031
04
Bulk Tank Platform;;STRUCTURAL STEEL
1927,00
DETAIL DRAWING
4 XDP45S0028 DP45-S0028
05
37,60 Frame for Bulk Platform;;DETAIL DRAWING
8 XBSS0002 BS-S0002
06
8 XBSS0004 BS-S0004
07
267,00 Manway 24" Hinged;;STEEL ASSEMBLY
2 XDP45S0036 DP45-S0036
08
1927,00 Bulk Tank Platform;;STEEL ASSEMBLY
2 XDP45S0037 DP45-S0037
09
1927,00 Bulk Tank Platform;;STEEL ASSEMBLY
32 209385
E01
195,00 LOAD CELL ASSEMBLY 100T, EExnA
8 157479
E02
8 192895
E03
8 161587
E04
8 157480
E05

Customer Parts List
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
8 157482
E06
2,00 FLANGE FOR VEGAFLEX 61/VEGGBAR 54
8 159794
H01
32 150449
H02
16 214252 BS-S0002/BS-S0004
M01
24 154742
M02
96 154944
M03
192 26644
M04
0,03 NUT, M16
192 26556
M05
0,01 WASHER, M16
192 25187
M06
192 26560
M07
0,04 WASHER, M24
32 25217
M08
32 14837
M09
0,00 WASHER, M06, A4-80
8 175212
M10
1,30
QUARDRAT
8 190997
M11
16 202940
M12

Customer Parts List
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
16 202939
M13
16 202873
M14
16 211738
M15

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A SECTION A-A DETAIL D

H DETAIL F H
05
09
01
01
DETAIL E
05
04
01
09
G G
01 04
3D21401D 3D21301C
13393
08
07 Note 1
05
F F
03
DETAIL A DETAIL C
DETAIL B A
DETAIL H ( 1 : 10 )
DETAIL B ( 1 : 10 ) DETAIL A ( 1 : 10 ) Note 1 08 05
E
Note 3 Note 2 E
M10 Note 1
M14 03
M12
M15
M13 DETAIL G
240
02
E01
M06 M07 Earth Boss
D M11 Note 1 D
02
DETAIL C ( 1 : 10 )
Note 3
06 Note 1
3D21401A 3D21401B 3D21401C 3D21401D H02
DETAIL E ( 1 : 10 )
02
M02 E05 E02 Note 1 M03 M04 M05

4287 TYP. DETAIL H
02
Notes:
C M03 M04 M05 C
1. Typical for all tanks
4202 TYP.
DETAIL G ( 1 : 10 ) 2. Typical for all tanks, 2 per tank.

3. Typical for all tanks, 4 per tank.
Note 1 4. Typical for all pos 05.
5. Pos. E04, M08 and M09 not shown
on drawing. To be installed on client
M02 E06 E03 structure.
M12
DETAIL D ( 1 : 10 ) Tolerances except as noted Welding except as noted Total weight
ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2
M13 ISO 2768-mK-E EN ISO 15614-1/2 175178
B DETAIL F ( 1 : 10 ) ASME Section IX kg B
Note 1
M14
M03 M04 M05
Note 2 M01 M15 This doc ument contains proprietary and confidential information w hich
Title:
3D21302 3D21301A 3D21301B Assembly Drawing

3D21301C Bulk Tanks 8x 113m3
H01 M02 Complete Assembly
1:75 A1
G1280-DP45-A0013 1/1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Customer Parts List
Revision: 0 Dust collector & Cyclone
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 XDP46S0017 DP46-S0017
01
737,00 Dust Collector Tank 2m3;;DETAIL DRAWING
1 XDP46S0018 DP46-S0018
02
200,00 Cyclone 5";;DETAIL DRAWING
1 XDP46S0016 DP46-S0016
03
64,00 Cyclone Support;;DETAIL DRAWING
1 XBSS0002 BS-S0002
04
1 190997
05
1 180209
06
1 202940
07
1 202871
08
1 202873
09
1 202939
10
1 192874
E01
1 192895
E02
1 157480
E03
1 157269
E04
1 159794
H01

Customer Parts List
Revision: 0 Dust collector & Cyclone
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 216314
H02
30,00 KNIFE GATE VALVE 5" ASSY ON/OFF EEXME
1 214252 BS-S0002
M01
3 154742
M02
2 157903
M03
8 214356
M04
0,13 BOLT, HEX, 3/4" X 035MM
4 154940
M05
16 26558
M06
0,02 WASHER, M20
8 26646
M07
0,06 NUT, M20
12 154944
M08
24 26644
M09
0,03 NUT, M16
24 26556
M10
0,01 WASHER, M16

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
E ( 1:10 )
02
G 07 G
08
03
Earth cable between cyclone and collector tank.
25mm2 copper cable including cable shoes, 09
50 cm (cut to fit). Builder supply
10
3919
F F
E 01
04
E E
A(1:5) 05
M06 M04 06
3
Tighten the 8x 4 " UNC tap bolts gently
Do not use normal torque value
M01
D D
H02
M05 M07 M06
M02 E03 E01
H01 M02
M10 M09 M08
C C
GENERAL NOTES:
M08 M09 M10 - For installation of accessories ref. installation
instructions for Bulk System, doc. G1280-Z-KA-003
1474
M03 Tolerances except as noted Welding except as noted Total weight

ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2
ISO 2768-mK-E EN ISO 15614-1/2 1315 kg
B ASME Section IX B
TIGHTENING OF BOLTS
M02 E04 E02 ALL BOLTS SLIGHTLY OILED
Torque [Nm]
Size Grade 8.8, Grade 10.9, A4-80 0 17.04.2012 Issued for Construction OFI SGIN ROEK
HDG Phosphated Rev. Date Description Made Checked Appr.
M10 M09 M08 M8 26 28 22 This doc ument contains proprietary and confidential information w hich
belongs to National Oilw ell Varco Norw ay AS. It is loaned for lim ited
M10 50 56 44 purposes only and rem ains the property of N ational Oilwell Varco N orw ay
M12 87 98 76 AS. R eproduc tion, in w hole or in part, or use of this des ign or distribution
of this information to others is not perm itted without the expres s written
M14 137 156 121 consent of National Oilw ell Varco Norw ay AS. T his document is to be
M16 211 238 187 returned to National O ilw ell Varco Norw ay A S upon request and in any Servicebox 401, Lundsiden
event upon com pletion of the use for w hich it w as loaned. N-4604 Kristiansand, Norway
M18 294 332 260 Title:
1872 M20 412 465 364
M24
M27
712
1028
804
1161
629
909
Dust collector & Cyclone
M36 2440 2761 2160 1:15 A1
G1280-DP46-A0001 1/1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Customer Parts List
Revision: 0 Rock Catcher 5"
Other Doc No:
Project:
Customer:

Pos
1 XDP47S0001 DP47-S0001
01
35,00 Rock Catcher Housing 5";;DETAIL DRAWING
1 XDP47S0002 DP47-S0002
02
7,30 Rock Catcher Filter;Typical;DETAIL DRAWING
1 XDP47S0003 DP47-S0003
03
Rock Catcher End Cap 8";Typical;DETAIL
6,40
DRAWING
1 205361
04
5,60 8" VICTAULIC FLEXIBLE COUPLING 75
1 202940
05
Total weight 54,30

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
H H
355
G B G
04
05
B 03
433
F F
02
900
E E
01
D D
263
C C
GENERAL NOTES
-Ref. Seperate part list
NOTES
1. Distance between filter and cap to be 3mm to 7mm

B ISO 13920-AE EN 287-1/2 B
ISO 2768-mK-E EN ISO 15614-1/2 54 kg
B-B ( 1 : 4 )
(Note 1)

Title:
Assembly Drawing
Rock Catcher 5"
1:4 A1
G1280-DP47-A0001 1/1 0
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title

Section
8 SUB Vendor User Manuals

8.3 Level Switch
8.4 Load Cell
8.5 Pressure Gauge
8.6 Butterfly Valve
8.7 Ball Valve
8.9 Sampling Unit
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Data Sheet, Kunkle PSV 6000 series 74850976 1
Installations- & Operating Instructions, Kunkle PSV 6000 series 22320650 1
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Operating Instructions, Vegabar 54 74887579 0
Operating Instructions, Vegabar 54 80140190 0
Plicscom set up instructions
Safety Manual, Vegabar 54 71279908 0
www.nov.com
VEGABAR 54
4 … 20 mA/HART
Process pressure/
Hydrostatic
Contents
Contents
1 About this document
1.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Symbolism used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 For your safety

2.1 Authorised personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.2 Appropriate use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.3 Warning about misuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.4 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.5 CE conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.6 Safety approval markings and safety tips . . . .. 6
2.7 Fulfilling NAMUR recommendations . . . . . . . .. 6
2.8 SIL conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7
2.9 Safety instructions for Ex areas . . . . . . . . . . .. 7
2.10 Environmental instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7
3 Product description
3.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8
3.2 Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9
3.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.4 Packaging, transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2 Mounting steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.3 Mounting steps, remote housing . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5 Connecting to power supply

5.1 Preparing the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.2 Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.3 Wiring plan, single chamber housing. . . . . . . . . 20
5.4 Wiring plan, double chamber housing . . . . . . . . 21
5.5 Wiring plan - version IP 66/IP 68, 1 bar. . . . . . . 23
5.6 Wiring plan, remote housing with version IP 68 . 24
5.7 Switch on phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6 Set up with the indicating and adjustment module

PLICSCOM
6.1 Short description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 27
29694-EN-070927
6.2 Insert indicating and adjustment module . . . . .. 27

6.3 Adjustment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 29
6.4 Setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 30
2 VEGABAR 54 - 4 … 20 mA/HART
Contents
6.5 Menu schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

6.6 Saving the parameter adjustment data . . . . . . . 41
7 Setup with PACTware™ and other adjustment

programs
7.1 Connect the PC via VEGACONNECT 3 . . . . .. 42
7.2 Connect the PC via VEGACONNECT 4 . . . . .. 44
7.3 Parameter adjustment with PACTware™. . . . .. 45
7.4 Parameter adjustment with AMS™ and PDM .. 46
7.5 Saving the parameter adjustment data . . . . . .. 46
8 Maintenance and fault rectification

8.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 47
8.2 Remove interferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 47
8.3 Exchange of the electronics module . . . . . . . .. 49
8.4 Instrument repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 49
9 Dismounting
9.1 Dismounting steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
9.2 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
10 Supplement
10.1 Technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
10.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Supplementary documentation
Information:
Supplementary documents appropriate to the ordered version
come with the delivery. You can find them listed in chapter
"Product description".
Instructions manuals for accessories and replacement

parts
Tip:
To ensure reliable setup and operation of your instrument, we
offer accessories and replacement parts. The corresponding
instructions manuals are:
29694-EN-070927
l 32036 - Welded socket and seals

l 27720 - VEGADIS 61
l 30175 - Electronics module VEGABAR series 50 and 60
VEGABAR 54 - 4 … 20 mA/HART 3
About this document

1.1 Function
This operating instructions manual provides all the information
you need for mounting, connection and setup as well as
important instructions for maintenance and fault rectification.
Please read this information before putting the instrument into
operation and keep this manual accessible in the immediate
vicinity of the device.
1.2 Target group

This operating instructions manual is directed to trained,
qualified personnel. The contents of this manual should be
made available to these personnel and put into practice by
them.
1.3 Symbolism used

Information, tip, note
This symbol indicates helpful additional information.
Caution: If this warning is ignored, faults or malfunc-

tions can result.
Warning: If this warning is ignored, injury to persons and/or
serious damage to the instrument can result.
Danger: If this warning is ignored, serious injury to persons
and/or destruction of the instrument can result.
Ex applications
This symbol indicates special instructions for Ex applications.
l List
The dot set in front indicates a list with no implied sequence.
à Action
This arrow indicates a single action.
1 Sequence
Numbers set in front indicate successive steps in a procedure.
29694-EN-070927
For your safety
2 For your safety

2.1 Authorised personnel
All operations described in this operating instructions manual
must be carried out only by trained specialist personnel
authorised by the operator.
During work on and with the device the required personal
protection equipment must always be worn.
2.2 Appropriate use

VEGABAR 54 is a pressure transmitter for measurement of
gauge pressure, absolute pressure and vacuum.
You can find detailed information on the application range in
chapter "Product description".
Operational reliability is ensured only if the instrument is
properly used according to the specifications in the operating
instructions manual as well as possible supplementary
instructions.
Due to safety and warranty reasons, any invasive work on the
device beyond that described in the operating instructions
manual may be carried out only by personnel authorised by the
manufacturer. Arbitrary conversions or modifications are
explicitly forbidden.
2.3 Warning about misuse

Inappropriate or incorrect use of the instrument can give rise to
application-specific hazards, e.g. vessel overfill or damage to
system components through incorrect mounting or adjustment.
2.4 General safety instructions

This is a high-tech instrument requiring the strict observance of
standard regulations and guidelines. The user must take note
of the safety instructions in this operating instructions manual,
the country-specific installation standards as well as all
prevailing safety regulations and accident prevention rules.
The instrument must only be operated in a technically flawless
29694-EN-070927
and reliable condition. The operator is responsible for trouble-

free operation of the instrument.
For your safety
During the entire duration of use, the user is obliged to

determine the compliance of the required occupational safety
measures with the current valid rules and regulations and also
take note of new regulations.
2.5 CE conformity
VEGABAR 54 is in CE conformity with EMC (89/336/EWG),
fulfils NAMUR recommendation NE 21 and is in CE conformity
with LVD (73/23/EWG).
Conformity has been judged according to the following
standards:
l EMC:
- Emission EN 61326: 2004 (class B)
- Susceptibility EN 61326: 2004 including supplement A
l LVD: EN 61010-1: 2001
VEGABAR 54 is not subject to the pressure device guideline.1)
2.6 Safety approval markings and safety tips

The safety approval markings and safety tips on the device
must be observed.
2.7 Fulfilling NAMUR recommendations

With regard to interference resistance and interference
emission, VEGABAR 54 fulfils NAMUR recommendation
NE 21.
VEGABAR 54 and its indicating and adjustment components
fulfill NAMUR recommendation NE 53 in respect to compat-
ibility. VEGA instruments are generally upward and downward
compatible:
l Sensor software to DTM VEGABAR 54 HART, PA or FF
l DTM VEGABAR 54 for adjustment software PACTware™
l Indicating and adjustment module for sensor software
The parameter adjustment of the basic sensor functions is
independent of the software version. The range of available
functions depends on the respective software version of the
individual components.
29694-EN-070927
The software version of VEGABAR 54 can be determined as

follows:
1) Due to the flush diaphragm, no own pressure compartment is formed.
For your safety
l via PACTware™
l on the type label of the electronics
l via the indicating and adjustment module
You can view all software histories on our website www.vega.
com. Make use of this advantage and get registered for update
information via e-mail.
2.8 SIL conformity

VEGABAR 54 fulfills the requirements for functional safety
according to IEC 61508/IEC 61511. You can find further
information in the Safety Manual "VEGABAR series 50 and 60
- 4 … 20 mA/HART".
2.9 Safety instructions for Ex areas

Please note the Ex-specific safety information for installation
and operation in Ex areas. These safety instructions are part of
the operating instructions manual and come with the Ex-
approved instruments.
2.10 Environmental instructions

Protection of the environment is one of our most important
duties. That is why we have introduced an environment
management system with the goal of continuously improving
company environmental protection. The environment man-
agement system is certified according to DIN EN ISO 14001.
Please help us fulfil this obligation by observing the environ-
mental instructions in this manual:
l Chapter "Packaging, transport and storage"
l Chapter "Disposal"
29694-EN-070927
Product description
3.1 Configuration
Scope of delivery The scope of delivery encompasses:
l VEGABAR 54 pressure transmitter
l Documentation
- this operating instructions manual
- Test certificate for pressure transmitters
- Safety Manual (SIL according to IEC 61508/IEC 61511)
"VEGABAR series 50 and 60 4 … 20 mA/HART"
- Operating instructions manual "Indicating and adjust-
ment module" (optional)
- Supplementary instructions manual - 31708 "Heating
for indicating and adjustment module" (optional)
- Supplementary instructions manual "Plug connector for
continuously measuring sensors" (optional)
- Ex-specific "Safety instructions" (with Ex-versions)
- if necessary, further certificates
Components VEGABAR 54 consists of the following components:

l Process fitting with measuring cell
l Housing with electronics, optionally available with plug
connector
l Housing cover, optionally available with indicating and
adjustment module
The components are available in different versions.
Fig. 1: Example of a VEGABAR 54 with process fitting G1 A and plastic housing

1 Housing cover with integrated indicating and adjustment module (optional)
2 Housing with electronics
29694-EN-070927
3 Process fitting with measuring cell

Type label The type label contains the most important data for identi-
fication and use of the instrument:
Product description
l Article number
l Serial number
l Technical data
l Article numbers, documentation
The serial number allows you to access the delivery data of the
instrument via "www.vega.com", "VEGA Tools" and "serial
number search". You can also find the serial number inside the
instrument.
3.2 Principle of operation

Area of application VEGABAR 54 is a pressure transmitter for use in the paper,
food processing and pharmaceutical industries as well as in
water/sewage water plants. Depending on the version, it is
used for level, gauge, absolute pressure or vacuum meas-
urement. Measured products are gases, vapours and liquids,
also those containing abrasive substances.
Functional principle The sensor element is the CERTEC® measuring cell with
flush, abrasion resistant ceramic diaphragm. The hydrostatic
pressure of the medium or the process pressure causes a
capacitance change in the measuring cell via the diaphragm.
This change is converted into an appropriate output signal and
outputted as measured value.
The CERTEC® measuring cell is also equipped with a
temperature sensor. The temperature value can be displayed
via the indicating and adjustment module or processed via the
signal output.
Supply Two-wire electronics 4 … 20 mA/HART for power supply and

measured value transmission over the same cable.
The supply voltage range can differ depending on the
instrument version.
The data for voltage supply are specified in chapter "Technical
data".
The backlight of the indicating and adjustment module is
powered by the sensor. The prerequisite for this is a supply
voltage at a certain level. The exact voltage specifications are
stated in chapter "Technical data".
29694-EN-070927
The optional heating requires its own power supply. You can
find further details in the supplementary instructions manual
"Heating for indicating and adjustment module".
Product description
This function is generally not available for approved instru-

ments.
3.3 Operation
VEGABAR 54 can be adjusted with different adjustment
media:
l with indicating and adjustment module
l with the suitable VEGA DTM in conjunction with an
adjustment software according to the FDT/DTM standard,
e.g. PACTware™ and PC
l with manufacturer-specific adjustment programs AMS™ or
PDM
l with a HART handheld
The entered parameters are generally saved in VEGABAR 54,
optionally also in the indicating and adjustment module or in
PACTware™.
3.4 Packaging, transport and storage

Packaging Your instrument was protected by packaging during transport.
Its capacity to handle normal loads during transport is assured
by a test according to DIN EN 24180.
The packaging of standard instruments consists of environ-
ment-friendly, recyclable cardboard. For special versions, PE
foam or PE foil is also used. Dispose of the packaging material
via specialised recycling companies.
Transport Transport must be carried out under consideration of the notes

on the transport packaging. Nonobservance of these instruc-
tions can cause damage to the device.
Transport inspection The delivery must be checked for completeness and possible
transit damage immediately at receipt. Ascertained transit
damage or concealed defects must be appropriately dealt
with.
Storage Up to the time of installation, the packages must be left closed

and stored according to the orientation and storage markings
on the outside.
29694-EN-070927
Unless otherwise indicated, the packages must be stored only

under the following conditions:
l Not in the open
Product description
l Dry and dust free

l Not exposed to corrosive media
l Protected against solar radiation
l Avoiding mechanical shock and vibration
Storage and transport tem- l Storage and transport temperature see "Supplement -
perature Technical data - Ambient conditions"
l Relative humidity 20 … 85 %
29694-EN-070927
Mounting
4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions
Materials, wetted parts Make sure that the wetted parts of the instrument, especially
the seal and process fitting, are suitable for the existing
process conditions such as pressure, temperature etc. as well
as the chemical properties of the medium.
You can find the specifications in chapter "Technical data".
Installation position Select an installation position you can easily reach for
mounting and connecting as well as later retrofitting of an
indicating and adjustment module. The housing can be rotated
by 330° without the use of any tools. You can also install the
indicating and adjustment module in four different positions
(each displaced by 90°).
Moisture Use the recommended cables (see chapter "Connecting to

power supply") and tighten the cable gland.
You can give your VEGABAR 54 additional protection against
moisture penetration by leading the connection cable down-
ward in front of the cable entry. Rain and condensation water
can thus drain off. This applies mainly to outdoor mounting,
areas where high humidity is expected (e.g. from cleaning
processes) or cooled or heated vessels.
Fig. 2: Measures against moisture penetration
Pressure compensation For instruments with gauge pressure measuring ranges, the
atmospheric pressure compensation of the measuring cell is
29694-EN-070927
realised via a filter element in the socket of the electronics

housing. Pressure compensation of the electronics housing is
realised via an additional filter element in the area of the cable
entries.
Mounting
1 1 1
2 2 2
Fig. 3: Position of the filter elements

1 Filter element for ventilation of the electronics housing
2 Filter element for pressure compensation of the measuring cell
Information:
Make sure that the filter elements are always free of buildup
during operation. A pressure washer must not be used for
cleaning.
With instrument versions in protection IP 66/68, 1 bar,

pressure compensation is realised via the capillaries in the
permanently connected cable. The filter elements are replaced
by blind stoppers.
Instruments with absolute pressure measuring ranges have no
vent filter, the opening is closed with a blind stopper.
Temperature limits Higher process temperatures often mean also higher ambient
temperatures. Make sure that the upper temperature limits
stated in chapter "Technical data" for the environment of the
electronics housing and connection cable are not exceeded.
29694-EN-070927
Mounting
Fig. 4: Temperature ranges

1 Process temperature
2 Ambient temperature
4.2 Mounting steps

Welding the socket For mounting VEGABAR 54, a welded socket is required. You
can find these components in the supplementary instructions
manual "Welded socket and accessory".
Sealing/Screwing in threaded Seal the thread with teflon, hemp or a similar resistant seal
versions material on the process fitting thread 1½ NPT.
à Screw VEGABAR 54 into the welded socket. Tighten the
hexagon on the process fitting with a suitable wrench.
Wrench size, see chapter "Dimensions".
Warning:
The housing must not be used to screw the instrument in!
Applying tightening force can damage internal parts of the
housing.
Sealing/Screwing in flange Seal the flange connections according to DIN/ANSI with a

versions suitable, resistant seal and mount VEGABAR 54 with suitable
screws.
Mounting, socket versions Use the seal corresponding to the instrument.

à Shift VEGABAR 54 with PMC connection into the socket
and fasten with two screws M8x10.
29694-EN-070927
4.3 Mounting steps, remote housing

Wall mounting 1 Mark the holes according to the following drilling template
Mounting
2 Depending on the mounting surface, fasten the wall

mounting plate with 4 screws
90mm (3 35/64")
70mm (2 3/4") 8mm

(5/16")
3mm
(1/8")
m
,5m )
R3 9 / 64"
(
110mm (4 21/64")
93mm (3 21/32")
Fig. 5: Drilling template - wall mounting plate
Tip:
Mount the wall mounting plate so that the cable entry of the
socket housing points downward. The socket housing can be
displaced by 180° to the wall mounting plate.
Warning:
The four screws for the socket housing must only be hand-
screwed. A torque >5 Nm can damage the wall mounting plate.
29694-EN-070927
Connecting to power supply

5.1 Preparing the connection
Note safety instructions Always keep in mind the following safety instructions:
l Connect only in the complete absence of line voltage
l If overvoltage surges are expected, overvoltage arresters
should be installed
Tip:
We recommend VEGA overvoltage arresters B 63-48 and
ÜSB 62-36G.X.
Take note of safety In hazardous areas you should take note of the appropriate
instructions for Ex regulations, conformity and type approval certificates of the
applications sensors and power supply units.
Select power supply Power supply and current signal are carried on the same two-
wire cable. The voltage supply range can differ depending on
the instrument version.
data".
Provide a reliable separation between the supply circuit and
the mains circuits according to DIN VDE 0106 part 101. The
VEGA power supply units VEGATRENN 149A Ex, VEGAS-
TAB 690 as well as all VEGAMETs meet this requirement.
Bear in mind the following factors regarding supply voltage:
l Output voltage of the power supply unit can be lower under
nominal load (with a sensor current of 20.5 mA or 22 mA in
case of fault message)
l Influence of additional instruments in the circuit (see load
values in chapter "Technical data").
Selecting connection cable Connection is made with standard two-wire cable without
screen. An outer cable diameter of 5 … 9 mm ensures the seal
effect of the cable entry.
If electromagnetic interference is expected which is above the
test values of EN 61326 for industrial areas, screened cable
should be used. In HART multidrop mode the use of screened
29694-EN-070927
cable is generally recommended.
Cable gland ½ NPT On the instrument with cable gland ½ NPT and plastic housing,
a metal ½" threaded insert is moulded in the plastic housing.
Caution:
No grease should be used when screwing the NPT cable
gland or steel tube into the threaded insert. Standard grease
can contain additives that corrode the connection between
threaded insert and housing. This would influence the stability
of the connection and the tightness of the housing.
Cable screen and grounding If screened cable is necessary, connect the cable screen on
both ends to ground potential. In the sensor, the screen must
be connected directly to the internal ground terminal. The
ground terminal on the outside of the housing must be
connected to the potential equalisation (low impedance).
If potential equalisation currents are expected, the connection
on the processing side must be made via a ceramic capacitor
(e.g. 1 nF, 1500 V). The low frequency potential equalisation
currents are thus suppressed, but the protective effect against
high frequency interference signals remains.
Select connection Take note of the corresponding installation regulations for Ex

cable for Ex applica- applications. In particular, make sure that no potential equal-
tions isation currents flow over the cable screen. In case of
grounding on both sides this can be achieved by the use of a
capacitor or a separate potential equalisation.
5.2 Connection procedure

Single/Double chamber hous- Proceed as follows:
ing
1 Unscrew the housing cover
2 If an indicating and adjustment module is installed, remove
it by turning it slightly to the left.
3 Loosen compression nut of the cable entry
4 Remove approx. 10 cm of the cable mantle, strip approx.
1 cm insulation from the individual wires
5 Insert the cable into the sensor through the cable entry
6 Lift the opening levers of the terminals with a screwdriver
(see following illustration)
7 Insert the wire ends into the open terminals according to
the wiring plan
29694-EN-070927
8 Press down the opening levers of the terminals, you will

hear the terminal spring closing
9 Check the hold of the wires in the terminals by lightly

pulling on them
10 Connect the screen to the internal ground terminal and the
external ground terminal to potential equalisation
11 Tighten the compression nut of the cable entry. The seal
ring must completely encircle the cable
12 Screw the housing cover on
The electrical connection is finished.
Fig. 6: Connection steps 6 and 7

IP 68 version with remote Proceed as follows:
housing
1 Loosen the four screws on the housing socket with an Allen
key size 4
29694-EN-070927
2 Remove the housing socket from the mounting plate
3
1
Fig. 7: Components of the remote housing for plics® devices

1 Screws
2 Wall mounting plate
3 Cable gland
3 Lead the connection cable through the cable gland on the

housing socket2)
Information:
The cable gland can be mounted in three positions each
displaced by 90°. Simply exchange the cable gland against the
blind plug in the suitable thread opening.
4 Connect the wire ends as described under "Single/Double

chamber housing" according to the numbering
5 Connect the screen to the internal ground terminal and the
external ground terminal on top of the housing to potential
equalisation
7 Attach the mounting plate again and tighten the screws
The electrical connection of the sensor to the remote housing
is finished.
29694-EN-070927
2) The connection cable is already preconfectioned. If necessary, shorten it to

the requested length, cut the breather capillaries clean. Remove approx.
5 cm of the cable mantle, strip approx. 1 cm insulation from the ends of the
individual wires. After shortening the cable, fasten the type plate with sup-
port back onto the cable.
5.3 Wiring plan, single chamber housing
The following illustrations apply to the non-Ex as well as to the

Ex ia version.
Housing overview
1 2 3
Fig. 8: Material versions, single chamber housing

1 Plastic
2 Aluminium
3 Stainless steel
4 Special steel casting
Electronics and connection

compartment
Display
I²C 1
1 2 5 6 7 8
4 2
Fig. 9: Electronics and connection compartment, single chamber housing

1 Plug connector for VEGACONNECT (I²C interface)
2 Spring-loaded terminals for connection of the external indication VEGADIS
61
29694-EN-070927
3 Ground terminal for connection of the cable screen

4 Spring-loaded terminals for voltage supply
Wiring plan
Display
I2C
1 2 5 6 7 8
Fig. 10: Wiring plan, single chamber housing

1 Voltage supply/Signal output
5.4 Wiring plan, double chamber housing

Ex ia version.
Housing overview
1 2 3 5
4 6
Fig. 11: Double chamber housing

1 Housing cover, connection compartment
2 Blind stopper or plug M12x1 for VEGADIS 61 (option)
3 Housing cover, electronics compartment
4 Filter element for pressure compensation of the electronics housing
5 Filter element for pressure compensation of the measuring cell
6 Cable entry or plug
29694-EN-070927
Electronics compartment
Display
1
I2C
1 2 5 6 7 8
3 2
Fig. 12: Electronics compartment, double chamber housing

2 Internal connection cable to the connection compartment
3 Terminals for VEGADIS 61
Connection compartment
Display
1 2 I²C
Fig. 13: Connection compartment, double chamber housing

29694-EN-070927
Wiring plan
I2C
1 2
Fig. 14: Wiring plan, double chamber housing

1 Voltage supply/Signal output
5.5 Wiring plan - version IP 66/IP 68, 1 bar

This version is only available for instruments with absolute
pressure measuring ranges.
Wire assignment, connection

cable +
1
-
2
Fig. 15: Wire assignment, connection cable

1 brown (+) and blue (-) to power supply or to the processing system
2 Screen
29694-EN-070927
5.6 Wiring plan, remote housing with version IP 68

Overview
Fig. 16: VEGABAR 54 in IP 68 version 25 bar, non-Ex and axial cable outlet,
remote housing
Electronics and connection

compartment
Display
1
I²C
5 1 2 5 6 7 8
Fig. 17: Electronics and connection compartment

29694-EN-070927
2 Spring-loaded terminals for connection of the external indication VEGADIS

61
3 Cable gland to VEGABAR
Terminal compartment, hous-

ing socket
1 2 3 4
2 4
1 3
5 6
Fig. 18: Connection of the sensor in the housing socket

1 Brown
2 Blue
3 Yellow
4 White
5 Screen
6 Breather capillaries
Wiring plan, remote elec-

tronics
Display
I2C
1 2 5 6 7 8
Fig. 19: Wiring plan, remote electronics

1 Voltage supply
29694-EN-070927
5.7 Switch on phase

Switch on phase After connecting VEGABAR 54 to power supply or after a
voltage recurrence, the instrument carries out a self-check for
approx. 30 seconds:
l Internal check of the electronics
l Indication of the instrument type, the firmware as well as
the sensor TAGs (sensor designation)
l Output signal jumps briefly (approx. 10 seconds) to the set
fault current
Then the corresponding current is outputted to the cable (the
value corresponds to the actual level as well as the settings
already carried out, e.g. factory setting).
29694-EN-070927
Set up with the indicating and adjustment module PLICSCOM
6 Set up with the indicating and

adjustment module PLICSCOM
6.1 Short description

Function/Configuration The indicating and adjustment module is used for measured
value display, adjustment and diagnosis. It can be mounted in
the following housing versions and instruments:
l All sensors of the plics® instrument family, in the single as
well as in the double chamber housing (optionally in the
electronics or connection compartment)
l External indicating and adjustment unit VEGADIS 61
From a hardware version …- 01 or higher of the indicating and
adjustment module resp. …- 02 or higher of the corresponding
sensor electronics, an integrated backlight can be switched on
via the adjustment menu. The hardware version is stated on
the type label of the indicating and adjustment module or the
sensor electronics.
Note:
You will find detailed information on adjustment in the
operating instructions manual of the "Indicating and adjustment
module".
6.2 Insert indicating and adjustment module

Mount/Dismount indicating The indicating and adjustment module can be inserted into the
and adjustment module sensor and removed again at any time. It is not necessary to
interrupt the power supply.
Proceed as follows:
2 Place the indicating and adjustment module in the desired
position on the electronics (you can choose any one of four
different positions - each displaced by 90°)
3 Press the indicating and adjustment module onto the
electronics and turn it to the right until it snaps in.
4 Screw housing cover with inspection window tightly back
on
29694-EN-070927
Removal is carried out in reverse order.

The indicating and adjustment module is powered by the
sensor, an additional connection is not necessary.
Fig. 20: Installation of the indicating and adjustment module

Note:
If you intend to retrofit VEGABAR 54 with an indicating and
adjustment module for continuous measured value indication,
a higher cover with an inspection glass is required.
29694-EN-070927
6.3 Adjustment system
2
1
1.1
Fig. 21: Indicating and adjustment elements

1 LC display
2 Indication of the menu item number
3 Adjustment keys
Key functions l [OK] key:

- move to the menu overview
- confirm selected menu
- Edit parameter
- Save value
l [->] key to select:
- menu change
- list entry
- Select editing position
l [+] key:
- Change value of the parameter
l [ESC] key:
- interrupt input
- jump to the next higher menu
Adjustment system The sensor is adjusted via the four keys of the indicating and
adjustment module. The LC display indicates the individual
menu items. The functions of the individual keys are shown in
the above illustration. Approx. 10 minutes after the last
pressing of a key, an automatic reset to measured value
29694-EN-070927
indication is triggered. Any values not confirmed with [OK] will

not be saved.
6.4 Setup procedure

Address setting HART-Multi- In HART-Multidrop mode (several sensors on one input) the
drop address must be set before continuing with the parameter
adjustment. You will find a detailed description in the operating
instructions manual "Indicating and adjustment module" or in
the online help of PACTware™ or DTM.
HART mode
Standard
Address 0
Level or process pressure VEGABAR 54 can be used for level as well as for process
measurement pressure measurement. Default setting is level measurement.
The mode can be changed in the adjustment menu.
Depending on the application only the respective subchapter
"Level or process pressure measurement" is of importance.
There, you find the individual adjustment steps.
Level measurement
Parameter adjust- Set up VEGABAR 54 in the following sequence:
ment "Level meas-
urement" 1 Selecting adjustment unit/density unit
2 Carry out position correction
3 Carrying out min. adjustment
4 Carrying out max. adjustment
In the menu item "Adjustment unit" you select the physical unit
in which the adjustment should be carried out, e.g. mbar, bar,
psi…
The position correction compensates the influence of the
mounting position or static pressure on the measurement. It
does not influence the adjustment values.
Information:
These steps are not necessary for instruments which are
already preset according to customer specifications!
You can find these data on the type label on the instrument and
in the menu items of the min./max. adjustment.
The indicating and adjustment module enables the adjustmetn
29694-EN-070927
without filling or pressure. Thanks to this, you can carry out

your settings already in the factory without the instrument
having to be installed.
The actual measured value is also displayed in the menu items

for min./max. adjustment.
Selecting adjustment unit/ To switch over to another adjustment unit (in the example from
density unit bar to mbar), proceed as follows:3)
1 Push the [OK] button in the measured value display, the
menu overview is displayed.
▶ Basic adjustment
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info
2 Confirm the menu "Basic adjustment" with [OK], the

menu item "Units of measurement" will be displayed.
Unit of measurement
bar
3 Activate the selection with [OK] and select the requested

unit with [->] (in the example mbar).
4 Confirm with [OK] and move to position correction with [-
>].
The adjustment unit is now changed from bar to mbar.
Information:
When changing over to a height unit (in the example from bar
to m), also the density has to be entered.
Proceed as follows:
unit with [->] (in the example m).
4 Confirm with [OK], the submenu "Density unit" appears.
29694-EN-070927
3) Selection options: mbar, bar, psi, Pa, kPa, MPa, inHg, mmHg, inH2O,
mmH2O, mm, cm, m, in, ft.
Unit of measurement
Density unit
▶ kg/dm³
pcf
5 Select the requested unit, e.g. kg/dm³ with [->] and confirm
with [OK], the submenu "Density" appears.
Unit of measurement
Density
0001000
kg/dm³
6 Enter the requested density value with [->] and [+], confirm
with [OK] and move to position correction with [->].
The adjustment unit is now changed from bar to m.
Carry out position correction Proceed as follows:

1 Activate in the menu item "Position correction" the
selection with [OK].
Position correction
Offset
= P
+0000 mbar
53 mbar
2 Select with [->], e.g. to accept actual measured value.

Position correction
Accept current measured
value?
▶ Accept
Edit
3 Confirm with [OK] and move to min. (zero) adjustment with

[->].
Carrying out min. adjustment Proceed as follows:
1 Edit the % value in the menu item "Min. adjustment" with
[OK].
Min. adjustment
+000.0 %
=
+0000.0 mbar
0000.0 mbar
29694-EN-070927
2 Set the requested % value with [+] and [->].

3 Edit the requested mbar value with [OK].
4 Set the requested mbar value with [+] and [->].

5 Confirm with [+] and move to max. adjustment with [->].
The min. adjustment is finished.
Information:
To adjust with filling, simply enter the indicated actual
measured value. If the adjustment ranges are exceeded, the
message "Outside parameter limits" is displayed. The editing
procedure can be aborted with [ESC] or the displayed limit
value can be accepted with [OK].
Carrying out max. adjustment Proceed as follows:

1 Edit the % value in the menu item "Max. adjustment" with
[OK].
Max. adjustment
+100.0 %
=
+1000.0 mbar
0000.0 mbar
Information:
The displayed pressure for 100 % corresponds to the nominal
measuring range of the sensor (in the above example 1 bar =
1000 mbar).
2 Set the requested % value with [->] and [OK].

5 Confirm with [OK] and move to the menu overview with
[ESC].
The max. adjustment is finished.
Information:
Process pressure measurement

29694-EN-070927

ment "Process pres-
sure measurement" 1 Select application "Process pressure measurement"
2 Select adjustment unit

4 Carry out zero adjustment
5 Carry out span adjustment
psi…
In the menu items "zero" and "span" you determine the span of
the sensor, the span corresponds to the end value.
Information:
in the menu items of the zero/span adjustment.
The actual measured value is displayed in addition to the
menu items for zero/span adjustment.
Select application "Process VEGABAR 54 is preset to application "Level measurement".

pressure measurement" Proceed as follows when switching over to application
"Process pressure measurement":
2 Select the menu "Service " with [->] and confirm with [OK]
.
Basic adjustment
Display
Diagnostics
▶ Service
Info
3 Select the menu item "Application" with [->] and edit with
[OK].
29694-EN-070927
Warning:
Note the warning: "Output can change".
4 Select with [->] "OK" and confirm with [OK].

5 Select "Process pressure" from the list and confirm with
[OK].
Select adjustment unit To switch over to another adjustment unit (in the example from
bar to mbar), proceed as follows:4)
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info

Unit of measurement
bar

>].

Position correction
Offset
= P
+0000 mbar
53 mbar

Position correction
value?
▶ Accept
29694-EN-070927
Edit
mmH2O.

[->].
Carry out zero adjustment Proceed as follows:
1 Edit the mbar value in the menu item "zero" with [OK].
Zero adjustment
000.0 %
= P
+0000.0 mbar
0000.0 mbar

3 Confirm with [+] and move to span adjustment with [->].
The zero adjustment is finished.
Information:
The zero adjustment shifts the value of the span adjustment.
The span, i.e. the difference between these values, however,
remains unchanged.
Information:
To adjust with pressure, simply enter the indicated actual
Carry out span adjustment Proceed as follows:

1 Edit the mbar value in the menu item "span" with [OK].
Span adjustment
100.0 %
= P
+1000.0 mbar
0000.0 mbar
Information:
1000 mbar).
2 Set the requested mbar value with [->] and [OK].

29694-EN-070927

[ESC].
The span adjustment is finished.
Information:
Copy sensor data This function enables reading out parameter adjustment data
as well as writing parameter adjustment data into the sensor
via the indicating and adjustment module. A description of the
function is available in the operating instructions manual
"Indicating and adjustment module".
The following data are read out or written with this function:
l Measured value presentation
l Adjustment
l Damping
l Linearisation curve
l Sensor-TAG
l Displayed value
l Display unit
l Scaling
l Current output
l Unit of measurement
l Language
The following safety-relevant data are not read out or written:
l SIL
l HART mode
l PIN
l Application
Copy sensor data
Copy sensor data?
Reset Basic adjustment

If the "Reset" is carried out, the sensor resets the values of the
following functions to the reset vales (see chart):
Function Reset value

29694-EN-070927
Zero/Min. adjustment 0 mbar
Span/Max. adjustment mbar/bar value corresponding to the

nominal measuring range
Damping 1s
Linearisation linear
Sensor-TAG Sensor
Displayed value bar
Current output - characteristics 4 … 20 mA
Current output - max. current 20 mA
Current output - min. current 4 mA
Current output - failure <3.6 mA
Unit of measurement bar
The values of the following functions are not reset to the reset
values (see chart) with "Reset":
Lighting no reset
SIL no reset
Language no reset
HART mode no reset
Factory setting
Like basic adjustment, furthermore special parameters are
reset to default values.5)
Pointer
The min. and max. temperature or pressure values are each
reset to the actual value.
Optional settings Additional adjustment and diagnosis options such as e.g.

scaling, simulation or trend curve presentation are shown in
the following menu schematic. You will find a detailed
description of these menu items in the operating instructions
manual "Indicating and adjustment module".
29694-EN-070927
5) Special parameters are parameters which are set acc. to customer speci-
fications on the service level with the adjustment software PACTware™.
6.5 Menu schematic
Information:
Depending on the version and application, the highlighted
menu windows are not always available.
Basic adjustment
▶ Basic adjustment 1
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info
Unit of measurement 1.1 Position correction 1.2 Min. adjustment 1.3 Max. adjustment 1.4
Offset 000.0 % 100.00 %
bar = P
= =
+0000 mbar 0.00 mbar 100.00 mbar
53 mbar 53 mbar 53 mbar
Damping 1.5 Linearisation curve 1.6 Sensor-TAG 1.7
1s linear Sensor
Display
Basic adjustment 2
▶ Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info
Displayed value 2.1 Displayed value 2.1 Display unit 2.2 Scaling 2.3
Pressure Scaled Volume 0 % = 0.0 l

l 100 % = 1000.0 l
Lighting 2.4
Switched off▼
29694-EN-070927
Diagnostics
Basic adjustment 3
Display
▶ Diagnostics
Service
Info
Pointer 3.1 Sensor status 3.2 Trend recording 3.4

Tmin.: -12.5 °C
Tmax.: +85.5 °C OK
p-min.: -0.58 bar
p-max.: 16.765 bar
Service
Basic adjustment 4
Display
Diagnostics
▶ Service
Info
Current output 4.1 Simulation 4.2 Reset 4.3 Language 4.4
Output mode: 4-20 mA ▼ Start simulation? Select reset? Deutsch ▼

Fail.mode: <3.6 mA ▼
Min. current: 3.8 mA ▼
SIL 4.5 HART mode 4.6 Copy sensor data 4.7 PIN 4.8
Not activated▼ Standard Copy sensor data? Enable?

Address 0
Application 4.9
Level ▼
Info
Basic adjustment 5
Display
Diagnostics
Service
▶ Info
Sensor type 5.1 Date of manufacture 5.2 Last change using PC 5.3 Sensor characteristics 5.4
16. May 2007 Display now?
Software version
29694-EN-070927
Serial number 3.50 08. May 2007

12345678
6.6 Saving the parameter adjustment data

It is recommended noting the adjusted data, e.g. in this
operating instructions manual and archive them afterwards.
They are hence available for multiple use or service purposes.
If VEGABAR 54 is equipped with an indicating and adjustment
module, the most important data can be read out of the sensor
into indicating and adjustment module. The procedure is
described in the operating instructions manual "Indicating and
adjustment module" in the menu item "Copy sensor data". The
data remain there permanently even if the sensor power
supply fails.
If it is necessary to exchange the sensor, the indicating and
adjustment module is inserted into the replacement instrument
and the data are written into the sensor under the menu item
"Copy sensor data".
29694-EN-070927
Setup with PACTware™ and other adjustment programs
7 Setup with PACTware™ and other

adjustment programs
7.1 Connect the PC via VEGACONNECT 3

Connection via I2-C interface
VEGACONNECT 3
PACTwareTM/
3 >PA<
1
~
2 Power supply
Fig. 22: Connection of the PC via I2-C interface directly on the sensor
1 RS232 connection
2 VEGABAR 54
3 I²C adapter cable for VEGACONNECT 3
Necessary components:
l VEGABAR 54
l PC with PACTware™ and suitable VEGA DTM
l VEGACONNECT 3 with I²C adapter cable (article no.
2.27323)
l Power supply unit
29694-EN-070927
Connection via HART

=
4
~
2 Power supply
3
PACTwareTM/
VEGACONNECT 3 1
Fig. 23: Connecting the PC via HART to the signal cable

1 RS232 connection
2 VEGABAR 54
3 HART adapter cable for VEGACONNECT 3
4 HART resistor 250 Ohm
l VEGABAR 54
l VEGACONNECT 3 with HART adapter cable (art. no.
2.25397)
l HART resistor approx. 250 Ohm
l Power supply unit
Note:
With power supply units with integrated HART resistance
(internal resistance approx. 250 Ohm), an additional external
resistance is not necessary. This applies, e.g. to the VEGA
instruments VEGATRENN 149A, VEGADIS 371, VEGAMET
381). Also usual Ex separators are most of the time equipped
with a sufficient current limitation resistor. In such cases,
VEGACONNECT 3 can be connected parallel to the 4 … 20 mA
cable.
29694-EN-070927

Internal connection via I2-C
interface
1 USB cable
2 Sensor
External connection via I2-C

interface 1 2
TWIST
LO
EN
CK
OP
USB
Fig. 25: Connection directly to the sensor

1 I²C bus (Com.) interface
2 I²C connection cable of VEGACONNECT 4
l VEGABAR 54
VEGACONNECT 4
29694-EN-070927
l
l Power supply unit or processing system
Connection via HART

2 4
CK
LO
TWIST
USB
3
N
OPE
Fig. 26: Connecting the PC via HART to the signal cable
1 VEGABAR 54
2 HART resistor 250 Ohm (optional depending on processing)
3 Connection cable with 2 mm pins and terminals
4 Processing system/PLC/Voltage supply
l VEGABAR 54
l VEGACONNECT 4
l HART resistor approx. 250 Ohm
l Power supply unit or processing system
Note:
With power supply units with integrated HART resistance
(internal resistance approx. 250 Ohm), an additional external
resistance is not necessary. This applies, e.g. to the VEGA
instruments VEGATRENN 149A, VEGADIS 371, VEGAMET
381). Also usual Ex separators are most of the time equipped
with a sufficient current limitation resistor. In such cases,
VEGACONNECT 4 can be connected parallel to the 4 … 20 mA
cable.
7.3 Parameter adjustment with PACTware™

Further setup steps are described in the operating instructions
manual "DTM Collection/PACTware™" attached to each CD
and which can also be downloaded from our homepage. A
detailed description is available in the online help of
PACTware™ and the VEGA DTMs.
29694-EN-070927
Note:
Keep in mind that for setup of VEGABAR 54, DTM-Collection
in the actual version must be used.
All currently available VEGA DTMs are provided in the DTM

Collection on CD and can be obtained from the responsible
VEGA agency for a token fee. This CD includes also the up-to-
date PACTware™ version. The basic version of this DTM
Collection incl. PACTware™ is also available as a free-of-
charge download from the Internet.
Go via www.vega.com and "Downloads" to the item "Soft-

ware".
7.4 Parameter adjustment with AMS™ and PDM

For VEGA sensors, instrument descriptions for the adjustment
programs AMS™ and PDM are available as DD or EDD. The
instrument descriptions are already implemented in the current
versions of AMS™ and PDM. For older versions of AMS™ and
PDM, a free-of-charge download is available via Internet.
Go via www.vega.com and "Downloads" to the item "Soft-
ware".

It is recommended to document or save the parameter
adjustment data. They are hence available for multiple use or
service purposes.
The VEGA DTM Collection and PACTware™ in the licensed,
professional version provide suitable tools for systematic
project documentation and storage.
29694-EN-070927
Maintenance and fault rectification

8.1 Maintenance
When used as directed in normal operation, VEGABAR 54 is
completely maintenance free.
8.2 Remove interferences

Reaction in case of failures The operator of the system is responsible for taken suitable
measures to remove interferences.
Causes of malfunction VEGABAR 54 offers maximum reliability. Nevertheless faults

can occur during operation. These may be caused by the
following, e.g.:
l Sensor
l Process
l Supply
l Signal processing
Fault rectification The first measures to be taken are to check the output signals
as well as to evaluate the error messages via the indicating
and adjustment module. The procedure is described below.
Further comprehensive diagnostics can be carried out on a PC
with the software PACTware™ and the suitable DTM. In many
cases, the causes can be determined in this way and faults
can be rectified.
24 hour service hotline However, if these measures are not successful, call the VEGA
service hotline in urgent cases under the phone no. +49 1805
858550.
The hotline is available to you 7 days a week round-the-clock.
Since we offer this service world-wide, the support is only
available in the English language. The service is free of
charge, only the standard telephone costs will be charged.
Checking the 4 … 20 mA sig- Connect a handheld multimeter in the suitable measuring

nal range according to the wiring plan.
? 4 … 20 mA signal not stable
l Level fluctuations
à Set the integration time via the indicating and adjust-
ment module or PACTware™
29694-EN-070927
l no atmospheric pressure compensation

à Check the pressure compensation in the housing and
clean the filter element, if necessary
? 4 … 20 mA signal missing
l Wrong connection to power supply
à Check connection according to chapter "Connection
steps" and if necessary, correct according to chapter
"Wiring plan"
l No voltage supply
à Check cables for breaks; repair if necessary
l supply voltage too low or load resistance too high
à Check, adapt if necessary
? Current signal greater than 22 mA or less than 3.6 mA

l electronics module or measuring cell defective
à Exchange instrument or return instrument for repair
In Ex applications, the regulations for the wiring of intrinsically

safe circuits must be observed.
Fault messages via the indi- ? E013

cating/adjustment module
l no measured value available6)
? E017
l Adjustment span too small
à repeat with modified values
? E036
l no operable sensor software
à Carry out a software update or send the instrument for
repair
? E041
l Hardware error
Reaction after fault rectifica- Depending on the failure reason and measures taken, the
tion steps described in chapter "Set up" must be carried out again,
29694-EN-070927
if necessary.
6) Fault message can also appear if the pressure is higher than the nominal
range.
8.3 Exchange of the electronics module

The electronics modules differ only in their signal output and
are universally suitable for VEGABAR series 50 and 60
sensors. The following types are available:
l BR-E.60Z. (4 … 20 mA)7)
l BR-E.60H. (4 … 20 mA/HART)
l BR-E.60P. (Profibus PA)
l BR-E.60F. (Foundation Fieldbus)
In case of a defect, the respective electronics module can be
exchaned by the user. If no electronics module is available on
side, the module can be ordered for the VEGA agency serving
you.
Ordering and exchange are possible with or without sensor
serial number. The electronics module with serial number
includes order-specific data such as factory setting, seal
material etc. These are not included in the electronics module
without serial number.
The serial number is stated on the type label of VEGABAR 54
or on the delivery note.
8.4 Instrument repair

If a repair is necessary, please proceed as follows:
You can download a return form (23 KB) from the Internet on
our homepage www.vega.com under: "Downloads - Forms
and certificates - Repair form".
By doing this you help us carry out the repair quickly and
without having to call for needed information.
l Print and fill out one form per instrument
l Clean the instrument and pack it damage-proof
l Attach the completed form and, if need be, also a safety
data sheet outside on the packaging
l Please ask the agency serving you for the address of your
return shipment. You can find the respective agency on our
website www.vega.com under: "Company - VEGA world-
wide"
29694-EN-070927
7) Only for VEGABAR series 50
Dismounting
9 Dismounting
9.1 Dismounting steps
Warning:
Before dismounting, be aware of dangerous process con-
ditions such as e.g. pressure in the vessel, high temperatures,
corrosive or toxic products etc.
Take note of chapters "Mounting" and "Connecting to power

supply" and carry out the listed steps in reverse order.
9.2 Disposal
The instrument consists of materials which can be recycled by
specialised recycling companies. We use recyclable materials
and have designed the electronics to be easily separable.
WEEE directive 2002/96/EG
This instrument is not subject to the WEEE directive 2002/96/
EG and the respective national laws (in Germany, e.g.
ElektroG). Pass the instrument directly on to a specialised
recycling company and do not use the municipal collecting
points. These may be used only for privately used products
according to the WEEE directive.
Correct disposal avoids negative effects to persons and
environment and ensures recycling of useful raw materials.
Materials: see chapter "Technical data"
If you cannot dispose of the instrument properly, please
contact us about disposal methods or return.
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
10 Supplement
10.1 Technical data
General data
Parameter, pressure Gauge pressure, absolute pressure, vacuum
Measuring principle Ceramic-capacitive, dry measuring cell
Communication interface I²C bus
Materials, weights, torque

Material 316L corresponds to 1.4404 or 1.4435
Materials, wetted parts
- Process fitting 316L
- Diaphragm sapphire ceramic® (99.9 % oxide ceramic)
- Seal, measuring cell FKM (e.g. Viton), Kalrez 6375, EPDM, Chem-
raz 535
- Process seal, PMC fitting FKM (e.g. Viton), Kalrez 6375, EPDM
- Process seal, fitting M30x1.5 FKM (e.g. Viton), Kalrez 6375, EPDM, Chem-
raz 535
Materials, non-wetted parts
- Electronics housing Plastic PBT (polyester), Alu die-casting pow-
der-coated, 316L
- Seal ring, housing cover Silicone
- Inspection window in housing cover Polycarbonate (UL-746-C listed)
for indicating and adjustment mod-
ule
- Ground terminal 316Ti/316L
- Transport cover PFA
Weight approx. 0.8 … 8 kg (1.764 … 17.64 lbs), depending on
process fitting
Max. torques
- PMC 1", PMC 1¼" 2 Nm
- PMC 1½" 5 Nm
- G½ A, G¾ A 30 Nm
- G1 A, M30x1.5 50 Nm
G1" PASVE 100 Nm
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
Output variable
Output signal 4 … 20 mA
Signal resolution 1.6 µA
Failure signal Current output unchanged 20.5 mA, 22 mA,
<3.6 mA (adjustable)
Max. output current 22 mA
Load see load diagram under Power supply
Damping (63 % of the input variable) 0 … 999 s, adjustable
Step response or adjustment time ≤250 ms (ti: 0 s, 10 … 90 %)
Fulfilled NAMUR recommendations NE 43
Additional output parameter - temperature

Processing is made via HART multidrop, Profibus PA and Foundation Fieldbus
Range -50 … +150 °C (-58 … +302 °F)
Resolution 1 °C (1.8 °F)
Accuracy
- in the range of 0 … +100°C ±3 K
(+32 … +212 °F)
- in the range of -50 … 0 °C typ. ±4 K
(-58 … +32 °F) and +100 … +150 °C
(+212 … +302 °F)
Input variable
Adjustment
Adjustment range of the min./max. adjustment relating to the nominal measuring range:
- percentage value -10 … 110 %
- pressure value -20 … 120 %
Adjustment range of the zero/span adjustment relating to the nominal measuring range:
- zero -20 … +95 %
- span -120 … +120 % 8)
- Difference between zero and span max. 120 % of the nominal range
Recommended max. turn down 10:1 (no limitation)
Nominal measuring ranges and overload resistance
Nominal range Overload, max. pressure9) Overload, min. pressure
29694-EN-070927
8) Values less than -1 bar cannot be set.

9) Limited to 200 bar according to the pressure device directive.
Supplement
Nominal range Overload, max. pres- Overload, min. pressure

sure9)
Gauge pressure
0 … 0.1 bar/0 … 10 kPa 15 bar/1500 kPa -0.5 bar/-50 kPa
0 … 0.2 bar/0 … 20 kPa 25 bar/2500 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa
0 … 1 bar/0 … 100 kPa 50 bar/5000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa
-1 … 0 bar/-100 … 0 kPa 35 bar/3500 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa
-1 … 1.5 bar/-100 … 150 kPa 50 bar/5000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa
-0.05 … 0.05 bar/-5 … 5 kPa 15 bar/1500 kPa -0.5 bar/-50 kPa
-0.1 … 0.1 bar/-10 … 10 kPa 20 bar/2000 kPa -0.5 bar/-50 kPa
-0.2 … 0.2 bar/-20 … 20 kPa 30 bar/3000 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa
-0.5 … 0.5 bar/-50 … 50 kPa 35 bar/3500 kPa -1 bar/-100 kPa
Absolute pressure
0 … 1 bar/0 … 100 kPa 50 bar/5000 kPa
0 … 2.5 bar/0 … 250 kPa 80 bar/8000 kPa
0 … 5 bar/0 … 500 kPa 100 bar/10000 kPa
0 … 10 bar/0 … 1000 kPa 150 bar/15000 kPa
0 … 25 bar/0 … 2500 kPa 200 bar/20000 kPa
0 … 60 bar/0 … 6000 kPa 200 bar/20000 kPa

29694-EN-070927
Supplement
Reference conditions and influencing variables (similar to DIN EN 60770-1)

Reference conditions according to DIN EN 61298-1
- Temperature +15 … +25 °C (+59 … +77 °F)
- Relative humidity 45 … 75 %
- Air pressure 860 … 1060 mbar/86 … 106 kPa
(12.5 … 15.4 psi)
Determination of characteristics Limit point adjustment according to
IEC 61298-2
Characteristics curve linear
Reference installation position upright, diaphragm points downward
Influence of the installation position <0.2 mbar/20 Pa (0.003 psi)
Deviation determined according to the limit point method according to IEC 6077010)
Applies to digital interfaces (HART, Profibus PA, Foundation Fieldbus) as well as to
analogue current output 4 … 20 mA. Specifications refer to the set measuring span. Turn
down (TD) is the ratio: nominal measuring range/set span.
Deviation with version 0.2 %
- Turn down 1:1 up to 5:1 <0.2 %
- Turn down >5:1 <0.04 % x TD
Deviation with version 0.1 %
- Turn down 1:1 up to 5:1 <0.1 %
- Turn down >5:1 <0.02 % x TD
Influence of the product or ambient temperature

Average temperature coefficient of the zero signal
Applies to digital interfaces (HART, Profibus PA, Foundation Fieldbus) as well as for the
analogue current output 4 … 20 mA. Specifications refer to the set span. Turn down (TD) =
nominal measuring range/set span.
In the compensated temperature range of 0 … +100 °C (212 °F), reference temperature
20 °C (68 °F):
- Turn down 1:1 <0.05 %/10 K
- Turn down 1:1 up to 5:1 <0.1 %/10 K
- Turn down up to 10:1 <0.15 %/10 K
29694-EN-070927
Outside the compensated temperature range:
10) Incl. non-linearity, hysteresis and non-repeatability.
Supplement

- Turn down 1:1 typ. <0.05 %/10 K
Thermal change of the current output
Applies also to the analogue 4 … 20 mA current output and refers to the set span.
Thermal change, current output <0.15 % at -40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F)
Long-term stability (similar to DIN 16086, DINV 19259-1 and IEC 60770-1)
Applies to digital interfaces (HART, Profibus PA, Foundation Fieldbus) as well as for the
analogue current output 4 … 20 mA. Specifications refer to the set span. Turn down (TD) =
nominal measuring range/set span.
Long-term drift of the zero signal <(0.1 % x TD)/1 year
Total deviation (similar to DIN 16086)

The total deviation Ft, also called practical deviation, is the sum of the basic accuracy Fp and
long-term stability:
Ft= Fp + Fs
Fperf = √((FT)2 + (FKl)2)
With
- Ft: Ftotal, total deviation
- Fp: Fperf, basic accuracy
- Fs: Fstab, long-term drift
- FT: Temperature coefficient (influ-
ence of medium or ambient tem-
perature)
- FKl: Deviation
Ambient conditions
Ambient, storage and transport tem- -40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F)
perature
Process conditions
The specifications of the pressure stage are used as an overview. The specifications on the
type plate are applicable.
Pressure stage, process fitting
- Thread 316L PN 60
29694-EN-070927
- Thread 316L 1" for OnC TransValve PN 40

080
Supplement
- PMC 316L PN 10
- Flange 316L PN 40
Product temperature depending on the measuring cell seal
- FKM (e.g. Viton) -20 … +120 °C (-4 … +248 °F)
- EPDM -40 … +120 °C (-40 … +248 °F), 1 h: 140 °C/
284 °F cleaning temperature
- Kalrez 6375 -10 … +120 °C (+14 … +248 °F)
Vibration resistance mechanical vibrations with 4 g and 5 … 100 Hz
tested according to the regulations of German
Lloyd, GL characteristics 2.
Shock resistance Acceleration 100 g/6 ms11)
Electromechanical data - version IP 66/IP 67

Cable entry/plug12)
- Single chamber housing l 1x cable entry M20x1.5 (cable-ø 5 … 9 mm),
1x blind stopper M20x1.5
or:
l 1x closing cap ½ NPT, 1x blind plug ½ NPT
or:
l 1x plug (depending on the version), 1x blind
plug M20x1.5
or:
l 2x blind stopper M20x1.5
- Double chamber housing l 1x cable entry M20x1.5 (cable-ø 5 … 9 mm),
1x blind stopper M20x1.5, plug M12x1 for
VEGADIS 61 (optional)
or:
l 1x closing cap ½ NPT, 1x blind stopper
½ NPT, plug M12x1 for VEGADIS 61
(optional)
or:
l 1x plug (depending on the version), 1x blind
stopper M20x1.5, plug M12x1 for VEGADIS
61 (optional)
or:
l 2x blind stopper M20x1.5; plug M12x1 for
VEGADIS 61 (optional)
29694-EN-070927
11) Tested according to EN 60068-2-27.

12) Depending on the version M12x1, according to DIN 43650, Harting, Am-
phenol-Tuchel, 7/8" FF.
Supplement
Spring-loaded terminals for wire cross- 2.5 mm² (AWG 14)

section up to
Electromechanical data - version IP 66/IP 68, 1 bar

Cable entry
- Single chamber housing l 1x IP 68 cable entry M20x1.5; 1x blind
stopper M20x1.5
or:
l 1x closing cap ½ NPT, 1x blind plug ½ NPT
- Double chamber housing l 1x IP 68 cable entry M20x1.5; 1x blind
stopper M20x1.5; plug M12x1 for VEGADIS
61 (optional)
or:
l 1x closing cap ½ NPT, 1x blind stopper
½ NPT, plug M12x1 for VEGADIS 61
(optional)
Connection cable
- Configuration four wires, one suspension cable, one breather
capillary, screen braiding, metal foil, mantle
- Wire cross-section 0.5 mm² (AWG 20)
- wire resistance <0.036 Ohm/m (0.011 Ohm/ft)
- Tensile strength >1200 N (270 pounds force)
- Standard length 5 m (16.4 ft)
- Max. length 1000 m (3281 ft)
- Min. bending radius at 25 °C/77 °F 25 mm (0.985 in)
- Diameter approx. 8 mm (0.315 in)
- Colour - standard PE Black
- Colour - standard PUR Blue
- Colour - Ex-version Blue
Electromechanical data - version IP 68

Cable entry/plug13)
- Remote housing l 1x cable entry M20x1.5 (cable-ø 5 … 9 mm),
1x blind stopper M20x1.5
or:
1x plug (depending on the version), 1x blind
29694-EN-070927
l
plug M20x1.5
13) Depending on the version M12x1, according to DIN 43650, Harting, Am-
Supplement
Spring-loaded terminals for wire cross-section up to 2.5 mm² (AWG 14)

Connection cable between IP 68 instrument and remote housing:
- Configuration four wires, one suspension cable, one breather
capillary, screen braiding, metal foil, mantle
- Wire cross-section 0.5 mm² (AWG 20)
- wire resistance <0.036 Ohm/m (0.011 Ohm/ft)
- Max. length 180 m (590.6 ft)
- Min. bending radius at 25 °C/77 °F 25 mm (0.985 in)
- Diameter approx. 8 mm (0.315 in)
Indicating and adjustment module

Power supply and data transmission through the sensor
Indication LC display in Dot matrix
Adjustment elements 4 keys
Protection
- unassembled IP 20
- mounted into the sensor without IP 40
cover
Materials
- Housing ABS
- Inspection window Polyester foil
Voltage supply
Supply voltage
- Non-Ex instrument 12 … 36 V DC
- EEx ia instrument 12 … 30 V DC
Supply voltage with lighted indicating and adjustment module
- Non-Ex instrument 20 … 36 V DC
- EEx ia instrument 20 … 30 V DC
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
Permissible residual ripple

- <100 Hz Uss <1 V
- 100 Hz … 10 kHz Uss <10 mV
Load see diagram
Ω
1000
750
3
500
2
1
250
4
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 V
Fig. 27: Voltage diagram

1 HART load with HART version
2 Voltage limit EEx ia instrument
3 Voltage limit non-Ex instrument
4 Supply voltage
Electrical protective measures

Protection
- Housing, standard IP 66/IP 6714)
- Alu and stainless housing (optionally IP 68 (1 bar)15)
available)
- Transmitter in IP 68 version IP 68
- Remote housing IP 65
Overvoltage category III
Protection class II
29694-EN-070927
14) Instruments with gauge pressure measuring ranges cannot detect the am-
bient pressure when submerged, e.g. in water. This can lead to falsification
of the measured value.
15) Only with instruments with absolute pressure ranges.
Supplement
Functional safety (SIL)

Functional safety according to IEC 61508/IEC 61511
- Single channel architecture (1oo1D) up to SIL2
- double channel diversitary redun- up to SIL3
dant architecture (1oo2D)
Existing approvals or approvals applied for16)17)

ATEX ia ATEX II 1G, 1/2G, 2G EEx ia IIC T6
ATEX D ATEX II 1/2D, 2D IP6X T
ATEX na ATEX 3G EEx na II T5 … T1 X
Ship approval GL, LRS, ABS, CCS, RINA, DNV
Other approvals VLAREM
29694-EN-070927
16) Deviating data in Ex applications: see separate safety instructions.

17) Depending on order specification.
Supplement
10.2 Dimensions
Housing in protection IP 66/IP 67
~ 59 mm ~ 69 mm ~ 87 mm (3 27/64")
~ 69 mm (2 21/64")
ø 80 mm (2 23/32") ø 84 mm
(2 23/32") ø 77 mm
ø 77 mm (3 5/16")
(3 5/32") (3 1/32")
(3 1/32")
M16x1,5
117 mm (4 39/64")
120 mm (4 23/32")
112 mm (4 13/32")
112 mm (4 13/32")
M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/
½ NPT ½ NPT ½ NPT
M20x1,5/
1 2 3 ½ NPT 4
~ 116 mm (4 9/16")
ø 84 mm (3 5/16")
116 mm (4 9/16")
M20x1,5/ M20x1,5
½ NPT
Fig. 28: Housing versions in protection IP 66/IP 67, with integrated indicating and adjustment module the housing is 9 mm
(1/64") higher
1 Plastic housing
2 Stainless steel housing
3 Special steel casting housing
4 Aluminium double chamber housing
5 Aluminium housing
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
Housing in protection IP 66/IP 68, 1 bar
~ 103mm ~ 105mm (4 9/64")

(4 1/16") ø 84mm ~ 150mm (5 29/32")
ø 77mm
(3 1/32") (3 5/16") ø 84mm (3 5/16")
M16x1,5
116mm (4 9/16")
117mm (4 39/64")
120mm (4 23/32")
M20x1,5 M20x1,5 M20x1,5
M20x1,5/
1 ½ NPT 2 3
Fig. 29: Housing versions in protection IP 66/IP 68, 1 bar (with integrated indicating and adjustment module the housing is
9 mm/0.35 in higher)
1 Stainless steel housing
2 Aluminium double chamber housing
3 Aluminium housing
IP 68 version with remote housing
65 mm
(2 9/16")
(2 43/64")
68 mm
42mm
(1 21/32")
1
59 mm (2 21/64")
(3 5/8")
92 mm
40mm
(1 37/64")
90 mm (3 35/64")
110 mm (4 21/64")
2
~ 66 mm (2 19/32")
29694-EN-070927
Fig. 30: IP 68 version with remote housing

1 Lateral cable outlet
2 Axial cable outlet
Supplement
VEGABAR 54 - threaded fitting 1
SW 46 SW46 SW55
1 ½”NPT
(1 31/32")
(1 31/32")
(2 11/64")
50 mm
50 mm
55 mm
G1 ½ A
G1 ½ A
22 mm
(55/64")
22 mm
(55/64")
25 mm
(63/64")
ø 55 mm
ø 55 mm ø 60 mm
(2 11/64")
(2 11/64") (2 23/64")
GG GN GW
Fig. 31: VEGABAR 54 - threaded fitting: GG = G1½ A, GW = G1½ A PVDF, GN = 1½ NPT

29694-EN-070927
Supplement
VEGABAR 54 - threaded fitting 2
SW 36mm
SW 27mm SW 41mm
(1 27/64")
(1 39/64")
(1 49/64")
(1 1/16")
(1 47/64")
(1 47/64")
45 mm
44 mm
44 mm
G¾A G½A G1A
ø 24 mm ø 18 mm ø 30 mm
22 mm
21 mm
(55/64")
(53/64")
21 mm
(13/16")
(15/16") (23/32") (1 3/16")

ø 27 mm ø 40mm
(1 1/16") (1 37/64")
GA GB GC
SW 32mm
SW 41mm (1 17/64")
(2 21/64")
59 mm
(1 39/64") M30x1,5
(1 13/16")
46 mm
G1A
(1 37/64")
ø 30 mm
21 mm
40 mm
(53/64")
ø 40 mm
ø 40mm (1 3/16")
(1 37/64")
(1 37/64")
GE GD
Fig. 32: VEGABAR 54 - threaded fititng: GA = G¾ A absolutely front-flush, GB = G½ A front-flush, GC = G1 A absolutely

front-flush, GE = G1 A with O-ring in front, GD = G1 A absolutely front-flush 40 mm
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
VEGABAR 54 - hygienic fitting 1
SW46
(2 1/64")
51 mm
(2 1/64")
51 mm
(2 23/64")
60 mm
ø 84 mm ø 78 mm (3 5/64")
ø 78 mm (3 5/16") ø 92 mm (3 5/8")
(3 5/64")
LA TA RA/RB
SW46
(2 11/64")
55 mm
(1 31/32")
50 mm
(2 23/64")
60 mm
ø 66 mm
(2 19/32")
ø 92 mm (3 5/8") ø 74 mm (2 29/32") ø 105 mm
ø 84 mm (3 5/16") (4 9/64")
RD RS/RT AA
Fig. 33: VEGABAR 54 - hygienic fitting: LA = hygienic fitting with compression nut, LB = hygienic fitting with tension flange,
TA = Tuchenhagen Varivent DN 32, TB = Tuchenhagen Varivent DN 25
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
(1 31/32") SW46
(2 1/64")
51 mm
50 mm
(2 23/64")
60 mm
ø 78 mm (3 5/64")
ø 92 mm (3 5/8") ø 74 mm (2 29/32")
ø 92 mm (3 5/8")
ø 84 mm (3 5/16")
RA/RB RD RS/RT
(2 11/64")
55 mm
ø 66 mm
(2 19/32")
ø 105 mm
(4 9/64")
AA
Fig. 34: VEGABAR 54 - hygienic fitting: RA/RB = bolting DN 40/DN 50 according to DIN 11851, RD = bolting DN 50
according to DIN 11864, RS/RT = SMS DN 38/DN 51, AA = DRD
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
SW41
44,5 mm
(1 3/4")
(2 1/64")
51 mm
(2 1/64")
51 mm
G1 A
ø 64 mm ø 77,5 mm
(3 33/64") (3 3/64")
CA CE GK
(1 49/64")
45 mm
67,5 mm
(2 21/32")
ø 36 mm
(1 27/64")
ø 52 mm
(2 3/64")
RI CI
Fig. 35: VEGABAR 54 - hygienic fitting: CI = Clamp DN15/DN 20, CA = Tri-Clamp 2" PN 16, CE = Tri-Clamp 2½" PN 10,
GK = G1 with cone, RI = Ingold
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
VEGABAR 54 - flange connection 1
(1 31/32")
d2
50 mm
b
f
d4
k
D
EA, FB, FM, FH, FI
mm DN PN D b k d2 d4 f
1 EA 40 40 150 18 110 4xø18 88 3
FB 50 40 165 20 125 4xø18 102 3
FM 80 40 200 24 160 8xø18 138 3
2 FH 2“ 150 lbs 6" 3/4" 4 3/4" 4xø 5/8" 3 5/8" 1/8"
FI 3“ 150 lbs 7 1/2" 15/16" 6“ 4xø 5/8" 5“ 1/8"
inch DN PN D b k d2 d4 f
1 EA 40 40 5 29/32" 45/64" 4 21/64" 4xø 45/64" 3 15/32" 1/8"
FB 50 40 6 1/2" 25/32" 4 59/64" 4xø 45/64" 4 1/64" 1/8"
FM 80 40 7 7/8" 15/16" 6 19/64" 8xø 45/64" 5 7/16" 1/8"
2 FH 2“ 150 lbs 6" 3/4" 4 3/4" 4xø 5/8" 3 5/8" 1/8"
FI 3“ 150 lbs 7 1/2" 15/16" 6“ 4xø 5/8" 5“ 1/8"
Fig. 36: VEGABAR 54 - flange connection form C DIN 2501

1 Flange connection according to DIN 2501
2 Flange fitting according to ANSI B16.5
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
VEGABAR 54 - flange connection 2
47,8 mm
(1 7/8") d2
b
f
d4
k
D
FA
mm DN PN D b k d2 d4 f
FA 25 40 115 18 85 4xø14 68 2
inch DN PN D b k d2 d4 f
FA 25 40 4 17/64" 45/64" 3 11/32" 4xø 35/64" 2 43/64" 5/64"
Fig. 37: VEGABAR 54 - flange connection form B1, EN 1092-1

29694-EN-070927
Supplement
VEGABAR 54 - connection for paper industry
SW32 ø 36 mm
46
45,5 mm
(1 51/64")
(2 3/64")
(1 57/64")
(1 27/64")
52 mm
48 mm
M44x1,25 M30x1,5 M8
ø 25 mm
21 mm
(1 9/64")
(53/64")
29 mm
ø 26,3 mm
(63/64")
(1 1/32")
ø 27,4 mm
(1 5/64")
BA/BB BF/BS PC
43,7 mm
43,7 mm
(1 23/32")
(1 23/32")
M8 M8
ø 34,6 mm ø 40,4 mm
(1 23/64") (1 19/32")
PD PE
Fig. 38: VEGABAR 54 - fitting for the paper industry: BA/BB = M44x1.25; BF = M30x1.5; BS = M30x1.5 for headbox, PC =
PMC 1", PD = PMC 1¼", PE = PMC 1½"
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
VEGABAR 54 - connection for paper industry 2
SW36 SW36
104,8 mm (4 1/8")
104,8 mm (4 1/8")
G1" G1"
(1 3/16")
(1 3/16")
30 mm
30 mm
ø 24,7 mm ø 24,7 mm
(31/32") (31/32")
ø 29,3 mm ø 29,3 mm
(1 5/32") (1 5/32")
VP VR
Fig. 39: VEGABAR 54 - connection for paper industry: VP = G1" PASVE, VO = G1" PASVE with O-ring seal
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
10.3 Industrial property rights

VEGA product lines are global protected by industrial property rights.
Further information see http://www.vega.com.
Only in U.S.A.: Further information see patent label at the sensor housing.
VEGA Produktfamilien sind weltweit geschützt durch gewerbliche Schutzrechte.

Nähere Informationen unter http://www.vega.com.
Les lignes de produits VEGA sont globalement protégées par des droits de
propriété intellectuelle.
Pour plus d'informations, on pourra se référer au site http://www.vega.com.
VEGA lineas de productos están protegidas por los derechos en el campo de la

propiedad industrial.
Para mayor información revise la pagina web http://www.vega.com.
Линии продукции фирмы ВЕГА защищаются по всему миру правами на

интеллектуальную собственность.
Дальнейшую информацию смотрите на сайте http://www.vega.com.
VEGA系列产品在全球享有知识产权保护。
进一步信息请参见网站<http://www.vega.com>。
10.4 Trademark
All brands used as well as trade and company names are
property of their lawful proprietor/originator.
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
29694-EN-070927
Supplement
29694-EN-070927
VEGA Grieshaber KG
Am Hohenstein 113
77761 Schiltach
Germany
Phone +49 7836 50-0
Fax +49 7836 50-201
E-mail: info@de.vega.com
www.vega.com
ISO 9001
All statements concerning scope of delivery, application,

practical use and operating conditions of the sensors and
processing systems correspond to the information avail-
able at the time of printing.
© VEGA Grieshaber KG, Schiltach/Germany 2007
Subject to change without prior notice 29694-EN-070927

6 Set up with the indicating and

adjustment module PLICSCOM
6.1 Short description

Function/Configuration The indicating and adjustment module is used for measured
value display, adjustment and diagnosis. It can be mounted in
the following housing versions and instruments:
l All sensors of the plics® instrument family, in the single as
well as in the double chamber housing (optionally in the
electronics or connection compartment)
l External indicating and adjustment unit VEGADIS 61
From a hardware version …- 01 or higher of the indicating and
adjustment module resp. …- 02 or higher of the corresponding
sensor electronics, an integrated backlight can be switched on
via the adjustment menu. The hardware version is stated on
the type label of the indicating and adjustment module or the
sensor electronics.
Note:
You will find detailed information on adjustment in the
operating instructions manual of the "Indicating and adjustment
module".
6.2 Insert indicating and adjustment module

Mount/Dismount indicating The indicating and adjustment module can be inserted into the
and adjustment module sensor and removed again at any time. It is not necessary to
interrupt the power supply.
Proceed as follows:
2 Place the indicating and adjustment module in the desired
position on the electronics (you can choose any one of four
different positions - each displaced by 90°)
3 Press the indicating and adjustment module onto the
electronics and turn it to the right until it snaps in.
4 Screw housing cover with inspection window tightly back
on
29694-EN-070927
Removal is carried out in reverse order.

The indicating and adjustment module is powered by the
sensor, an additional connection is not necessary.
Fig. 20: Installation of the indicating and adjustment module

Note:
If you intend to retrofit VEGABAR 54 with an indicating and
adjustment module for continuous measured value indication,
a higher cover with an inspection glass is required.
29694-EN-070927
6.3 Adjustment system
2
1
1.1
Fig. 21: Indicating and adjustment elements

1 LC display
2 Indication of the menu item number
3 Adjustment keys
Key functions l [OK] key:

- move to the menu overview
- confirm selected menu
- Edit parameter
- Save value
l [->] key to select:
- menu change
- list entry
- Select editing position
l [+] key:
- Change value of the parameter
l [ESC] key:
- interrupt input
- jump to the next higher menu
Adjustment system The sensor is adjusted via the four keys of the indicating and
adjustment module. The LC display indicates the individual
menu items. The functions of the individual keys are shown in
the above illustration. Approx. 10 minutes after the last
pressing of a key, an automatic reset to measured value
29694-EN-070927
indication is triggered. Any values not confirmed with [OK] will

not be saved.
6.4 Setup procedure

Address setting HART-Multi- In HART-Multidrop mode (several sensors on one input) the
drop address must be set before continuing with the parameter
adjustment. You will find a detailed description in the operating
instructions manual "Indicating and adjustment module" or in
the online help of PACTware™ or DTM.
HART mode
Standard
Address 0
Level or process pressure VEGABAR 54 can be used for level as well as for process
measurement pressure measurement. Default setting is level measurement.
The mode can be changed in the adjustment menu.
Depending on the application only the respective subchapter
"Level or process pressure measurement" is of importance.
There, you find the individual adjustment steps.
Level measurement
ment "Level meas-
urement" 1 Selecting adjustment unit/density unit
3 Carrying out min. adjustment
4 Carrying out max. adjustment
psi…
Information:
in the menu items of the min./max. adjustment.
29694-EN-070927

The actual measured value is also displayed in the menu items

for min./max. adjustment.
Selecting adjustment unit/ To switch over to another adjustment unit (in the example from
density unit bar to mbar), proceed as follows:3)
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info

Unit of measurement
bar

>].
Information:
When changing over to a height unit (in the example from bar
to m), also the density has to be entered.
Proceed as follows:
unit with [->] (in the example m).
4 Confirm with [OK], the submenu "Density unit" appears.
29694-EN-070927
mmH2O, mm, cm, m, in, ft.
Unit of measurement
Density unit
▶ kg/dm³
pcf
5 Select the requested unit, e.g. kg/dm³ with [->] and confirm
with [OK], the submenu "Density" appears.
Unit of measurement
Density
0001000
kg/dm³
6 Enter the requested density value with [->] and [+], confirm
with [OK] and move to position correction with [->].
The adjustment unit is now changed from bar to m.

Position correction
Offset
= P
+0000 mbar
53 mbar

Position correction
value?
▶ Accept
Edit

[->].
Carrying out min. adjustment Proceed as follows:
1 Edit the % value in the menu item "Min. adjustment" with
[OK].
Min. adjustment
+000.0 %
=
+0000.0 mbar
0000.0 mbar
29694-EN-070927
2 Set the requested % value with [+] and [->].


5 Confirm with [+] and move to max. adjustment with [->].
The min. adjustment is finished.
Information:
Carrying out max. adjustment Proceed as follows:

1 Edit the % value in the menu item "Max. adjustment" with
[OK].
Max. adjustment
+100.0 %
=
+1000.0 mbar
0000.0 mbar
Information:
1000 mbar).
2 Set the requested % value with [->] and [OK].

[ESC].
The max. adjustment is finished.
Information:
Process pressure measurement

29694-EN-070927

ment "Process pres-
sure measurement" 1 Select application "Process pressure measurement"
2 Select adjustment unit

4 Carry out zero adjustment
5 Carry out span adjustment
psi…
In the menu items "zero" and "span" you determine the span of
the sensor, the span corresponds to the end value.
Information:
in the menu items of the zero/span adjustment.
The actual measured value is displayed in addition to the
menu items for zero/span adjustment.
Select application "Process VEGABAR 54 is preset to application "Level measurement".

pressure measurement" Proceed as follows when switching over to application
"Process pressure measurement":
2 Select the menu "Service " with [->] and confirm with [OK]
.
Basic adjustment
Display
Diagnostics
▶ Service
Info
3 Select the menu item "Application" with [->] and edit with
[OK].
29694-EN-070927
Warning:
Note the warning: "Output can change".
4 Select with [->] "OK" and confirm with [OK].

5 Select "Process pressure" from the list and confirm with
[OK].
Select adjustment unit To switch over to another adjustment unit (in the example from
bar to mbar), proceed as follows:4)
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info

Unit of measurement
bar

>].

Position correction
Offset
= P
+0000 mbar
53 mbar

Position correction
value?
▶ Accept
29694-EN-070927
Edit
mmH2O.

[->].
Carry out zero adjustment Proceed as follows:
1 Edit the mbar value in the menu item "zero" with [OK].
Zero adjustment
000.0 %
= P
+0000.0 mbar
0000.0 mbar

3 Confirm with [+] and move to span adjustment with [->].
The zero adjustment is finished.
Information:
The zero adjustment shifts the value of the span adjustment.
The span, i.e. the difference between these values, however,
remains unchanged.
Information:
Carry out span adjustment Proceed as follows:

1 Edit the mbar value in the menu item "span" with [OK].
Span adjustment
100.0 %
= P
+1000.0 mbar
0000.0 mbar
Information:
1000 mbar).
2 Set the requested mbar value with [->] and [OK].

29694-EN-070927

[ESC].
The span adjustment is finished.
Information:
Copy sensor data This function enables reading out parameter adjustment data
as well as writing parameter adjustment data into the sensor
via the indicating and adjustment module. A description of the
function is available in the operating instructions manual
"Indicating and adjustment module".
The following data are read out or written with this function:
l Measured value presentation
l Adjustment
l Damping
l Linearisation curve
l Sensor-TAG
l Displayed value
l Display unit
l Scaling
l Current output
l Unit of measurement
l Language
The following safety-relevant data are not read out or written:
l SIL
l HART mode
l PIN
l Application
Copy sensor data
Copy sensor data?
Reset Basic adjustment

If the "Reset" is carried out, the sensor resets the values of the
following functions to the reset vales (see chart):

29694-EN-070927
Zero/Min. adjustment 0 mbar
Span/Max. adjustment mbar/bar value corresponding to the

nominal measuring range
Damping 1s
Linearisation linear
Sensor-TAG Sensor
Displayed value bar
Current output - characteristics 4 … 20 mA
Current output - max. current 20 mA
Current output - min. current 4 mA
Current output - failure <3.6 mA
Unit of measurement bar
The values of the following functions are not reset to the reset
values (see chart) with "Reset":
Lighting no reset
SIL no reset
Language no reset
HART mode no reset
Factory setting
Like basic adjustment, furthermore special parameters are
reset to default values.5)
Pointer
The min. and max. temperature or pressure values are each
reset to the actual value.
Optional settings Additional adjustment and diagnosis options such as e.g.

scaling, simulation or trend curve presentation are shown in
the following menu schematic. You will find a detailed
description of these menu items in the operating instructions
manual "Indicating and adjustment module".
29694-EN-070927
5) Special parameters are parameters which are set acc. to customer speci-
fications on the service level with the adjustment software PACTware™.
6.5 Menu schematic
Information:
Depending on the version and application, the highlighted
menu windows are not always available.
Basic adjustment
▶ Basic adjustment 1
Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info
Unit of measurement 1.1 Position correction 1.2 Min. adjustment 1.3 Max. adjustment 1.4
Offset 000.0 % 100.00 %
bar = P
= =
+0000 mbar 0.00 mbar 100.00 mbar
53 mbar 53 mbar 53 mbar
Damping 1.5 Linearisation curve 1.6 Sensor-TAG 1.7
1s linear Sensor
Display
Basic adjustment 2
▶ Display
Diagnostics
Service
Info
Displayed value 2.1 Displayed value 2.1 Display unit 2.2 Scaling 2.3
Pressure Scaled Volume 0 % = 0.0 l

l 100 % = 1000.0 l
Lighting 2.4
Switched off▼
29694-EN-070927
Diagnostics
Basic adjustment 3
Display
▶ Diagnostics
Service
Info
Pointer 3.1 Sensor status 3.2 Trend recording 3.4

Tmin.: -12.5 °C
Tmax.: +85.5 °C OK
p-min.: -0.58 bar
p-max.: 16.765 bar
Service
Basic adjustment 4
Display
Diagnostics
▶ Service
Info
Current output 4.1 Simulation 4.2 Reset 4.3 Language 4.4
Output mode: 4-20 mA ▼ Start simulation? Select reset? Deutsch ▼

Fail.mode: <3.6 mA ▼
Min. current: 3.8 mA ▼
SIL 4.5 HART mode 4.6 Copy sensor data 4.7 PIN 4.8
Not activated▼ Standard Copy sensor data? Enable?

Address 0
Application 4.9
Level ▼
Info
Basic adjustment 5
Display
Diagnostics
Service
▶ Info
Sensor type 5.1 Date of manufacture 5.2 Last change using PC 5.3 Sensor characteristics 5.4
16. May 2007 Display now?
Software version
29694-EN-070927
Serial number 3.50 08. May 2007

12345678

It is recommended noting the adjusted data, e.g. in this
operating instructions manual and archive them afterwards.
They are hence available for multiple use or service purposes.
If VEGABAR 54 is equipped with an indicating and adjustment
module, the most important data can be read out of the sensor
into indicating and adjustment module. The procedure is
described in the operating instructions manual "Indicating and
adjustment module" in the menu item "Copy sensor data". The
data remain there permanently even if the sensor power
supply fails.
If it is necessary to exchange the sensor, the indicating and
adjustment module is inserted into the replacement instrument
and the data are written into the sensor under the menu item
"Copy sensor data".
29694-EN-070927
7 Setup with PACTware™ and other

adjustment programs

Connection via I2-C interface
VEGACONNECT 3
PACTwareTM/
3 >PA<
1
~
2 Power supply
1 RS232 connection
2 VEGABAR 54
3 I²C adapter cable for VEGACONNECT 3
l VEGABAR 54
l VEGACONNECT 3 with I²C adapter cable (article no.
2.27323)
l Power supply unit
29694-EN-070927
Safety Manual
VEGABAR series 50 and 60
4 … 20 mA/HART
p
Contents
Contents
1 Functional safety
1.1 Generally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3 Instrument parameter adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.4 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.5 Reaction during operation and in case of failure. 9
1.6 Recurring function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.7 Safety-related characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
31637-EN-061002
2 VEGABAR series 50 and 60 - 4 … 20 mA/HART

Functional safety
1 Functional safety
1.1 Generally
Scope This safety manual applies to measuring systems consisting of
VEGABAR pressure transmitter series 50 and 60 in version
4 … 20 mA/HART:
VEGABAR 51 (up to 60 bar), 52, 54
VEGABAR 61 (up to 60 bar), 64, 65, 66, 67
Valid hardware and software versions:
l Serial number of the electronics >14138614
l Sensor software from Rev. 3.22
Area of application The measuring system can be used for process pressure or
level measurement of gases, vapours and liquids which meet
the specific requirements of the safety technology, e.g.:
This is possible up to SIL2 in a single channel architecture
(1oo1D), and up to SIL3 in a multiple channel, diverse
redundant architecture.
The use of the measuring system in a multiple channel,
homogeneous redundant architecture is excluded.
SIL conformity The SIL declaration of conformity can be downloaded from our
homepage in the Internet.
Abbreviations, terms Further abbreviations and terms are stated in IEC 61508-4.
SIL Safety Integrity Level
HFT Hardware Fault Tolerance
SFF Safe Failure Fraction
PFDavg average Probability of dangerous Failure on Demand
PFH Probability of a dangerous Failure per Hour
FMEDA Failure Mode, Effects and Diagnostics Analysis
λsd Rate for safe detected failure
λsu Rate for safe undetected failure
λdd Rate for dangerous detected failure
λdu Rate for dangerous undetected failure

31637-EN-061002
DCS Diagnostic Coverage of safe failures; DCS = λsd/(λsd+λsu)
DCD Diagnostic Coverage of dangerous failures; DCD = λdd/(λdd+λdu)
FIT Failure In Time (1 FIT = 1 failure/109 h
VEGABAR series 50 and 60 - 4 … 20 mA/HART 3

Functional safety
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
MTTF Mean Time To Failure
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
Relevant standards l IEC 61508 (also available as DIN EN)

- Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable
electronic safety-related systems
l IEC 61511-1
- Functional safety - safety instrumented systems for the
process industry sector - Part 1: Framework, defini-
tions, system, hardware and software requirements
Safety requirements The failure limit values for a safety function, depending on the
SIL class (of IEC 61508-1, 7.6.2)
Safety integrity level Low demand mode High demand mode
SIL PFDavg PFH

-5 -4
4 ≥10 … <10 ≥10 … <10-8
-9
-4 -3
3 ≥10 … <10 ≥10-8 … <10-7
2 ≥10-3 … <10-2 ≥10-7 … <10-6
1 ≥10-2 … <10-1 ≥10-6 … <10-5
Safety integrity of hardware for safety-related subsystems of

type B (IEC 61508-2, 7.4.3)
Safe failure fraction Hardware fault

tolerance
SFF HFT = 0 HFT = 1 (0) HFT = 2
<60 % not permitted SIL1 SIL2
60 % … <90 % SIL1 SIL2 SIL3
90 % … <99 % SIL2 SIL3 (SIL4)
≥99 % SIL3 (SIL4) (SIL4)
Proven in use According to IEC 61511-1, paragraph 11.4.4, the failure

tolerance HFT can be reduced by one for proven-in-use
subsystems if the following conditions are met:
31637-EN-061002
l The instrument is proven in use

Functional safety
l Only process-relevant parameters can be modified on the

instrument (e.g. measuring range, current output in case of
failure …)
l The modification of these process-relevant parameters is
protected (e.g. password, …)
l The safety function requires less than SIL4
The assessment of the modification management was part of
the proof for "Proven in use".
1.2 Planning
Safety function The measuring system generates on its current output a signal
between 3.8 mA and 20.5 mA corresponding to the process
pressure or level.
This analogue signal is transmitted to a connected processing
unit for monitoring the following conditions:
l Exceeding a preset pressure value
l Falling below a preset pressure value
l Quitting a preset pressure range
When the switching point set on the processing unit is
reached, a signal is outputted.
Safe state The safe state depends on the mode:
Monitoring upper Monitoring lower

pressure value pressure value
Safe state Exceeding the switching Falling below the

point switching point
Output current in safe > switching point (-1 %) < switching point (+1 %)
state
Failure current "fail low" <3.6 mA <3.6 mA
Failure current "fail high" >21.5 mA >21.5 mA
The current tolerance ±1 % refers to the full measuring range

of 16 mA.
Fault description A safe failure is present if the measuring system changes to

the defined safe state or the fault mode when the process does
not demand it.
31637-EN-061002
If the internal diagnosis system detects a failure, the measuring

system goes into fault mode.

Functional safety
A dangerous undetected failure exists if the measuring system

switches neither to the defined safe state nor to the failure
mode when the process requires it.
Configuration of the process- If the measuring system delivers output currents of "fail low" or
ing unit "fail high", a failure can be assumed.
The processing unit must therefore interpret such currents as a
malfunction and output a suitable fault signal.
If this is not the case, the corresponding portions of the failure
rates must be assigned to the dangerous failures. The stated
values in chapter "Safety-relevant characteristics" can thus
worsen.
The processing unit must correspond to the SIL level of the
measurement chain.
Low demand mode If the demand rate is only once a year, then the measuring
system can be used as safety-relevant subsystem in "low
demand mode" (IEC 61508-4, 3.5.12).
If the ratio of the internal diagnostics test rate of the measuring
system to the demand rate exceeds the value 100, the
measuring system can be treated as if it is executing a safety
function in the mode with low demand rate (IEC 61508-2,
7.4.3.2.5).
An associated characteristic is the value PFDavg (average
Probability of dangerous Failure on Demand). It is dependent
on the test interval TProof between the function tests of the
protective function.
Number values see chapter "Safety-related characteristics".
High demand mode If the "low demand rate" does not apply, the measuring system
as safety-relevant subsystem in "high demand mode" should
be used (IEC 61508-4, 3.5.12).
The fault tolerance time of the complete system must be higher
than the sum of the reaction times or the diagnostics test
periods of all components in the safe measurement chain.
An associated characteristic is the value PFH (failure rate).
31637-EN-061002
Assumptions The following assumptions form the basis for the implemen-
tation of FMEDA:

Functional safety
l Failure rates are constant, wear of the mechanical parts is

not taken into account
l Failure rates of external power supplies are not included
l Multiple errors are not taken into account
l The average ambient temperature during the operating
time is 40 °C (104 °F)
l The environmental conditions correspond to an average
industrial environment
l The lifetime of the components is around 8 to 12 years
(IEC 61508-2, 7.4.7.4, remark 3)
l The repair time (exchange of the measuring system) after
an undangerous malfunction is eight hours (MTTR = 8 h)
l The processing unit ca interprete "fail low" and "fail high"
failures as errors and trigger a suitable error message
l The scanning interval of a connected control and pro-
cessing unit is max. 1 hour to react on dangerous,
detectable errors
l Existing communication interfaces (e.g. HART, I²C-Bus)
are not used for transmission of safety-relevant information
General instructions and re- The measuring system should be used appropriately taking
strictions pressure, temperature, density and chemical properties of the
medium into account.
The user-specific limits must be kept. The specifications of the
operating instructions manual must not be exceeded.
1.3 Instrument parameter adjustment

Adjustment tools Since the plant conditions influence the safety of the
measuring system, the instrument parameters must be set
according to the application.
The following tools are allowed:
l the DTM suitable for VEGABAR in conjunction with an
adjustment software according to the FDT/DTM standard,
e.g. PACTware™
l the indicating and adjustment module
Note:
Make sure that DTM-Collection 10/2005 or a newer version is
used.
31637-EN-061002
Create a measurement loop In the adjustment software, the parameter "Sensor acc. to SIL"
must be selected in the menu level "Basic adjustment".

Functional safety
If the indicating and adjustment module is used, the parameter

"SIL" must be actived in the menu level "Service".
Reaction in case of failure The parameter adjustment of the interference current influen-
ces the safety-related characteristics. For safety-relevant
applications only the following interference currents are
permitted:
l fail low = <3.6 mA (default value)
l fail high = 22 mA
Damping of the output signal The damping of the output signal must be adapted to the
process safety time.
Inadmissible modes Measured value transmission via HART signal as well as

HART multidrop mode is not permitted.
Inspection possibilities The effectivity of the set parameters must be checked in a

suitable way.
l After connecting the instrument, the output signal jumps to
the set interference current (at the end of the switch on
phase)
l In mode "Simulation", the signal current can be simulated
independent of the actual pressure or level
Access locking To avoid unwanted or unauthorized modification, the set
parameters must be protected against unintentional access:
l activate the password protection in the adjustment
software
l Activate the PIN on the indicating and adjustment module
The access by means of HART handheld or similar is not
permitted.
The protection against unintentional or unauthorized adjust-
ment can be prevent by e.g. sealing the housing cover.
Caution:
After a reset of the values, all parameters must be checked or
readjusted.
1.4 Setup
Mounting and installation Take note of the mounting and installation instructions of the
31637-EN-061002
operating instructions manual.

Within the setup, we recommend checking the safety function
by means of an initial filling.

Functional safety
1.5 Reaction during operation and in case of

failure
The adjustment elements or device parameters must not be
modified during operation.
If modifications have to be made during operation, carefully
observe the safety functions.
Fault signals that may appear are described in the appropriate
If errors or failure messages are determined, the complete
measuring system must be out of order and the process must
be hold in safe state by other measures.
An exchange of the electronics is easily possible and is
described in the operating instructions manual.
If due to a detected failure the electronics or the complete
sensor is exchanged, the manufacturer must be informed (incl.
a fault description).
1.6 Recurring function test

Generally The recurring function test is used to check the safety function,
to detect possible, non-evident dangerous errors. The meas-
uring system should hence be checked in regular intervals.
The operator is responsible for the kind of check. The intervals
depend on the taken PFDavg value according to chart and
diagram in paragraph "Safety-related characteristics".
With high demand rate, a recurring function test is not
requested in IEC 61508. The function of the measuring system
is proven by the frequent use of the system. In double channel
architectures it is useful to proof the redundancy by recurring
function tests in appropriate intervals.
The test must be carried out in a way that verifies the flawless
operation of the safety functions in conjunction with all system
components.
This is ensured by a controlled reaching of the response height
during filling. If filling up to the response height is not possible,
then a response of the measuring system must be triggered by
a suitable simulation of the level or the physical effect.
31637-EN-061002
The methods and procedures used during the tests must be

stated and their suitability must be specified. The tests must be
documented.

Functional safety
If the function test proves negative, the entire measuring

system must be switched out of service and the process held
in a safe state by means of other measures.
In the double channel architecture 1oo2D this applies
separately to both channels.
1.7 Safety-related characteristics

Basics The failure rates of the electronics, the mechanical parts of the
transmitter as well as the process fitting are determined by an
FMEDA according to IEC 61508. The calculations are based
on component failure rates according to SN 29500. All values
refer to an average ambient temperature during the operating
time of 40 °C (104 °F).
For a higher average temperature of 60 °C (140 °F), the failure
rates should be multiplied by a factor of 2.5. A similar factor
applies if temperature fluctuations are often expected.
The calculations are also based on the specifications stated in
chapter "Planning".
Service life After 8 to 12 years, the failure rates of the electronic

components will increase whereby derived PFD and PFH
values will adulterate (IEC 61508-2, 7.4.7.4, note 3).
Failure rates The key figures stated in the following charts apply to the
modes:
l Overfill protection or monitoring upper pressure value
l Dry run protection or monitoring lower pressure value
l Monitoring a specified pressure range
λsd 0 FIT
λsu 239 FIT
λdd 518 FIT
λdu 195 FIT
DCS 0%
DCD 72 %
MTBF = MTTF + MTTR 0.87x106 h

31637-EN-061002
Fault reaction time Error E013 (no measured value available) <2 sec
Error E041 (hardware error) <20 sec

Functional safety
Error E036 (no executable sensor software) <1 h
Single channel architecture 1oo1D

Specific characteristics SIL SIL2
HFT 0
Sensor type Type B
SFF 79 %
PFDavg
TProof = 1 year <0.086x10-2
TProof = 5 years <0.426x10-2
TProof = 10 years <0.851x10-2
PFH <0.195x10-6/h
Time-dependent process of The chronological sequence of PFDavg is nearly linear to the

PFDavg operating time over a period up to 10 years. The above values
apply only to the TProof interval after which a recurring function
test must be carried out.
PFDavg
4
2
1
1 5 10 TProof
Fig. 1: Chronological sequence of PFDavg (figures see above charts)

1 PFDavg = 0
2 PFDavg after 1 year
3 PFDavg after 5 years
Multiple channel architecture

Specific characteristics If the measuring system is used in a multiple channel
architecture, the safety-relevant characteristics of the selected
31637-EN-061002
structure of the meas. chain must be calculated especially for

the selected application according to the above failure rates.
A suitable Common Cause Factor must be taken into account.

Functional safety
The measuring system must only be used in a diversitary

redundant architecture!
31637-EN-061002

Functional safety
31637-EN-061002

Functional safety
31637-EN-061002

Functional safety
31637-EN-061002

VEGA Grieshaber KG
Am Hohenstein 113
77761 Schiltach
Germany
Phone +49 7836 50-0
Fax +49 7836 50-201
www.vega.com
ISO 9001


TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section
8.3 Level Switch

Operating Instructions, Vegavib 62 - two-wire 71236793 1
Safety manual, Vegavib 62/63 71279762 0
Operating Instructions, Vegavib 63 75579686 0
www.nov.com
VEGAVIB 62
- two-wire
Vibration
Content
Content
1.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Symbolism used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 For your safety

2.1 Authorised personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.2 Appropriate use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.3 Warning about misuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.4 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.5 Safety approval markings and safety tips . . . .. 6
2.6 CE conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.7 SIL conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.8 Safety instructions for Ex areas . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.9 Manufacturer declaration for zone 2 . . . . . . . .. 6
2.10 Environmental instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7
3.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8
3.2 Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9
3.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.4 Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2 Mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

5.1 Preparing the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16
5.2 Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16
5.3 Wiring plan, single chamber housing. . . . . . . .. 17
5.4 Wiring plan - version IP 66/IP 68, 1 bar. . . . . .. 19
6 Set up
6.1 In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 20
6.2 Adjustment elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 21
6.3 Functional chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 23
6.4 Recurring function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 25

29274-EN-080310
7.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.2 Remove interferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.3 Exchanging the electronics module. . . . . . . . . . 29
2 VEGAVIB 62 • - two-wire
Content
7.4 Instrument repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
8 Dismounting
8.1 Dismounting steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
8.2 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
9 Supplement
9.1 Technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
9.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Information:
Supplementary documents appropriate to the ordered version
come with the delivery. You can find them listed in chapter
Instructions manuals for accessories and replacement parts

Tip:
To ensure reliable setup and operation of your VEGAVIB 62,
we offer accessories and replacement parts. The associated
documents are:
29274-EN-080310
l 31086 - External housing - VEGAVIB

l 30172 - Electronics module VEGAVIB series 60
l 30097 - Cable shortening set VEGAVIB 62
VEGAVIB 62 • - two-wire 3
About this document

1.1 Function
This operating instructions manual provides all the information
you need for mounting, connection and setup as well as
important instructions for maintenance and fault rectification.
Please read this information before putting the instrument into
operation and keep this manual accessible in the immediate
vicinity of the device.
1.2 Target group

This operating instructions manual is directed to trained
personnel. The contents of this manual should be made
available to these personnel and put into practice by them.
1.3 Symbolism used

Caution: If this warning is ignored, faults or malfunc-

tions can result.
Warning: If this warning is ignored, injury to persons and/or
serious damage to the instrument can result.
Danger: If this warning is ignored, serious injury to persons
and/or destruction of the instrument can result.
Ex applications
l List
à Action
1 Sequence
29274-EN-080310
For your safety
2 For your safety

All operations described in this operating instructions manual
must be carried out only by trained specialist personnel
authorised by the plant operator.
During work on and with the device the required personal
protection equipment must always be worn.
2.2 Appropriate use

VEGAVIB 62 is a sensor for level detection.
You can find detailed information on the application range in
chapter "Product description".
Operational reliability is ensured only if the instrument is
properly used according to the specifications in the operating
instructions manual as well as possible supplementary
instructions.
Due to safety and warranty reasons, any invasive work on the
device beyond that described in the operating instructions
manual may be carried out only by personnel authorised by the
manufacturer. Arbitrary conversions or modifications are
explicitly forbidden.

application-specific hazards, e.g. vessel overfill or damage to
system components through incorrect mounting or adjustment.

standard regulations and guidelines. The user must take note
of the safety instructions in this operating instructions manual,
the country-specific installation standards as well as all
prevailing safety regulations and accident prevention rules.
The instrument must only be operated in a technically flawless
and reliable condition. The operator is responsible for trouble-
29274-EN-080310
free operation of the instrument.
For your safety
During the entire duration of use, the user is obliged to

determine the compliance of the required occupational safety
measures with the current valid rules and regulations and also
take note of new regulations.
2.5 Safety approval markings and safety tips

The safety approval markings and safety tips on the device
must be observed.
2.6 CE conformity
VEGAVIB 62 is in CE conformity with EMC (89/336/EWG),
fulfils NAMUR recommendation NE 21 and is in CE conformity
with LVD (73/23/EG).
Conformity has been judged according to the following
standards:
l EMC:
- Emission EN 61326: 1997 (class B)
- Susceptibility EN 61326: 1997/A1:1998
l LVD: EN 61010-1: 2001
2.7 SIL conformity

VEGAVIB 62 meets the requirements of functional safety
according to IEC 61508. Further information is available in the
Safety Manual "VEGAVIB series 60".

Please note the Ex-specific safety information for installation
and operation in Ex areas. These safety instructions are part of
the operating instructions manual and come with the Ex-
approved instruments.
2.9 Manufacturer declaration for zone 2

In conformity with DIN EN 60079-15/2005 VEGAVIB 62 is
suitable for use in zone 2.
The operator must use the instrument as it was intended to be
used and follow the specifications of the following documents:
29274-EN-080310
l this operating instructions manual

l the manufacturer declaration 32911 (download under
"www.vega.com")
For your safety
l the valid installation regulations

Protection of the environment is one of our most important
duties. That is why we have introduced an environment
management system with the goal of continuously improving
company environmental protection. The environment man-
agement system is certified according to DIN EN ISO 14001.
Please help us fulfil this obligation by observing the environ-
mental instructions in this manual:
29274-EN-080310
Product description
3.1 Configuration
l VEGAVIB 62 point level sensor
l Documentation
- Safety Manual "Functional safety according to
IEC 61508 or IEC 61511 (SIL)"
- Supplementary instructions manual "Plug connector for
level sensors" (optional)
- Ex-specific "Safety instructions" (with Ex-versions)
Components VEGAVIB 62 consists of the following components:

l Housing cover
l Housing with electronics
l process fitting with vibrating rod
Fig. 1: VEGAVIB 62 - with plastic housing

1 Housing cover
3 Process fitting
Type label The type label contains the most important data for identi-
29274-EN-080310
fication and use of the instrument:

l Article number
l Serial number
Product description
l Technical data
With the serial number, it is possible to show the delivery data
of the instrument via "www.vega.com", "VEGA Tools" and
"serial number search". In addition to the type label outside on
the instrument, the serial number is also available inside the
instrument.

Area of application VEGAVIB 62 is a point level sensor with vibrating rod for level
detection.
It is designed for industrial use in all areas of process
technology and is preferably used for bulk solids.
Typical applications are overfill and dry run protection. Thanks
to its simple and robust measuring system, VEGAVIB 62 is
virtually unaffected by the chemical and physical properties of
the bulk solid.
It works also under strong external vibrations or with changing
product.
Solid detection in water
If VEGAVIB 62 was ordered for solid detection in water, the
vibrating rod is to the density of water. In air or if covered by
water (density: 1 g/cm³/0.036 lbs/in) VEGAVIB 62 signals
uncovered. Only if the vibrating element is also covered with
solids (e.g. sand, sludge, gravel etc.) will the sensor signal
covered.
Fault monitoring
The electronics module of VEGAVIB 62 monitors continuously
the following criteria:
l Correct vibrating frequency
l Line break to the piezo drive
If one of these faults is detected, the electronics signals this via
a defined current to the signal conditioning instrument. The
connection cable to the vibrating element is also monitored.
Functional principle The vibrating rod is piezoelectrically energised and vibrates at

its mechanical resonance frequency of approx. 360 Hz. When
the vibrating rod is submerged in the product, the vibration
29274-EN-080310
amplitude changes. This change is detected by the integrated

oscillator and converted into a switching command.
Product description
Supply Depending on your requirements, VEGAVIB 62 with two-wire

electronics can be connected to different signal conditioning
instruments. Compatible signal conditioning instruments are
listed in chapter "Technical data".
data".
3.3 Operation
With the factory setting, products with a density of > 0.05 g/cm³
(0.002 lbs/in³) can be measured. It is possible to adapt the
instrument for products with lower density > 0.02 g/cm³
(0.0007 lbs/in³).
On the electronics module you will find the following indicating
and adjustment elements:
l Signal lamp for indication of the switching condition (green/
red)
l DIL switch (V02) or potentiometer (V01) for adaptation to
the product density
l Mode changeover for selection of the output current
3.4 Storage and transport

Packaging Your instrument was protected by packaging during transport.
Its capacity to handle normal loads during transport is assured
by a test according to DIN EN 24180.
The packaging of standard instruments consists of environ-
ment-friendly, recyclable cardboard. In addition, the sensor is
provided with a protective cover of cardboard. For special
versions PE foam or PE foil is also used. Dispose of the
packaging material via specialised recycling companies.
Transport Transport must be carried out under consideration of the notes

on the transport packaging. Nonobservance of these instruc-
tions can cause damage to the device.
Transport inspection The delivery must be checked for completeness and possible
transit damage immediately at receipt. Ascertained transit
damage or concealed defects must be appropriately dealt
with.
29274-EN-080310
Storage Up to the time of installation, the packages must be left closed

and stored according to the orientation and storage markings
on the outside.
Product description
Unless otherwise indicated, the packages must be stored only

under the following conditions:
l Not in the open
l Dry and dust free
Storage and transport l Storage and transport temperature see "Supplement -
temperature Technical data - Ambient conditions"
29274-EN-080310
Mounting
4 Mounting
Switching point In general, VEGAVIB 62 must be mounted vertically. The
instrument must be mounted in such a way that the vibrating
element is at the height of the requested switching point.
Moisture Use the recommended cables (see chapter "Connecting to

power supply") and tighten the cable gland.
You can give your instrument additional protection against
moisture penetration by leading the connection cable down-
ward in front of the cable entry. Rain and condensation water
can thus drain off. This applies mainly to mounting outdoors, in
areas where moisture is expected (e.g. by cleaning processes)
or on cooled or heated vessels.
Transport Do not hold VEGAVIB 62 on the vibrating element. Especially

with flange and tube versions, the sensor can be damaged by
the weight of the instrument.
Remove the protective cover just before mounting.
Pressure/Vacuum The process fitting must be sealed if there is gauge or low

pressure in the vessel. Before use, check if the seal material is
resistant against the measured product and the process
temperature.
The max. permissible pressure is specified in chapter
"Technical data" or on the type label of the sensor.
29274-EN-080310
Handling The vibrating level switch is a measuring instrument and must

be treated accordingly. Bending the vibrating element will
destroy the instrument.
Mounting
Warning:
The housing must not be used to screw the instrument in!
Applying tightening force can damage internal parts of the
housing.
Use the hexagon above the thread for screwing in.
4.2 Mounting instructions

Tensile load Make sure that the max. permissible tensile load of the
suspension cable is not exceeded. The danger of this
happening exists particularly with very heavy solids and large
meas. lengths. The max. permissible load is stated in chapter
"Technical data".
Material cone In silos for bulk solids, material cones can form and change the
switching point. Please keep this in mind when installing the
sensor in the vessel. We recommend selecting an installation
location where the vibrating rod detects an average value of
the material cone.
The vibrating rod must be mounted in a way that takes the
arrangement of the filling and emptying apertures into account.
To compensate measurement errors caused by the material
cone in cylindrical vessels, the sensor must be mounted at a
distance of d/6 from the vessel wall.
d d
10 10
d d
29274-EN-080310
Fig. 3: Filling and emptying centered
Mounting
10
d
2
d
Fig. 4: Filling in the center, emptying laterally

1 VEGAVIB 62
2 Emptying opening
3 Filling opening
Socket The vibrating element should protrude into the vessel to avoid
buildup. For that reason, avoid using mounting bosses for
flanges and screwed fittings. This applies particularly to use
with adhesive products.
Inflowing medium If VEGAVIB 62 is mounted in the filling stream, unwanted false

measurement signals can be generated. For this reason,
mount VEGAVIB 62 at a position in the vessel where no
disturbances, e.g. from filling openings, agitators, etc., can
occur.
29274-EN-080310
Mounting
Fig. 5: Inflowing medium
Baffle protection against In applications such as grit chambers or settling basins for
falling rocks coarse sediments, the vibrating element must be protected
against damage with a suitable baffle.
This baffle must be manufactured by you.
> 125 mm
(4 59/64")
Fig. 6: Baffle to protect against damages

29274-EN-080310

Take note of In hazardous areas you should take note of the appropriate
safety instruc- regulations, conformity and type approval certificates of the
tions for Ex ap- sensors and power supply units.
plications
Select power supply Connect the power supply according to the following diagrams.
Take note of the general installation regulations. As a rule,
connect VEGAVIB 62 to vessel ground (PA), or in case of
plastic vessels, to the next ground potential. On the side of the
instrument housing there is a ground terminal between the
cable entries. This connection serves to drain off electrostatic
charges. In Ex applications, the installation regulations for
hazardous areas must be given priority.
data".
Selecting connection VEGAVIB 62 is connected with standard cable with round

cable cross section. An outer cable diameter of 5 … 9 mm
(0.2 … 0.35 in) ensures the seal effect of the cable gland.
If cable with a different diameter or wire cross section is used,
exchange the seal or use an appropriate cable connection.
In hazardous areas, only use approved cable connections for

VEGAVIB 62.
Select connec- Take note of the corresponding installation regulations for Ex

tion cable for Ex applications.
applications
With Ex instruments, the housing cover may only be opened if

there is no explosive atmosphere present.
Proceed as follows:
29274-EN-080310

3 Remove approx. 10 cm (4 in) of the cable mantle, strip

approx. 1 cm (0.4 in) insulation from the ends of the
individual wires
(see following illustration)
the wiring plan
pulling on them
10 If necessary, carry out a fresh adjustment

EEx-d version.
29274-EN-080310
Housing overview
4 4 4
1 2 3

1 Plastic (not with EEx d)
2 Aluminium
3 Stainless steel (not with EEx d)
4 Filter element for pressure compensation or blind stopper with version IP 66/
IP 68, 1 bar (not with EEx d)
Wiring plan For connection to a VEGATOR (Ex) signal conditioning

instrument. The sensor is powered by the connected
VEGATOR signal conditioning instrument. Further information
is available in chapter "Technical data", "Ex-technical data" are
available in the supplied "Safety information manual".
The wiring example is applicable for all suitable signal
conditioning instruments.
If the mode switch of VEGAVIB 62 is correctly set to "max.",
the control lamp on VEGAVIB 62 lights.
l red - with submerged vibrating element
l green - with uncovered vibrating element
Take note of the operating instructions manual of the signal
conditioning instrument. Suitable signal conditioning instru-
ments are listed in chapter "Technical data".
1
29274-EN-080310
Fig. 9: Wiring plan

1 Supply voltage

Wire assignment, con-
nection cable +
1
-
2
Fig. 10: Wire assignment, connection cable

2 Shielding
29274-EN-080310
Set up
6 Set up
6.1 In general
The numbers in brackets refer to the following illustrations.
Function/Configuration On the electronics module you will find the following indicating
and adjustment elements:
l DIL switch (V02) or potentiometer (V01) for adaptation to
the product density (1)
l DIL switch for mode adjustment - min./max. (2)
l Signal lamp (5)
Note:
As a rule, always set the mode before starting to set up
VEGAVIB 62 . If used on a VEGATOR signal conditioning
instrument, always set the mode switch (2) on VEGAVIB 62 to
max. mode.
The mode is selected on the signal conditioning instrument
with the mode switch.
The switching output will change if you set one of the two mode
switches afterwards. This could possibly trigger other con-
nected instruments or devices.
29274-EN-080310
Set up
6.2 Adjustment elements

Electronics and connec-
tion compartment -
Electronics version V02 1
5
Fig. 11: Electronics and connection compartment - VB60Z - Two-wire output

(electronics version V02)
1 DIL switch for switching point adaptation
2 DIL switch for mode adjustment
3 Ground terminal
4 Connection terminals
5 Control lamp
Electronics and connec- For instruments with FM or CSA approval there is still
tion compartment - electronics version V01 available.
Electronics version V01
This electronics version has a potentiometer for switching
point adjustment (instead of the slide switch).
29274-EN-080310
Set up
1
5
Fig. 12: Electronics and connection compartment - VB60Z - Two-wire output

(electronics version V01)
1 Potentiometer for switching point adaptation
3 Ground terminal
5 Control lamp
Switching point adapta- From electronics version -02 a DIL switch is integrated on the
tion (1) electronics module instead of the potentiometer. With the
potentiometer or the DIL switch you can adapt the switching
point to the bulk solid. Both are preset and must only be
modified in special cases.
l The DIL switch (V-02) of VEGAVIB 62 is set to the large
weight symbol (> 0.3 g/cm³ or 0.011 lbs/in³). In very light
solids you should turn the DIL switch to the small weight
symbol (0.02 … 0.1 g/cm³ or 0.0007 … 0.0036 lbs/in³). By
doing this, VEGAVIB 62 is more sensitive and can detect
light solids reliably.
l The Potentiometer (V-01) of VEGAVIB 62 is set to the
complete right position (> 0.3 g/cm³/0.011 lbs/in³). In very
light solids you have to turn the potentiometer to the
complete left position (0.02 … 0.1 g/cm³ or
0.0007 … 0.0036 lbs/in³). By doing this, VEGAVIB 62 will
be more sensitive and light solids can be detected more
29274-EN-080310
reliably.
For instruments detecting solids in water, these settings are
not applicable. The switching point adaptation is preset and
must not be changed.
Set up
Mode adjustment (2) With the mode adjustment (min./max.) you can determine the
output current.
When using a VEGATOR signal conditioning instrument,
always set the mode switch to max. mode.
In this case you select the requested mode according to the
"Function chart" (max. - max. detection or overfill protection,
min. - min.detection or dry run detection) on the VEGATOR
signal conditioning instrument.
When used on a control system, the following values apply:
l Mode min.
- Vibrating element uncovered - 16 mA ±1 mA
- Vibrating element covered - 8 mA ±1 mA
l Mode max.
Signal lamp (5) Control lamp for indication of the switching status.
l green = 8 mA
l red = 16 mA
l red (flashing) = Failure (< 2.3 mA)
6.3 Functional chart

VEGAVIB 62 level switch
The following chart provides an overview of the switching
conditions depending on the adjusted mode and level.
Mode on the Level Signal current - Signal lamp -

sensor Sensor sensor
Max. 8 mA
Overflow protec-
tion
Green
Max. approx. 16 mA
Overflow protec-
tion
Red
Min. approx. 8 mA
Dry run protection
29274-EN-080310
Green
Set up

Min. approx. 16 mA
Dry run protection
Red
Fault message any < 2.3 mA
(min./max. mode)
flashes red
VEGAVIB 62 level switch with signal conditioning instrument1)

The following chart provides an overview of the switching
conditions depending on the adjusted mode of the signal
conditioning instrument and the level.
Note:
Keep in mind that the mode switch of VEGAVIB 62 must be
always set to "max.".
Mode on the Level Signal cur- Signal lamp Signal

signal condi- rent - Sen- - sensor lamp - sig-
tioning in- sor nal condi-
strument tioning in-
strument
Mode A approx. 8 mA
Overflow pro-
tection
Green
Mode A approx.
Overflow pro- 16 mA
tection
Red
Mode B approx.
Dry run pro- 16 mA
tection
Red
29274-EN-080310
1) You will find suitable signal conditioning instruments in chapter "Technical

data".
Set up
Mode on the Level Signal cur- Signal lamp Signal

signal condi- rent - Sen- - sensor lamp - sig-
tioning in- sor nal condi-
strument tioning in-
strument
Mode B approx. 8 mA
Dry run pro-
tection
Green
Fault mes- any < 2.3 mA
sage
(mode A/B)
flashes red

According to IEC 61508.
VEGAVIB 62 in conjunction with a VEGATOR 636 Ex is
qualified in mode A (overfill protection) for use in measuring
chains of stage SIL2 according to IEC 61508 (redundant, stage
SIL3).
SIL The following instrument combinations meet the requirements

according to SIL:
VEGAVIB 62
l Oscillator VB60Z
l VEGATOR 636EX signal conditioning instrument
Recurring function test The recurring function test according to IEC 61508 can be
carried out by pushing the test key on the signal conditioning
instrument or by briefly (> 2 seconds) interrupting the cable to
the sensor. The correct sequence of the switching conditions
must be monitored via the two LEDs on the signal conditioning
instrument as well as the connected systems. The sensor must
neither be removed nor response must be triggered by filling
the vessel. This applies to VEGAVIB 62 with two-wire oscillator
VB60Z.
You can carry out the function test with the outputted current
values also directly via a safety PLC or a process control
system.
29274-EN-080310
The implementation and switching sequence of the function

test is described also in the operating instructions manual of
the appropriate signal conditioning instrument.
Set up
Test key on the signal A function test can be carried out for measuring systems in
conditioning instrument conjunction with the two-wire oscillator VB60Z. For this the
switching delay must be set to 0.5 s. The signal conditioning
instrument has an integrated test key. The test key is recessed
in the front plate of the signal conditioning instrument. Push the
test key for > 2 seconds with a suitable object (screwdriver,
pen, etc.).
If VEGAVIB 62 is connected to a VEGALOG processing
system or a safety SPLC, you have to interrupt the connection
cable to the sensor for > 2 seconds.
After releasing the test key or interrupting the connection cable
to the sensor, the complete measuring system can be checked
on correct function. The following operating conditions are
simulated during the test:
l Fault message
l Empty signal
l Full signal
I/mA
16 1
8 2
1,5 3 4,5 t/s
Fig. 33: Flow chart of the function test

1 Full signal
2 Empty signal
Check if all three switching conditions occur in the correct
sequence and the stated time period. If this is not the case,
there is a fault in the measuring system (see also the operating
instructions manual of the signal conditioning instrument).
Keep in mind that connected instruments are activated during
the function test. By doing this, you can check the correct
function of the measuring system.
Test procedure (after releasing the test key)

29274-EN-080310
Set up
Sensor Level re- Level re- LED LED Fail safe LED
current lay lay VEGA- VEGA- relay
VEGA- VEGA- TOR A - TOR B - VEGA-
TOR A - TOR B - Overfill Dry run TOR
Overfill Dry run protec- protec-
protec- protec- tion tion
tion tion
1. Fault signal < 2 mA current- current- current-
(approx. 3 s) less less less
approx. energized current- energized

2. Empty signal 8 mA less
(approx. 1.5 s)
3. Full signal approx. current- energized energized

(approx. 1.5 s) 16 mA less
4. Return to the actual

operating condition
Note:
When used in measuring chains according to IEC 61508,
mode B is not permitted.
You can carry out the function test with the stated current
values also directly with a safety PLC or a process control
system.
29274-EN-080310

7.1 Maintenance
When used as directed in normal operation, VEGAVIB 62 is
completely maintenance free.
7.2 Remove interferences

Reaction when malfunc- The operator of the system is responsible for taken suitable
tions occur measures to remove interferences.
Causes of malfunction VEGAVIB 62 offers maximum reliability. Nevertheless, faults

can occur during operation. These may be caused by the
following, e.g.:
l Sensor
l Process
l Supply
l Signal processing
Fault clearance The first measure to be taken is to check the output signal. In
many cases, the causes can be determined this way and the
faults rectified.
24 hour service hotline However, should these measures not be successful, call the
VEGA service hotline in urgent cases under the phone no. +49
1805 858550.
The hotline is available to you 7 days a week round-the-clock.
Since we offer this service world-wide, the support is only
available in the English language. The service is free of
charge, only the standard telephone costs will be charged.
Checking the switching ? VEGAVIB 62 signals "covered" when the vibrating element
signal is not submerged (overfill protection)
? VEGAVIB 62 signals "uncovered" when the vibrating
element is submerged (dry run protection)
l Supply voltage too low
à Check the power supply
l Electronics defective
à Press the mode switch (min./max.). If the instrument
then changes the mode, the instrument may be
29274-EN-080310
mechanically damaged. Should the switching function

in the correct mode still be faulty, return the instrument
for repair.
à Push the mode switch. If the instrument then does not

change the mode, the oscillator may be defective.
Exchange the oscillator.
à Check if there is buildup on the probe, and if so,
remove it.
l Unfavourable installation location
à Mount the instrument at a location in the vessel where
no dead zones or mounds can form.
à Check if the vibrating element is covered by buildup on
the socket.
l Wrong mode selected
à Set the mode switch on VEGAVIB 62 to "max". Set the
correct mode on the signal conditioning instrument (A:
overfill protection; B: dry run protection).
? Signal lamp flashes red

l Electronics module has detected a failure
Reaction after fault rec- Depending on the failure reason and measures taken, the
tification steps described in chapter "Set up" must be carried out again,
if necessary.
7.3 Exchanging the electronics module

In general, all oscillators of series VB60 can be interchanged. If
you want to use an oscillator with a different signal output, you
can download the corresponding operating instructions man-
ual from our homepage under Downloads.
With EEx d instruments, the housing cover must only be

opened if there is no explosive atmosphere.
Proceed as follows:
1 Switch off power supply
4 Pull the connection cables out of the terminals
29274-EN-080310
5 Loosen the two screws with a screw driver (Torx size T10
or slot 4)
Fig. 44: Loosening the holding screws

1 Electronics module
2 Screws (2 pcs.)
6 Pull out the old electronics module

7 Compare the new oscillator with the old one. The type label
of the oscillator must correspond to that of the old
oscillator. This applies particularly to instruments used in
hazardous areas.
8 Compare the settings of the two oscillators. Set the
adjustment elements of the new oscillator to the same
setting of the old one.
Information:
Make sure that the housing is not rotated during the electronics
exchange. Otherwise the plug may be in a different position
later.
9 Insert the oscillator carefully. Make sure that the plug is in

the correct position.
10 Screw in and tighten the two holding screws with a
screwdriver (Torx size T10 or Phillips 4)
the wiring plan
pulling on them
14 Check cable gland on tightness. The seal ring must
completely encircle the cable.
29274-EN-080310

The electronics exchange is now finished.

You can download a return form (23 KB) from our Internet
homepage www.vega.com under: "Downloads - Forms and
certificates - Repair form".
By doing this you help us carry out the repair quickly and
without having to call back for needed information.
l Attach the completed form and probably the safety data
sheet outside on the packaging
l Please ask the agency serving you for the address of your
return shipment. You can find the respective agency on our
website www.vega.com under: "Company - VEGA world-
wide"
29274-EN-080310
Dismounting
8 Dismounting
Warning:
Before dismounting, be aware of dangerous process con-
ditions such as e.g. pressure in the vessel, high temperatures,
corrosive or toxic products etc.
Take note of chapters "Mounting" and "Connecting to power

supply" and carry out the listed steps in reverse order.
With Ex instruments, the housing cover may only be opened if

there is no explosive atmosphere present.
8.2 Disposal
specialised recycling companies. We use recyclable materials
and have designed the electronics to be easily separable.
This instrument is not subject to the WEEE directive 2002/96/
EG and the respective national laws. Pass the instrument
directly on to a specialised recycling company and do not use
the municipal collecting points. These may be used only for
privately used products according to the WEEE directive.
Correct disposal avoids negative effects to persons and
environment and ensures recycling of useful raw materials.
If you cannot dispose of the instrument properly, please
contact us about disposal methods or return.
29274-EN-080310
Supplement
9 Supplement
9.1 Technical data
General data
- Process fitting - thread 316L
- Process fitting - flange 316L
- Process seal Klingersil C-4400
- Seal (vibrating element) CR, CSM
- Vibrating rod 316L, 318 S13 (1.4462)
- Suspension cable PUR
(-20 … +80 °C/-4 … +176 °F)
- Suspension cable - optionally FEP
(-40 … +150 °C/-40 … +302 °F)
- Plastic housing plastic PBT (Polyester)
- Aluminium die-casting housing Aluminium die-casting AlSi10Mg, powder-
coated - basis: Polyester
- Stainless steel housing - preci- 316L
sion casting
- Stainless steel housing, electro- 316L
polished
- Seal between housing and NBR (stainless steel housing, investment
housing cover casting), silicone (Aluminium/plastic hous-
ing, stainless steel housing, electro-pol-
ished)
- Light guide in housing cover PMMA (Makrolon)
- Ground terminal 316L
Weight approx.
- Instrument weight (depending 0.8 … 4 kg (0.18 … 8.82 lbs)
on process fitting)
- Suspension cable 165 g/m (1.77 oz/ft)
(-20 … +80 °C/-4 … +176 °F)
- Suspension cable 200 g/m (2.15 oz/ft)
(-40 … +150 °C/-40 … +302 °F)
29274-EN-080310
optionally
Max. permissible tensile load 3000 N (675 lbs)
Supplement
Sensor length (L) - suspension 0.48 … 80 m (1.575 … 262.47 ft)

cable PUR
(-20 … +80 °C/-4 … +176 °F)
Sensor length (L) - suspension 0.6 … 80 m (1.969 … 262.47 ft)
cable FEP
(-40 … +150 °C/-40 … +302 °F)
Output variable
Output Two-wire output
Suitable signal conditioning instru- VEGATOR 536Ex, 537Ex, 636Ex
ments
Output signal
- Mode min. Vibrating element uncovered: 16 mA ±1 mA,
vibrating element covered: 8 mA ±1 mA
- Mode max. Vibrating element uncovered: 8 mA ±1 mA,
- Fault message < 2.3 mA
Modes (adjustable) min./max.
Switching delay
- When immersed 0.5 s
- When laid bare 1s
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature on the housing -40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F)
Storage and transport temperature -40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F)
Process conditions
Measured value Limit level of solids
Process pressure -1 … 6 bar/-100 … 600 kPa (-14.5 … 87 psig)
Process temperature with PUR -20 … +80 °C (-4 … +176 °F)
suspension cable
Process temperature with FEP sus- -40 … +150 °C (-40 … +302 °F)
pension cable
Product density
- Standard > 0.05 g/cm³ (0.002 lbs/in³)
adjustable > 0.02 g/cm³ (0.0007 lbs/in³)
29274-EN-080310
-
Granular size max. approx. 20 mm (0.8 in)2)
2) Only with density < 0.05 g/cm³ (0.002 lbs/in³).
Supplement
Electromechanical data - version IP 66/IP 67 and IP 66/IP 68; 0.2 bar

Cable entry/plug3)
- Single chamber housing l 1 x cable gland M20 x 1.5 (cable:
ø 5 … 9 mm), 1 x blind stopper M20 x 1.5
or:
l 1 x closing cap ½ NPT, 1 x blind plug
½ NPT
or:
l 1 x plug (depending on the version), 1 x
blind stopper M20 x 1.5
Spring-loaded terminals for wire cross-section up to 1.5 mm²
(AWG 16)
Electromechanical data - version IP 66/IP 68, 1 bar

Cable entry
- Single chamber housing l 1 x IP 68 cable gland M20 x 1.5; 1 x
blind stopper M20 x 1.5
or:
l 1 x closing cap ½ NPT, 1 x blind plug
½ NPT
Connection cable
- Configuration four wires, one suspension cable, one
breather capillary, screen braiding, foil,
mantle
- Wire cross-section 0.5 mm²
- Wire resistance < 0.036 Ω/m (0.011 Ω/ft)
- Tensile strength > 1200 N (270 pounds force)
- Min. bending radius 25 mm (with 25 °C/77 °F)
- Diameter approx. 8 mm
29274-EN-080310
3) Depending on the version M12 x 1, according to DIN 43650, Harting, Am-

Supplement
Adjustment elements
Mode switch
- Min. Min. detection or dry run protection
- Max. Max. detection or overflow protection
Supply voltage
Voltage supply 10 … 36 V DC (via the signal conditioning
instrument)

Protection
- Plastic housing IP 66/IP 67
- Aluminium and stainless steel IP 66/IP 68 (0.2 bar)4)
standard
- Aluminium and stainless hous- IP 66/IP 68 (1 bar)
ing (optionally available)
Protection class II
Approvals5)
Approvals
- ATEX ATEX II 1G, 1/2G, 2G EEx ia IIC T6
ATEX II 1D, 1/2D, 2D IP66T
ATEX II 1D, 1/2D, 2D IP66T + ATEX II 1G,
1/2G, 2G EEx ia IIC T6
- FM FM (IS) CL I, II, III DIV 1, GP ABCDEFG
FM (NI) CL I, DIV 2, GP ABCD; (DIP) CL II,

III, DIV 1, GP EFG
- CSA CSA (IS) CL I, II, III DIV 1, GP ABCDEFG
- IEC Ex tD A20/21, A21 IP66T
29274-EN-080310
4) A suitable cable is the prerequisite for maintaining the protection class.

5) Deviating data in Ex applications: see separate safety instructions.
Supplement
9.2 Dimensions
Housing in protection IP 66/IP 67 and IP 66/IP 68; 0.2 bar
~ 59 mm ~ 69 mm
~ 69 mm (2 21/64")
ø 80 mm (2 23/32") ~ 116 mm (4 9/16")
(2 23/32") ø 77 mm
ø 77 mm
(3 5/32") (3 1/32") ø 84 mm (3 5/16")
(3 1/32")
116 mm (4 9/16")
117 mm (4 39/64")
112 mm (4 13/32")
112 mm (4 13/32")
M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/ M20x1,5
½ NPT ½ NPT ½ NPT ½ NPT
1 2 3 4
Fig. 45: Housing versions in protection IP 66/IP 67 and IP 66/IP 68; 0.2 bar
1 Plastic housing
2 Stainless steel housing, electro-polished
3 Stainless steel housing - precision casting
4 Aluminium housing
Housing in protection IP 66/IP 68, 1 bar
~ 103mm
(4 1/16") ~ 150mm (5 29/32")
ø 77mm
(3 1/32") ø 84mm (3 5/16")
116mm (4 9/16")
117mm (4 39/64")
M20x1,5 M20x1,5 M20x1,5
1 2
Fig. 46: Housing versions in protection IP 66/IP 68, 1 bar

2 Aluminium housing
29274-EN-080310
Supplement
(63/64")
25 mm
G1A
G1 1/2A
(25/32")
20 mm
(1 59/64")
49 mm
ø 29 mm (1 9/64")
ø 11 mm ( 7/16")
L
185 mm (7 9/32")
ø 29 mm (1 9/64")
125 mm (4 59/64")
ø16 mm (5/8")
29274-EN-080310
Fig. 47: VEGAVIB 62 - with PUR suspension cable

L Sensor length, see chapter "Technical data"
Supplement
(63/64")
25 mm
G1A
G1 1/2A
(25/32")
(1 27/32")
20 mm
47 mm
ø 29 mm (1 9/64")
ø 10 mm ( 25/64")
L
176 mm (6 59/64")
ø 29 mm (1 9/64")
125 mm (4 59/64")
ø16 mm (5/8")
Fig. 48: VEGAVIB 62 - with FEP suspension cable

29274-EN-080310
Supplement

VEGA product lines are global protected by industrial property
rights. Further information see http://www.vega.com.
Only in U.S.A.: Further information see patent label at the
sensor housing.
VEGA Produktfamilien sind weltweit geschützt durch gewer-
bliche Schutzrechte.
Les lignes de produits VEGA sont globalement protégées par
des droits de propriété intellectuelle. Pour plus d'informations,
on pourra se référer au site http://www.vega.com.
VEGA lineas de productos están protegidas por los derechos
en el campo de la propiedad industrial. Para mayor
información revise la pagina web http://www.vega.com.
Линии продукции фирмы ВЕГА защищаются по всему
миру правами на интеллектуальную собственность.
Дальнейшую информацию смотрите на сайте http://www.vega.
com.
9.4 Trademark
All brands used as well as trade and company names are
property of their lawful proprietor/originator.
29274-EN-080310
Supplement
29274-EN-080310
Supplement
29274-EN-080310
Supplement
29274-EN-080310
Printing date:
VEGA Grieshaber KG
Am Hohenstein 113
77761 Schiltach
Germany
Phone +49 7836 50-0
Fax +49 7836 50-201
www.vega.com
ISO 9001


Safety Manual
VEGAVIB series 60
with two-wire output
Contents
Contents
1 Functional safety
1.1 In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Adjustment instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.4 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5 Reaction during operation and in case of failure. 7
1.6 Recurring function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.7 Safety-related characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
32006-EN-061031
2 VEGAVIB series 60 - with two-wire output

Functional safety
1 Functional safety
1.1 In general
Scope This safety manual applies to measuring systems consisting of
the vibrating level switch VEGAVIB series 60 with integrated
oscillator VB60Z:
VEGAVIB 61, 62, 63, 65, 66, 67
Valid hardware and software versions:
l Serial number of the electronics >14215176
l Sensor software from Rev. 1.03
Area of application The measuring system can be implemented for level detection
of bulk solids (powders and granulates) which meets the
special requirements of safety technology.
This is possible up to SIL2 in a single channel architecture
(1oo1D), and up to SIL3 in a multiple channel, redundant
architecture.
Note:
With a special factory setting, the measuring system is also
suitable for detection of solids in water (see "Operating
instructions manual").
SIL conformity The SIL declaration of conformity can be downloaded from our
homepage in the Internet.
Abbreviations, terms Further abbreviations and terms are stated in IEC 61508-4.
SIL Safety Integrity Level
HFT Hardware Fault Tolerance
SFF Safe Failure Fraction
PFDavg average Probability of dangerous Failure on Demand
PFH Probability of a dangerous Failure per Hour
FMEDA Failure Mode, Effects and Diagnostics Analysis
λsd Rate for safe detected failure
λsu Rate for safe undetected failure
λdd Rate for dangerous detected failure

32006-EN-061031
λdu Rate for dangerous undetected failure
DCS Diagnostic Coverage of safe failures; DCS = λsd/(λsd+λsu)
DCD Diagnostic Coverage of dangerous failures; DCD = λdd/(λdd+λdu)
VEGAVIB series 60 - with two-wire output 3

Functional safety
FIT Failure In Time (1 FIT = 1 failure/109 h
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
MTTF Mean Time To Failure
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
Relevant standards l IEC 61508 (also available as DIN EN)

- Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable
electronic safety-related systems
Safety requirements Failure limit values for a safety function, depending on the SIL
class (of IEC 61508-1, 7.6.2)
Safety integrity level Low demand mode High demand mode
SIL PFDavg PFH

-5 -4
4 ≥10 … <10 ≥10 … <10-8
-9
3 ≥10-4 … <10-3 ≥10-8 … <10-7

-3 -2
2 ≥10 … <10 ≥10-7 … <10-6
1 ≥10-2 … <10-1 ≥10-6 … <10-5
Safety integrity of hardware for safety-related subsystems of

type B (IEC 61508-2, 7.4.3)
Safe failure fraction Hardware fault

tolerance
SFF HFT = 0 HFT = 1 HFT = 2
<60 % not permitted SIL1 SIL2
60 % … <90 % SIL1 SIL2 SIL3
90 % … <99 % SIL2 SIL3 (SIL4)
≥99 % SIL3 (SIL4) (SIL4)
1.2 Planning
Safety function The safety function of this measuring system is the identi-
fication and signalling of the condition of the vibrating element.
A difference is made between the two conditions "covered"
and "uncovered".
32006-EN-061031

Functional safety
Safe state The safe state depends on the mode:
Overfill protection Dry run protection

(max. operation) (min. operation)
Vibrating element in safe covered uncovered

state
Output current in safe 12.5 … 23.5 mA 2.3 … 11.5 mA

condition if mode switch
on the sensor is set to
"max."
Output current in safe 2.3 … 11.5 mA 12.5 … 23.5 mA

condition if mode switch
on the sensor is set to
"min."
Failure current "fail low" <2.3 mA <2.3 mA
Failure current "fail high" >23.5 mA >23.5 mA
Fault description A safe failure is present when the measuring system switches
to the defined safe state or the fault mode without the process
demanding it.
If the internal diagnosis system detects a failure, the measuring
system goes into fault mode.
A dangerous undetected failure exists if the measuring system
switches neither to the defined safe condition nor to the failure
mode when the process requires it.
Configuration of the process- If the measuring system delivers output currents of "fail low" or
ing unit "fail high", it can be assumed that there is a malfunction.
The processing unit must therefore interpret such currents as a
malfunction and output a suitable fault signal.
If this is not the case, the corresponding portions of the failure
rates must be assigned to the dangerous failures. The stated
values in chapter "Safety-relevant characteristics" can thus
worsen.
The processing unit must correspond to the SIL level of the
measurement chain.
If a VEGATOR 636 is used for processing, the mode switch on
the sensor must be set to "max.".
32006-EN-061031
Low demand mode If the demand rate is only once a year, then the measuring
system can be used as safety-relevant subsystem in "low
demand mode" (IEC 61508-4, 3.5.12).

Functional safety
If the ratio of the internal diagnostics test rate of the measuring

system to the demand rate exceeds the value 100, the
measuring system can be treated as if it is executing a safety
function in the mode with low demand rate (IEC 61508-2,
7.4.3.2.5).
An associated characteristic is the value PFDavg (average
Probability of dangerous Failure on Demand). It is dependent
on the test interval TProof between the function tests of the
protective function.
High demand mode If the "low demand rate" does not apply, the measuring system
as safety-relevant subsystem in "high demand mode" should
be used (IEC 61508-4, 3.5.12).
The fault tolerance time of the complete system must be higher
than the sum of the reaction times or the diagnostics test
periods of all components in the safety-related measurement
chain.
An associated characteristic is the value PFH (failure rate).
Assumptions The following assumptions form the basis for the implemen-
tation of FMEDA:
l Failure rates are constant, wear of the mechanical parts is
not taken into account
l Failure rates of external power supplies are not taken into
account
l Multiple errors are not taken into account
l The average ambient temperature during the operating
time is 40 °C (104 °F)
l The environmental conditions correspond to an average
industrial environment
l The lifetime of the components is around 8 to 12 years
(IEC 61508-2, 7.4.7.4, remark 3)
l The repair time (exchange of the measuring system) after
an nondangerous malfunction is eight hours (MTTR = 8 h)
l The processing unit can interprete "fail low" and "fail high"
failures as errors and trigger a suitable error message
l The scanning interval of a connected control and pro-
cessing unit is max. 1 hour, in order to react to dangerous,
32006-EN-061031
detectable errors
l Existing communication interfaces (e.g. HART, I²C-Bus)
are not used for transmission of safety-relevant information

Functional safety
General instructions and re- The measuring system should be used appropriately taking
strictions pressure, temperature, density and chemical properties of the
medium into account.
The user-specific limits must be kept. The specifications of the
operating instructions manual must not be exceeded.
Keep in mind when using as dry run protection:
l Avoid buildup on the vibrating system (probably shorter
proof test intervals will be necessary)
l Fork version: avoid granulate size of the medium >15 mm
(0.6 in)
1.3 Adjustment instructions

Adjustment elements Since the plant conditions influence the safety of the
measuring system, the adjustment elements must be set
according to the application:
l Potentiometer for switching point adaptation
l DIL switch for mode adjustment
The function of the adjustment elements is described in the
1.4 Setup
Mounting and installation Take note of the mounting and installation instructions of the
In the setup procedure, a check of the safety function by
means of an initial filling is recommended.
1.5 Reaction during operation and in case of

failure
The adjustment elements or device parameters must not be
modified during operation.
If modifications have to be made during operation, carefully
observe the safety functions.
Fault signals that may appear are described in the appropriate
32006-EN-061031
If faults or error messages are detected, the entire measuring

system must be shut down and the process held in a safe state
by other measures.

Functional safety
An exchange of the electronics is easily possible and is

described in the operating instructions manual.
If due to a detected failure the electronics or the complete
sensor is exchanged, the manufacturer must be informed (incl.
a fault description).

In general The recurring function test is used to check the safety function,
to detect possible, non-evident dangerous errors. The meas-
uring system should hence be checked in regular intervals.
The operator is responsible for choosing the type of check.
The time intervals depend on the selected PFDavg value
according to chart and diagram in paragraph "Safety-related
characteristics".
With high demand rate, a recurring function test is not
requested in IEC 61508. The function of the measuring system
is demonstrated by the frequent use of the system. In double
channel architectures it is a good idea to verify the redundancy
through recurring function tests at appropriate intervals.
The test must be carried out in a way that verifies the flawless
operation of the safety functions in conjunction with all system
components.
This is ensured by a controlled reaching of the response height
during filling. If filling up to the response height is not possible,
then a response of the measuring system must be triggered by
a suitable simulation of the level or the physical measuring
effect.
The methods and procedures used during the tests must be
stated and their suitability must be specified. The tests must be
documented.
If the function test proves negative, the entire measuring
system must be switched out of service and the process held
in a safe state by means of other measures.
In the double channel architecture 1oo2D this applies
separately to both channels.
Function test in mode overfill If the measuring system is used as overfill protection, the proof
32006-EN-061031
protection of the function is ensured by a simple function test which can

be triggered and monitored manually or by a connected control
system.

Functional safety
This function test is triggered by an interruption of the supply

cable for at least two seconds. Then a special warm-up
reaction of the current output is carried out which must be
recorded.
The test procedure is described in detail in the operating
instructions manual.
Test key on the signal conditioning instrument:
If a connected signal conditioning instrument with test key is
used for processing, the stated function test can be easily
carried out by pushing the test key. Suitable signal condition-
ing instruments are listed in chapter "Technical data" of the
Note:
This test can be carried out only if the vibrating element is
uncovered.
1.7 Safety-related characteristics

Basics The failure rates of the electronics, the mechanical parts of the
transmitter as well as the process fitting are determined by an
FMEDA according to IEC 61508. The calculations are based
on component failure rates according to SN 29500. All values
refer to an average ambient temperature during the operating
time of 40 °C (104 °F).
For a higher average temperature of 60 °C (140 °F), the failure
rates should be multiplied by a factor of 2.5. A similar factor
applies if frequent temperature fluctuations are expected.
The calculations are also based on the specifications stated in
chapter "Planning".
Service life After 8 to 12 years, the failure rates of the electronic

components will increase, whereby the derived PFD and PFH
values will deteriorate (IEC 61508-2, 7.4.7.4, note 3).
Failure rates Mode switch on the sensor to "max."

32006-EN-061031
λsd 49 FIT 39 FIT
λsu 387 FIT 352 FIT
λdd 163 FIT 182 FIT

Functional safety

λdu 18 FIT 43 FIT
DCS 11 % 10 %
DCD 90 % 81 %
6
MTBF = MTTF + MTTR 1.59x10 h 1.59x106 h
Mode switch on the sensor to "min."

λsd 39 FIT 45 FIT
λsu 373 FIT 361 FIT
λdd 168 FIT 173 FIT
λdu 36 FIT 37 FIT
DCS 9% 11 %
DCD 82 % 82 %
MTBF = MTTF + MTTR 1.59x106 h 1.59x106 h
Fault reaction time Diagnosis test period <100 sec
Single channel architecture 1oo1D

Specific characteristics SIL SIL2
HFT 0
Sensor type Type B
Mode switch on the sensor to "max."

SFF 97 % 93 %
PFDavg
TProof = 1 year <0.008x10-2 <0.019x10-2
TProof = 5 years <0.039x10-2 <0.093x10-2
32006-EN-061031
TProof = 10 years <0.077x10-2 <0.186x10-2
PFH <0.018x10-6/h <0.043x10-6/h

Functional safety
Mode switch on the sensor to "min."

SFF 94 % 94 %
PFDavg
TProof = 1 year <0.016x10-2 <0.016x10-2
TProof = 5 years <0.078x10-2 <0.081x10-2
TProof = 10 years <0.156x10-2 <0.162x10-2
PFH <0.036x10-6/h <0.037x10-6/h
Time-dependent process of The chronological sequence of PFDavg is nearly linear to the

PFDavg operating time over a period up to 10 years. The above values
apply only to the TProof interval after which a recurring function
test must be carried out.
PFDavg
4
2
1
1 5 10 TProof
Fig. 1: Chronological sequence of PFDavg (figures see above charts)

1 PFDavg = 0
2 PFDavg after 1 year
Multiple channel architecture

Specific characteristics If the measuring system is used in a multiple channel
architecture, the safety-relevant characteristics of the selected
structure of the meas. chain must be calculated specifically for
the selected application according to the above failure rates.
A suitable Common Cause Factor must be taken into account.
32006-EN-061031

VEGA Grieshaber KG
Am Hohenstein 113
77761 Schiltach
Germany
Phone +49 7836 50-0
Fax +49 7836 50-201
www.vega.com
ISO 9001


VEGAVIB 63
- two-wire
Document ID:
29280
Vibration
Contents
Contents
1.1 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Symbolism used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 For your safety

2.1 Authorised personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.2 Appropriate use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.3 Warning about misuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.4 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5
2.5 Safety label on the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.6 CE conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.7 SIL conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.8 Safety instructions for Ex areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
2.9 Environmental instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6
3.1 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7
3.2 Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8
3.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9
3.4 Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9
4 Mounting
4.1 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2 Mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

5.1 Preparing the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15
5.2 Connection procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15
5.3 Wiring plan, single chamber housing . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16
5.4 Wiring plan - version IP 66/IP 68, 1 bar . . . . . . . . . .. 18
6 Set up
6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 19
6.2 Adjustment elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 20
6.3 Functional chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 21
6.4 Recurring test and function test (SIL) . . . . . . . . . . . .. 22

7.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 26
7.2 Rectify faults . . . . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 26
7.3 Exchanging the electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 27
7.4 Instrument repair . . . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 28
29280-EN-100805
8 Dismounting
8.1 Dismounting steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
8.2 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Contents
9 Supplement
9.1 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
9.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Information:
Supplementary documents appropriate to the ordered version come
with the delivery. You can find them listed in chapter "Product
description".
Instructions manuals for accessories and replacement parts

Tip:
To ensure reliable setup and operation of your VEGAVIB 63, we offer
accessories and replacement parts. The corresponding documenta-
tions are:
l 31086 - External housing - VEGAVIB
l 30172 - Electronics module VEGAVIB series 60
29280-EN-100805
l 34296 - Protective cover

l 29753 - Lock fitting for VEGAVIB 63 unpressurized
l 29754 - Lock fitting for VEGAVIB 63 16 bar

1.1 Function
This operating instructions manual provides all the information you
need for mounting, connection and setup as well as important
instructions for maintenance and fault rectification. Please read this
information before putting the instrument into operation and keep this
manual accessible in the immediate vicinity of the device.
1.2 Target group

This operating instructions manual is directed to trained qualified
personnel. The contents of this manual should be made available to
these personnel and put into practice by them.
1.3 Symbolism used

Caution: If this warning is ignored, faults or malfunctions can

result.
Warning: If this warning is ignored, injury to persons and/or serious
damage to the instrument can result.
Danger: If this warning is ignored, serious injury to persons and/or
destruction of the instrument can result.
Ex applications
l List
à Action
1 Sequence
29280-EN-100805
2 For your safety
2 For your safety

All operations described in this operating instructions manual must be
carried out only by trained specialist personnel authorised by the plant
operator.
During work on and with the device the required personal protective
equipment must always be worn.
2.2 Appropriate use

The VEGAVIB 63 is a sensor for level detection.
You can find detailed information on the application range in chapter
Operational reliability is ensured only if the instrument is properly used
according to the specifications in the operating instructions manual as
well as possible supplementary instructions.
For safety and warranty reasons, any invasive work on the device
beyond that described in the operating instructions manual may be
carried out only by personnel authorised by the manufacturer. Arbitrary
conversions or modifications are explicitly forbidden.

application-specific hazards, e.g. vessel overfill or damage to system
components through incorrect mounting or adjustment.

standard regulations and guidelines. The user must take note of the
safety instructions in this operating instructions manual, the country-
specific installation standards as well as all prevailing safety
regulations and accident prevention rules.
The instrument must only be operated in a technically flawless and
reliable condition. The operator is responsible for trouble-free
operation of the instrument.
During the entire duration of use, the user is obliged to determine the
compliance of the necessary occupational safety measures with the
current valid rules and regulations and also take note of new
regulations.
29280-EN-100805
2 For your safety
2.5 Safety label on the instrument

The safety approval markings and safety tips on the device must be
observed.
2.6 CE conformity
This device fulfills the legal requirements of the applicable EC
guidelines. By attaching the CE mark, VEGA provides a confirmation
of successful testing. You can find the CE conformity declaration in the
download area of www.vega.com.
2.7 SIL conformity

VEGAVIB 63 meets the requirements of functional safety according to
IEC 61508. Further information is available in the Safety Manual
"VEGAVIB series 60".

Please note the Ex-specific safety information for installation and
operation in Ex areas. These safety instructions are part of the
operating instructions manual and come with the Ex-approved
instruments.

Protection of the environment is one of our most important duties. That
is why we have introduced an environment management system with
the goal of continuously improving company environmental protection.
The environment management system is certified according to DIN
EN ISO 14001.
Please help us fulfil this obligation by observing the environmental
instructions in this manual:
29280-EN-100805
3.1 Structure
l Point level sensor VEGAVIB 63

l Documentation
- Safety Manual "Functional safety (SIL) according to IEC 61508
or IEC 61511" (optional)
- Supplementary instructions manual "Plug connector for level
sensors" (optional)
- Ex-specific "Safety instructions" (with Ex versions)
Constituent parts The VEGAVIB 63 consists of the following components:
l Housing cover
l Housing with electronics
l Process fitting with vibrating rod
Fig. 1: VEGAVIB 63 - with plastic housing

1 Housing cover
3 Process fitting
Type label The type label contains the most important data for identification and
use of the instrument:
29280-EN-100805
l Article number
l Serial number
l Technical data
l SIL identification (with SIL rating ex works)
With the serial number, you can access the delivery data of the
instrument via www.vega.com, "VEGA Tools" and "serial number
search". In addition to the type label outside, you can also find the
serial number on the inside of the instrument.

Application area VEGAVIB 63 is a point level sensor with vibrating rod for level
detection.
It is designed for industrial use in all areas of process technology and
is preferably used for bulk solids.
Typical applications are overfill and dry run protection. Thanks to its
simple and robust measuring system, VEGAVIB 63 is virtually
unaffected by the chemical and physical properties of the bulk solid.
It also works when subjected to strong external vibrations or changing
products.
Solid detection in water
If VEGAVIB 63 was ordered for solid detection in water, the vibrating
rod is calibrated to the density of water. If covered by water (density:
1 g/cm³/0.036 lbs/in) VEGAVIB 63 signals "uncovered". Only if the
vibrating element is also covered with solids (e.g. sand, sludge, gravel
etc.) will the sensor signal "covered".
Fault monitoring
The electronics module of VEGAVIB 63 monitors continuously the
following criteria:
l Correct vibrating frequency
l Line break to the piezo drive
If one of these faults is detected, the electronics signals this via a
defined current to the signal conditioning instrument. The connection
cable to the vibrating element is also monitored.
Functional principle The vibrating rod is piezoelectrically energised and vibrates at its
mechanical resonance frequency of approx. 360 Hz. When the
vibrating rod is submerged in the product, the vibration amplitude
changes. This change is detected by the integrated electronics module
and converted into a switching command.
Voltage supply Depending on your requirements, VEGAVIB 63 with two-wire

electronics can be connected to different signal conditioning instru-
ments. Compatible signal conditioning instruments are listed in chapter
"Technical data".
The data for power supply are specified in chapter "Technical data".
29280-EN-100805
3.3 Operation
With the factory setting, products with a density of > 0.05 g/cm³
(0.002 lbs/in³) can be measured. It is possible to adapt the instrument
for products with lower density > 0.02 g/cm³ (0.0007 lbs/in³).
On the electronics module you will find the following indicating and
adjustment elements:
l Signal lamp for indication of the switching condition (green/red)
l Potentiometer for adaptation to the product density
l Mode changeover for selection of the output current
3.4 Storage and transport

Packaging Your instrument was protected by packaging during transport. Its
capacity to handle normal loads during transport is assured by a test
according to DIN EN 24180.
The packaging of standard instruments consists of environment-
friendly, recyclable cardboard. In addition, the sensor is provided with
a protective cover of paperboard. For special versions PE foam or PE
foil is also used. Dispose of the packaging material via specialised
recycling companies.
Transport Transport must be carried out under consideration of the notes on the
transport packaging. Nonobservance of these instructions can cause
damage to the device.
Transport inspection The delivery must be checked for completeness and possible transit
damage immediately at receipt. Ascertained transit damage or
concealed defects must be appropriately dealt with.
Storage Up to the time of installation, the packages must be left closed and
stored according to the orientation and storage markings on the
outside.
Unless otherwise indicated, the packages must be stored only under
the following conditions:
l Not in the open
l Dry and dust free
Storage and transport l Storage and transport temperature see chapter "Supplement -
temperature Technical data - Ambient conditions"
29280-EN-100805
4 Mounting
4 Mounting
Suitability for the pro- Make sure that all parts of the instrument exposed to the process, in
cess conditions particular the sensor element, process seal and process fitting, are
suitable for the existing process conditions. These include above all
the process pressure, process temperature as well as the chemical
properties of the medium.
You can find the specifications in chapter "Technical data" or on the
type label.
Switching point In general, VEGAVIB 63 can be installed in any position. The

instrument only has to be mounted in such a way that the vibrating
element is at the height of the desired switching point.
Moisture Use the recommended cables (see chapter "Connecting to power

supply") and tighten the cable gland.
You can give your instrument additional protection against moisture
penetration by leading the connection cable downward in front of the
cable entry. Rain and condensation water can thus drain off. This
applies mainly to outdoor mounting as well as installation in areas
where high humidity is expected (e.g. through cleaning processes) or
on cooled or heated vessels.
Transport Do not hold VEGAVIB 63 on the vibrating element. Especially with

flange and tube versions, the sensor can be damaged by the weight of
the instrument.
29280-EN-100805
Remove the protective cover just before mounting.
4 Mounting
Pressure/Vacuum The process fitting must be sealed if there is gauge or low pressure in
the vessel. Before use, check if the seal material is resistant against
the measured product and the process temperature.
The max. permissible pressure is specified in chapter "Technical data"
or on the type label of the sensor.
Handling The vibrating level switch is a measuring instrument and must be

treated accordingly. Bending the vibrating element will destroy the
instrument.
Warning:
The housing must not be used to screw the instrument in! Applying
tightening force can damage internal parts of the housing.
Use the hexagon above the thread for screwing in.
4.2 Mounting instructions

Agitators and fluidiza- Due to the effects of agitators, equipment vibration or similar, the level
tion switch can be subjected to strong lateral forces. For this reason, do not
use an overly long extension tube for VEGAVIB 63, but check if you
can mount a short level switch on the side of the vessel in horizontal
position.
Extreme vibration caused by the process or the equipment, e.g.
agitators or turbulence in the vessel e.g. from fluidization, can cause
the extension tube of VEGAVIB 63 to vibrate in resonance. This leads
to increased stress on the upper weld joint. Should a longer tube
version be necessary, you can provide a suitable support directly
above the tuning fork to secure the extension tube.
This measure applies mainly to applications in Ex areas. Make sure that

the tube is not subject to bending stress due to this measure.
Inflowing medium If VEGAVIB 63 is mounted in the filling stream, unwanted false

measurement signals can be generated. For this reason, mount
VEGAVIB 63 at a position in the vessel where no disturbances, e.g.
from filling openings, agitators, etc., can occur.
This applies particularly to instrument types with long extension tube.
29280-EN-100805
4 Mounting
Fig. 3: Inflowing medium
Lock fitting VEGAVIB 63 can be mounted with a lock fitting for height adjustment.
Take note of the pressure information of the lock fitting.
Socket The vibrating element should protrude into the vessel to avoid buildup.
For that reason, avoid using mounting bosses for flanges and screwed
fittings. This applies particularly to use with adhesive products.
Material cone In silos for bulk solids, material cones can form and change the
switching point. Please keep this in mind when installing the sensor in
the vessel. We recommend selecting an installation location where the
vibrating rod detects an average value of the material cone.
The vibrating rod must be mounted in a way that takes the
arrangement of the filling and emptying apertures into account.
To compensate measurement errors caused by the material cone in
cylindrical vessels, the sensor must be mounted at a distance of d/6
from the vessel wall.
29280-EN-100805
4 Mounting
d d
6 6
d d
Fig. 4: Filling and emptying centred
1
d
6
2
d
3
29280-EN-100805
Fig. 5: Filling in the centre, emptying laterally

1 VEGAVIB 63
2 Discharge opening
3 Filling opening
4 Mounting
Baffle protection against In applications such as grit chambers or settling basins for coarse
falling rocks sediments, the vibrating element must be protected against damage
with a suitable baffle.
This baffle must be manufactured by you.
> 125 mm
(4 59/64")
Fig. 6: Baffle for protection against mechanical damage
29280-EN-100805

Take note of sa- In hazardous areas you should take note of the appropriate
fety instructions regulations, conformity and type approval certificates of the sensors
for Ex applica- and power supply units.
tions
Voltage supply Connect the operating voltage according to the following diagrams.
Take note of the general installation regulations. As a rule, connect
VEGAVIB 63 to vessel ground (PA), or in case of plastic vessels, to the
next ground potential. On the side of the instrument housing there is a
ground terminal between the cable entries. This connection serves to
drain off electrostatic charges. In Ex applications, the installation
regulations for hazardous areas must be given priority.
The data for power supply are specified in chapter "Technical data".
Connection cable The instrument is connected with standard two-wire cable without
screen. If electromagnetic interference is expected which is above the
test values of EN 61326 for industrial areas, screened cable should be
used.
Use cable with round cross-section. A cable outer diameter of 5 … 9 mm
(0.2 … 0.35 in) ensures the seal effect of the cable gland. If you are
using cable with a different diameter or cross-section, exchange the
seal or use a suitable cable gland.
In hazardous areas, only use approved cable connections for VEGAVIB

63.
Connection cab- Take note of the corresponding installation regulations for Ex

le for Ex appli- applications.
cations
With Ex instruments, the housing cover may only be opened if there is

no explosive atmosphere present.
Proceed as follows:
29280-EN-100805

3 Remove approx. 10 cm (4 in) of the cable mantle, strip approx.
1 cm (0.4 in) of insulation from the ends of the individual wires
5 Lift the opening levers of the terminals with a screwdriver (see

following illustration)
6 Insert the wire ends into the open terminals according to the wiring
plan
7 Press down the opening levers of the terminals, you will hear the
terminal spring closing
8 Check the hold of the wires in the terminals by lightly pulling on
them
9 Tighten the compression nut of the cable entry. The seal ring must
completely encircle the cable
10 If necessary, carry out a fresh adjustment
The following illustrations apply to the non-Ex as well as to the EEx-d

version.
29280-EN-100805
Housing overview
4 4 4
1 2 3

1 Plastic (not with EEx d)
2 Aluminium
3 Stainless steel (not with EEx d)
4 Filter element for pressure compensation or blind stopper with version IP 66/
IP 68, 1 bar (not with EEx d)
Wiring plan For connection to a VEGATOR (Ex) signal conditioning instrument.

The sensor is powered by the connected VEGATOR signal
conditioning instrument. Further information is available in chapter
"Technical data", "Ex-technical data" are available in the supplied
"Safety information manual".
The wiring example is applicable for all suitable signal conditioning
instruments.
If the mode switch of VEGAVIB 63 is correctly set to "max.", the control
lamp on VEGAVIB 63 lights.
l red - with submerged vibrating element
l green - with uncovered vibrating element
Take note of the operating instructions manual of the signal
conditioning instrument. Suitable signal conditioning instruments are
listed in chapter "Technical data".
1
29280-EN-100805
Fig. 9: Wiring plan

1 Voltage supply

Wire assignment con-
nection cable
+
1
-
2
Fig. 10: Wire assignment connection cable

2 Shielding
29280-EN-100805
6 Set up
6 Set up
6.1 General
The figures in brackets refer to the following illustrations.
Function/Configuration On the electronics module you will find the following indicating and
adjustment elements:
l potentiometer for adaptation to the product density (1)
l DIL switch for mode adjustment - min./max. (2)
l Signal lamp (5)
Note:
As a rule, always set the mode before starting to set up VEGAVIB 63 .
If used on a VEGATOR signal conditioning instrument, always set the
mode switch (2) on VEGAVIB 63 to max. mode.
The mode is selected on the signal conditioning instrument with the
mode switch.
The switching output will change if you set one of the two mode
switches afterwards. This could possibly trigger other connected
instruments or devices.
29280-EN-100805
6 Set up
6.2 Adjustment elements

Electronics and connec-
tion compartment 1
5
Fig. 11: Electronics and connection compartment - two-wire output

1 Potentiometer for switching point adaptation
3 Ground terminal
5 Control lamp
Switching point adapta- With the potentiometer you can adapt the switching point to the solid. It
tion (1) is already preset and must only be modified in special cases.
As a default setting, the potentiometer of VEGAVIB 63 is set to the
complete right position (> 0.3 g/cm³/0.011 lbs/in³). In very light solids
you have to turn the potentiometer to the complete left position
(0.02 … 0.1 g/cm³ or 0.0007 … 0.0036 lbs/in³). By doing this,
VEGAVIB 63 will be more sensitive and light solids can be detected
more reliably.
For instruments detecting solids in water, these settings are not
applicable. The switching point adaptation is preset and must not be
changed.
Mode adjustment (2) With the mode adjustment (min./max.) you can determine the output
current.
When using a VEGATOR signal conditioning instrument, always set
29280-EN-100805
the mode switch to max. mode.

In this case you select the requested mode according to the "Function
chart" (max. - max. detection or overfill protection, min. - min.detection
or dry run detection) on the VEGATOR signal conditioning instrument.
6 Set up
When used on a control system, the following values apply:

l Mode min.
l Mode max.
Signal lamp (5) Control lamp for indication of the switching status
l green = 8 mA
l red = 16 mA
l red (flashing) = Failure (< 2.3 mA)
6.3 Functional chart

VEGAVIB 63 level switch
The following chart provides an overview of the switching conditions
depending on the adjusted mode and level.

Max. 8 mA
Overflow protec-
tion
Green
Max. approx. 16 mA
Overflow protec-
tion
Red
Min. approx. 8 mA
Dry run protection
Green
Min. approx. 16 mA
Dry run protection
Red
Failure message any < 2.3 mA
(min./max. mode)
29280-EN-100805
flashes red
6 Set up
VEGAVIB 63 level switch with signal conditioning instrument1)

The following chart provides an overview of the switching conditions
depending on the adjusted mode of the signal conditioning instrument
and the level.
Note:
Keep in mind that the mode switch of VEGAVIB 63 must be always set
to "max.".
Mode on the Level Signal cur- Signal lamp - Signal lamp -

signal condi- rent - Sensor sensor signal condi-
tioning in- tioning in-
strument strument
Mode A approx. 8 mA
Overflow pro-
tection
Green
Mode A approx. 16 mA
Overflow pro-
tection
Red
Mode B approx. 16 mA
Dry run pro-
tection
Red
Mode B approx. 8 mA
Dry run pro-
tection
Green
Failure mes- any < 2.3 mA
sage
(mode A/B)
flashes red
6.4 Recurring test and function test (SIL)

General information The VEGAVIB 63 is qualified for use in measuring chains of level SIL2
according to IEC 61508 (redundant, level SIL3).
29280-EN-100805
SIL The measuring system can be used for level detection of bulk solids
and meets the special requirements of safety technology.
1) You will find suitable signal conditioning instruments in chapter "Technical

data".
6 Set up
This is possible up to SIL2 in a single channel architecture (1oo1D),

and up to SIL3 in a multiple channel, redundant architecture.
The following instrument combinations meet the requirements
according to SIL:
VEGAVIB 63 Ex with
l Oscillator VB60Z
l Signal conditioning instrument VEGATOR 636Ex or SPLC (safety-
oriented PLC)
Implementation - Func- There are the following possibilities to carry out the recurring function
tion test test:
1 Filling of the vessel up to the switching point
2 Dismounting of the sensor and immersion in the the original
product
3 Short interruption of the supply line to the sensor
4 Pushing the test key on the signal conditioning instrument
1 Filling the vessel up to the switching point
If this does not cause any problems, you can fill the vessel up to the
switching point and monitor the correct sensor reaction.
2 Dismounting of the sensor and immersion in the original
product
You can dismount the sensor for test purposes and check its proper
functioning by immersing it in the original product.
3 Short interruption of the supply line to the sensor
The recurring function test according to IEC 61508 can be carried out
through a short interruption (> 2 seconds) of the supply line to the
sensor. This starts a test sequence.
The correctness of the subsequent switching conditions on the
indications of the SPLC must be monitored. The sensor must neither
be dismounted nor triggered by filling the vessel.
You can carry out the function test with the outputted current values
also directly via a safety PLC or a process control system.
4 Pushing the test key on the signal conditioning instrument
A test key is lowered in the front plate of the signal conditioning
instrument. Push the test key for > 2 seconds with a suitable object.
Hence a test is started. Hence the correctness of the subsequent
switching conditions must be monitored via the two LEDs on the signal
conditioning instrument as well as the connected facilities. The sensor
must neither be dismounted, nor controlled by filling the vessel.
Test without filling or This test is valid if you cannot change the vessel filling or cannot
29280-EN-100805
dismounting the sensor dismount the sensor.

(3, 4)
6 Set up
The recurring function test according to IEC 61508 can be carried out
by pushing the test key on a respective signal conditioning instrument
or briefly (> 2 seconds) interrupting the supply line to the sensor.
The correctness of the subsequent switching conditions must be
monitored via the two LEDs on the signal conditioning instrument as
well as the connected devices. The sensor must neither be
dismounted nor triggered by filling the vessel.
This applies for VEGAVIB 63 with two-wire electronics module VB60Z.
You can carry out the function test with the outputted current values
also directly via a safety PLC or a process control system.
A function test can be carried out with measurement setups in

conjunction with the two-wire electronics module VB60Z EX.
If you are using a signal conditioning instrument of type VEGATOR for
this purpose, you can carry out the test with the integrated test key.
The test key is recessed in the front plate of the signal conditioning
insturment. Push the test key for > 2 seconds with a suitable object
(screwdriver, pen, etc.).
When the VEGAVIB 63 is connected to a processing system or an
SPLC, you have to interrupt the connection cable to the sensor for > 2
seconds. The switching delay must be set to 0.5 s.
After releasing the test key or interrupting the connection cable to the
sensor, the complete measuring system can be checked on correct
function. The following operating conditions are simulated during the
test:
l Failure message
l Empty signal
l Full signal
I/mA
16 1
8 2
2 3
1,5 3 4,5 t/s
Fig. 35: Flow chart of the function test

29280-EN-100805
1 Full signal
2 Empty signal
3 Failure message
6 Set up
Check if all three switching conditions occur in the correct sequence

and the stated time period. If this is not the case, there is a fault in the
measuring system (see also the operating instructions manual of the
signal conditioning instrument). Keep in mind that connected instru-
ments are activated during the function test. By doing this, you can
check the correct function of the measuring system.
Test procedure (after releasing the button or after a line break)
Sensor Level relay Signal Level relay Signal Fail safe Control
current - A - overfill lamp A - B - dry run lamp B - relay lamp
Sensor protection Overfill protection Dry run
protection protection
1. Fault sig- < 2 mA currentless currentless currentless

nal
(approx.
1.5 s)
When con-
nected to an
SPLC ap-
prox. 0.6 s
2. Empty approx. energized currentless energized

signal 8 mA
(approx.
1.5 s)
3. Full signal approx. currentless energized energized

(approx. 16 mA
1.5 s)
4. Return to
current ope-
rating condi-
tion
Note:
When used in measuring chains according to IEC 61508, mode B is
not permitted.
29280-EN-100805

7.1 Maintenance
If the instrument is used properly, no special maintenance is required
in normal operation.
7.2 Rectify faults

Reaction when malfunc- The operator of the system is responsible for taking suitable measures
tions occur to remove interferences.
Failure reasons VEGAVIB 63 offers maximum reliability. Nevertheless, faults can occur
during operation. These may be caused by the following, e.g.:
l Sensor
l Process
l Voltage supply
l Signal processing
Fault rectification The first measure to be taken is to check the output signal. In many
cases, the causes can be determined this way and the faults rectified.
24 hour service hotline Should these measures not be successful, please call in urgent cases
the VEGA service hotline under the phone no. +49 1805 858550.
The hotline is available to you 7 days a week round-the-clock. Since
we offer this service world-wide, the support is only available in the
English language. The service is free of charge, only the standard
telephone costs will be charged.
Checking the switching

signal
Error Cause Removal
VEGAVIB 63 Operating voltage Check operating voltage

signals "covered" too low
when the vibrating
element is not Electronics de- Press the mode switch. If the instru-
submerged (over- fective ment then changes the mode, the
fill protection) vibrating element may be covered with
buildup or mechanically damaged.
VEGAVIB 63
Should the switching function in the
signals "uncover-
correct mode still be faulty, return the
ed" when the vib-
instrument for repair.
rating element is
submerged (dry Press the mode switch. If the instru-
29280-EN-100805
run protection) ment then does not change the mode,

the electronics module is defective.
Exchange the electronics module.
Error Cause Removal
Unfavourable in- Mount the instrument at a location in

stallation location the vessel where no dead zones or
mounds can form.
Buildup on the Check the vibrating element and the

vibrating element sensor if there is buildup and remove
it.
Wrong mode se- Set the mode switch on VEGAVIB

lected 63 to "max". Set the correct mode on
the signal conditioning instrument (A:
overfill protection; B: dry run protec-
tion).
Signal lamp fla- Error on the vib- Check if the vibrating element is
shes red rating element damage or extremely corroded.
Interference on Exchanging the electronics module

the electronics
module
instrument defec- Exchange the instrument or send it in

tive for repair
Reaction after fault rec- Depending on the failure reason and measures taken, the steps
tification described in chapter "Set up" must be carried out again, if necessary.
7.3 Exchanging the electronics module

In general, all electronics modules of series VB60 can be inter-
changed. If you want to use an electronics module with a different
signal output, you can download the corresponding operating
instructions manual from our homepage under Downloads.
With EEx d instruments, the housing cover may only be opened if there
is no explosive atmosphere present.
Proceed as follows:
1 Switch off power supply
4 Pull the connection cables out of the terminals
5 Loosen the two screws with a screw driver (Torx size T10 or slot 4)
29280-EN-100805
Fig. 46: Loosening the holding screws

1 Electronics module
2 Screws (2 pcs.)
6 Pull out the old electronics module

7 Compare the new electronics module with the old one. The type
label of the electronics module must correspond to that of the old
electronics module. This applies particularly to instruments used in
hazardous areas.
8 Compare the settings of the two electronics modules. Set the
adjustment elements of the new electronics module to the same
setting of the old one.
Information:
Make sure that the housing is not rotated during the electronics
exchange. Otherwise the plug may be in a different position later.
9 Insert the electronics module carefully. Make sure that the plug is
in the correct position.
10 Screw in and tighten the two holding screws with a screwdriver
(Torx size T10 or Phillips 4)
11 Insert the wire ends into the open terminals according to the wiring
plan
12 Press down the opening levers of the terminals, you will hear the
terminal spring closing
13 Check the hold of the wires in the terminals by lightly pulling on
them
14 Check cable gland on tightness. The seal ring must completely
encircle the cable.
The electronics exchange is now finished.
29280-EN-100805

You can download a return form (23 KB) from our Internet homepage
www.vega.com under: "Downloads - Forms and certificates - Repair
form".
By doing this you help us carry out the repair quickly and without
having to call back for needed information.

l Attach the completed form and, if need be, also a safety data
sheet outside on the packaging
l Please ask the agency serving you for the address of your return
shipment. You can find the respective agency on our website
www.vega.com under: "Company - VEGA worldwide"
29280-EN-100805
8 Dismounting
8 Dismounting
Warning:
Before dismounting, be aware of dangerous process conditions such
as e.g. pressure in the vessel, high temperatures, corrosive or toxic
products etc.
Take note of chapters "Mounting" and "Connecting to power supply"

and carry out the listed steps in reverse order.
With Ex instruments, the housing cover may only be opened if there is

no explosive atmosphere present.
8.2 Disposal
specialised recycling companies. We use recyclable materials and
have designed the electronics to be easily separable.
This instrument is not subject to the WEEE directive 2002/96/EG and
the respective national laws. Pass the instrument directly on to a
specialised recycling company and do not use the municipal collecting
points. These may be used only for privately used products according
to the WEEE directive.
Correct disposal avoids negative effects to persons and environment
and ensures recycling of useful raw materials.
If you have no way to dispose of the old instrument properly, please
contact us concerning return and disposal. 29280-EN-100805
9 Supplement
9 Supplement
9.1 Technical data
General data
- Process fitting - thread 316L
- Process fitting - flange 316L
- Process seal Klingersil C-4400
- Vibrating rod 316L, 318 S13 (1.4462)
- Extension tube ø 29 mm (1.14 in) 316L
- Plastic housing plastic PBT (Polyester)
- Aluminium die-casting housing Aluminium die-casting AlSi10Mg, powder-coated -
basis: Polyester
- Stainless steel housing - precision cast- 316L
ing
- Stainless steel housing, electropolished 316L
- Seal between housing and housing NBR (stainless steel housing, investment casting),
cover silicone (Aluminium/plastic housing, stainless steel
housing, electro-polished)
- Light guide in housing cover (plastic) PMMA (Makrolon)
- Ground terminal 316L
Process fittings
- Pipe thread, cylindrical (DIN 3852-A) G1 A, G1½ A
- American pipe thread, conical 1 NPT, 1½ NPT
(ASME B1.20.1)
Weight approx.
- Instrument weight (depending on proc- 0.8 … 4 kg (0.18 … 8.82 lbs)
ess fitting)
- Extension tube 1450 g/m (15.6 oz/ft)
Sensor length (L) 0.3 … 6 m (0.984 … 19.69 ft)
Max. lateral load 140 Nm, max. 400 N (103 lbf ft, max. 90 lbf)
Output variable
Output Two-wire output
Suitable signal conditioning instruments VEGATOR 536Ex, 537Ex, 636Ex
29280-EN-100805
Output signal
- Mode min. Vibrating element uncovered: 16 mA ±1 mA,
9 Supplement
- Mode max. Vibrating element uncovered: 8 mA ±1 mA, vibrat-

ing element covered: 16 mA ±1 mA
- Failure message < 2.3 mA
Modes (adjustable) min./max.
Switching delay
- When immersed 0.5 s
- When laid bare 1s
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature on the housing -40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F)
Storage and transport temperature -40 … +80 °C (-40 … +176 °F)
Process conditions
Measured variable Limit level of solids
Process pressure -1 … 16 bar/-100 … 1600 kPa (-14.5 … 232 psig)
2
16 bar
(232psi)
6 bar
(87psi)
1
-50°C 0°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C
(-58°F) (32°F) (122°F) (212°F) (302°F) (392°F) (482°F)
Fig. 47: Process pressure - Process temperature

2 Process pressure
VEGAVIB 63 of 316L -50 … +150 °C (-58 … +302 °F)

Process temperature (thread or flange tem- -50 … +250 °C (-58 … +482 °F)
perature) with temperature adapter (option)
29280-EN-100805
9 Supplement
2
3
80°C
(176°F)
40°C
(104°F)
0°C
1
(32°F)
-50°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C
(-58°F) (122°F) (212°F) (302°F) (392°F) (482°F)
-40°C
(-40°F)
Fig. 48: Ambient temperature - Process temperature

2 Ambient temperature
3 Temperature range with temperature adapter
Density
- Standard > 0.05 g/cm³ (0.002 lbs/in³)
- adjustable > 0.02 g/cm³ (0.0007 lbs/in³)
Granular size no limitation2)
Electromechanical data - version IP 66/IP 67 and IP 66/IP 68; 0.2 bar

Cable entry/plug3)
- Single chamber housing l 1 x cable gland M20 x 1.5 (cable: ø 5 … 9 mm),
1 x blind stopper M20 x 1.5
or:
l 1 x closing cap ½ NPT, 1 x blind plug ½ NPT
or:
l 1 x plug (depending on the version), 1 x blind
stopper M20 x 1.5
Spring-loaded terminals for wire cross-section up to 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
Electromechanical data - version IP 66/IP 68 (1 bar)

Cable entry
- Single chamber housing l 1 x IP 68 cable gland M20 x 1.5; 1 x blind
stopper M20 x 1.5
or:
l 1 x closing cap ½ NPT, 1 x blind plug ½ NPT
29280-EN-100805
Connection cable
- Structure
2) max. 20 mm (0.8 in) with product density < 0.05 g/cm³ (0.002 lbs/in³).
3) Depending on the version M12 x 1, according to ISO 4400, Harting, 7/8" FF.
9 Supplement
four wires, one suspension cable, one breather

capillary, screen braiding, foil, mantle
- Wire cross-section 0.5 mm²
- Wire resistance < 0.036 Ω/m (0.011 Ω/ft)
- Tensile strength > 1200 N (270 pounds force)
- Min. bending radius 25 mm (with 25 °C/77 °F)
- Diameter approx. 8 mm
Adjustment elements
Mode switch
- Min. Min. detection or dry run protection
- Max. Max. detection or overflow protection
Voltage supply
Operating voltage 10 … 36 V DC (via the signal conditioning instru-
ment)

Protection rating
- Plastic housing IP 66/IP 67
- Aluminium and stainless steel standard IP 66/IP 68 (0.2 bar)4)
- Aluminium and stainless housing (op- IP 66/IP 68 (1 bar)
tionally available)
Protection class II
Approvals
Depending on the version, instruments with approvals can have different technical data.
For these instruments, the corresponding approval documents have to be taken into account.
These are part of the delivery or can be downloaded under www.vega.com via "VEGA Tools" and
"serial number search" as well as via "Downloads" and "Approvals".
29280-EN-100805
4) A suitable cable is the prerequisite for maintaining the protection rating.
9 Supplement
9.2 Dimensions
Housing in protection IP 66/IP 67 and IP 66/IP 68; 0.2 bar
~ 59 mm ~ 69 mm
~ 69 mm (2 21/64")
ø 80 mm (2 23/32") ~ 116 mm (4 9/16")
(2 23/32") ø 77 mm
ø 77 mm
(3 5/32") (3 1/32") ø 84 mm (3 5/16")
(3 1/32")
116 mm (4 9/16")
117 mm (4 39/64")
112 mm (4 13/32")
112 mm (4 13/32")
M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/ M20x1,5/ M20x1,5
½ NPT ½ NPT ½ NPT ½ NPT
1 2 3 4
Fig. 49: Housing versions in protection IP 66/IP 67 and IP 66/IP 68; 0.2 bar
1 Plastic housing
2 Stainless steel housing, electropolished
4 Aluminium housing
Housing with protection rating IP 66/IP 68 (1 bar)
~ 103mm
(4 1/16") ~ 150mm (5 29/32")
ø 77mm
(3 1/32") ø 84mm (3 5/16")
116mm (4 9/16")
117mm (4 39/64")
M20x1,5 M20x1,5 M20x1,5
1 2
Fig. 50: Housing versions with protection rating IP 66/IP 68 (1 bar)

2 Aluminium housing
29280-EN-100805
9 Supplement
(63/64")
25mm
(25/32")
20mm
G1A
ø 29mm (1 9/64")
125mm (4 59/64")
ø16mm (5/8")
Fig. 51: VEGAVIB 63 - threaded version G1 A (DIN ISO 228/1)

29280-EN-100805
9 Supplement
(1 19/64")
33mm
(55/64")
22mm
G1½A
ø 29mm (1 9/64")
125mm (4 59/64")
ø16mm (5/8")
Fig. 52: VEGAVIB 63 - threaded version G1½ A (DIN ISO 228/1)

29280-EN-100805
9 Supplement
178 mm (7 1/64")
ø 34 mm
(1 11/32")
Fig. 53: Temperature adapter
29280-EN-100805
9 Supplement

VEGA product lines are global protected by industrial property rights.
Further information see http://www.vega.com.
Only in U.S.A.: Further information see patent label at the sensor
housing.
VEGA Produktfamilien sind weltweit geschützt durch gewerbliche

Schutzrechte.
Les lignes de produits VEGA sont globalement protégées par des

droits de propriété intellectuelle.
Pour plus d'informations, on pourra se référer au site http://www.vega.
com.
VEGA lineas de productos están protegidas por los derechos en el

campo de la propiedad industrial.
Para mayor información revise la pagina web http://www.vega.com.
Линии продукции фирмы ВЕГА защищаются по всему миру

правами на интеллектуальную собственность.
Дальнейшую информацию смотрите на сайте http://www.vega.com.
9.4 Trademark
All the brands as well as trade and company names used are property
of their lawful proprietor/originator.
29280-EN-100805
Printing date:
VEGA Grieshaber KG
Am Hohenstein 113
77761 Schiltach
Germany
Phone +49 7836 50-0
Fax +49 7836 50-201
www.vega.com
ISO 9001


TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section
8.4 Load Cell

Data Sheet, VC3500 Load Cell 32017451 03
Technical Manual, VC3500 Load Cell 32039917 1
www.nov.com
VC3500 Series Load Cell Assembly for Offshore Vessel Weighing
Capacities 2t to 200t
• Stainless Steel Load Sensor

• Mud and Chemical Resistant Integral Cable (20 metres long)
• Low Cost Installation
• Low Profile
• Integrated Lift Off Prevention
• 5 Year Warranty
• Resistant To ‘Off Axis’ Loading
• Fully Welded Construction IP68
• Vessel Expansion & Contraction Compensation
• Galvanised or Stainless Steel Loading Assembly
Vessel weighing problems solved simply and cost effectively. The VC3500 incorporates
lift off prevention,and holding bolts for routine maintenance.
The VC3500 is available with intrinsically safe (ATEX) certification EEx ia llC T6 to
CENELEC standard EN50020 : 1995, and also with Ex nA 11 T6 for Zone 2, Class 2
applications.
Page 1 of 10
Index
VC3500 SERIES LOAD CELL ASSEMBLY FOR OFFSHORE VESSEL WEIGHING 1
INDEX 2
VC3500 SERIES LOAD CELL ASSEMBLY 3
INSTALLATION (GENERAL) 4
SIDE LOADS 4
MOUNTING VARIATIONS 4
LOAD CELL INSTALLATION 5
LOAD CELL CAPACITY SELECTION 5
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS 6
DIMENSIONAL DETAILS 7
INSTRUCTIONS FOR VC3500 ASSEMBLY 9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SHEET 10
Page 2 of 10
VC3500 Series Load Cell Assembly
The VC3500 family of Load Cells are available in capacities ranging from 2,000KG to
200,000KG. They are especially suitable for high capacity vessel weighing and feature
a combined error specification of < +/- 0.05%.
The loading assembly is an integral part of the VC3500 and (in most cases) eliminates
the need for vessel restraints or check rods (except in extreme environmental
conditions).
The critical sensor element of the VC3500 unit is a fully welded double ended shear
beam, manufactured from high tensile 17-4PH stainless steel, and heat treated to give
a high ultimate tensile strength. This treatment provides an extremely stable platform
for the strain gauges.
In common with all Thames Side Sensors Ltd Load Cells, the strain gauged element is
temperature compensated to ensure accuracy is maintained throughout a wide
temperature range. Stainless steel diaphragms are TIG welded in to position to provide
total environmental sealing.
The specialist method of construction allows Thames Side Sensors Ltd to offer a five
year warranty on the complete unit.
Page 3 of 10
Vessel Design And Support Structures (General)
When designing support structures for vessel weighing, the following should be
considered:
• Thermal expansion and contraction of the vessel can induce significant errors.
Where large temperature changes are expected, steps should be taken to reduce
the effect on the Load Cells.
• Support structures should be rigid, with minimal deflection under full vessel load.
Flexible structures have lower natural frequencies which could result in unstable
weight indications. Furthermore, deflection of the support structure under load will
change the angle of the force through the cell assembly, resulting in additional
errors. Any unavoidable deflection in the support structure shou ld be uniform in
character.
• Unstable or non-uniform flooring under a tank support structure can cause a shift of
the structure under load, which could induce side loading.
Installation (General)
SIDE LOADS
Side loads will cause errors in a Load Cell installation and care must be taken to avoid or
minimise possible causes:
• All pipe work to and from the vessel, including electrical conduit and trunking, should
be installed using flexible connections. Where flexible connections are not possible an
unrestrained horizontal length of pipe work could be used (a length of at least twenty
times the diameters of the pipe is usually considered a minimum ).
• Common catwalks and other shared structure may cause interaction between vessels
and should be avoided or isolated as far as practicable. Ladders and other
attachments to the vessel should be included as part of the weighed system (not
connected to ground or non-weighed structure).
MOUNTING VARIATIONS
• Most applications that use Load Cells in compression have either three or four support
points, depending on vessel geometry. Vertical cylindrical vessels can utilise a three or
four point support, whereas square vessels demand a four point support (unless
mounted on to a circular base frame). If possible, the cells should be mounted such
that the line across the cell, along the length of the loading pin, passes through t he
geometric centre of the tank (see page 8)
• To achieve the greatest accuracy with horizontal or cylindrical vessels, cells should be
mounted under all supports. In order to minimise the effects of vessel deflection the
Load Cell should be aligned parallel to the length of the vessel.
Page 4 of 10
Load Cell Installation
• Loading assemblies should be level. A solid metal foundation is preferred. Mounting

surfaces must be level. It is important to ensure that the loading assemblies are level at
both the upper and lower interface points (i.e. where the vessel support leg meets the
top mounting surface, and where the assembly base meets the foundation structure).
• Ensure the cell is located in the assembly with adequate clearance on all vertical faces.
(errors could be introduced if the cell is allowed to rub against the loading assembly ).
• Use high pressure grease on all pins.
• Removal or replacement of a Load Cell is best achieved when the vessel is empty or
close to empty. For safety, at any one time, only one Load Cell should be removed
from the vessel. The four holding screws provided in the top bracket are intended to
provide secondary support to the vessel during installation or Load Cell replacement.
First, using a suitable and safe external means, take the weight off the vessel leg or
support, then lower the four holding screws until they make contact with the top face of
the loading shaft support pillars on the Base Bracket, thus providing additional security
whilst the Load Cell is out of its bracket.
Load Cell Capacity Selection
To determine the capacity requirements of compression cells:
• Determine the empty weight of the vessel, including any fixed equipment such as
motors, agitators and piping. This is generally known as the DEAD WEIGHT or TARE
WEIGHT.
• Determine the weight of the MAXIMUM contents of the vessel, not the normal or
operating capacity. This is usually referred to as the LIVE WEIGHT.
• Add the two figures to obtain the GROSS WEIGHT. Divide this figure by the number of
vessel support points. The resulting number is the LOWEST capacity cell that should
be specified. In general, no more than 80% of the cell capacity should be utilised in
order to accommodate possible unequal load distribution, errors in weight estimates,
and the effects of agitators, mixers, wind forces and shock loading. If extreme
environmental factors are to be considered (such as high wind loading or seismic
effects) it may be necessary to incorporate Load Cells of a higher capacity.
Page 5 of 10
Environmental Considerations
The range of conditions to which a weighing system is exposed is as wide and varied
as the industry itself. To ensure a long and dependable service life, it is important to
consider wider aspects of the application:
• Is the weighing system exposed to chemical or corrosive agents (airborne or

spillage potential)?
• Does the presence of chemicals in the tank or surrounding area create a

potentially hazardous environment?
• Will the tank weighing system see extremes in temperature or humidity?
• Will the Load Cells be located in an area where flooding can occur?
• Can vehicles, cranes, or other mobile machinery impact with any part of the
weighing system?
• Is the vessel subject to wind loading, shock or seismic activity?
• Is the vessel located in an area where lightning strikes occur frequently?
If in any doubt engineering advice should be sought from NOV

P.O.Box 168, Blakstadmarka 26
N-1371 Asker
Norway
Telephone no. : +47 66 76 07 50

Service phone : +47 66 76 07 51
Fax no. : +47 66 90 23 53
Page 6 of 10
Dimensional Details
Page 7 of 10
VC3500 3 X Load Cell Installation VC3500 4 X Load Cell Installation
VC3500 3 x Load Cell installation VC3500 4 x Load Cell installation
Assembly deflection and Due to the unique design of the VC3500, Transverse and Non
Axial misalignment errors are minimised
expansion
VC3500 Capacities 2 - 200t
The unit is manufactured in 5 shell sizes as follows :
Capacity t Deflection mm Expansion across
Load Cell assembly Shell size 1 : 2 - 20t
'0.20 +/- 5 mm Shell size 2 : 30 - 50t
2, 5,
Shell size 3 : 75t
10 '0.25 +/- 5 mm Shell size 4 : 100t
Shell size 5 : 150t & 200t
15 '0.30 +/- 5 mm
20 '0.40 +/- 5 mm The standard mounting kit is fabricated from Galvanised steel.
A Stainless steel mounting assembly is available as an option.
30 '0.30 +/- 9 mm
The bi-directional freedom of movement of the top plate allows for

50 '0.50 +/- 9 mm
a high degree of mis-alignment in the structure. This is
75 '0.80 +/- 9 mm particularly important in large structures where dimensional
accuracy, rigidity and angular conformity cannot be guaranteed,
100 '0.80 +/- 12 mm or where large changes in ambient temperature are anticipated.
150/200 '0.90 +/- 12 mm

The complete assembly incorporates integral ‘lift off’ protection,
reducing the need for additional restraints. Integrated holding
bolts facilitate routine maintenance and calibration, providing a
very cost effective total solution.
+/- 5°
+/- 3°
Page 8 of 10
Instructions for VC3500 Assembly
Parts List
1x VC3500 Type Load Cell

1x Top Bracket
1x Base Bracket
1x Lift Off Shaft
2x Loading Shaft
6x R-Clip/Split Pin
4x Hex Head Screw
4x Hex Lock (Thin) Nut
1. The jacking arrangement screws need to be installed first (not applicable to 100t, 150t &
200t variants). Coat the screw threads with grease and wind the Hex Lock Nuts fully home
on each. Wind the Hex Head Screws into the underside of the Top Bracket until the shaft
ends are just below the upper loading face of the Bracket. If at any time during service the
Load Cell is to be removed from it’s mount, the weight should first be taken off the silo leg
by safe external means (for safety only one Load Cell should be removed at any one
time). The screws are then lowered (unwound) until their heads rest against the top face
of the loading shaft support pillars on the Base Bracket, and the lock nuts tightened
against the Top Bracket (this feature provides additional security, and enables the bracket
assembly to stay in position while the Load Cell is safely removed or replaced).
2. With the Base Bracket in position the Load Cell is installed between the loading shaft
plates until its loading shaft holes align with those in the Base Bracket. Please ensure that
the Load Cell is orientated correctly, with the loading holes (A) at the bottom of the
bracket. If installed incorrectly the Load Cell will fail under load.
3. Once the base plate and Load Cell are aligned the two Loading Shafts should be inserted.
Ensure the bars are central to the Base Bracket pillars (when viewed from the end of the
bracket).
4. The Loading Shafts have a hole at each end which will accommodate the R-Clips/Split
Pins provided.
5. The Top Bracket is now placed centrally over the Load Cell/Base Bracket assembly.
6. The Lift Off Prevention Shaft is then inserted through the two holes in the down legs of the
Top Bracket, passing under the Load Cell.
7. R-Clips/Split Pins are now installed in the Lift Off Shaft to secure it in position. During
Load Cell removal or installation this shaft must first be removed to allow the Top Bracket
to be raised to provide clearance for the Load Cell.
LOAD CELL
BASE
BRACKET
Page 9 of 10
Technical Specification Sheet
units
Standard Load Ranges 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30,
50, 75, 100, 150 & 200. t
Full Load Output 2.0 (+/- 0.25%) mV/V
Excitation Recommended 10 V
Excitation Maximum 18 V
Safe Service Load 150 %
Ultimate load 300 %
Side Load without Accuracy Degradation 30 %
Maximum Operating Side Load 100 %
Maximum lift off protection 30 %
Combined Error < +/- 0.05 %
Repeatability < +/- 0.02 %
Output at Zero load < +/- 2.0 %
Input Resistance 785 +/- 20 ohms
Output Resistance 700 +/- 5 ohms
Operational Temperature Range -50 to +80 ºC
Compensated Temperature Range -10 to +40 ºC
Temperature Coefficient on Zero < +/- 0.005 %/ºC
Temperature Coefficient on Span < +/- 0.003 %/ºC
Environmental Protection IP 68 Insulation
>500 at 100 VDC M ohms
All percentages are related to Full Rated Load.

Mechanical Interface
via 8 off attachment holes (12 holes on 75t, 100t, 150t & 200t capacities)
Construction
Sensor Element High Strength Stainless Steel Type 17 - 4 PH
Mounting assembly Galvanised Steel.
Stainless Steel is available as an option.
Shafts High Strength Stainless Steel Type 17 - 4 PH
Electrical Connections
4 Core 16/ 0.2 mm, screened polyurethane, mud and chemical resistant cable.
Cable length 20m.
Screen not connected to Load Cell body.
-ve
Page 10 of 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section
8.5 Pressure Gauge

Data Sheet, Pressure Gauge IM-100 74890457 03
www.nov.com
Pressure gauge
Type IM - Ø100 mm
• Robust pressure gauge

• Suitable for corrosive environments
• Housing material stainless steel
• Wetted parts in stainless steel or monel
• Liquid filled housing option available
• Protection category IP 65 according to
EN 60529
• Class of safety S1 according to
EN 837-1
• Special configurations available
on request
• IMPA code 65 15 ...
Technical specifications
Stainless steel Monel

(Wetted parts) (Wetted parts)
Accuracy Standard ±1,0% F.S. Standard ±1,0% F.S.

(up to 1600 bar)
Pressure ranges 0-0,6 up to 0-4000 bar 0-0,6 up to 0-600 bar

Full vacuum Full vacuum
Housing material AISI 304 AISI 304
Wetted parts
- measuring element AISI 316 up to 1600 bar Monel 400
- process connection AISI 316 Monel 400
Movement AISI 304 AISI 304

Pointer Aluminium, black Aluminium, black
Dial Aluminium, white Aluminium, white
Black figures Black figures
Maximum overpressure 130% of F.S. 130% of F.S.
Protection category IP 65 IP 65
Liquid filling Glycerine Glycerine
Temperature limitations
- ambient temperature unfilled -40°C +85°C -40°C +85°C
- ambient temperature filled -20°C +70°C -20°C +70°C
- process temperature unfilled +120°C max. +120°C max.
- process temperature filled +100°C max. +100°C max.
Weight 1,0 kg (filled) 1,0 kg (filled)

Ordering code
IM Pressure gauge
Material of wetted parts
316 AISI 316
MO Monel 400 (Type 10 and 11 only)
Housing material
304 Housing AISI 304
316 Housing AISI 316
Liquid filling
0 Unfilled housing
G Filled housing
Housing configurations
10 Direct mounting, bottom connection
11 Back flange for wall mounting, bottom connection
12 Front flange with 3 hole, bottom connection
30 Direct mounting, lower back connection
32 Front flange with 3 hole, lower back connection
33 Front flange for panel mounting, fixing clamp, lower back connection
Housing size
100 Housing size Ø100 mm
Process connection
R1/2” 1/2”BSP-M Other options on request
1/2”NPT 1/2”NPT-M
1/4”HP 1/4”HP-AE (9/16” x 18 UNF-F) (Only AISI 316)
Pressure ranges
Standard ranges acc. EN 837-1. Other options on request
0014-10/02/22
Special configurations available on request

(Exampel of ordering code)
IM - 316 - 304 - G - 10 - 100 - R1/2” 0-10 bar
Teck-Skotselv AS Main office: Bergen:

E-mail: firmapost@skotselv.no Verksveien 7 Postbox 38
www.skotselv.no N-3330 Skotselv N-5201 Os
Phone: +47 32 25 09 70 Phone: +47 56 57 61 10
Fax: +47 32 25 09 71 Fax: +47 56 57 61 11
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section
8.6 Butterfly Valve

Installation & Maintenance Instructions, Tyco butterfly valve fig. 14//17 71236594 X0
Installation & Operating Instructions, Tyco AVID ZR & ZR+ Position monitor 71236596 X0
Data Sheet, Tyco Butterfly Valve Optiseal Fig. 14 & 16 71259932 0
Operating & Maintenance Instructions, Tyco Pneumatic Actuator fig. 79 71236597 X0
Data Sheet, Tyco Pneumatic Actuator fig. 79 71250317 1
Data Sheet, Tyco AVID Position Monitors 71259933 1
www.nov.com
Þ«¬¬»®º´§ ª¿´ª»- Ñ³²·Í»¿´ô Ñ°¬·Í»¿´ Ú·¹ò ïìñïê ¿²¼ Ú·¹ò ïëñïé
×²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ú Ó¿·²¬»²¿²½» ×²-¬®«½¬·±²-
ïò Í¬±®¿¹» ú ¸¿²¼´·²¹
Ð´»¿-» ®»¿¼ ¬¸»-» ·²-¬®«½¬·±²- ½¿®»º«´´§ò 1.1 Storage
Ì¸» ª¿´ª»- -¸±«´¼ ¾» -¬±®»¼ ±ºº ¬¸» ¹®±«²¼ ·² ¿ ½´»¿²ô ¼®§ ·²¼±±® ¿®»¿ò
Ì¸·- -§³¾±´ ·²¼·½¿¬»- ·³°±®¬¿²¬
³»--¿¹»- ¿²¼ -¿º»¬§ ·²-¬®«½¬·±²-ò 1.2 Handling
Ì± °®»ª»²¬ ¼¿³¿¹» ¼«®·²¹ ¸¿²¼´·²¹ô ¬¸» ª¿´ª»- -¸±«´¼ ¾» ´·º¬»¼ ¾§ ¸¿²¼ ±® «-·²¹ ¿°°®±°®·¿¬»
×²¬»²¼»¼ ª¿´ª» «-» ´·º¬·²¹ »¯«·°³»²¬ò Ì¸» ª¿´ª»- -¸±«´¼ ¾» °®±¬»½¬»¼ º®±³ »¨¬»®²¿´ »ª»²¬- »ò¹ò ø¾«³°-ô ¸·¬¬·²¹
Ì¸» ª¿´ª» ·- ·²¬»²¼»¼ ¬± ¾» «-»¼ ±²´§ ·² ¿²¼ ª·¾®¿¬·±²÷ ¼«®·²¹ ¬®¿²-°±®¬ò
¿°°´·½¿¬·±²- ©·¬¸·² ¬¸» °®»--«®»ñ¬»³°»®¿¬«®» ß²§ º´¿²¹» °®±¬»½¬·±² ½¿°- ²»»¼ ¬± ¾» ®»³±ª»¼ ¾»º±®» ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ·- ³±«²¬»¼ ·² ¬¸» °·°»´·²»ò
´·³·¬- ·²¼·½¿¬»¼ ·² ¬¸» ÐñÌ ¼·¿¹®¿³ ±º ¬¸» Ô·º¬ ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ©·¬¸ ¹®»¿¬ ½¿®» º®±³ ¬¸» ¬®¿²-°±®¬ °¿½µ¿¹» ø½®¿¬»ô °¿´´»¬÷ò É¸·´» ¸¿²¼´·²¹ ±®
°®±¼«½¬ ³¿²«¿´ò ·²-¬¿´´·²¹ ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ô »²-«®» ¬¸¿¬ ²± ¼¿³¿¹» ±½½«®- ¬± ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ô ¬¸» °²»«³¿¬·½ñ»´»½¬®·½¿´ñó
É¸»² ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ·- «-»¼ ·² ¿² »²¼ó±ºó´·²» ¸§¼®¿«´·½ ¿½¬«¿¬±® ±® ±¬¸»® ·²-¬®«³»²¬¿¬·±²ò
º«²½¬·±²ô ÐÛÜ Ý¿¬ó× ¿°°´·½¿¬·±²- ¿®» ¿´´±©»¼
±²´§ò Ú±® ±¬¸»® ½¿¬»¹±®·»-ô °´»¿-» ½±²¬¿½¬ ¬¸» îò Í°¿®» °¿®¬-
º¿½¬±®§ò
Ñ²´§ ±®·¹·²¿´ Õ»§-¬±²» -°¿®» °¿®¬- ¿®» ¿´´±©»¼ ¬± ¾» «-»¼ò Í¿º» ±°»®¿¬·±² ½¿² ²±¬ ¾» ¹«¿®¿²¬»»¼
·º ¬¸·®¼ °¿®¬§ -°¿®» °¿®¬- ¿®» «-»¼ò
íò ×²-¬¿´´¿¬·±²
WARNING!
Ú±® -¿º»¬§ ®»¿-±²-ô ·¬ ·- ·³°±®¬¿²¬ ¬± ¬¿µ» ¬¸» º±´´±©·²¹ °®»½¿«¬·±²- ¾»º±®» §±« -¬¿®¬ ©±®µ ±² ¬¸» ª¿´ª»æ
ïò Ð»®-±²²»´ ³¿µ·²¹ ¿²§ ¿¼¶«-¬³»²¬- ¬± ¬¸» ª¿´ª»- -¸±«´¼ «¬·´·¦» -«·¬¿¾´» »¯«·°³»²¬ò
ß´´ ®»¯«·®»¼ °»®-±²¿´ °®±¬»½¬·±² ³»¿²- -¸±«´¼ ¾» ©±®²ò
îò Ì¸» ´·²» ³«-¬ ¾» ¼»°®»--«®·¦»¼ ¾»º±®» ·²-¬¿´´·²¹ ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ò
íò ×²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ¿²¼ ¸¿²¼´·²¹ ±º ª¿´ª»- -¸±«´¼ ¾» ¼±²» ±²´§ ¾§ °»®-±²²»´ ¬¸¿¬ ·- ¬®¿·²»¼ ·² ¿´´
¿-°»½¬- ±º ³¿²«¿´ ¿²¼ ³»½¸¿²·½¿´ ¸¿²¼´·²¹ ¬»½¸²·¯«»-ò
ÜÊÙÉóÙ¿- ¿°°®±ª»¼ ´«¹¹»¼ ª¿´ª» ìò Ó·-«-» ±º ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ·- ²±¬ ¿´´±©»¼ò Ú±® »¨¿³°´»æ ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ô ¸¿²¼´»-ô ¿½¬«¿¬±®- ±® ±¬¸»® °¿®¬-
³¿§ ²±¬ ¾» «-»¼ ¿- N½´·³¾·²¹ ¬±±´-Mò
ëò Û²-«®» ¬¸¿¬ ª¿´ª» °®»--«®»ñ¬»³°»®¿¬«®» ´·³·¬¿¬·±²- ³¿®µ»¼ ±² ¬¸» ·¼»²¬·º·½¿¬·±² ¬¿¹ ¿®» ©·¬¸·²
¬¸» -»®ª·½» ½±²¼·¬·±²-ò Ì¸» ¬®·³ ²«³¾»® ±² ¬¸» ª¿´ª»K- ¬¿¹°´¿¬» ·¼»²¬·º·»- ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ³¿¬»®·¿´-ò
Í»» Ð®±¼«½¬ Ó¿²«¿´ º±® ª¿´ª» -°»½·º·½ ÐñÌ ¼·¿¹®¿³ ¿²¼ ¬®·³ ²«³¾»® ¼»º·²·¬·±²ò
êò Û²-«®» ¬¸¿¬ ª¿´ª» ³¿¬»®·¿´- ¿®» ½±³°¿¬·¾´» ©·¬¸ ¬¸» °·°»´·²» º´«·¼ò
éò Ú±® ÜÊÙÉóÙ¿- ¿°°®±ª»¼ ´«¹¹»¼ ª¿´ª»-ô ¬¸®±«¹¸ ¬¸®»¿¼»¼ ®±¼- ³«-¬ ¾» «-»¼ ·²-¬»¿¼ ±º
º´¿²¹» ¾±´¬-ò
3.1 Visual valve inspection

ïò Ý±²º·®³ ¬¸¿¬ ¬¸» ³¿¬»®·¿´- ±º ½±²-¬®«½¬·±² ´·-¬»¼ ±² ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ²¿³»°´¿¬» ¿®» ¿°°®±°®·¿¬» º±®
¬¸» -»®ª·½» ·²¬»²¼»¼ ¿²¼ ¿®» ¿- -°»½·º·»¼ò
îò Ì¿¹ñ²¿³» °´¿¬» ·¼»²¬·º·½¿¬·±²
Ó¿²«º¿½¬«®»® æ Õ»§-¬±²»
Ú·¹ò æ »ò¹ò Ñ°¬·Í»¿´ ïìóïïî
ÖÑÞ æ Ö±¾ ²«³¾»®
Ò±³·²¿´ -·¦» æ ÜÒ
ÓòÐòÉòÐò æ ³¿¨·³«³ °»®³·--·¾´» ©±®µ·²¹ °®»--«®»
Ú´¿²¹» ½±³°¿¬·¾·´·¬§ æ »ò¹ò ÐÒïðñïê
Ì»³°»®¿¬«®» æ »ò¹ò óìðñïîð•Ý
Þ±¼§ æ »ò¹ò ÙÖÔ îëðò
3.2 Flange and pipe compatibility
Ý¸»½µ ³¿¬½¸·²¹ ±º º´¿²¹» ¼®·´´·²¹ °¿¬¬»®² ±º ª¿´ª» ¿²¼ °·°» ¾»º±®» ¿--»³¾´§ò
Ú´¿²¹»- ¸¿ª» ¬± ³»»¬ ¬¸» º±´´±©·²¹ ®»¯«·®»³»²¬-æ
ó Ì¸» º¿½» ·²-·¼» ¼·¿³»¬»® -¸±«´¼ ¾»æ
Ü ³·²ò æ Ì¸» ª¿´ª» Ïó¼·³»²-·±² õ ¿¼»¯«¿¬» ¼·-½ ½´»¿®¿²½»ò
Ü ³¿¨ò æ Ì¸» ±°¬·³«³ ·²-·¼» ¼·¿³»¬»® ø×Ü÷ ·- »¯«¿´ ¬± ¬¸» ·²-·¼» ¼·¿³»¬»® ±º º´¿²¹»
-¬¿²¼¿®¼ ÛÒ ïðçîóïô ¬¿¾´» èô ¬§°» ïïò Ú±® ´¿®¹»® ¬¸¿² Ü ³¿¨ ·²-·¼» ¼·¿³»¬»®- ±®
±¬¸»® º´¿²¹» ¬§°»- °´»¿-» ½±²¬¿½¬ §±«® ´±½¿´ Ì§½± Í¿´»- ±®¹¿²·¦¿¬·±²ô ¿- ´¿®¹»®
·²-·¼» ¼·¿³»¬»®- ³·¹¸¬ ®»-«´¬ ·² ®»¼«½»¼ ª¿´ª» º«²½¬·±²¿´·¬§ò
ó ×º ¬¸» º´¿²¹» ø±® °·°»÷ ·- °®±ª·¼»¼ ©·¬¸ ¿ ®¿·-»¼ º¿½»ô ¬¸» ¼·¿³»¬»® ±º ¬¸·- -¸¿´´ ¾» ¿¬ ´»¿-¬
è ³³ ´¿®¹»® ¬¸¿² ¬¸» ÇÇó¼·³»²-·±² ±º ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ò
Ì¸» «-» ±º ¬¸» º´¿²¹»ó¹¿-µ»¬- ·- ²±¬ ¿´´±©»¼ -·²½» ·¬ ³·¹¸¬ ¼¿³¿¹» ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ò
Ì¸» Õ»§-¬±²» -»¿¬óº¿½» ¼»-·¹² »´·³·²¿¬»- ¬¸» ²»»¼ º±® ¬¸» ¹¿-µ»¬-ò
Ë-» º´¿²¹» ¾±´¬·²¹ ·² ¿¹®»»³»²¬ ©·¬¸ ¿°°®±°®·¿¬» -¬¿²¼¿®¼ò
Ü± ²±¬ «-» º´¿²¹» ¹¿-µ»¬-ô ¬¸»-» ´»¿¼ ¬± ª¿´ª» ¼¿³¿¹»ÿ
©©©ò¬§½±ª¿´ª»-ó»«ò½±³ Ì§½± ®»-»®ª»- ¬¸» ®·¹¸¬ ¬± ½¸¿²¹» ¬¸» ½±²¬»²¬- ©·¬¸±«¬ ²±¬·½» ÛÞÐÖÊóðéìéóÛÒóðëïî
×²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ú Ó¿·²¬»²¿²½» ×²-¬®«½¬·±²-
íòí Ê¿´ª» ·²-¬¿´´¿¬·±²

Ì¸» ª¿´ª»- ¿®» ¾·ó¼·®»½¬·±²¿´ ¿²¼ ³¿§ ¾» º·¬¬»¼ ·² »·¬¸»® ¼·®»½¬·±² ®»´¿¬·ª» ¬± ¬¸» º´±©ò Ì¸» ª¿´ª»
©·´´ ½±²¬®±´ º´±© »¯«¿´´§ ·² »·¬¸»® ¼·®»½¬·±²ò Ì¸» ®»½±³³»²¼»¼ ·²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² °±-·¬·±² ·- -¸¿º¬
¸±®·¦±²¬¿´ ¿²¼ ¬¸» ´±©»® ¼·-½ó»¼¹» ±°»²·²¹ ¼±©²ó-¬®»¿³ò øÛ-°»½·¿´´§ º±® -´«®®§ -»®ª·½» ¿²¼
³»¼·¿ ©·¬¸ ¿ ¬»²¼»²½§ º±® -»¼·³»²¬¿¬·±²÷ò Ú±® ±°¬·³«³ ª¿´ª» ½±²¬®±´ ¿²¼ -³±±¬¸
°»®º±®³¿²½»ô ·¬ ·- ®»½±³³»²¼»¼ ¬± ¸¿ª» ¿ ïð ¬± îð °·°» ¼·¿³»¬»®- ±º -¬®¿·¹¸¬ ®«² ·²´»¬ °·°·²¹
¿²¼ í ¬± ë °·°» ¼·¿³»¬»®- -¬®¿·¹¸¬ ±«¬´»¬ °·°·²¹ò
ß ª¿´ª» ·- ²± ½®±©ó¾¿®ò Ü± ²±¬ «-» ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¬± -°®»¿¼ ¬¸» º´¿²¹»-ò Í»¿¬ ¼¿³¿¹» ³·¹¸¬ ¾»
¬¸» ®»-«´¬ò
Ò±¬»-
{ Ì¸» ª¿´ª» ½¿² ¾» ·²-¬¿´´»¼ ·² ¬¸» °·°»ó´·²» »·¬¸»® ©·¬¸ ±® ©·¬¸±«¬ ¬¸» ¿½¬«¿¬±® ³±«²¬»¼ ±²
¬±° ±º ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ò Ó¿µ» -«®» ¬¸¿¬ §±« ½¿² ¬«®² ¬¸» ¼·-½ ½¿«¬·±«- -± §±« ½¿² º»»´ ¿ ³·-³¿¬½¸
®»-«´¬·²¹ º®±³ ¿ ¼·-½ ¬±«½¸·²¹ ¬¸» ¿¼¶¿½»²¬ °·°·²¹ò
{ ×¬ ·- ¬¸» ®»-°±²-·¾·´·¬§ ±º ¬¸» ª¿´ª» «-»® P ¿²¼ ²±¬ ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ³¿²«º¿½¬«®»®ÿ P ¬± »²-«®» ¬¸¿¬
¬¸» °·°»´·²» -§-¬»³ ¸¿- ¾»»² ¾«·´¬ °®±º»--·±²¿´´§ ¿²¼ ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¸¿- ¾»»² °®±°»®´§ ·²-¬¿´´»¼ò
{ ß¼¶¿½»²¬ °·°·²¹ ³«-¬ ¾» °±-·¬·±²»¼ -± ¬¸¿¬ ³·²·³¿´ °·°·²¹ -¬®»--»- ¿®» ¬®¿²-³·¬¬»¼ ¬± ¬¸»
ª¿´ª» º´¿²¹»- ¼«®·²¹ ±® ¿º¬»® ·²-¬¿´´¿¬·±²ò
{ Ø¿²¼´·²¹ ¿²¼ ´·º¬·²¹ ±º ¬¸» ª¿´ª»- ¼«®·²¹ ·²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ÓËÍÌ ¾» °»®º±®³»¼ º±´´±©·²¹ ¬¸» -¿³»
·²-¬®«½¬·±²- ¼»-½®·¾»¼ ·² °®»ª·±«- -»½¬·±² Nïòî Ø¿²¼´·²¹Mò
×³°±®¬¿²¬
Ó¿¬·²¹ º´¿²¹» º¿½»- -¸±«´¼ ¾» ·² ¹±±¼ ½±²¼·¬·±² ¿²¼ º®»» ±º ¼·®¬ ¿²¼ñ±® ·²½´«-·±²-ò Þ±¬¸ °·°»
·²-·¼»- ¬± ¾» ©»´´ ½´»¿²»¼ò
íòíòïò Û¨·-¬·²¹ -§-¬»³ ø-»» -µ»¬½¸÷

ïò Ý¸»½µ ©¸»¬¸»® ¬¸» º´¿²¹» ¼·-¬¿²½» ³»»¬- ¬¸» ª¿´ª» º¿½»ó¬±óº¿½» ¼·³»²-·±²-ò Í°®»¿¼ ©·¬¸
¿¼»¯«¿¬» ¬±±´·²¹ ¬¸» º´¿²¹»- º±® »¿-§ ·²-»®¬·±² ±º ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ò
îò ×² ½¿-» ±º ¿ ©¿º»® ª¿´ª»ô ·²-»®¬ -±³» º´¿²¹» ¾±´¬- ·² ¬¸» °·°» º´¿²¹»-ô ¬± ¸»´° §±« ¾»¿® ¬¸»
ª¿´ª» ¿º¬»® ·²-»®¬·±²ò
íò Ý´±-» ¬¸» ª¿´ª» -± º¿®ô ¬¸¿¬ ¬¸» ¼·-½ó»¼¹» ·- ¿¬ ´»¿-¬ ïð ³³ ©·¬¸·² ¬¸» ¾±¼§ò
ìò ×²-»®¬ ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¾»¬©»»² ¬¸» º´¿²¹»-ô ½»²¬»® ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¾±¼§ ¿²¼ ·²-»®¬ ¿´´ º´¿²¹» ¾±´¬-ò
Ì·¹¸¬»² ¬¸» º´¿²¹»ó¾±´¬- ¸¿²¼ ¬·¹¸¬ò
ëò Í´±©´§ ±°»² ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ½±³°´»¬»´§ò øÌ¸» ¼·-½ ·- ·² ´·²» ©·¬¸ °¿®¿´´»´ º´¿¬- ±® µ»§©¿§ ·² -¬»³
¸»¿¼ò Õ»§©¿§ °±·²¬- ¬±©¿®¼- ¼·-½ »¼¹»÷ò
êò Ó¿·²¬¿·² ¬¸» ª¿´ª» º´¿²¹» ¿´·¹²³»²¬ ©¸·´» ¹®¿¼«¿´´§ ®»³±ª·²¹ ¬¸» º´¿²¹»ó-°®»¿¼»®- ¿²¼
¬·¹¸¬»² ¬¸» º´¿²¹»ó¾±´¬- ¸¿²¼ ¬·¹¸¬ò
éò Í´±©´§ ½´±-» ¿²¼ ±°»² ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¬± ½¸»½µ º±® ¿¼»¯«¿¬» ¼·-½ ½´»¿®¿²½»ò
èò Ý®±--ó¬·¹¸¬»² ¿´´ ¾±´¬·²¹ ¬± ¬¸» °®±°»® ¬±®¯«»ò Ü± ²±¬ ±ª»® ¬·¹¸¬»²ò
íòíòîò Ò»© -§-¬»³ ø-»» -µ»¬½¸÷

ïò É·¬¸ ¬¸» ¼·-½ ·² ²»¿®ó½´±-»¼ °±-·¬·±² ½»²¬»® »¿½¸ ³¿¬·²¹ º´¿²¹» ©·¬¸ ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¾±¼§ò
Ú·¨ ¬¸» ¾±¼§ ©·¬¸ -±³» º´¿²¹»ó¾±´¬- ¿²¼ ¬·¹¸¬»² ¬¸» ¾±´¬-ò
îò Ë-» ¬¸» º´¿²¹»óª¿´ª»óº´¿²¹» ¿--»³¾´§ º±® º·¬ó«° ¿²¼ ½»²¬»®·²¹ ¬± ¬¸» °·°»ò
íò Ì¿½µó©»´¼ ¬¸» º´¿²¹»- ¬± ¬¸» °·°»ò
ìò Î»³±ª» ¬¸» ¾±´¬·²¹ ¿²¼ ®»³±ª» ¬¸» ª¿´ª» º®±³ ¾»¬©»»² ¬¸» º´¿²¹»-ò
×³°±®¬¿²¬
Ü± ²±¬ º·²·-¸ó©»´¼ ¬¸» º´¿²¹»- ¬± ¬¸» °·°» ©·¬¸ ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¾±´¬»¼ ¾»¬©»»² ¬¸» º´¿²¹»- ¿-
¬¸·- ©·´´ ®»-«´¬ ·² -»®·±«- ¸»¿¬ó¼¿³¿¹» ¬± ¬¸» -»¿¬ò
ëò Ú·²·-¸ó©»´¼ ¬¸» º´¿²¹»- ¬± ¬¸» °·°» ¿²¼ ¿´´±© ¬¸» º´¿²¹»- ¬± ½±±´ ½±³°´»¬»´§ò
êò ×²-¬¿´´ ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ²±© ¿½½±®¼·²¹ ¬± ¬¸» °®±½»¼«®» º±® ·²-¬¿´´·²¹ ·² »¨·-¬·²¹ -§-¬»³-ò
íòìò Ê¿´ª» ª»®·º·½¿¬·±²

Ý¸»½µ ¬¸» ±°»®¿¬·±² ±º ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¾§ ±°»®¿¬·²¹ ·¬ ¬± Nº«´´ ±°»²M ¿²¼ Nº«´´ ½´±-»Mò Ì± ª»®·º§ ¬¸»
ª¿´ª» ±°»®¿¬·±²ô ¬¸» ¼·-½ °±-·¬·±² ·²¼·½¿¬±® ±² ¬¸» ¿½¬«¿¬±® ±® ¬¸» ¸¿²¼´» -¸±«´¼ ®±¬¿¬»
¾»¬©»»² ¬¸» Nº«´´ ±°»²M ¿²¼ Nº«´´ ½´±-»M ·²¼·½¿¬±®- ±² ¬¸» ¿½¬«¿¬±® ±® ¬¸®±¬¬´» °´¿¬»ò Ù»²»®¿´´§
¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¼·-½ ¬®¿ª»´- ½´±½µ©·-» ¬± ½´±-»ò
Ì§½± ®»-»®ª»- ¬¸» ®·¹¸¬ ¬± ½¸¿²¹» ¬¸» ½±²¬»²¬- ©·¬¸±«¬ ²±¬·½» °¿¹» î
×²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ú Ó¿·²¬»²¿²½» ×²-¬®«½¬·±²-
Û¨·-¬·²¹ -§-¬»³ Ò»© -§-¬»³
ïò Í°®»¿¼ ¬¸» º´¿²¹»- ©·¬¸ ¬¸» ¿¼»¯«¿¬» ¬±±´·²¹ò ïò Ý»²¬»® ¿ º´¿²¹»óª¿´ª»óº´¿²¹» ¿--»³¾´§ ¾»¬©»»²
×²-»®¬ -±³» º´¿²¹» ¾±´¬- ¬± ¾»¿® ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ò ¬¸» °·°»-ò
îò Ñ°»² ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¿²¼ ®»³±ª» ¬¸» º´¿²¹» -°®»¿¼- îò Ì¿½µ ©»´¼ ¬¸» º´¿²¹»- ¬± ¬¸» °·°»-ò
íò Ý´±-» ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ½´±½µ©·-»ô ®»¬«®² ¬± ±°»² °±-·¬·±² ¿²¼ íò Î»³±ª» ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¿²¼ º·²·-¸ ©»´¼ò
½®±--ó¬·¹¸¬»² ¿´´ ¾±´¬·²¹ò ×²-¬¿´´ ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¿½½±®¼·²¹ ¬± ¬¸» °®±½»¼«®» ·² ¬¸»
´»º¬ ½±´«³²ò
3.5. Sources of possible danger

Ì¸·- -»½¬·±² ½±²¬¿·²- -±³» »¨¿³°´»- ±º °±--·¾´» º±®»-»»² ¼¿²¹»® -±«®½»-ò
íòëòïò Ó»½¸¿²·½¿´
ß÷ É¸»² ³¿²«¿´ ±°»®¿¬±®- ¿®» «-»¼ô ¿ª¿·´¿¾´» -°¿½» -¸±«´¼ ¾» ½¸»½µ»¼ ·² ±®¼»® ¬± ¿ª±·¼ ¸¿²¼- ¾»·²¹ ½´¿³°»¼ò
Þ÷ Ó»½¸¿²·½¿´ -°¿®µ- ½¿«-»¼ ±² ·³°¿½¬ ±º ª¿´ª» ¿²¼ »ò¹ò ¬±±´·²¹ô ¿®» ¿ °±¬»²¬·¿´ -±«®½» ±º ·¹²·¬·±² ±º -«®®±«²¼·²¹ ¿¬³±-°¸»®»ò
íòëòîò Û´»½¬®·½¿´
×º -¬¿¬·½ ½¸¿®¹»- ±® -¬®¿§ »´»½¬®·½¿´ ½«®®»²¬- ½¿² ·²·¬·¿¬» »¨°´±-·±²-ô ¬¸» ª¿´ª» -¸±«´¼ ¾» ¹®±«²¼»¼ ¬± »¿®¬¸ò
íòëòíò Ì¸»®³¿´
ß÷ ×-±´¿¬·±² -¸±«´¼ ¾» «-»¼ ±² ª¿´ª»- ©·¬¸ ¿°°´·½¿¬·±² ¬»³°»®¿¬«®»- â õìð•Ý ¿²¼ ä óîð•Ý ¬± °®»ª»²¬ ¬¸»³ º®±³ ¾»·²¹ ¬±«½¸»¼ ø¬± ¿ª±·¼ ¾«®²·²¹÷ò
Þ÷ ×º ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ·- «-»¼ ·² ¸±¬ ¹¿-ñº´«·¼ ¿°°´·½¿¬·±²- ¬¸¿¬ ³·¹¸¬ ¹·ª» »¨±¬¸»®³·½ ®»¿½¬·±²-ô °®»½¿«¬·±²- ³«-¬ ¾» ¬¿µ»² -± ¬¸¿¬ ¬¸» ª¿´ª» -«®º¿½» ½¿²
²±¬ ´»¿¼ ¬± ¼¿²¹»® º±® °»±°´» ±® ¬¸» ¼·®»½¬ »²ª·®±²³»²¬ò ×² ¼«-¬ ¿²¼ °±--·¾´» »¨°´±-·±² ¦±²»-ô ¬¸» ±°»®¿¬·±² ¬»³°»®¿¬«®»- ¿²¼ ¹ · ²·¬·±²
¬»³°»®¿¬«®»- º±® ¼«-¬ -¸±«´¼ ¾» ®»ª·»©»¼ò
íòëòìò Ñ°»®¿¬·±²¿´
Ý´±-·²¹ ¿ ª¿´ª» ¬±± º¿-¬ ³¿§ ®»-«´¬ ·² ©¿¬»®¸¿³³»® ·² ¬¸» «°-¬®»¿³ °¿®¬ ±º ¬¸» °·°»´·²»ò É¿¬»®¸¿³³»® ®»-«´¬- ·² »¨½»--·ª» -¬®»--»- ·² ¬¸» ª¿´ª»
¿²¼ ©·´´ ½¿«-» -»ª»®» ¼¿³¿¹»ò
É¿¬»®¸¿³³»® -¸±«´¼ ¾» ¿ª±·¼»¼ ·² ¿´´ ½·®½«³-¬¿²½»-ò
Ü«» ¬± ¼·ºº»®»²¬·¿´ °®»--«®» ¿½®±-- ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¼·-½ô ¾«¬¬»®º´§ ª¿´ª»- ¸¿ª» ¬¸» ¬»²¼»²½§ ¬± ¾» ½´±-»¼ ¾§ ¬¸» º´±©ò Ì¿µ» ½¿®» ©¸»² «²´¿¬½¸·²¹ ¬¸» ª¿´ª»
±°»®¿¬·²¹ ³»½¸¿²·-³ò
Ì§½± ®»-»®ª»- ¬¸» ®·¹¸¬ ¬± ½¸¿²¹» ¬¸» ½±²¬»²¬- ©·¬¸±«¬ ²±¬·½» °¿¹» í
×²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ú Ó¿·²¬»²¿²½» ×²-¬®«½¬·±²-
íòêò Ì®±«¾´»-¸±±¬·²¹ ¹«·¼»

Í§³°¬±³ Ð±--·¾´» ½¿«-» Î»-±´«¬·±²
Ê¿´ª» ©±«´¼ ²±¬ ®±¬¿¬» ß½¬«¿¬±® ¸¿- º¿·´»¼ Î»°´¿½» ±® ®»°¿·®
Ê¿´ª» °¿½µ»¼ ©·¬¸ ¼»¾®·- Ú´«-¸ ±® ½´»¿² ª¿´ª» ¬± ®»³±ª» ¼»¾®·-
Ê¿´ª» ´»¿µ·²¹ Ê¿´ª» ²±¬ º«´´§ ½´±-»¼ Ý´±-» ª¿´ª»
Ü»¾®·- ¬®¿°°»¼ ·² ª¿´ª» Ý§½´» ¿²¼ º´«-¸ ø©·¬¸ ª¿´ª» ±°»²÷ ¬± ®»³±ª» ¼»¾®·-
Í»¿¬ ·- ¼¿³¿¹»¼ Î»°´¿½» -»¿¬
Ö»®µ§ ±°»®¿¬·±² Û¨¬®»³» ¼®§ ¿°°´·½¿¬·±² Ð«¬ -±³» -·´·½±² ±·´ ±² -»¿¬ ±® ·²½®»¿-» -·¦» ±º ¿½¬«¿¬±®
ß·® -«°°´§ ¿½¬«¿¬±® ·²¿¼»¯«¿¬» ×²½®»¿-» ¿·® -«°°´§ °®»--«®» ¿²¼ñ±® ª±´«³»
ìò Ó¿·²¬»²¿²½» ¾«¬¬»®º´§ ª¿´ª»- Ñ³²·Í»¿´ô Ñ°¬·Í»¿´ Ú·¹ò ïìñïê

Ì¸» Õ»§-¬±²» ¾«¬¬»®º´§ ª¿´ª»- Ñ³²·Í»¿´ô Ñ°¬·Í»¿´ Ú·¹ò ïìñïê ¿®» ¼»-·¹²»¼ ¬± ®»¯«·®» ¿ ³·²·³«³ ±º
³¿·²¬»²¿²½»ò
ÉßÎÒ×ÒÙ!
Ü»°®»--«®·¦» ¿²¼ô ·º ²»½»--¿®§ ·² ½¿-» ±º ¼¿²¹»®±«- º´«·¼-ô ¼®¿·² ¬¸» ´·²» ¿²¼ º´«-¸ ©·¬¸
¿°°®±°®·¿¬» ½´»¿²·²¹ º´«·¼ ¾»º±®» -¬¿®¬·²¹ ¿²§ ³¿·²¬»²¿²½»ò Ú¿·´«®» ¬± ¼± -± ³¿§ ½¿«-» -»®·±«-
°»®-±²¿´ ·²¶«®§ ¿²¼ñ±® »¯«·°³»²¬ ¼¿³¿¹»ò
Þ»º±®» ¼·-¿--»³¾´·²¹ ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ô »²-«®» ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¸¿- ¾»»² ¼»½±²¬¿³·²¿¬»¼ ½±®®»½¬´§ º®±³ ¿²§
¸¿®³º«´ ¹¿--»- ±® ´·¯«·¼- ¿²¼ ¬¸¿¬ ·¬ ·- ©·¬¸·² ¿ -¿º» ¬»³°»®¿¬«®» ®¿²¹» º±® ¸¿²¼´·²¹ò
Ð»®-±²²»´ ³¿µ·²¹ ¿²§ ¿¼¶«-¬³»²¬- ¬± ¬¸» ª¿´ª»- -¸±«´¼ «¬·´·¦» -«·¬¿¾´» »¯«·°³»²¬ò ß´´ ®»¯«·®»¼
°»®-±²¿´ °®±¬»½¬·±² ³»¿²- -¸±«´¼ ¾» ©±®²ò
É» ®»½±³³»²¼ ¬¸¿¬ °»®-±²²»´ -¸±«´¼ ¾» ¬®¿·²»¼ ·² ¿´´ ¿-°»½¬- ±º ¬¸»-» ·²-¬®«½¬·±²- ¾»º±®»
½¿®®§·²¹ ±«¬ ¸¿²¼´·²¹ ±º ¿²§ ª¿´ª»ò
ìòï Î±«¬·²» ³¿·²¬»²¿²½»

Ì¸» Õ»§-¬±²» Ñ³²·Í»¿´ô Ñ°¬·Í»¿´ Ú·¹ò ïìñïê ¾«¬¬»®º´§ ª¿´ª»- ¿®» ¼»-·¹²»¼ ¬± ®»¯«·®» ¿
³·²·³«³ ±º ³¿·²¬»²¿²½»ò
Î±«¬·²» ³¿·²¬»²¿²½» ±® ´«¾®·½¿¬·±² ·- ²±¬ ®»¯«·®»¼ô ©» ®»½±³³»²¼ °»®·±¼·½ øª·-«¿´÷
·²-°»½¬·±² ¬± »²-«®» -¿¬·-º¿½¬±®§ ±°»®¿¬·±² ¿²¼ -»¿´·²¹ ¬± ¬¸» »²ª·®±²³»²¬ò
ìòî Î»³±ª·²¹ ¬¸» ª¿´ª» º®±³ ¬¸» °·°» -§-¬»³

ïò Ì«®² ¬¸» ¼·-½ ¬± ²»¿®´§ ½´±-»¼ °±-·¬·±²ò øÌ¸» ¼·-½ ·- ·² ´·²» ©·¬¸ ¬¸» °¿®¿´´»´ º´¿¬- ·² ¬¸» -¬»³÷ò
îò Ô±±-»² ¿´´ º´¿²¹» ¾±´¬- ¿²¼ ®»³±ª» ¬¸» ¾±´¬-ô ©¸·½¸ °®»ª»²¬ ®»³±ª·²¹ ±º ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ò
íò Í°®»¿¼ ¬¸» º´¿²¹»- ©·¬¸ ¿¼»¯«¿¬» ¬±±´·²¹ô ¿²¼ ®»³±ª» ¬¸» ª¿´ª»ò
ìòí Ê¿´ª» ¼·-¿--»³¾´§ øÍ»» -µ»¬½¸÷
ïò Ì«®² ¬¸» ¼·-½ ¬± ¿´³±-¬ ±°»² °±-·¬·±²ò
îò Î»³±ª» ¿½¬«¿¬±®ò
íò Î»³±ª» ¬¸» ¾±¼§ó-½®»©-ò
ìò Î»³±ª» ¬¸» ´±©»® °¿®¬ ±º ¬¸» ¾±¼§ò Ì¸·- ·- ³±®» ±® ´»-- ¸»´¼ ¾§ ¬¸» ®»½¬¿²¹«´¿® -¸¿°»¼
-»¿¬ ´·° ¿²¼ ¹®±±ª»ò Ë-» ¬©± -½®»©¼®·ª»®- ·² ¬¸» ¾±¼§ó-°´·¬- ¬± -»°¿®¿¬» ¬¸» ¾±¼§ ¸¿´ª»-
¿²¼ °«´´ ¬¸» ¾±¬¬±³ó°¿®¬ ±ºº ©·¬¸ ¿ ®±¬¿¬·²¹ ³±¬·±²ò
ëò Ð«´´ ¬¸» ¼·-½-¬»³ ¿²¼ -»¿¬ ±«¬ ±º ¬¸» ¾±¼§ ¬±° °¿®¬ò
êò Ì± ®»³±ª» ¬¸» ¼·-½ó-¬»³ º®±³ ¬¸» -»¿¬ô ¼»º±®³ ¬¸» -»¿¬ ·²¬± ¿ ´±²¹ N±ª¿´M -«ºº·½·»²¬ ¬± ½´»¿®
¬¸» »²¼ ±º ¬¸» -¸±®¬ -¬»³ô ³±ª» ¬¸» -¸±®¬ -¬»³ó»²¼ ±«¬ ±ºº ¬¸» -»¿¬ ¾±®»ô ¿²¼ °«´´ ¬¸» ´±²¹
»²¼ º®±³ ¬¸» -»¿¬ -¬»³ ¸±´»ô «-·²¹ ¿ ®±¬¿¬·²¹ ³±¬·±²ò
éò Ì¸» ¾±¼§ ¬±° °¿®¬ ½±²¬¿·²- ¿ ¬±° ¾«-¸·²¹ ¿²¼ ¼·®¬ -½®¿°»®ò Ù»²»®¿´´§ ¬¸»®» ·- ²± ²»»¼ ¬±
®»³±ª» ¬¸»-» °¿®¬-ò
èò Ú±® -±³» ª»®-·±²- ±º ¬¸» Ñ°¬·Í»¿´ ±²´§ô ¬¸» ¾±¼·»- ¿®» »¯«·°°»¼ ©·¬¸ ¾»¿®·²¹-ò ×º ®»¯«·®»¼
¬¸»-» ½¿² ¾» ®»³±ª»¼ò
ìòì Ê¿´ª» ¿--»³¾´§ øÍ»» -µ»¬½¸÷
ïò Ý´»¿² ¿´´ °¿®¬-ò Ë-» -·´·½±²» ¹®»¿-» ±² ¬¸» ¼·-½-¬»³ ¬± º¿½·´·¬¿¬» ¬¸» ¿--»³¾´§ò
×º ¬¸» ª¿´ª» ¸¿- ¬± ¾» °®±ª·¼»¼ ©·¬¸ ¿ ÌÚÛó´·²»¼ó-»¿¬ °®»¸»¿¬ ¬¸·- -»¿¬ ¼«®·²¹ ¸¿´º ¿² ¸±«®
·² ²»¿®´§ ¾±·´·²¹ ©¿¬»® ¾»º±®» ¿--»³¾´§ò
îò ×º ®»³±ª»¼ ¾»º±®»ô ®»ó¿--»³¾´» ¬¸» ¬±° ø-¸¿º¬÷ó¾«-¸·²¹ ·² ¬¸» ¾±¼§ «°°»® °¿®¬ò
íò Ú±® -±³» ª»®-·±²- ±º ¬¸» Ñ°¬·Í»¿´ô ³±«²¬ ¬¸» ¬©± -¸¿º¬ ¾»¿®·²¹- ¿²¼ -°´·¬ -»¿´-ò
ìò Ì¿µ» ¬¸» ¼·-½-¬»³ ¿²¼ ·²-»®¬ ¬¸» ´±²¹ -¬»³ó»²¼ ·²¬± ¿ ¸±´» ±º ¬¸» -»¿¬ô «-·²¹ ¿ ¬©·-¬·²¹ ³±¬·±²ò
ëò Ü»º±®³ ¬¸» -»¿¬ ·²¬± ¿ ´±²¹ N±ª¿´M -«ºº·½·»²¬ ¬± ½´»¿® ¬¸» »²¼ ±º ¬¸» -¸±®¬ -¬»³ò É·¬¸ ¬¸»
¼·-½ó-¬»³ -·³«´¿¬·²¹ ¿² ±°»² °±-·¬·±²ô ³±ª» ¬¸» -¸±®¬ -¬»³ó»²¼ ·²¬± ¬¸» »´±²¹¿¬»¼ -»¿¬ó
¾±®» ¿²¼ ¿--»³¾´» ¬¸» -¸±®¬ -¬»³ó»²¼ ·²¬± ¬¸» ±¬¸»® -»¿¬ -¬»³ó¸±´» ¾§ ®»´»¿-·²¹ ¬¸»
¼·-¬±®¬»¼ -»¿¬ò Ü± ²±¬ °«¬ ±·´ ±® ¹®»¿-» ¾»¬©»»² ¾±¼§ ¿²¼ -»¿¬ò
êò Ð«-¸ ¬¸» ´±²¹ -¬»³ó»²¼ ±º ¬¸» ¼·-½ó-¬»³ñ-»¿¬ «²·¬ ·²¬± ¬¸» ¾±¼§ ¬±° °¿®¬ò Ð«-¸ ¬¸» -»¿¬
©·¬¸ -»¿¬ ´·° ¿²¼ ¹®±±ª» ·² °´¿½»ò
éò ß--»³¾´» ¬¸» ¾±¬¬±³ °¿®¬ ±º ¬¸» ¾±¼§ò Ì¿µ» ½¿®» ±º ¬¸» °±-·¬·±²·²¹ ±º ¬¸» ¾±¬¬±³ °¿®¬ò
Ì¸» ´·¬¬´» ®»½¬¿²¹«´¿® ½¿-¬ ±² ·²¼·½¿¬±® ²»¿® ¬¸» ¾±¼§ -°´·¬ -¸±«´¼ ½±®®»-°±²¼ ¬± ¬¸»
·²¼·½¿¬·±² ±² ¬¸» ¾±¬¬±³ °¿®¬ò ×²-¬¿´´ ¬¸» ¾±¼§ -½®»©- ¿²¼ ¬·¹¸¬»² -»½«®»´§ò Ì¿µ» ½¿®» ¬¸¿¬
¬¸» ¾±¼§ °¿®¬- ¿®» ¿´·¹²»¼ -»½«®»´§ò
èò ß--»³¾´» ¬¸» ¼·®¬ -½®¿°»®ò
çò Ó±«²¬ ¬¸» ¿½¬«¿¬·±²ò
ìòë Î»ó·²-¬¿´´·²¹ ¬¸» ª¿´ª»
Í»» -»½¬·±² íòíòïò
Ì§½± ®»-»®ª»- ¬¸» ®·¹¸¬ ¬± ½¸¿²¹» ¬¸» ½±²¬»²¬- ©·¬¸±«¬ ²±¬·½» °¿¹» ì
×²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ú Ó¿·²¬»²¿²½» ×²-¬®«½¬·±²-
Ñ°¬·Í»¿´ Ú·¹«®» ïì
Ð¿®¿´´»´ º´¿¬-
Ì±°ª·»©
Î»´·»º ¸±´»
Ó±«²¬·²¹ ¸±´»-
Ð¿®¬- ·¼»²¬·º·½¿¬·±²
ïò Ü·®¬-½®¿°»® ëò Í»¿¬
îò Í¸¿º¬ ¾«-¸·²¹ êò Ü·-½-¬»³
íò Þ±¼§ éò Í°´·¬ó-»¿´
ìò Þ»¿®·²¹ ø²±¬ º±® ¹®»§ ½¿-¬ ·®±² ¾±¼§÷ èò Þ±¼§ -½®»©-
Ñ°¬·Í»¿´ Ú·¹«®» ïê
Ð¿®¿´´»´ º´¿¬-
Ì±°ª·»©
Î»´·»º ¸±´»
Ó±«²¬·²¹ ¸±´»-
Ð¿®¬- ·¼»²¬·º·½¿¬·±²
ïò Ü·®¬-½®¿°»® ëò Í»¿¬
îò Í¸¿º¬ ¾«-¸·²¹ êò Ü·-½-¬»³
íò Þ±¼§ éò Í°´·¬ó-»¿´
ìò Þ»¿®·²¹ ø²±¬ º±® ¹®»§ ½¿-¬ ·®±² ¾±¼§÷ èò Þ±¼§ -½®»©-
Ì§½± ®»-»®ª»- ¬¸» ®·¹¸¬ ¬± ½¸¿²¹» ¬¸» ½±²¬»²¬- ©·¬¸±«¬ ²±¬·½» °¿¹» ë
×²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ú Ó¿·²¬»²¿²½» ×²-¬®«½¬·±²-
Ñ³²·Í»¿´ ø©¿º»®÷
Ð¿®¿´´»´ º´¿¬-
Ì±°ª·»©
Ó±«²¬·²¹ ¸±´»-
Ð¿®¬- ·¼»²¬·º·½¿¬·±²
ïò Þ±¼§
îò Í»¿¬
íò Ü·-½-¬»³
ìò Þ±¼§ -½®»©-
Ñ³²·Í»¿´ ø´«¹¹»¼÷
Ð¿®¿´´»´ º´¿¬-
Ì±°ª·»©
Ó±«²¬·²¹ ¸±´»-
Ð¿®¬- ·¼»²¬·º·½¿¬·±²
ïò Þ±¼§
îò Í»¿¬
íò Ü·-½-¬»³
ìò Þ±¼§ -½®»©-
Ì§½± ®»-»®ª»- ¬¸» ®·¹¸¬ ¬± ½¸¿²¹» ¬¸» ½±²¬»²¬- ©·¬¸±«¬ ²±¬·½» °¿¹» ê
×²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ú Ó¿·²¬»²¿²½» ×²-¬®«½¬·±²-
ëò Ó¿·²¬»²¿²½» ¾«¬¬»®º´§ ª¿´ª»- Ú·¹ò ïëñïé

Ì¸» Õ»§-¬±²» ¾«¬¬»®º´§ ª¿´ª» º·¹«®» ïë ¿²¼ ïé ¿®» ¼»-·¹²»¼ ¬± ®»¯«·®» ¿ ³·²·³«³ ±º ³¿·²¬»²¿²½»ò
WARNING! See section 4!
5.1 Routine maintenance

Í»» -»½¬·±² ìòï
5.2 Removing the valve from the pipe system

Í»» -»½¬·±² ìòî
5.3 Valve disassembly

ïò Ì«®² ¬¸» ¼·-½ ¬± ¿´³±-¬ ±°»² °±-·¬·±²ò
îò Î»³±ª» ¿½¬«¿¬±®ò
íò Î»³±ª» ¬¸» ¼·-½ -½®»© ©·¬¸ ¬¸» Ñó®·²¹ò
ìò Ð«´´ ¬¸» -¸¿º¬ ±«¬ ±º ¬¸» ¾±¼§ò
ëò Î»³±ª» ¬¸» ¼·-½ ¾§ °«´´·²¹ ±® N®±´´·²¹M ±«¬ ±º ¬¸» -»¿¬ ¾±®»ò
êò Î»³±ª» ¬¸» -»¿¬ º®±³ ¬¸» ¾±¼§æ °®§ «²¼»® ¾±¬¸ -»¿¬ »¼¹»- ¿¬ ±²» °±·²¬ô ½±´´¿°-» ¬¸» -»¿¬
·²¬± ¬¸» -¸¿°» ±º ¿ ®±«²¼ ¾±¬¬±³ ¸»¿®¬ ½±²º·¹«®¿¬·±² ¿²¼ °«´´ ¬¸» -»¿¬ ±«¬ ±º ¬¸» ¾±¼§
¾±®»ò
éò Î»³±ª» ½·®½´·° ¿²¼ °«´´ ¬¸» °´«¹ô ½±²¬¿·²·²¹ ¿² Ñó®·²¹ô ±«¬ ±º ¬¸» ¾±¼§ò
èò Î»³±ª» ¬¸» Ñó®·²¹ º®±³ ¬¸» °´«¹ò
çò Î»³±ª» ¬¸» ¼·®¬ -½®¿°»® ¿²¼ ¾«-¸·²¹ º®±³ ¬¸» ¾±¼§ ¬±° ²»½µò
5.4 Valve assembly

ïò Ý´»¿² ¿´´ °¿®¬-ò
îò ×²-»®¬ ¬¸» ¾«-¸·²¹ ·² ¬±° ²»½µò
íò Ý±´´¿°-» ¬¸» -»¿¬ ·² ¬¸» -¸¿°» ±º ¿ ®±«²¼ ¾±¬¬±³ ¸»¿®¬ º·®³´§ °´¿½» ¬¸» N¾±¬¬±³M °¿®¬ ±º
¬¸» -»¿¬ ·²¬± °±-·¬·±² ·² ¬¸» ¾±¼§ò ß´·¹² ¬¸» ¸±´»- ·² ¬¸» -»¿¬ °®±°»®´§ ©·¬¸ ¬¸» ¸±´»- ·² ¬¸»
¾±¼§ò
ìò ×²-»®¬ ¬¸» -¸¿º¬ ©·¬¸ -«ºº·½·»²¬ ø-·´·½±²»÷ ¹®»¿-» -± º¿® ¬¸¿¬ ·¬ °®±¬®«¼»- ¿°°®±¨·³¿¬»´§
ïð ³³ ·²¬± ¬¸» ·²-·¼» ¾±®» ±º ¬¸» -»¿¬ò ×²-¬¿´´ ¬¸» ¼·-½ô ©·¬¸ ¬¸» ¼·-½ó-½®»© ¸±´»- ¬±©¿®¼
¬¸» ¿½¬«¿¬±® º´¿²¹»ô ¾§ ·²-»®¬·²¹ ¬¸» ¼·-½ ·² ¬¸» -»¿¬ ©·¬¸ ¬¸» -¸¿º¬ ¾±®» ±² ¬¸» ¬±°-·¼»
¿¹¿·²-¬ ¬¸» -¸¿º¬ô ´»¿ª·²¹ ¬¸» ¾±¬¬±³ °¿®¬ ±º ¬¸» ¼·-½ ¶«-¬ ±«¬-·¼» ¬¸» -»¿¬ò Ð«-¸ ¬¸»
¾±¬¬±³ °¿®¬ ±º ¬¸» ¼·-½ ·² °´¿½» ©·¬¸ ¿ ¬©·-¬·²¹ ³±¬·±²ò
ëò ×²-»®¬ ¬¸» -¸¿º¬ ½±³°´»¬»´§ «-·²¹ ¿ ®±¬¿¬·²¹ °®»--«®» ±² ¬¸» -¸¿º¬ô ¿²¼ ¿ ®±¬¿¬·²¹ ³±¬·±² ±²
¬¸» ¼·-½ò Ð¿§ -°»½·¿´ ¿¬¬»²¬·±² ·² ±®¼»® ¬¸¿¬ ¬¸» -»¿¬ ·- ²±¬ ¼¿³¿¹»¼ ¼«» ¬± ¿²§
³·-¿´·¹²³»²¬ ±º -¬»³ ¸±´»-ò
êò ß´·¹² ¬¸» ½±«²¬»®ó¼®·´´»¼ °±-·¬·±² ±º ¬¸» -¬»³ -½®»© ¸±´»-ò Ð´¿½» ¬¸» Ñó®·²¹ ±² ¬¸» ¼·-½ó
-½®»©ò ×²-¬¿´´ ¬¸» ¼·-½ó-½®»© ¿²¼ ¬·¹¸¬»² -»½«®»´§ò
éò Ð´¿½» ¬¸» Ñó®·²¹ ±²¬± ¬¸» °´«¹ò Ð´¿½» ¬¸» °´«¹ ·²¬± ¬¸» ¾±¼§ ¿²¼ °±-·¬·±² ·¬ ©·¬¸ ¿ ½·®½´·°ò
èò ß--»³¾´» ¬¸» ¼·®¬ -½®¿°»®ò
çò Ó±«²¬ ¬¸» ¿½¬«¿¬±®ò
5.5 Re-installing the valve

Í»» -»½¬·±² íòíòïò
Ì§½± ®»-»®ª»- ¬¸» ®·¹¸¬ ¬± ½¸¿²¹» ¬¸» ½±²¬»²¬- ©·¬¸±«¬ ²±¬·½» °¿¹» é
×²-¬¿´´¿¬·±² ú Ó¿·²¬»²¿²½» ×²-¬®«½¬·±²-
Ú·¹«®» ïë
Ú´¿²¹» ´±½¿¬·²¹
Ì±°ª·»© ¸±´»-
Ì¸®±«¹¸ ¸±´»- º±®
íëð ó êðð ³³
Ì¿°°»¼ ¸±´»- º±®
-·¦»- éðð ó çðð
³³
Ó±«²¬·²¹ ¸±´»-
Ð¿®¬- ·¼»²¬·º·½¿¬·±²
ïò Þ±¼§ èò Ð´«¹
îò Ü·-½ çò Ñó®·²¹
íò Í»¿¬ ïðò Ý·®½´·°
ìò Í¸¿º¬ ïïò Ü·®¬-½®¿°»®
ëò Ü·-½ -½®»©
êò Ñó®·²¹
éò Þ«-¸·²¹
Ú·¹«®» ïé
Ì±°ª·»©
Ó±«²¬·²¹ ¸±´»-
Ð¿®¬- ·¼»²¬·º·½¿¬·±²
ïò Þ±¼§ èò Ð´«¹
îò Ü·-½ çò Ñó®·²¹
íò Í»¿¬ ïðò Ý·®½´·°
ìò Í¸¿º¬ ïïò Ü·®¬-½®¿°»®
ëò Ü·-½ -½®»©
êò Ñó®·²¹
éò Þ«-¸·²¹
Ì§½± ®»-»®ª»- ¬¸» ®·¹¸¬ ¬± ½¸¿²¹» ¬¸» ½±²¬»²¬- ©·¬¸±«¬ ²±¬·½» °¿¹» è
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section
8.7 Ball Valve

Data Sheet, Tyco Ball Valve Fig. 190 71251188 0
Installation & Maintenance Instructions, Tyco Ball Valves Fig.190 79025238 0
Data Sheet, Tyco Pneumatic Actuator Premiair 79003975 0
Installation & Operating Instructions, Tyco SmartCal valve positioner 71236595 2
Technical manual, Tyco SmartCal valve positioner 74889350 0
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Data sheet, Orbinox knife gate valve Model EX 78488801 0
Installation, operation & maintenance manual, Orbinox knife gate valve Model 78488844 0
EX
Installation & Operating Instructions, Tyco AVID ZR & ZR+ Position monitor 71236596 X0
Data Sheet, Tyco AVID Position Monitors 71259933 1
www.nov.com
MODEL
EX
WAFER STYLE KNIFE GATE VALVE
The EX model knife gate is an uni-directional wafer valve designed for general industrial service
applications. The design of the body and seat assures non-clogging shut off on suspended solids in
industries such as:
Pulp and Paper Power plants
Wastewater treatment plants Chemical plants
Food and Beverage Bulk handling
Mining etc.
Sizes: DN 50 to DN 1200 (larger diameters on request)
Working pressure: DN 50 to DN 250: 10 kg/cm2

DN 300 to DN 400: 6 kg/cm2
DN 450: 5 kg/cm2
DN 500 to DN 600: 4 kg/cm2
DN 700 to DN 1200: 2 kg/cm2
Standard flange connection: DIN PN 10 and ANSI B16.5 (class 150)
Note: other flange connections are available on request such as:

DIN PN 6 DIN PN 16 DIN PN 25
BS "D" and "E"p ANSI 125
Directives: DIR 98/37/CE (MACHINES)

DIR 97/23/CE (PED) Fluid: Group 1(b), 2 (Cat. I, mod. A)
DIR 94/9/CE (ATEX) Please contact Orbinox for information and availability
of categories and zones.
All valves are tested prior to shipping in accordance with the standard developed by the Quality Control Department at ORBINOX.
12
13 STANDARD PARTS LIST

Part: Cast Iron: Stainless Steel:
11 1- Body GJL250 (GG25) CF8M
14 2- Gate AISI 304 AISI 316
9
7 3- Seat Metal/Metal or EPDM
4- Packing PTFE Impreg. Synth. Fibre
8 (With a EPDM o-ring)
5- Gland Aluminium (DN 50 to DN 300) CF8M
6 or Ductile Iron
(DN 350 a DN 1000)
6- Stem AISI 430
5 7- Stem nut Brass
4 8- Yoke Epoxy-coated Carbon Steel
9- Collar Nylon
3 10- “A” ring AISI 304 AISI 316
11- Handwheel < 310: Ductile Iron / > 410: GJL 250 (GG25)
2
12- Cap Plastic
1 10 13- Stem Protector Epoxy-coated Carbon Steel
14- Friction washer Brass
OBX 09/09 8th EDITION Revision 1

Reserves the right to change specifications without notice EX-1
ORBINOX S.A. Pol. Ind. s/n-20270 ANOETA (Spain) Tel.: +34 943 698030 - Fax: +34 943 653066 e-mail:orbinox@orbinox.com
ORBINOX CANADA, ORBINOX USA, ORBINOX BRAZIL, ORBINOX COMERCIAL, ORBINOX UK, ORBINOX FRANCE, ORBINOX GERMANY, ORBINOX INDIA, ORBINOX CHINA, ORBINOX S.E.A.
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
DESIGN FEATURES
BODY:
Wafer style cast monoblock with raised face, with reinforced ribs in larger
diameters for extra body strength.
Internal cast-in gate wedges and guides allows for tighter shut-off.
Full port design for greater flow capacity and minimal pressure drop.
Internal design avoids any build up of solids that would prevent valve from
closing.
GATE:
Stainless steel gate as standard.
Gate is polished on both sides to avoid jamming and seat damage.
Bottom of the gate edge is machined to a bevel to cut through solids for a
tighter seal in the closed position. On request: thickness and/or material of
the gate can be changed for higher pressure requirement.
SEAT: (resilient)
Unique design that mechanically locks the seat in the internal of the valve
body with a stainless steel retainer ring.
Standard EPDM also available in different materials such as Viton, PTFE,
etc.
PACKING:
Long-life packing with several layers of braided fibre plus an EPDM o-ring,
with an easy access packing gland ensuring a tight seal.
Long-life braided packing is available in a wide range of materials.
STEM:
The standard stainless steel stem offers a long corrosion resistant life.
For rising stem handwheel actuators only, a stem protector is provided for
additional protection against dust while the valve is in the open position.
ACTUATORS:
All actuators supplied by ORBINOX are interchangeable, and supplied
with an standard mounting kit to allow for installation on site.
YOKE or ACTUATOR SUPPORT:

Made of EPOXY coated steel (stainless steel available on request).
Compact design makes it extremely robust even under the most severe conditions.
EPOXY COATING:
The epoxy coating on all ORBINOX cast iron and carbon steel valve
bodies and components is electrostatically applied making the valves to be
corrosion resistant with a high quality finished surface.
The ORBINOX standard colour is RAL-5015 blue.
GATE SAFETY PROTECTION:

ORBINOX automated valves are provided with gate guards in accordance
with EU Safety Standards.
The design feature prevents any objects from being caught accidentally
while the gate is moving.
Reserves the right to change specifications without notice OBX 09/09 8th EDITION Revision 1
ORBINOX S.A. Pol. Ind. s/n-20270 ANOETA (Spain) Tel.: +34 943 698030 - Fax: +34 943 653066 e-mail:orbinox@orbinox.com EX-2
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
OTHER OPTIONS
Bonnet (Fig.1):
Assures tight sealing to atmosphere for using with hazardous gas or
fluids.
Reduces packing maintenance.
V-port:
60 degree and pentagonal port design.
Selection depends on type of fluid control desired.
Flush ports (Fig.2):

Allow for cleaning of solids trapped within the body cavities that can
obstruct the flow or prevent the valve from closing.
Purging can be made with air, steam, liquids, etc. depending on the
process.
Other materials of construction:

Special alloys such as AISI 317, 254SMO, Hastelloys, Titanium, etc.
Fabricated valves:
ORBINOX is equipped for in house fabrication of special valves.
Depending on the design, diameter, pressures, construction material,
etc.
EXT (full lug design):

Modified version of the EX model with full lug design for end of line
applications.
Standard flange connection from DIN PN 10, ANSI 150, to AS "D".
Sizes available up to DN 600.
Fig.1
SURFACE TREATMENTS
Valve components can be protected or coated for a longer life expectancy, depending
on the application and the service conditions.
At ORBINOX we can offer treatments and coatings for the valve components to
improve the properties against abrasion (Stellite, Polyurethane…), corrosion
(Halar, Rilsan, Galvanised…) and adherence (Polishing, PTFE…).
We recommend consultation with our technical department.

Fig.2
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
ACTUATOR TYPES
Manual: Automatic:
Handwheel (rising & non-rising stem) Electric

Chainwheel Pneumatic
Lever Hydraulic
Bevel Gear
Other (square nut…)
All actuators supplied by ORBINOX are interchangeable.
Accessories:
Mechanical Stops Locking device

Actuator manual override Solenoid valves
Positioners Limit Switches
Proximity Switches Floor stands
Stem extensions
Wide range of valve extensions available.
Please consult our technical department.
Standard Handwheel Handwheel Pneumatic Electric Lever

(Rising Stem) (Non Rising Stem) Cylinder
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
TEMPERATURE CHART
SEAT / SEALS PACKING
Material Max.Temp.(°C) Applications Material Max. Temp. (°C) pH
Metal/Metal >250 High temp. Low tightness. Dry cotton (AS) 50 6-8
EPDM (E) 120 Acids and non mineral oils. PTFE impregn. synth. fibre (ST) 240 2 - 13
Nitrile (N) 120 Resistance to petroleum products. Braided PTFE (TH) 260 0 - 14
Viton (V) 200 General chemical service. Graphited (GR) 600 0 - 14
High temperature. Ceramic fibre (FC) 1200 ––
Silicone (S) 250 Food service. / High temperature. NOTE: all types include an elastomere O-ring (same material as seal), excluding
TH, GR and FC.
PTFE (T) 250 Corrosion resistance.
More details and other materials under request.
SEAT TYPES
METAL / METAL RESILIENT, TYPE "A"
For applications with: • Standard resilient seat.
• High temperature • Temperature limitations according to
• High density media application seat material selected. Consult the
• When full tightness is not required above chart or our technical department
for more information.
• Replaceable seat retainer ring.
TYPE "B" SEAT (metal/metal) TYPE "B" SEAT (resilient)

For applications with: • Temperature limitations according to
• High temperature seat material selected. Consult the
• High density media application above chart or our technical department
• When full tightness is not required for more information.
• Replaceable design without dismantling • Replaceable and reinforced seat ring
the valve available in different materials such as:
stainless steel, CA15, Ni Hard,…
DEFLECTION CONE "C"

• Deflects the media away from any
internal exposed parts of the valve
such as gate guides, seat, etc.
• Different types of material available
such as AISI 316 stainless, CA15, Ni-
Hard, etc.
Face to face dimension increase:

DN 50 to DN 250 X = 9mm
DN 300 to DN 600 X = 12 mm
Larger diameters on request.
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
VALVE EXTENSIONS
The extension on a valve allows the operator to open or close the valve from a distance. Different types of extensions
can be used depending on the application and the distance from the gate to the actuator.
1.- Floor stand.
Mainly used to facilitate the operator in opening and closing the valve at normal
operating level.
Required dimensions:
H1: distance from centre line of the pipe to the base of the floor.
d1: (wall bracket) distance from the wall to the face of the connecting flange.
Notes:
a- Any type of actuator can be mounted on the floor stand such as Handwheel,
Gear, Electric, etc.
b- A wall bracket (detail A) is recommended at every 1.5m. This prevents any
deviation or buckling of the extension rod.
c- Standard construction of the floor stand is cast iron or carbon steel. Other mate-
rials are available on request. (Fig. 1)
d- A position indicator (optional) can be installed for easy visibility of the percen-
tage of opening of the valve.
e- Possibility of construction of floor stand supports. (Fig. 2)
Fig. 1
Detail A. Fig. 2
STANDARD PARTS LIST

Part: Material:
Spindle AISI 303
Stem AISI 304
Wall bracket Carbon Steel - Epoxy coated
Slider/bushing Nylon
Floor stand Cast Iron - Epoxy coated
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
2.- Tube
• Stem and yoke assembly remains in its original position.
• Handwheel is replaced by a tube, which rotates when operating the valve.
• Stem rises and lowers within the tube.
• Ideal for surface box operation, valve can be operated with a T-bar and a square nut.
• Required dimensions:
H1: distance from centre line of the pipe to the base of the floor.
d1: (wall bracket) distance from the wall to the face of the connecting flange.
Notes:
1. Handwheel or square nut operated only.
2. A wall bracket (detail A) is recommended at every 1.5m. This prevents any deviation
or buckling of the extension rod.
3. Standard construction of the extension is carbon steel epoxy coated. Other materials
are available on request.
3 - Universal joint 4 - Extended support plates
• Universal joints are installed • Ideal where long extensions

between the rod extensions are not required.
where a straight alignement is • Guide bearing is installed
not available. Please contact at the mid point to prevent
our technical department for any deflection of the rod.
more information.
Please consult our technical department.
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
HANDWHEEL (rising stem)
Standard handwheel actuator.
Consists of:
- Handwheel: Epoxy coated Cast Iron
- Stem
- Stem nut
- Stem protector
Available from DN 50 to DN 1000
Options:
- Locking Device
- Extensions
DN A B C D E F ØG H Weight (kg.)
50 40 119 100 105 129 47 225 420 7

65 40 134 100 115 146 47 225 450 8
80 50 149 100 124 162 47 225 475 9
100 50 169 100 140 187 47 225 520 11
125 50 180 100 150 211 47 225 600 15
150 60 210 100 175 237 47 225 652 18
200 60 262 119 205 309 67 310 822 30
250 70 318 122 250 364 67 310 1022 44
300 70 372 122 300 414 67 310 1122 58
350 96 431 197 338 486 66 410 1323 96
400 100 486 197 392 536 66 410 1427 124
450 106 540 201 432 588 66 550 1594 168
500 110 602 201 485 648 66 550 1707 192
600 110 708 201 590 748 66 550 2022 245
700 110 834 380 686 890 74 800 2778 405
750 110 884 380 760 945 74 800 2900 455
800 110 1015 320 791 989 74 800 2980 512
900 110 1040 320 895 1118 74 800 3215 680
1000 110 1146 320 975 1220 74 800 3400 865
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
HANDWHEEL (non-rising stem)
Recommended for installation where space is limited.
Consists of:
- Handwheel: Epoxy coated Cast Iron
- Stem
- Yoke bushing
- Stem nut fixed to the gate
Options:
- Locking Device
- Extension
- Square Nut Drive
DN A B C D E F ØG H
50 40 119 125 105 132 78 225 315
65 40 134 125 115 149 78 225 342
80 50 149 125 124 165 78 225 367
100 50 169 125 140 190 78 225 408
125 50 180 125 150 214 78 225 442
150 60 210 125 175 240 78 225 493
200 60 262 142 205 305 92 310 602
250 70 318 142 250 360 92 310 702
300 70 372 142 300 410 92 310 802
350 96 431 197 338 487 110 410 935
400 100 486 197 392 537 110 410 1039
450 106 540 201 432 589 111 550 1132
500 110 602 201 485 649 111 550 1245
600 110 708 201 590 748 111 550 1449
700 110 834 380 686 900 151 800 1737
750 110 884 380 760 945 151 800 1856
800 110 1015 320 791 997 151 800 1939
900 110 1040 320 895 1128 151 800 2174
1000 110 1150 320 975 1255 151 800 2381
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
CHAINWHEEL
Recommended for elevated installations.
Consists of:
- Chainwheel: Epoxy coated Cast Iron
- Stem
- Stem nut
- Stem protector
Options (on request):

- Locking Device
- Extension
- Non-rising Stem
DN A B C D E F ØG H
50 40 119 100 105 129 253 225 420
65 40 134 100 115 146 280 225 450
80 50 149 100 124 162 305 225 475
100 50 169 100 140 187 347 225 520
125 50 180 100 150 211 380 225 600
150 60 210 100 175 237 431 225 652
200 60 262 119 205 309 538 300 822
250 70 318 122 250 364 638 300 1022
300 70 372 122 300 414 738 300 1122
350 96 431 197 338 486 856 454 1323
400 100 486 197 392 536 960 454 1427
450 106 540 201 432 588 1052 454 1594
500 110 602 201 485 648 1165 454 1707
600 110 708 201 590 748 1370 454 2022
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
LEVER
Recommended for quick opening and closing.
Consists of:
- Lever
- Stem
- Yoke sleeve
- Lever lock
DN A B C D E F G H I
50 40 119 100 105 129 256 150 408 315
65 40 134 100 115 146 259 150 435 315
80 50 149 100 124 162 307 150 509 315
100 50 169 100 140 187 439 150 637 415
125 50 180 100 150 211 529 150 755 415
150 60 210 100 175 237 620 150 895 415
200 60 262 119 205 309 822 235 1038 620
250 70 318 122 250 364 995 235 1307 620
300 70 372 122 300 414 1166 235 1578 620
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
GEAR
Recommended for valves larger than DN 350
and working pressures greater than 3.5 kg/cm2
Consists of:
- Stem
- Yoke
- Bevel Gear Actuator with Handwheel
(Standard Ratio 4:1)
Available from DN 200 to DN1200
Options:
- Locking device
- Extension
- Chainwheel
- Non-rising stem
DN A B C D E F ØG H I
200 60 262 119 205 309 584 300 994 200
250 70 318 122 250 364 684 300 1094 200
300 70 372 122 300 414 784 300 1194 200
350 96 431 197 338 472 857 450 1657 262
400 100 486 197 392 522 961 450 1761 262
450 106 540 201 432 574 1053 450 1853 262
500 110 602 201 485 634 1166 450 1966 262
600 110 708 201 590 734 1371 450 2171 262
700 110 834 380 686 890 1623 450 2423 262
750 110 884 380 760 945 1755 450 2555 262
800 110 1015 320 791 993 1886 450 2926 260
900 110 1040 320 895 1123 2120 650 3160 288
1000 110 1146 320 975 1220 2302 650 3342 288
1200 150 1390 450 1037 1522 2695 850 3935 365
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
PNEUMATIC CYLINDER
The standard pneumatic actuator (double acting on-off
cylinder) consists of:
- Aluminium jacket and covers
- Stainless steel (AISI 304) piston rod
- Nitrile coated steel piston
Supply Pressure: minimum 3.5 kg/cm2 - maximum 10 kg/cm2
Actuator designed with 6kg/cm2 air supply
For valves installed in a horizontal position, we recommend
U-type support plates and/or actuator support.
Options: - Hard anodized jacket and covers
- Over / Undersized cylinder
- Stainless steel jacket and covers
- Manual override
- Fail safe system (Page EX-14)
- Travel stops
Instrumentation (on request):
- Positioners
- Solenoid valves
- Flow regulators
- Air preparation units
DN A B C D E F G H Weight (kg.) Standard Cyl Connect.

50 40 119 100 105 129 178 115 412 9 C100/62 1/4" G
65 40 134 100 115 146 193 115 454 10 C100/77 1/4" G
80 50 149 100 124 162 211 115 497 11 C100/95 1/4" G
100 50 169 100 140 187 231 115 558 14 C100/115 1/4" G
125 50 180 100 150 211 271 140 632 20 C125/143 1/4" G
150 60 210 100 175 237 296 140 708 25 C125/168 1/4" G
200 60 262 119 205 309 358 175 872 44 C160/220 1/4" G
250 70 318 122 250 364 428 220 1042 67 C200/270 3/8" G
300 70 372 122 300 414 478 220 1192 82 C200/320 3/8" G
350 96 431 197 338 500 549 277 1387 135 C250/375 3/8" G
400 100 486 197 392 550 599 277 1541 165 C250/425 3/8" G
450 106 540 270 432 598 680 382 1710 220 C300/475 1/2" G
500 110 602 270 485 658 730 382 1873 280 C300/525 1/2" G
600 110 708 270 590 758 830 382 2178 330 C300/625 1/2" G
700 110 834 380 686 875 985 444 2546 520 C350/730 3/4” G
750 110 884 380 760 930 1035 444 2725 585 C350/780 3/4” G
800 110 1015 320 791 974 1085 444 2850 650 C350/830 3/4” G
900 110 1040 320 895 1105 1202 515 3202 850 C400/930 3/4” G
1000 110 1146 320 975 1217 1296 515 3488 1060 C400/1030 3/4” G
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
FAIL SAFE SYSTEM
SINGLE ACTING / SPRING RETURN
This actuator (single acting cylinder) consists of:
- Aluminium jacket and covers
- Ductile Iron or carbon steel spring cap
- Steel spring
- Stainless Steel (AISI 304) piston rod
- Nitrile coated steel piston
Supply pressure: minimum 5 kg/cm2 - maximum 10 kg/cm2
Options:
- Fail open
- Fail close
SINGLE ACTING / VOLUME TANK
For size DN250 and bigger safety system consists on:

double acting pneumatic cylinder, volume tank and all
the neccessary elements according to the available
options (solenoid valve, spool valve,…)
Available for all diameters

Supply Pressure: Minimum 3.5kg/cm2
Maximum 10 kg/cm2
Options:
1- Pneumatic Failsafe
2- Pneumatic or Electric Failsafe
Option 2:
ELECTRIC SUPPLY
AIR SUPPLY
VALVE CLOSURE PNEUM AND/OR ELECTROPNEUM FAILSAFE
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR
Consists of:
- Electric actuator
- Rising stem
- Motor support yoke flange
(Acc. to ISO 5210 / DIN 3338)
The standard electric motor is equiped with:

- Manual emergency operation
- Limit switches (open/closed)
- Torque switches
Wide range of types and marks available to meet

customer's needs.
Option:
- Non rising stem
DN A B C D E F ØG H I J L M stem Ø x pitch Torque(Nm)

50 40 119 100 105 129 377 160 547 265 249 62 237 20 x 4 10
65 40 134 100 115 146 404 160 574 265 249 62 237 20 x 4 10
80 50 149 100 124 162 429 160 599 265 249 62 237 20 x 4 10
100 50 169 100 140 187 470 160 640 265 249 62 237 20 x 4 10
125 50 180 100 150 211 504 160 674 265 249 62 237 20 x 4 15
150 60 210 100 175 237 555 160 1055 265 249 62 237 20 x 4 20
200 60 262 122 205 309 669 200 1169 265 249 62 237 24 x 5 30
250 70 318 122 250 364 769 200 1269 265 249 62 237 24 x 5 45
300 70 372 122 300 414 869 200 1369 265 249 62 237 24 x 5 40
350 96 431 197 338 472 940 200 1440 282 256 65 247 36 x 6 70
400 100 486 197 392 552 1044 200 1544 282 256 65 247 36 x 6 90
450 106 540 270 432 610 1172 200 1672 282 256 65 247 36 x 6 110
500 110 602 270 485 670 1280 200 1780 282 256 90 247 36 x 6 95
600 110 708 270 590 800 1565 315 2065 385 329 90 285 36 x 6 140
700 110 834 380 686 900 1763 315 2846 385 329 90 285 40 x 7 120
750 110 884 380 760 945 1882 315 2965 385 329 90 285 40 x 7 140
800 110 1015 320 791 980 1948 315 3031 385 329 90 285 50 x 8 180
900 110 1040 320 895 1087 2157 400 3240 385 332 90 285 50 x 8 220
1000 110 1146 320 975 1200 2350 400 3431 385 332 90 285 50 x 8 300
1200 150 1390 450 1037 1485 2732 500 4137 510 355 115 310 60 x 9 480
www.orbinox.com
MODEL
EX
FLANGE AND BOLTING DETAILS
EN 1092-2 PN10
DN K nº M T
50 125 4 M-16 11 4 - -- - --
65 145 4 M-16 11 4 - -- - --
80 160 8 M-16 11 4 - -- - 4
100 180 8 M-16 11 4 - -- - 4
125 210 8 M-16 11 4 - -- - 4
150 240 8 M-20 14 4 - -- - 4
200 295 8 M-20 14 4 - -- - 4
250 350 12 M-20 18 6 - -- - 6
300 400 12 M-20 18 6 - -- - 6
350 460 16 M-20 22 6-4-6
400 515 16 M-24 24 6-4-6
450 565 20 M-24 24 8-6-6
500 620 20 M-24 24 8-6-6
600 725 20 M-27 24 8-6-6
700 840 24 M-27 20 10 - 6 - 8
800 950 24 M-30 20 10 - 6 - 8
900 1050 28 M-30 20 12 - 8 - 8 BLIND TAPPED HOLES
TAPPED THROUGH
1000 1160 28 M-33 20 12 - 8 - 8
THROUGH HOLED
1200 1380 32 M-36 30 22 - 6 - 4
ANSI B16.5, class 150(*)

DN K nº M T
2” 4 3/4“ 4 5/8” UNC 3/8” 4 - -- - --
2 1/2” 5 1/2” 4 5/8” UNC 3/8” 4 - -- - --
3” 6” 4 5/8” UNC 3/8” 4 - -- - --
4” 7 1/2” 8 5/8” UNC 3/8” 4 - -- - 4
5” 8 1/2” 8 3/4” UNC 3/8” 4 - -- - 4
6” 9 1/2” 8 3/4” UNC 1/2” 4 - -- - 4
8” 11 3/4” 8 3/4” UNC 1/2” 4 - -- - 4
10” 14 1/4” 12 7/8” UNC 3/4” 6 - -- - 6
12” 17” 12 7/8” UNC 3/4” 6 - -- - 6
14” 18 3/4” 12 1” UNC 7/8” 4-4-4
16” 21 1/4” 16 1” UNC 1” 6-4-6
18” 22 3/4” 16 1 1/8” UNC 1” 6-4-6
20” 25” 20 1 1/8” UNC 1” 8-6-6
24” 29 1/2” 20 1 1/4” UNC 1” 8-6-6
28” 34” 28 1 1/4” UNC 3/4” 12 - 6 - 10
30” 36” 28 1 1/4” UNC 3/4” 12 - 8 - 8
32” 38 1/2” 28 1 1/2” UNC 3/4” 12 - 8 - 8
36” 42 3/4” 32 1 1/2” UNC 3/4” 14 - 8 - 10 BLIND TAPPED HOLES
40” 47 1/4” 36 1 1/2” UNC 3/4” 14 -12 - 10 TAPPED THROUGH
48” 56” 44 1 1/2” UNC 1 3/16” 26 -10 - 8 THROUGH HOLED

(*) From DN 24”, acc. to MSS SP 44 (class 150)
www.orbinox.com
INSTALLATION, OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MODEL EX
ORBINOX SPAIN Pol.Ind. s/n-20270 ANOETA. Tel:+34 943 698030 Fax:+34 943 653066 e-mail:orbinox@orbinox.com
ORBINOX CANADA, ORBINOX USA, ORBINOX COMERCIAL, ORBINOX UK, ORBINOX FRANCE, ORBINOX GERMANY,
ORBINOX INDIA, ORBINOX CHINA.
www.orbinox.com
MODEL EX
INDEX Page
0.- Description .........................………................................ 2

1.- Handling ..................................……….......................... 2
2.- Installation .................................………......................... 3
3.- Actuators .....................................………....................... 5
4.- Maintenance .....................................……….................. 6
4.1.- Gland packing replacement …….………............ 6
4.2.- Seal replacement......………....…....……............ 7
4.3.- PTFE seal replacement ..…....…..........…............ 8
4.4.- Lubrication …………………….……………..…… 9
5.- Storage …………................................…..………........... 9
6.- Parts list & drawing ..................................………........... 10
0.- DESCRIPTION
The EX model knife gate is a uni-directional wafer valve designed for general industrial service
applications. The design of the body and seat assures non-clogging shut-off with suspended solids.
The EX valve complies with the following European directives:
- DIR 98/37/EC (machines)

- DIR 97/23/EC (PED) Fluid: Group 1 (b), 2 (Cat. I, mod.A)
It may also comply with the directive:
- DIR 94/9/EC (Explosive Atmospheres)

The EX valve may comply with the directive regarding equipment and protective systems for their
use in explosive atmospheres. In these cases, the logotype shall appear on the identification
label of the valve. This label shows the exact classification of the zone where the valve can be
used. The user will be liable for its use in any other zone.
This directive only applies in the following atmospheric conditions:
0,8 bar ≤ P ≤ 1,2 bar
-20ºC < T < 60ºC
Any increase in temperature due to frictional warmth is negligible, since the relative speed of
the moving parts is extremely low.
The risk analysis associated to this directive does not take into account the fluid that goes
through the valve, even when such fluid produces an explosive atmosphere. The user must take
into account the risks that the fluid generates, such as:
- heating of the valve surface.
- generation of electrostatic charges caused by displacement of the fluid.
- shock waves caused by the installation (water hammer), internal crashes generated by the
pellets or the risks due to foreign bodies susceptible of being present in the installation.
1.- HANDLING
When handling an Orbinox valve please pay attention to the following points:
• Do NOT attach lifting gear to the valve actuators or gate guards. They are not designed to
bear the weight, and could easily be damaged.
• Do NOT lift the valve by the valve bore.
This can cause damage to the seating surfaces and seals.
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
Ideally when using lifting gear to move an Orbinox valve, it should be supported by two or more
eyebolts screwed into the tapped fixing holes in the valve body.
SAFETY WARNING:
• Check that the lifting gear is rated to carry the weight of the valve.
• Make sure the eyebolts have the same thread as the boltholes and that they are well secured.
During installation it is recommended to lift the valve via soft straps. These can be to the upper part of
the valve body.
2.- INSTALLATION
valve operations.
Before installation, inspect the valve body and components for any damage that may have
occurred during shipping or storage. Make sure the internal cavities within the valve body are
clean. Inspect the pipeline and mating flanges, making sure the pipe is free of foreign material and
that the flanges are clean.
The valve is unidirectional. It should be installed with pressure exerted against the seat. The words
“SEAT SIDE” are marked on the valve body to indicate the position of the valve seat. Installation
and the correct orientation with respect to the direction of the flow is the responsibility of the user.
It should be noted that the direction of flow and differential pressure, do not always coincide.
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
Special care should be taken to maintain the correct distance between the flanges and to ensure
that they are parallel to the valve body. Incorrect alignment of the valve can cause deformations,
which can lead to difficulties in operation.
The following table gives the maximum torque values for the valve fixing bolts. Also shown is the
maximum depth (T) allowed for the tapped blind boltholes drilled into the valve body.
DN 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000
T (mm) 10 10 10 10 10 14 14 18 18 22 24 24 24 24 20 20 20 20
Kg.m 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 11 11 15 15 19 19 23 23 28 28 34
The valve can be mounted in any position with regard to the pipe. However, it is advisable to place
it vertically in horizontal pipeline (A) if the installation allows it. (Please consult the technical
department at Orbinox).
With larger diameters (> 300 mm), heavy actuators (pneumatic, electric, etc.), or with the valve
installed horizontally (B) or at an angle (C) on a horizontal pipeline, the installation will require the
construction of suitable supports. (See the following diagram and consult the technical department
at Orbinox).
C C
B B
C* C*
A*
* For these positions please consult Orbinox.
In vertical pipelines, the construction of suitable supports is always required (for further information
please consult the technical department at Orbinox).
Once the valve is installed, test that the flanges have been fastened correctly and that all electrical
and/or pneumatic connections have been properly made.
Where electric accessories are mounted on the valve (i.e. solenoid valves, electro-pneumatic
positioners, etc.), or is in an ATEX zone, the corresponding earth connections must be made before
it is put into operation.
The operation of automated valves is limited only with fitted gate covers.
First, operate the valve with no flow in the pipeline. Then test operation and valve seal with flow. It
should be noted that the packing material might settle in shipping/storage, which can cause minor
leakage. This can be remedied by tightening the gland follower (5) during installation.
The nuts shall be tightened gradually and crosswise until the leakage stops (see the next figure).
Check that there is no metal contact between the glandfollower (5) and the gate (2).
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
2 3
1
4
If the glandfollower nuts are pulled to hard, the force needed to operate the valve will increase, the
valve function will be affected and the box packing lifetime will be shortened.
The table below shows the maximum torque value for tightening the glandfollower nuts.
DN Torque (N.m)
50 - 100 20
125 - 200 30
250 - 1000 35
Once performance has been tested, the valve can be put into operation.
In an ATEX zone, the continuity between the body of the valve and the pipe must be checked (test
in accordance with EN 12266-2 Standard, annex B, points B.2.2.2. and B.2.3.1).
It must also be verified that the pipe is connected to earth and that there is electrical conductivity
between the two pipes (outlet/inlet).
Approximate weight of the handwheel-operated valve (rising stem):
DN 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1200
Weight(Kg) 7 8 9 11 15 18 30 44 58 96 124 168 192 245 405 455 512 680 865 1055
3.- ACTUATORS
3.1.- Handwheel
To open the valve turn the handwheel (11) anticlockwise. To close turn the handwheel
clockwise.
3.2.- Lever
To operate the valve with this device, first loosen the locking clamp located on the top of the
yoke (8). Then either open or close the valve by moving the lever in the desired direction.
Finally, fix the position of the lever with the locking clamp.
3.3.- Pneumatic
Valves are usually supplied with a double acting pneumatic actuator although, upon request,
we can supply single-acting actuators. In either case the feed pressure can vary between 3,5
and 10 Kg/cm2.However, the size of the actuator for each valve has been designed for a feed
pressure of 6 Kg/cm2.
It is essential for a good maintenance of the cylinder that air should be well dried, filtered and
lubricated.
It is recommended to actuate the cylinder 3-4 times before the start up, once it is installed in the
pipeline.
3.4.- Electric actuator

Depending on the type or make of the electric actuator, specific instructions (i.e. a
manufacturer’s manual) will be supplied.
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
4.- MAINTENANCE
The valve must not undergo any modifications without a previous agreement with ORBINOX.
ORBINOX shall not be liable for any damages that may arise due to the use of non original parts or
components
valve operations.
In an ATEX zone, there may be electrostatic charges in the internal parts of the valve. These
electrostatic charges, caused by the evacuation of the fluid, may entail a risk of explosion. It is the
responsibility of the user to take extreme precautions to minimize this risk.
Safety in an ATEX zone:

- The maintenance personnel must be made fully aware of the risks of explosion, and it is
advisable that they receive specific training regarding ATEX.
- Should the fluid transported create an internal explosive atmosphere, the user must check
periodically the correct water-tightness of the installation
- Clean the valve periodically to prevent dust accumulation.
- Assembly at the end of the line is not allowed.
- Avoid repainting the products supplied.
The only maintenance required is to change the gland packing (4) or the seal (3) if the valve is a
resilient seated type.
The life of these elements will depend on the working conditions of the valve such as: pressure,
temperature, abrasion, chemical action, number of operations, etc.
4.1. - Replacement of the gland packing (4):

1) Depressurise the circuit and place the valve in close position.
3) - Rising stem valves.Photo 1: Release the spindle or stem (6) from the gate (2).
- Non rising stem.Photo 2: Release the stem nut from the gate (2).
Photo 1 Photo 2
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
5) Loosen the nuts of the gland follower (5) and remove it. (Photo 3)
6) Remove the old packing rings (4) and clean the stuffing box.
7) Insert the new packing rings (4), making sure that the ring joints alternate (the first on one
side of the gate, the next on the other and so on). (Photo 4)
tightening of the gland follower (5).(Photo 3)
9) Place the yoke (8) (with the actuator) and screw it.
10) Fix the stem (6) to the gate (2)( Rising stem valves.Photo 1) or fix the stem nut to the
gate.(Non rising stem.Photo 2).
11) Remount the gate guards.
12) Carry out some operations with a loaded circuit and then re-tighten the gland follower (5)
to prevent leakage.
Photo 3 Photo 4
4.2.- Replacement of the seal (3) (only applicable to resilient seated valves):
1) Remove the valve from the pipeline.
3) Release the spindle or stem (6) from the gate (2).(Rising stem valves.Photo 1) or release the
stem nut from the gate.(Non rising stem.Photo 2).
5) Loosen the nuts of the gland follower (5) and remove it.(Photo 3)
6) Remove the old packing (4) and the gate (2) and clean the stuffing box.
7) Remove the seal retainer ring (10) which support the seals (3).
8) Remove the worn seal (3) and clean the seal housing.
9) Once the new seal (3) is cut according to size, insert it into the seat housing (making sure
that the union of the seal is at the top). (Photos 5 and 6)
If the valve has PTFE seal (3), follow the point 4.3.
Seal lengths
DN 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600
Lengths (mm) 205 255 295 365 440 510 680 860 1020 1190 1350 1510 1630 2010
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
Photo 5 Photo 6
10) Insert the seal retainer ring (10) by hammering gently around the edge. (Photos 7 and 8)
Photo 7 Photo 8
11) Remount the gate (2).

tightening of the gland follower (5).(Photo 3) following the steps of point 4.1.
4.3. - Replacement of the PTFE seal (3):

Follow the same procedure as point 4.2 but with following notes:
1. To obtain a tighter shut off in stainless steel valves (CF8M body), the machined housing of
the seat is sealed with a plastic glue. This is not necessary in cast iron valves (GG25).
With the seal in this position:
2. Make a circle, joining the ends and making a heart-shaped form (see the following
diagram).
3. Insert both ends of the seal in the upper side of

the machined housing of the seat (adjacent to
the gland follower (5)), and pushing the
arched part with a finger, insert the seal into
the housing.
If the diameter of the valve is small (DN≤150),
a vice can be used.
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
4.4. - Lubrication:
Twice a year, it is recommended to remove the protection cap (12) and fill up the stem
protector (13) halfway with a calcium-based grease with the following characteristics: highly
water resistant, low ash content, and excellent adherence.
After maintenance, and in an ATEX zone, it is obligatory to verify the electrical continuity between
the pipe and the different valve components, such as the body, the gate, the supports,... (test in
accordance with EN 12266-2 Standard, annex B, points B.2.2.2. and B.2.3.1).
5.- STORAGE
For long periods it is recommended to store the valves in a well-ventilated room. Valves should not
be exposed to temperatures higher than 30ºC, as some soft seal materials can be damaged when
exposed to higher temperatures.
If outdoor storage cannot be avoided, cover the valve and protect it from sources of heat or direct
sunlight. Provide good ventilation to avoid moisture.
.
2009 EDITION
MODEL EX
6.- PARTS LIST & DRAWINGS
1.- BODY 8.- YOKE

2.- GATE 9.- COLLAR
3.- SEAL 10.- SEAL RETAINER RING
4.- PACKING RING 11.- HANDWHEEL
5.- GLAND FOLLOWER 12.- CAP
6.- STEM 13.- STEM PROTECTOR
7.- STEM NUT 14.- FRICTION WASHER
.
2009 EDITION
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section
8.9 Sampling Unit

Data Sheet, Sampling Unit 71243281 1
Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual, Sampling Unit 71243282 1
Data Sheet, Filter regulator for sampling unit 77917209 0
Data Sheet, Lever valve for sampling unit 77923874 0
Data Sheet, Muffler/ flow control for Lever valve on sampling unit 77923875 0
Assembly Drawing, Sampling unit (L-R) 7-03204D 0
www.nov.com
MODEL PR
Model PR Automatic Sampler

Automatic Sampler
Collects Samples from
Dilute and Dense Phase
Convey Lines
Features Description
 Designed to eliminate the degradation of product The Model PR is designed for spot sampling of free-
 Includes 316 stainless steel tube and stainless flowing materials in dilute and dense phase horizontal
steel body, filter/regulator and gauge, Teflon® pneumatic transfer lines. Rapid cycling acquires a large
seals, and maintenance-free industrial air cylinder volume of sample over a short period of time. The
Model PR is also recommended for slurry sampling.
 Fully retracting sample tube will not restrict
product flow between sample cycles The Model PR samples when a solenoid-controlled air
cylinder operates a reciprocating probe in the product
 1/8" NPT capped purge nipple for sample tube flow. A representative sample collects by gravity to the
cleanout discharge point.
Options Sampler is designed to

fit customer horizontal
 Sample tube in stroke lengths of 4", 6" and 8" transfer line. Special Model SBC
Most common products mounting brackets automatic sampler
 Nosepiece for vertical applications sampled with this model secure sampler in place controller
 Nickel-impregnated Teflon® ensures a are granules, powders
and slurries
non-stick surface
PLC-133
. ENTER
ESC
+/-
1 QZ 2 ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
6 MNO 7 PRS 8 TUV 9 WXY 0
F6 F7 F8 F9 F10
 Hardening treatments to protect against

WARNING!
HAZARDOUS
VOLTAGE INSIDE.
DISCONNECT POWER
BEFORE SERVICING
WARNING!
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DISCONNECT & OVERCURRENT

PROTECTION DEVICES MUST BE
PROVIDED BY OTHERS.

OCONOMOWOC, WI 53066 U.S.A.
RGE
(262) 567-7256 Fax: (262) 567-4523
E N
EM
CY
PB-110
wear and abrasion

S T O P
PB
Sample tube enters

the product line and
captures sample Air cylinder
through opening
Airset
Sample tube grabs

sample, retracts and
seals, depositing the
Sentry supplies a variety
sample by gravity
of sample containers
flow into container
ranging in size from one
quart to two gallons,
in stainless steel or
polyethylene
www.sentry-equip.com 18.1.1 Rev. 3 02/11

Model PR TECHNICAL DATA
Top View
Front View Side View

4" (10.2 cm) 5" 26 13/16"
7 1/2" (12.7 cm) (68.1 cm)
(19 cm)
Customer to support
using 7/16" hole in
supplied bracket
9 1/16" Ref.
(23 cm Ref.)
5 3/4" (14.6 cm)
1 1/2" (3.8 cm)
Side View Side View

FLOW DIRECTION
Vertical Mount Horizontal Mount
45°
45° 15°
15°
SPECIFICATIONS
Basic Electrical Requirements 115/230 VAC, single phase, 60 Hz; control box fused to 2 amps
Air Requirements 80 psig, 1.5 ft3/cycle (5.5 barg, 42.5 l/cycle)
Quantity of Sample determined by flow rate, aperture size and retract time
Product Size 10 µm to ¼" (6 mm); larger sizes upon request
Recommended Location of Sampler screw conveyors or angled gravity chutes
Suggested Connection to Collection Point rigid metal or flexible tubing to a container or indexing cabinet
Materials of Construction 304 stainless steel; acetal spacers and urethane wiper seal
Temperature Range up to 250° F (121° C)
NOTE: Teflon is a registered trademark of E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and Company.
It is solely the responsibility of the end-user, through its own analysis and testing, to select products and materials suitable for their specific application
requirements, ensure they are properly installed, safely applied, properly maintained, and limit their use to their intended purpose. Improper selection,
installation, or use may result in personal injury or property damage.
SENTRY EQUIPMENT CORP For further information, contact:

Tel: 262-567-7256 • Fax: 262-567-4523
E-mail:
sales@sentry-equip.com
Website:
© Sentry Equipment Corp 2006 18.1.1 Rev. 3 02/11

Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Model PR
Automatic Sampler
SPD 18.2.1 Rev. 4 11/09

PO Box 127
Phone: 262.567.7256
Fax: 262.567.4523
Email: sales@sentry-equip.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................... iii
1.0 General Description................................................................................................... 1
2.0 Installation ................................................................................................................. 1
3.0 Operation .................................................................................................................. 4
4.0 Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 6
5.0 Factory Assistance .................................................................................................. 13
6.0 Standard Warranty .................................................................................................. 14
SENTRY EQUIPMENT CORP • 262.567.7256 • Fax: 262.567.4523 • sales@sentry-equip.com • www.sentry-equip. com i

WARNING notices as used in this manual apply to hazards or unsafe practices, which could
result in personal injury or death.
CAUTION notices apply to hazards or unsafe practices which could result in minor personal
injury or property damage.
NOTES highlight procedures and contain information which assists the operator in
understanding the information contained in this manual.
WARNING
Do not install, maintain, or operate this equipment without reading, understanding

and following the proper Sentry Equipment Corp. instructions. Otherwise, injury
or damage or both may result.
NOTICE
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Sentry Equipment Corp, its employees, agents, and the authors of and contributors to this
document specifically disclaim all liabilities and warranties, express and implied (including
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose), for the accuracy, currency,
completeness, and/or reliability of the information contained herein and/or for the fitness for any
particular use and/or for the performance of any material and/or equipment selected in whole or
part with the user of/or in reliance upon information contained herein. Selection of materials
and/or equipment is at the sole risk of the user of this publication.
This document contains proprietary information. No part of this document may be photocopied
or reproduced without the prior written consent of Sentry Equipment Corp.

PO Box 127
Phone: 262.567.7256
Fax: 262.567.4523
Normal business hours: 8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. CST (U.S. Central Time), Monday
through Friday
SENTRY EQUIPMENT CORP • 262.567.7256 • Fax: 262.567.4523 • sales@sentry-equip.com • www.sentry-equip. com ii

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read the entire manual before attempting to unpack, set up or operate this product. Pay careful
attention to all warnings, cautions and notes. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury or
equipment damage.
Use of Hazard Information

If multiple hazards exist, the signal word corresponding to the greatest hazard shall be used.
Definitions
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, may result in property damage.
NOTE
Information that requires special emphasis
SHALL
This word understood to be mandatory
SHOULD
This word understood to be advisory
SENTRY EQUIPMENT CORP • 262.567.7256 • Fax: 262.567.4523 • sales@sentry-equip.com • www.sentry-equip. com iii
It is solely the responsibility of the user, through its own analysis and testing, to
select products suitable for their specific application requirements, ensure they
are properly installed, ensure that they are safely applied, ensure they are
properly maintained, and limit their use to their intended purpose.
Improper selection, installation, or use can cause personal injury or property

damage.
Sentry does not warrant against erosion and corrosion. Sentry makes no claims
regarding suitability for specific use, and provides no warrantee regarding
material compatibility of elastomers in specific services.
Hot Surfaces! This equipment may have very hot surfaces. If an operator
contacts a hot surface, injury may occur. Use protective clothing to prevent
injury. If other equipment comes in contact with a hot surface, damage to the
equipment may occur. Ensure the area around this equipment is kept clear to
prevent damage from occurring.
High Pressures! This equipment may contain fluids at very high pressures. Prior
to installing, removing or maintaining this equipment, ensure that the equipment
is isolated from all connecting piping, the equipment is de-pressurized, the
contents have been drained and the equipment is cool.
This equipment contains moving parts! All drive guards and doors must be
secured in place when this machine is being operated.
Follow proper local, state and federal regulations for proper installation and
operational requirements.
SENTRY EQUIPMENT CORP • 262.567.7256 • Fax: 262.567.4523 • sales@sentry-equip.com • www.sentry-equip. com iv

1.0 General Description
The standard Model PR samples dilute and dense material from positive or negative air
conveying lines. A sample is taken when a solenoid-controlled air cylinder moves a
sample probe in and out of the product stream. The sample is then discharged to a
collection container.
Product characteristics are not changed by the sampler because no moving parts
convey the product to the sample container. Sample size and frequency can be changed
at the controller.
Please have this manual accessible when contacting the customer service
representative for the area.
2.0 Installation
Sampler shall be supported in two planes to prevent bending of the sample tube and
to prevent personal and property damage.
SUPPORT BRACKET
1. Choose a location for your sampler where the product is evenly dispersed in the
material line. Make sure that the sampler is mounted six to eight feet beyond all
elbows or line irregularities.
2. If the sampler is premounted at the factory, remove a section of the conveying line
equal to the length of pipe in which the sampler is mounted. Insert the sample tube
facing into the product flow. Clamp or bolt sampler in position.
3. If the sampler comes with mounting adaptors, you will have to drill a hole in the
conveying line. Cut a 2” diameter hole in the conveying line to accommodate the
sample tube. The hole must be 30°-60° down from the horizontal plane of the line in
the horizontal mounts. For angular conveying line, cut a hole on the bottom side of
the line. (See Figure 1). For vertical applications, cut a hole, which will be elliptical in
shape, based on a 2” diameter circle projected at a 45-degree angle.

NOTE
When placing the sampler in position for mounting, make sure the
sample tube slot faces the flow of material so the sample can enter
into the tube. Also, be sure the product discharge is facing down.
4. Mount adaptor wraps on the conveying line, making sure the hole in the adaptor lines
up with the hole in the conveying line. Then secure with the bolts.
5. Mount and fasten the sampler to mounting adaptors with included hardware.
NOTE
The packing nut MUST be hand tight using the spanner wrench
before the unit is started. Instructions for doing this are in section
3.0 Operation / Adjustments.
6. Mount the sample bottle assembly in any convenient location below the sampler.
NOTE
Best results are obtained when, in the sampling position, the
discharge of the sampler is in direct line with the intake of the
sample bottle.
Figure 1.
Various Mounts
ANGULAR CONVEYING LINE

HORTIZONTAL CONVEYING LINE
30°MIN.
60°MAX.
30°MIN.
60°MAX.
DISCHARGE
DISCHARGE
7. Connect a flexible hose from the sample discharge to the sample collection
container. See Figure 2. In certain applications rigid, metal tubing can be used
following a short length of hose attached to the discharge.
8. Mount the filter-regulator and the solenoid-valve with the bowl in a vertical position
as close as possible to the sampler. See Figure 2. Air pressure of 60 to 80 PSI is

normally recommended (3.9 to 5.6 kilograms per square centimeters). The regulator
and the restrictors are preset at the factory.
9. Connect the lines from the solenoid-valve marked C1 and C2 to the corresponding
C1 and C2 marks on the air cylinders. See Figure 2.
10. Cut a length of 3/8” (approximately 9.5 mm) O.D. poly tube and run a line from the
filter-regulator to the solenoid-valve.
11. Connect your air supply to the inlet of the filter-regulators. See Figure 2.
NOTE
A clean air supply should be used. Oil and Moisture filters should
be used before the sampler filter- regulator if necessary.
NOTE
The air lines should not be so long that sharp bends or kinks
develop in the lines.
NOTE
If an air lubricant is added to the system, it should be placed
immediately after the filter-regulator.
Figure 2. Air Line Connections

C1
C2
Air lines
C1
C2
Filter / Regulator
12. Mount controller (if supplied) in a location easily accessible. Surge suppression and
filtering is recommended but not required. The controller should be hard wired to

instrument-quality power using appropriate certified conduit, fittings, and wiring or

cable. A suitable external over-current protection device, such as a fuse or circuit
breaker (15 A), and disconnect device is recommended. The over-current protection
and disconnect devices shall be installed on both the hot (L) and neutral (N) leads.
The disconnect device shall be located near the equipment and marked with
appropriate ON(1) OFF(O) markings as specified by local codes. For fixed wiring
methods, the ground conductor shall have green with a yellow stripe as the
insulation. Installation should be performed by qualified personal in accordance with
local codes and procedures. Mount the controller in a vibration-free location and
have a qualified electrician wire the controller to the motor and electrical supply. If
the controller is to be mounted near the sampler, then the controller must meet the
National Electrical Code for the area.
NOTE
When penetrating the enclosure controller, use tubes & fittings
that maintain the environmental rating of the enclosure.
13. Connect solenoid coil leads to controller using appropriate weatherproof cable or
wire and conduit. Minimum wire size - 14 ga. copper with a 60°C rating.
14. Remote Enable Connector (if used).
Customer supplied normally open (N.O.) dry contact to enable a sample control
should be wired per Electrical wiring diagram provided. Remove jumper supplied with
controller.
3.0 Operation
1. Sample Bottle Assembly

The pressure relief valve on the sample bottle assembly is used to release pressure
in the container. See Figure 3. It may be opened very slightly to allow pressure to
bleed slowly between sampling cycles.
If closed during sampling, it should be opened to release container

pressure before removing the container. Under no circumstances should
the relief valve be more than very slightly open during sampling since fine
material may escape, biasing the sample and possibly causing personal
injury.
NOTE
The pressure relief valve must be closed when sampling on a
vacuum line.

NOTE
Check the pressure relief valve on the pressurized container. The
screw should be turned down (clockwise) as far as possible.
Figure 3.
Pressure Relief
Valve Adjustment
Adjustments
Sample Probe Speed

The speed with which the sample probe rotates can be increased or decreased by
turning the flow controls on the four-way valve. See Figure 4. Each screw regulates the
air supply to the cylinder. Turn the screw clockwise to decrease cylinder speed. When
shipped from the factory, the advancing and retracting speeds are equal.
NOTE
If you make an adjustment to the four-way valve, you might have to
adjust the timers in the controller.
Figure 4.
Four-way Valve
MAIN AIR SUPPLY
DECREASE SPEED DECREASE SPEED
SOLENOID COIL FLOW CONTROL

FLOW CONTROL RETRACT ADVANCE

The length of time the probe will stay in the line to collect each sample is increased or
decreased by turning the dial on the solenoid time delay. The solenoid time delay is
located on the inside of the controller and is adjustable from .15-5 seconds.
Seal Adjustment
Remove the top cover plate to adjust the seals. Using the spanner wrench, turn the
packing nut (Figure 5) clockwise ¼ to1/2 revolution. The packing nut should be hand
tight using the spanner wrench supplied. Never loosen the packing nut. Let the sampler
stroke 3 to 4 times and readjust as needed.
NOTE
Glass-filled Teflon seals will be slightly harder to slip the probe
through, but once they are in, the probe will move freely.
Sentry Equip. Corp strongly suggests that seal adjustments should be on a periodic
maintenance schedule. Frequency of adjustments will depend on your specific
application and sampling procedure
C1
Figure 5.
Premature failure of the

sampler will occur if break-in
instructions are not followed.
Packing nut should be
tightened while the sample
tube is being stroked out of the
PACKING NUT housing, using not

to get hand pinched
4.0 Maintenance
1. If an air lubricant is added to the system, it should be placed immediately after the
filter-regulator.
2. Drain the filter/regulator once a week by turning the drain on the bottom of the bowl.
See figure 6. Draining frequency depends upon quality of air supply and may be
required daily.

Figure 6.
Filter Regulator
PUSH IN DRAIN, FINGERTIP

TOUCH TO DRAIN
DO NOT use carbon tetrachloride, trichloroethylene, thinner, acetone or similar

solvents. Use only household soap to clean the bowl. Reassemble the regulator and
turn the air supply on.
3. Excessive pressure drops or a visible coating on the filter element indicates cleaning
of the filter-regulator is necessary. Shut off the air supply and remove the bowl.
Unscrew the lower gasket, allowing the filter element to fall out. Wash the filter
element with denatured alcohol. Do not use carbon tetrachloride, trichloroethylene,
thinner, acetone or similar solvents. Use only household soap to clean the bowl.
Reassemble the regulator and turn the air supply on.
4. Replaceable items for the filter-regulator are: filters, bowls and gauges.
5. Wash and blow out restrictors once a month or, whenever necessary. Replace spool
assembly if O-rings are grooved.
6. Replaceable items for the four-way valve are: solenoid, spool assembly, and
restrictors. See figure 7.

Figure 7.
Four-way Valve
SOLENOID
MANUAL FOUR-WAY VALVE

OVERRIDE
SPOOL ASSEMBLY
MUFFLERS
7. If the seals become worn, you must remove and replace them. The following steps
are necessary to remove the seal housing.
a. Loosen nuts and bolts marked (A). See Figure 8.
b. Remove the packing nut and packing plate. See Figure 9.
c. Remove the seals and insert spacers.
d. Install new seals as shown in exploded view Figure10.
e. Replace the packing plate and packing nut.
f. Slide seal housing on and tighten all nuts and bolts removed in Step 1.
g. Adjust seals according to SECTION 3.0 - SEAL ADJUSTMENTS section.
NOTE
Never remove the housing spacer part # 88531000 for 6” or 8”
units when changing the inner seals and inserting spacers.

Figure 8. Housing Assembly Figure 9. Packing Assembly
Pre-Troubleshooting Checklist
The following information is a synopsis of the problems you may encounter prior to
troubleshooting your equipment. Divide the unit into three sections and try solving the
problem before you continue on.
Potential Problems
Electrical
· Timers
· Connections
· Circuit Breaker
· Solenoid
Pneumatic
· Air Pressure
· Filter-Regulator
· Restrictors
· Four-way Valves
· Air Cylinder
· Air Lines
Mechanical
· Alignment
· Packings

Figure 10.
Exploded view
Item # Description Quanity

1 Mount Gasket 1
2 Housing Weldment Modification 1
3 Seal Ring, Male 3
4 Pressure Ring 11
5 Seal Ring, Female 3
6 Purge Spacer 1
7 Discharge Spacer 1
8 Back Spacer 1
9 Packing Plate 1
10 Packing Nut 1
11 Model PR Side Plate 2
12 Body Back Flange 1
13 Model PR Threaded Spacer Rod 2
14 Model PR Spacer Pipe 2
15 Air Cylinder 1
NOTE 16 Sample Tube 1
This Figure is for Reference Only. 17 Fitting (for C1 & C2) 2
18 Cover Gasket 2
Always refer to the Final Assembly 19 Model PR Cover Plate 2
Dwg. And the General 20 Support Bracket 1
Arrangement Dwg. included with 21 .125 NPT SS Cap 1
your sampler purchase, for 22 Spanner Wrench 1
specific part #’s used on your 23 Nameplate 1
24 Caution Label 2
sampler. 25 Danger Label 1

Troubleshooting
Do not attempt any adjustments or disassembly unless main power to

controller is disconnected.
Figure 11.
Troubleshooting Sequence
1,2,3,4 Controller
5 Solenoid
6 Air Kinks
7 Air Pressure
8 Restrictors
9 Spool Assembly
10 Air Cylinder
11 Packing
12 Alignment

Electrical
(1) Check main power supply and other user supplied electrical control for tripped
circuit breaker or other power indicator.
(2) If the sampler does not function, check controller settings in controller manual.
(3) Check terminals for loose connections.
(4,5) If solenoid timer delay is functional, it will energize the solenoid on the four-
way valve. If the solenoid does not function, check connections and settings
on Solenoid valve. Be sure the red dot on the valve is pointed to “0”.
Pneumatic
(6,7,8,9) Check air lines for kinks, breaks, etc. Air pressure to the filter/regulator should
be 60-80 PSI. If higher air pressure is required to activate the cylinder, then
there is a possibility that the probe is bound or the four-way valve needs
cleaning. Look at the air restrictors and make sure they are open and not
clogged. Clean and/or replace spool assembly in the solenoid when
necessary.
(10) If the probe slows up or stops when entering or retracting from the material
line, the air cylinder seals may need replacing. If the main seal is worn, you
may be able to hear air escaping around it.
Mechanical
(11) If the probe still does not function properly, check the seals for excessive wear
or improper fit. If they need adjustment, see ADJUSTMENTS.
(12) If the sampler properly runs mechanically, but still does not function correctly,
then remove it from the line. Check for obstructions in the tube. Reassemble
and check for operation. If any other problems arise, please contact factory
service.

5.0 Factory Assistance
Sentry Equipment Corp. has been a pioneer in sampling equipment. From single point
sampling to complex multifunction, automated sampling control systems, Sentry has
been at the forefront to assist utilities and industry.
Please do not return any equipment or system components before discussing your
application problem with a Sentry representative and obtaining a return authorization.
The Service Department at Sentry Equipment or your Sentry representative is available
for your assistance.
For other sampling applications, your Sentry representative or Sentry Equipment Corp.
is eager to help you. Please feel free to call your representative or the number below to
discuss our application.

PO Box 127
Phone: 262.567.7256
Fax: 262.567.4523
E-mail: sales@sentry-equip.com

6.0 Standard Warranty
Warranty
Seller warrants products manufactured by it and supplied hereunder to be free from defects in
materials and workmanship for a period of eighteen months from date of shipment or twelve
months from start up (which ever occurs first). If within such period any such products shall be
proved to Seller’s satisfaction to be defective, such products shall be repaired or replaced at
Seller’s option. Seller’s obligation and Buyer’s exclusive remedy hereunder shall be limited to
such repair and replacement and shall be conditioned upon Seller’s receiving written notice of
any alleged defect within 10 days after its discovery and, at Seller’s option, return of such
product to Seller, ex-works Sentry’s factory.
The foregoing warranties are exclusive and in lieu of all other express and implied warranties
except in title, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for
purpose. Seller shall not be subject to any other obligations or liabilities whatsoever with respect
to products manufactured or furnished by it, or any undertakings, acts or omissions relating
thereto.
Warranty Conditions & Limitations

This Warranty shall not apply to any Sentry product which, in the opinion of Sentry Equipment
Corp, has been (a) altered or repaired in a manner affecting the efficiency of performance of the
unit or (b) incorrectly installed or operated or (c) damaged in shipment or (d) damaged by flood
or fire or (e) if the serial number is missing, altered or defaced.
Any materials proposed to be used by Sentry Equipment Corp. (“Seller”) are based on
published reference literature and/or customer recommendations, and customer assumes sole
responsibility for the selection of such materials. Any references are based on third-party
studies, and may not correlate directly with the end user's intended usage or process (i.e.
chemical composition, concentrations, temperatures, etc.).
EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN, SELLER HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS (EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, ORAL OR WRITTEN), INCLUDING ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE WHETHER OR NOT SELLER
KNOWS, OR HAS REASON TO KNOW, HAS BEEN ADVISED, OR IS OTHERWISE IN FACT
AWARE OF ANY SUCH PURPOSE, WHETHER ALLEGED TO ARISE BY LAW, BY REASON
OF CUSTOM OR USAGE IN THE TRADE, OR BY COURSE OF DEALING OR
PERFORMANCE. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Seller makes no warranty
regarding ability of products sold hereunder to withstand erosion or corrosion, or regarding
material compatibility of elastomers in specific services, and no warranty made hereunder shall
apply to products which have been subjected to adverse storage
The owner shall be responsible for maintenance of his equipment. Wear or damage caused by
lack of normal maintenance or by misuse of the equipment shall not be considered as defective
workmanship and material.
Sentry reserves the right to make product design changes or improvements without notice and
without imposing any obligation upon itself to install these changes or improvements on its
products previously manufactured.
This warranty is for the sole benefit of the original purchaser and is not transferable unless
agreed to in writing by Sentry Equipment Corp.

Receiving Shipments (including loss or damage by transportation)

It is the customer’s responsibility to check for missing cartons and sign of damage to cartons. If
found, customer should note missing and/or damaged cartons on the delivery receipt and have
delivery receipt signed by the representative of the transportation company. If unpacking
discloses concealed damage from rough handling, the customer should request a concealed
damage inspection from the transportation company.
The Sentry Customer Service Department will aid your organization in any claim proceeding for
shortages or damages in shipment, but it is the receiver’s responsibility to file claim with the
carrier for damage or loss.
Customer Actions For Claims on Products During the Warranty Period
1. Contact the Customer Service Department, Sentry Equipment Corp., Oconomowoc,

WI, Telephone: 262-567-7256, to obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA)
number.
2. You will be sent an “RMA” and a “Decontamination Statement” that is required to be
filled out and returned with the equipment.
3. The following information must appear on the outside of the package:
a. RMA number marked on outside of box.
b. Decontamination Statement filled out and attached to outside of box.
4. Return defective equipment FREIGHT PREPAID. Collect shipments will be refused.
5. The factory will not process warranty claims until the customer has properly
accomplished the above items.
6. The Sentry factory may accept the entire claim, a part of the claim or none of the
claim if our inspection of returned parts proves the failure was for reasons other than
defective material or factory workmanship.
Important Notes:
1. Sentry will not be responsible for damage incurred during the return shipment.
2. All returns subject to inspection and a minimum $100.00 evaluation fee.
3. This RMA is not authorization for credit. Credits and/or replacements will be issued
upon evaluation of returned goods.
4. RMA is valid for thirty (30) days from issue date.

®
Catalog 0700P-7 Prep-Air II, 05E Series
Economy 05E Series 1/4", 3/8" – Basic 1/4" Body
05E Filter / Regulator – Economy

A
➤
➤
Features
➤ ➤
➤ ➤
B
s 3PACESAVINGPACKAGEOFFERSBOTHFILTERAND
PU
SH
K
C
TO L O
regulator features for optimal performance.

1/4" NPT
s %XCELLENTWATERREMOVALEFFICIENCY Gauge Ports
(2) C
s 2OLLINGDIAPHRAGMFOREXTENDEDLIFE
C s 2EMOVABLENON RISINGKNOBFORTAMPERRESISTANCE
s 1UICKRESPONSEANDACCURATEPRESSUREREGULATION E
regardless of changing flow or inlet pressure.
D
Selection
Product
s MICRONFILTERELEMENTSTANDARD
Automatic Drain
5 micron and adsorber available.
s (IGH&LOW n3#&- §
n3#&- § Distance Required
F To Remove All
Filters
Bowls Regardless
Of Drain Option
Port NPT Accepts
Size Twist Drain Automatic Pulse Drain 1/8" Tubing
Coalescers
Poly Bowl‡ / Metal Guard

05E Filter / Regulator
1/4" 05E12A13A* 05E1PA13A* ! WARNING Dimensions
3/8" 05E22A13A* 05E2PA13A* Product rupture can cause
A B C
serious injury. 2.00 2.06 3.16
Metal Bowl / Sight Gauge
Regulators
Do not connect regulator to (51) (52) (80)

1/4" 05E14A13A* 05E1TA13A* bottled gas.
Do not exceed maximum D† E† F
3/8" 05E24A13A* 05E2TA13A* 5.35 8.51 1.77
primary pressure rating.
Standard part numbers shown bold. For other models refer to (136) (216) (45)
Regulators
ordering information below.

Filter /
Inches (mm)
‡ For polycarbonate bowl see Caution on page C2. † With Twist Drain or Auto
§ SCFM = Standard cubic feet per minute at 100 psig inlet, Pulse Drain
90 psig no flow secondary setting and 10 psig pressure drop.
./4%$IAMM HOLEREQUIREDFORPANELMOUNTING
Lubricators
Ordering
05E 1 2 A 13 A * — — ---
Information
Combos
Port Size Elements Relief Port Type Preset / Pressure

1 1/4 Inch A 40 Micron A Relieving Limited
Blank NPT
Accessories
2 3/8 Inch B 5 Micron L Non-Relieving 1* BSPP Blank None

Z Adsorber H Low Temp. 2 BSPT XXX* Preset
Relieving * 1/4 & 3/8 inch meet Pressure
ISO 1179-1 Standard. XXX* Pressure
Bowl Options Pressure Range Engineering Options Limited
Polycarbonate Bowl Without With Level Blank No Options
* Available Preset /
Pressure Limited
1 Twist Drain Gauge Gauge* * Will be L† Preset Range, 10 to 90 psig in
10 30 psig 17 30 psig Entered at Non-Adjustable 5 psig increments. For
2 Metal Bowl Guard / Twist Drain higher pressures,
11 60 psig 16 60 psig Factory P† Preset Adjustable contact factory.
N Automatic Pulse Drain
13 125 psig 18 125 psig S† Pressure Limiter %XAMPLE
P Metal Bowl Guard / Auto Pulse Drain
14§ 200 psig 19§ 200 psig Max. Adjustable 065 = 65 psig)
Metal Bowl * Includes 1-1/2" Dial Face Gauge T† Pressure Limiter
3 Twist Drain § Requires Metal Bowl Max. Non-Adj.
4 Sight Gauge / Twist Drain Spring Type by Preset / Limited Pressure: † Inlet Pressure is 100 psig.
R Automatic Pulse Drain For Preset / Limited Pressure 10 to 25 For other pressures, contact
use 30 PSI Spring factory.
T Sight Gauge / Auto Pulse Drain For Preset / Limited Pressure 26 to 50
use 60 PSI Spring
For Preset / Limited Pressure 51 to 90
BOLD ITEMS ARE MOST POPULAR. use 125 PSI Spring
C98 Parker Hannifin Corporation

Pneumatic Division
Richland, Michigan
www.parker.com/pneumatics
®
Catalog 0700P-7 Prep-Air II, 05E Series
Technical Specifications – 05E Filter / Regulators
Technical Information
Relief And Flow Characteristics Relief And Flow Characteristics
05E12A13A* 05E22A13A*
120 120
8 8
Secondary Pressure - PSIG

Secondary Pressure - PSIG
1/4 Inch Ports 3/8 Inch Ports
Secondary Pressure - bar

Secondary Pressure - bar
105 Primary Pressure 100 PSIG (6.9 bar) 105 Primary Pressure 100 PSIG (6.9 bar)
7 7
90 90
6 6
75 5 75
5
4 60 4 60
3 45 3 45
2 30 2 30
15 1 15
C
1
0 0 0 0
10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Flow - SCFM Flow - SCFM
5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
3 3
Flow - dm /s
Selection
Flow - dm /s
Product
n n
CAUTION:
REGULATOR PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT – The working range of knob adjustment is designed
to permit outlet pressures within their full range. Pressure adjustment beyond this range is also
Filters
possible because the knob is not a limiting device. This is a common characteristic of most
industrial regulators, and limiting devices may be obtained only by special design.
For best performance, regulated pressure should always be set by increasing the pressure up to
Coalescers
the desired setting.
05E Filter / Regulator Kits & Accessories Specifications
Regulators
Bowl Guard Kit ..................................................................... PS905P Bowl Capacity .................................................................2.0 Ounces
Bowl Kits – Gauge Port (2) ...................................................................... 1/4 Inch
0OLY"OWLn !UTOMATIC0ULSE$RAIN................................... PS995P Sump Capacity ................................................................. 0.9 Ounce
Twist Drain..................................................... PS932P Port Threads .................................................................1/4, 3/8 Inch
-ETAL"OWLn!UTOMATIC0ULSE$RAIN................................... PS997P
Regulators
Pressure & Temperature Rating –
Filter /
Twist Drain..................................................... PS934P 0OLYCARBONATE"OWLnTOPSIGTOBAR
Sight Gauge / Automatic Pulse Drain ........... PS996P 32°F to 125°F (0°C to 52°C)
Sight Gauge / Twist Drain.............................. PS935P
-ETAL"OWLnTOPSIGTOBAR
Drain Kit –
32°F to 175°F (0°C to 80°C)
Lubricators
Automatic Pulse Drain........................................................ PS998P
Semi-Auto Drain ................................................................. PS511P !UTOMATIC0ULSE$RAINn10 to 150 psig (0.7 to 10.3 bar)
Twist Drain ...................................................................... PS512P Weight ....................................................................... 1.35 lb. (0.6 kg)
Push ‘N’ Drain..................................................................... PS513P
Filter Element Kits – 40 Micron ......................................... PS901P
5 Micron ............................................ PS902P Materials of Construction
Combos
Adsorber............................................ PS931P Adjusting Stem ......................................................................... Steel
Sight Gauge Kit .................................................................... PS914P Body ............................................................................................ Zinc
Gauges – 1-1/2" Dial Face Bonnet, Internal Parts ........................................................... Plastic
30 psig (0 to 2.1 bar)...................................K4515N14030
Accessories
Bowl Guard ................................................................................ Steel
60 psig (0 to 4.1 bar)...................................K4515N14060
160 psig (0 to 11.0 bar) ............................... K4515N14160 Collar ....................................................................................... Plastic
300 psig (0 to 20.0 bar) ..............................K4515N14300 Diaphragm ................................................................................Nitrile
2" Dial Face Drain ........................................................................................ Plastic
60 psig (0 to 4.1 bar) ................................. K4520N14060 Filter Elements – 40 Micron (Standard)................................ Plastic
160 psig (0 to 11.0 bar) ..............................K4520N14160 5 Micron (Optional) ................................... Plastic
300 psig (0 to 20.0 bar) ............................. K4520N14300 Adsorber (Optional) ...............Activated Charcoal
Mounting Bracket Kit (Includes Panel Mount Nut)..............PS963P Knob ........................................................................................ Plastic
Panel Mount Nut – Metal......................................................PS964P Seals .........................................................................................Nitrile
Springs – 1-30 psig Range....................................................P04427 Sight Gauge ........................................................ Polyamide (Nylon)
1-60 psig Range ...................................................P04426 Springsn0OPPET#ONTROL ....................................................... Steel
2-125 psig Range ..................................................P04425
2-200 psig ............................................................P02934
Relieving Service Kit ...........................................................PS908P
Non-Relieving Service Kit ..................................................PS909P
Bonnet Assembly Kit .......................................................... PS915P
C99 Parker Hannifin Corporation

Pneumatic Division
Richland, Michigan
“42” Series
Lever / Pedal Valves
4-Way, 5-Port, 2 & 3-Position
Poppet
Brass
Section F
www.parker.com/pneu/42ser
LV / EZ
M0
Viking
Lever
42
Directair
4
Directair
F 2
Basic Valve Functions ............................................. F32

“42” Series Basic Valve Features ............................ F33
Common Part Numbers........................................... F34
Model Number Index & Accessories ....................... F35
Dimensions
Lever Valve ......................................................... F36
Foot Pedal Valve, Foot Pedal Guard ................... F37
BOLD ITEMS ARE MOST POPULAR.
Parker Hannifin Corporation

F31 Pneumatic Division
Richland, Michigan
Catalog 0600P-12 “42” Series Valves – Lever / Pedal
Basic Valve Functions Lever – Parallel & Perpendicular Operated
Lever Valves – Parallel & Perpendicular Operated

2-Position, Spring Return 3-Position, Detent
4 2
#12 4 2
#14
Operator Operator #14 #12
End End Operator Operator
5 3 End End
1 5 1 3
Function 3
Poppet
Brass
Single Pressure at Port #1 – The Hand Lever alternately 4 2

#14 #12
pressurizes port 2 or 4 while exhausting at port 3 or 5. When Operator Operator
actuating Hand Lever, port 4 is pressurized; when releasing End End
5 1 3
LV / EZ
Hand Lever, spring returns the spool, pressurizing port 2. Function 4

Dual Pressure – Pressure at port 3 & 5 alternately
pressurizes port 2 or 4 while exhausting at port 1. When Single Pressure at Port #1 – The Hand Lever alternately
actuating Hand Lever, port 2 is pressurized; when releasing pressurizes port 2 or 4 while exhausting at port 3 or 5.
Hand Lever, spring returns the spool, pressurizing port 4. When pulling Hand Lever, port 4 is pressurized; when
M0
(Must be ordered as dual pressure) pushing Hand Lever, port 2 is pressurized. When
Hand Lever is vertical, it is in the center position -
either APB or CE. Spool stays in last actuated position.
Viking
Lever
2-Position, Detent
Center Functions
All Ports Blocked – Function 3
4 2
#14 #12 Center Exhaust – Function 4
42
Operator Operator
End End
5 3
1
Directair
Single Pressure at Port #1 – The Hand Lever alternately

pressurizes port 2 or 4 while exhausting at port 3 or 5. When ! CAUTION:
4
pulling Hand Lever, port 4 is pressurized; when pushing Hand For 3-Position lever function, do not restrict exhaust
Lever, port 2 is pressurized. Spool stays in last actuated ports with speed controls.
position.
Directair
Dual Pressure – Pressure at port 3 & 5 alternately

2
pressurizes port 2 or 4 while exhausting at port 1. When

pulling Hand Lever, port 2 is pressurized; when pushing Hand
Lever, port 4 is pressurized. Spool stays in last actuated
position. (Must be ordered as dual pressure.)
Foot Pedal Operated
F 2-Position, Spring Return
4 2
#14 #12
Operator Operator
End End
5 3
1
CAUTION:
This valve shall not be used to actuate a punch press.
! Do not use this valve on punch presses or press brakes.
See OSHA 1910.217.
See Dimension page for Pedal Guard Kit.
Single Pressure at Port #1 – The Foot Pedal alternately Dual Pressure – Pressure at port 3 & 5 alternately
pressurizes port 2 or 4 while exhausting at port 3 or 5. pressurizes port 2 or 4 while exhausting at port 1.
When pressing Foot Pedal down, port 4 is pressurized; When pressing Foot Pedal down, port 2 is pressurized;
when releasing Foot Pedal, spring returns the spool, when releasing Foot Pedal, spring returns the spool,
pressurizing port 2. pressurizing port 4. (Must be ordered as dual pressure)
F32 Parker Hannifin Corporation

Pneumatic Division
Richland, Michigan
Basic Features Lever / Pedal
“42” Series
Specifications
Heavy Duty Lever
• Parallel Mount
• Perpendicular Mount
Poppet
Brass
Heavy Duty Foot Pedal
Inline Valve
• 1/4" Port – 1.3 to 2.2 Cv
LV / EZ
• 3/8" Port – 1.3 to 2.9 Cv
2-Position
3-Position
M0
• All Ports Blocked
• Center Exhaust
Viking
Lever
Operating Pressure
• Vacuum to 150 PSI
(710mm HG to 1035 kPa)
Lever Valve – Parallel
42
Operating Temperature
• 0°F to 140°F (-18°C to 60°C)
Directair
4
Flow Rating (Cv)
Port Mounting
Directair
2-Position 3-Position
Size Style
2
1/4" Ports Inline 2.2 1.3
3/8" Ports Inline 2.9 1.3
Foot Pedal Valve

Richland, Michigan
Common Part Numbers Lever & Foot Pedal Valve – Inline
Lever Valve – 2-Position Lever Valve – 3-Position

(Parallel Shown) (Perpendicular Shown)
Poppet
Brass
LV / EZ
M0
4 2 4 2
#14 #12 #14 #12 4 2 4 2
Operator Operator Operator Operator #14 #12 #14 #12
End End End End Operator Operator Operator Operator
5 3 5 3 End End End End
1 1 5 1 3 5 1 3
Spring Return Detented APB CE

Viking
Lever
Inline – Parallel Inline – Parallel

Single Pressure Return Port Single Pressure Type Port
422CS011K 1/4" NPT 422CS013W 1/4" NPT
42
Spring 3-Pos APB

422CS021K 3/8" NPT 422CS023W 3/8" NPT
422CS011W 1/4" NPT 422CS014W 1/4" NPT
Directair
Detent 3-Pos CE
422CS021W 3/8" NPT 422CS024W 3/8" NPT
4
Inline – Perpendicular Inline – Perpendicular

Directair
Single Pressure Return Port Single Pressure Type Port

2
422CR011K 1/4" NPT 422CR013W 1/4" NPT

Spring 3-Pos APB
422CR021K 3/8" NPT 422CR023W 3/8" NPT
422CR011W 1/4" NPT 422CR014W 1/4" NPT
Detent 3-Pos CE
422CR021W 3/8" NPT 422CR024W 3/8" NPT
F
Foot Pedal Valve – 2-Position Inline
Single Type Return Port
Pressure
422CT011K 1/4" NPT
2-Pos Spring
422CT021K 3/8" NPT
! CAUTION:
4 2
#14
Operator
#12
Operator Do not use this valve on punch presses or press brakes.
End End
5
1
3 See OSHA 1910.217.
Spring Return See Dimensions page for Pedal Guard Kit.

Pneumatic Division
Richland, Michigan
Model Number Index & Accessories Lever & Foot Pedal Valve – Inline
BOLD OPTIONS ARE MOST POPULAR
“42” Series
422 C R 0 1 1 K
Operator #14 End Operator #12 End
Poppet
Brass
Lever Perpendicular (Inline Only) R K Spring Return (2-Position Only)
Lever Parallel S W Detented
Foot Pedal (2-Position, Spring Return, Inline Only) T
LV / EZ
Function (4-Way)
Style 2-Position
NPT 0 1 Single Pressure
3-Position*
M0
3 Single Pressure - All Ports Blocked
4 Single Pressure - Cyl. Ports to Exhaust
* Available Detented Only.
Viking
Lever
Port Size
1 1/4”
2 3/8”
42
Directair
4
Directair
2
Valve Body Service Kits
Function / Operator Single Pressure Dual Pressure
2-Position / Manual PS2038P PS2039P
3-Position / Manual,
PS2041P
Detented
Kit includes: all soft seals and spool. F

Richland, Michigan
Dimensions Lever Valve
Lever Valve
2-Position 3-Position
14 4 2 12 C 14 4 2 12 C
F F
O
14 G G
Poppet
O O
9 -39' 9 -39'
Brass
O
7 G1 G1
Energized U De-energized
LV / EZ
T T
E1 E1
E E
B B
R (3 mtg. R (3 mtg.
holes) holes)
M0
QH QH
L1 Stroke
Viking
Lever
L Stroke S L1 Stroke S
J D J1 D1
A A1
O
14 O O
O 9 -39' 9 -39'
7
Energized De-energized
42
T T
Directair
B1 B1
K K
4
1/4 or 1/4 or
M1 M 3/8 NPTF M1 M 3/8 NPTF
5 Ports 5 Ports
N N
P P
Directair
5 1 3 5 1 3
2
L Stroke L1 Stroke
L1 Stroke
Lever Valve
A A1 B B1 C
6.70 7.58 5.55 5.05 1.15
(170) (193) (141) (128) (29)
D D1 E E1 F
3.59 3.83 1.58 2.06 .57
F (91)
G NPT
(97) (40)
G1 NPT H
(52) (14)
1/4" .51 (13) 1/4" 1.56 (40) 2.13

3/8" .55 (14) 3/8" 1.51 (38) (54)
J J1 K NPT L
2.44 2.80 1/4" 2.08 (53) .25
(62) (71) 3/8" 2.13 (54) (6)
L1 M M1 NPT N
.18 1.03 1/4" .02 (.5) .50
(5) (36) 3/8" .06 (2) (13)
P Q R S T
.65 1.58 .33 .27 3.42
(17) (40) (8) (7) (87)
U Dia
.75
(19)
Inches (mm)

Pneumatic Division
Richland, Michigan
Dimensions Foot Pedal Valve & Foot Pedal Valve Guard
Foot Pedal Valve
14 4 2 12 C
F
G
Foot Pedal Valve
G1
E1 A B B1 C D
Poppet
Brass
E 8.64 2.18 1.03 1.15 3.59
R (3 mtg. (220) (55) (26) (29) (91)
holes)
E E1 F G NPT
1.58 2.06 .57 1/4" .51 (13)
(40) (52) (14) 3/8" .55 (14)
LV / EZ
H QH
G1 NPT H H1 J
1/4" 1.56 (40) 2.13 2.50 2.32
D S 3/8" 1.51 (38) (54) (64) (59)
A
K NPT L M
M0
1/4" 2.08 (53) .60 1.03
3/8" 2.13 (54) (15) (26)
T K 1/4 or
M1 M 3/8 NPTF B1 M1 NPT N P Q
5 Ports N
1/4" .02 (.5) .50 .65 1.58
Viking
B
Lever
De-energized
L 5 1 3 P 3/8" .06 (2) (13) (17) (40)
13 -30' ± 2 R S T U
68 ± 2 .33 .27 3.00 .48
Energized
J (8) (7) (76) (11)
42
! CAUTION: Inches (mm)
Do not use this valve on punch presses or press brakes.
Directair
See OSHA 1910.217.
4
Foot Pedal Valve Guard
Directair
2
To order Foot Pedal Valve Guard, specify part number PS2043P.
This kit contains the valve mounting hardware.
Foot Valve Guard

A A1 B B1 C
4.50 .75 10.50 1.25 .48
(114) (19) (267) (32) (11)
A
D E
6.00 7.13
E1
.50
F F1
13.00 8.38
F
(152) (181) (13) (330) (213)
A1
Inches (mm)
B1 B C
E1
D F1
F

Richland, Michigan
Catalog 0600P-12 Accessories
Muffler / Filters, Muffler / Flow Controls EM Series & Muffler / Flow Controls
EM Series – Sintered Bronze General Description

Muffler / filters effectively reduce air exhaust noises to an
Muffler / Filters industry accepted level with minimum flow restriction. They
protect valves, impact wrenches, screw drivers and other air
tools by preventing dirt and other foreign matter from entering
the system. Non-corrosive. Can be cleaned with many
common solvents.
Specifications
Maximum Operating Pressure ......................250 PSIG (Air)
Operating Temperature .................................... 0° to 300°F*
* Ambient temperatures below freezing require moisture-free air. Ambient
temperatures below freezing and above 180° require lubricants especially
selected for suitability at these temperatures. Pneumatic valves should be
used with filtered and lubricated air.
Model Pipe Overall Hex

Number Thread Length Size
EM12 1/8" 1.00 7/16"
EM25 1/4" 1.32 9/16"
EM37 3/8" 1.54 11/16"
EM50 1/2" 1.85 7/8"
EM75 3/4" 2.29 1-1/6"
EM100 1" 2.91 1-5/16"
EM125 1-1/4" 3.25 1-11/16"
EM150 1-1/2" 3.69 2"
Muffler / Flow Controls General Description

Muffler / flow controls provide an acceptable exhaust noise
level and effectively meter exhaust. Installed in valve exhaust
Controls
Flow
ports, they control cylinder piston speeds throughout a wide
range. The adjusting screw cannot be accidently blown
out, can be locked to maintain setting. Brass and bronze
construction. Clean with commonly used solvents.
Integrated
Fittings
Specifications
Maximum Operating Pressure ......................250 PSIG (Air)
Operating Temperature .................................... 0° to 300°F* Sensing
* Ambient temperatures below freezing require moisture-free air. Ambient
temperatures below freezing and above 180° require lubricants especially
selected for suitability at these temperatures. Pneumatic valves should be
used with filtered and lubricated air.
Control
Panel
Model Pipe Overall Hex

Number Thread Length Size
04502 0002 1/8" 1.15 9/16"
04504 0004
04506 0060
1/4"
3/8"
1.42
1.49
1/2"
11/16"
G
04508 0080 1/2" 1.77 7/8"
04512 0012 3/4" 1.98 1-1/16"
04516 0016 1" 2.15 1-5/16"
G63 Parker Hannifin Corporation

Pneumatic Division
Richland, Michigan
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY. REVISIONS
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

1 2-05860E MOUNT GASKET 1
19
2 6-04268C HOUSING WELDMENT 1 1 PART NUMBER FOR CAP (ITEM 20) WAS 4-01430C. 11/12/2008 MPM
A 3 88280000 Seal Ring, Male Teflon 3 15 2 ADDED STN TAG TO SAMPLER. 2/24/2010 MPM
A
4 88300100 Ring, Pressure Teflon 11 C2
5 88290000 Seal Ring, Female Teflon 3
18
6 2-06075A Universal Purge Spacer 1 MIN 60 PSIG ...
7 88190200 Discharge Spacer, Model PR & R 1
8 88350000 Back Spacer, Model PR & R 1 24
TOP & BOTTOM 23
9 2-06016C Packing Plate, Model PR & R, w/MTR's 1
10 88520000 Packing Nut 1
11 A305015 Side Plate, Model PR 2
B 12 A305016 Back Flange, Body, Model R & PR 1 B
13 A305017 Threaded Spacer Rod, Model PR 2 C1
14 A305018 Spacer Pipe, Model PR 2 17
12
15 80110045 4" Bore x 4" Stroke Air Cyl. 1
16 6-04268B PR Tube Weldment L-R (CRN) 1 11
14
17 88081300 Cover Gasket, 8" Model PR 2
18 88042300 8" Cover Plate, Model PR 2
19 A130004 Support Bracket, Model PR 1
C 20 4-02406ET 1/8" NPT SS Cap w/MTRs 1 C
21 80950001 Spanner Wrench 1 22
22 2-04632E Sentry Nameplate 1
13
23 4-05887B Label, Caution "...Guards In Place" 2 16 11
24 4-05887A Label, Danger "Disconnect Power..." 1
25 4-01290C 1 1/2 x 3 Stn Tag 1 9 10 21
8 SEALS MUST BE ADJUSTED ....

(BOTH SIDES)
D D
5 17
7 18
5
4
E E
3
3
6 31 7/8"
7 1/2" REF.
5 4" STROKE
4
F 9 1/16" REF. F
3
20
2 25
4
G G
1
SHEET 1 OF 1

NOTE: DO NOT SCALE DWG.
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
THIS DOCUMENT IS CONFIDENTIAL, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
AND CONTAINS INFORMATION TOLERANCES FOR ALL DIMENSIONS OCONOMOWOC WI 53066 USA
WHICH IS PROPRIETARY TO SEC. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
IT IS PROVIDED IN CONFIDENCE
MACH. PARTS STRUCT.
X
AND UPON THE CONDITION THAT
NEITHER IT NOR THE INFORMATION
H 1/X 1/8 1/2
H
Model PR FINAL ASSEMBLY
CONTAINED IN IT WILL BE COPIED,
DISCLOSED, OR USED IN WHOLE .X 0.1 0.3
OR IN PART WITHOUT THE PRIOR .XX 0.01 0.06
WRITTEN CONSENT OF SEC. .XXX 0.005 0.030
ANG. 1/2 1
FILENAME DATE 03/18/08 DATE DATE

REMOVE ALL BURRS AND SHARP 73204C01 DRAWN MPM CKD APPD
EDGES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
DWG. NO.
7-03204D REVISION
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS 0
Revision:
Page: 1

Section

Installation- & Maintenance instructions, Flexible bellows Type 53 71235038 3
Data Sheet, Flexible bellows Type 53 74890137 2
www.nov.com
Planning, Installation and Maintenance Instructions for
Rubber Compensators with Rotary Flanges and Solid Flanges
WILLRANDT Rubber Compensators will be supplied ready 2. Bracing examples
for installation in two designs. Once with one-piece swivel Rubber compensators in order to take up axial must be
steel retaining flanges, in accordance with the standard installed between fixed points expansion. The axial and
interface (DIN, ASA, BS etc.) lateral expansion must be transformed where this is not
possible so that braced rubber compensators can be used
These flanges should fit neatly, without any burr within the to neutralize the arising reaction forces (inside surface of
clamping range of the rubber bellow with a rubber sealing the compensator multiplied by the operating pressure).
surface protruding about 1 -10 mm, depending on the In this arrangement only appropriate sliding bearings can
nominal width. The counterflange sealing surfaces may be used for correct introduction of the expansion.
be designed smooth or rather with sealing face, according
to EN 1092 - 1:2001 (form A or B). An extensive range of rubber compensator bracings is listed
in our catalogue.
The second group will be supplied with pressure-strengthe-
ned solid rubber flanges including one-piece steel retaining
flanges in accordance with the standard connection (DIN,
ASA, BS, etc.). The counter flanges should be designed 3. IMPORTANT
with smooth sealing surface. When conveying abrasive media (liquids containing solids,
e.g. water/sand) the compensators must not be directly
Both compensators are self-sealing, additional gaskets are attached to the pump connecting piece (suction/pressure
not required. side), due to a risk of the compensators being damaged by
the relatively high speeds associated with the twist and
whirl formations in the pump connecting piece. This also
applies to bent pipes and tailings.
1. Planning instructions
EB 7
The lines must be designed in such a manner that the The installation space between the pump connecting piece
compensators are guided by fixed bearings (FP) or sliding and compensator must be 1 to 1.5 times the nominal
bearings (GL); see: diameter (DN). Pump operation against a totally or partially
closed gate or flap valve must be avoided. Cavitation must
Installation example 1 also be avoided as this can result in the rapid destruction
Compensating of axial expansion with unbraced of the compensator.
compensators.
EB 8 (Axial prestress)
Installation example 2 With axial prestress it is necessary to ensure that the
Compensating lateral and axial expansion with an unbraced compensators are prestressed by not more than
compensator. maximum 10 mm when in a non-installed state. For
higher prestresses a compensator in conformity with
Installation example 3 EB 8 must be used, i.e. the compensator must be first
Compensating of lateral and axial expansion with unbraced fully installed after which the corresponding prestress
compensators at an outgoing pipe. is generated with the firmly installed compensator.
Installation example 4 Reason: With a higher prestress in a non-installed state,

Compensating of axial expansion by angular movement the sealing bead can spring out of the holder of the steel
reversal with braced compensators. Advantage: Large axial backing flange and damage the sealing bead in the
expansions can only be absorbed by two compensators. process.
Installation example 5 EB 8 (Lateral prestress)

Arrangement of pipe hinge compensators in three hinge For compensator arrangement, it must be ensured when
systems for absorbing expansion in two directions. dimensioning the pipe that any necessary lateral prestress
Advantage: High expansion absorbing rates, low adjusting must be applied only with a securely installed compensator
forces, a soft corner. by means of pipe misalignment (EB 8a). A lateral prestress
of only 5mm is possible prior to installation. It must
Installation example 6 however be ensured that the rubber bead is not pulled
Use of rubber compensators with pumps. In this case out of the groove in the steel backing flange.
compensators in the pressure line should always be braced
to ensure that internal pressure does not overload the pump
connecting piece. A vacuum bearing ring should be used on
the suction side if the negative pressure exceeds 0.8 bar,
absolute.
60
EB 9 Vacuum supporting ring (EB15)
Regarding rubber bonded pipes or fittings rubber bonded
with a rubber to rubber gasket is to avoid by using isolation With application of vacuum supporting rings it must be
disk. observed that the vacuum supporting rings will be checked
up on right positioning after assembly when application is
directly behind the pump, damper or pipe elbow.
4. Safety measures a. exact fit (max. 10 - 15 mm play between bellow and

The pipes must be protected against impermissible ring onesided).
overpressure, excessive rise of temperature and
uncontrolled vacuum. The limiting values for the b. Where necessary insertion of adapter plates to achieve
respective settings are shown in the data sheets of our the acceptable play of seating.
catalogue relating to the respective types. In addition,
appropriate drain and venting options should be provided c. The connection lock should always lay in the lower
to prevent water impact and vacuum failures, which can flow range (6°°).
also cause compensator damage.
d. With high velocity flow it should always be checked
Medium safety whether a compensator with vulcanized supporting ring
Since the inside of the compensator comes into contact should be applied to avoid possible vibration crackings
with the media, it must be ensured that only media is by strong turbulent flows.
pumped as specified in the resistance list as suitable for
the inner rubber. e. After assembly please check whether the hexagon
socket wrench and the hexagon nuts are secured
If other media are used we should be notified of the same accordingly against loosening.
together with the relevant data in accordance with the
safety data sheet for chemical substances and preparation
as per DIN 52900, Item 1 to 2.13, in order that we may
ascertain whether the inner rubber of the compensator is
suitable.
Flow rates
With high flow rates it is necessary to clarify whether the
compensators have to be installed with or without a guiding
pipe to avoid wear as a result of excessive whirling.
Mating flanges
Mating flanges must conform in their design with EB 10 to
ensure reliable sealing and clamping of the rubber
compensators.
Counter flanges with or without protrusion may be used

for compensators with swivel flanges in accordance with
EN EN 1092-1:2001 form A or B. There should only be
used smooth counter flanges for compensators with solid
flanges.
61
5. Transport 6.6 The flange screws must be evenly tightened in
alternation as shown in Table 1 and 2 (page 69/70).
Packaging Package parts. It must also be ensured that the sealing bead does
Note „TOP" at the top and „cable or lifting hook" steel bak- not tilt. The entire protruding sealing surface must be
king rings (with bracing) and the rubber compensator flan- uniformly compressed. The screws must be evenly
ges must remain fastened until final mounting. The relative- tightened crosswise 3-4 times.
ly light rubber part is bonded to heavy metal flanges - avoid
excessive loading of the rubber part. 6.7 Tightening with a torque wrench
Evenly tighten all screws manually (step 1) (ensure
Tools parallelism with the sealing surfaces). Than step 2
No sharp-edged tools, wire cables, chains or lifting and 3 crosswise (acc. to table 1 and 2 page 69/70.
hooks (danger of damage to rubber). After the third stage, 30 minutes should be allowed
to pass before retightening to the final torque specified
Lifting and moving in step 3. Further tightening of the screws is
Always lift both steel flanges simultaneously. Shackle unnecessary, particularly since this could destroy the
at both sides or place padded tie-bars through the surface seal.
compensator or lift both sides.
6.8 Do not use plain washers on steel backing flanges.
Ground level transportation
Move flanges by rolling. 6.9 Do not weld close to the rubber compensator. If
necessary, cover the compensator with asbestos for
protection against welding heat and flying sparks
(sparks and temperatures above 80°C will damage
6. Installation the rubber parts!).
6.1 Check the packaging of the rubber compensators 6.10 Attention:

for damage. Damaged compensators must never When welding, steel-wire compensators
be released for installation. throughout the whole piping system can be
damaged by current leakage or electrical earthing.
6.2 Check the envisaged installation gap. The mating The anode and cathode of the E welding connection
flange must be installed in true alignment. The must always be on the same section of piping.
maximum deviation within the installation gap in (Not separated by the rubber compensator!).
relation to the compensator is +10 mm, minus the
corresponding expansion specifications. The 6.11 Attention: Bellow
maximum lateral deviation of the flange is 5 mm. Bellow must not be painted or insulated by a
temperature above 50°C. Heating and hardening
Note: If it is not possible to observe the above of the rubber.
tolerances then proceed with an axial/lateral
prestress as defined by EB 8 / EB 8a.
6.3 Do not use sharp-edged tools. Additional gaskets

are not required. The compensator rubber flange
seals directly on to the pipe flange.
6.4 Fasten the compensator at both flanges with

e.g. 2 threaded rods before loosening the lifting
device.
6.5 Arrangement of the screws EB 10

For compensators that have through-holes the screw
heads must face the bellow to avoid damaging the
bellow body when under pressure. For compensators
with threaded holes in the flange, the screws must fit
flush with the inner side of the flange in relation to the
bellow so that protruding screws cannot damage the
bellow when under pressure.
62
7. Pipe leading 9. Pressure test
Anchor points and mountings The rubber compensator is not a proper pressure vessel,
Prior to filling the piping, it must be ensured that all but is classified according to the Pressure Equipment
anchor points and mountings are installed and ope ratio- Directive as a "pipe accessory" (pipe component). When
nal. The bracing anchors must provide uniform support including the compensator in the pipeline, sealing does
and must be adjusted to the existing piping. not take place via a separate seal, but directly on the
integrated surface seal of the rubber bellow.
A one hundred per cent pressure test of the rubber

8. Final installation inspection compensators at the manufacturer can adversely
influence the integrated rubber sealing surface. For this
8.1 Damage reason, pressure testing of the rubber compensators at
Check complete compensators for visible damage the manufacturer takes place only at the special request
and in particular clean the gap between the steel of the customer with the utmost care.
backing flange and rubber bellow (remove foreign
bodies, sand, etc.). The pressure test is normally carried out only after the
rubber compensators have been fully installed in the
8.2 After the compensators have been installed they pipeline system. The information contained in these
should be protected in an appropriate manner installation instructions should be observed prior to the
against damage, and the protection should only pressure test.
be removed just before putting into operation.
8.3 The rubber parts must not be over-painted.

Solvents and chemicals will attack the surface 10. Storage
and destroy the bellow.
See DIN 7716 - guidelines for the storage of rubber parts:
8.4 The compensators must not be insulated as this Rubber compensators must be stored free of stress,
can result in overheating and drying the bellow and deformation and bending. Rubber compensators with
damage to the same. steel flanges must be stored upright on the flanges
(to avoid the risk of crushing).
8.5 The best operating results are achieved when the
compensator operates stress-free under operating Storage room
conditions (take appropriate prestressing into The storage room must be cool, dry, dust-free and
account during installation). moderately ventilated.
8.6 The fixed points must be checked to see whether Oxygen and ozone
they are suitable for absorbing the reaction force Rubber parts must be protected from draughts. If
from the non-braced compensator or whether the necessary they should be covered. Do not operate
adjusting forces and initiation of expansion with any ozone-generating facilities in the storage room,
appropriate sliding bearings take place at the e.g. electric motors, fluorescent lamps, etc.
correct distance from the compensator.
Other jointly stored media
8.7 Compensators braced with tie rods should be Do not store solvents, fuels, chemicals or similar
appropriately adjusted following installation. The substances in the same storage room.
tie rods should be able to be turned hand-tight.
All hexagon nuts must subsequently be locked
with lock nuts.
8.8 After mounting check the supporting rings on the

right seat and fuse.
8.9 Leakages
Tighten bolts when possible leakages occur during
pressure testing (1.3 x design pressure).
63
11. Supplementary installation and mounting 14. Maintenance and Monitoring
instructions for type 45 - 46 (EB 11)
14.1 Before final commissioning, check the tightening
The type 46 rubber compensator should be installed free torque of the flanged joints.
of any tension. Screws should always be tightened with
two wrenches to avoid damaging torsions being transmitted 14.2 Rubber parts must not be painted and should be
to the compensator; see EB 11. kept clean. (Clean with water or soapy water).
Keep the parts free from grease and oil.
Installation procedure
1. Attach the screw-joining parts to the pipe and check 14.3 Rubber parts should not be insulated when the
the installation gap! The installation gap must equal temperature exceeds 50°C. (Heating and hardening
the compensator length (130 mm +5 mm). of the rubber.)
2. Insert the compensator and tighten with two 14.4 Inspection must be carried out minimum one
wrenches. week after commissioning. Tighten flange bolts with
torque wrench. Inspections must be carried after
Nominal diameters DN 20 - 25 1,4 and 12 months, then annually.
The front screw-in part is used as a steady while the union
nut is tightened (to avoid the transmission of 14.5 Inspection criteria
torsions to the bellow). - External damage to rubber and bracing.
- Deformation of rubber flange external diameter
Nominal diameters DN 32 - 50 between the bolts (flange surface displacement).
The rear screw-in part is used as a steady while the union - Variations in the rubber bellow (blister formation,
nut is tightened (to avoid the transmission of torsion to the brittleness, fissures, hairline cracks)
bellow). - Check bracing for excessive movement
and misalignment.
See main installation instructions for all other installation
points.
Assess corrosion and wear over the whole
Tightening torque for all types 100 Nm. component.
12. Additional installation and assembly instructions

for pressure balanced compensators
Compensators for receiving axial extension without reaction

forces are transferred from high or low pressure on the
adjacent bearing, equipment or machinery (EB 12).
Compensators to accommodate axial- and lateral extension

in a pipe elbow without that the reaction forces are
transferred from positive and negative pressure on the
adjacent bearing (EB 13).
13. Additional installation and assembly instructions

for compensators as dismounting device
In order to balance imprecise assembly on valves or for

simple installation and removal tight joints may be used.
On the one hand the tensions prevent the transfer of
reaction forces on the connected valve. On the other
hand after loosening the flange connection by means of
the restraint flange the rubber bellow can be compressed
by its maximum possible axial movement in order to create
space for dismounting the valve (EB 14).
64
Installation Examples
EB 1 EB 6
EB 2
EB 7
EB 3
1-1,5 x DN
1-1,5 x DN
EB 8
EB 4
EB 8 a
EB 5
65
EB 9 EB 10
EB 10
66
EB 11 EB 14
DN 20/25 Typ 46 / DN 20 - 50 Typ 50
DN 32 - 50 Typ 46
EB 12
EB 15b
EB 13
EB 15a
67
Flange Bolt Torque (Nm)
Installation information Flange tightening torque
The flange bolt torques given in the table provide a specific
Tools: Torque-wrench, rubber hammer, centre surface pressure of 7 N/mm2 relative to the total surface of
punches. All tools to be burr-free the compensator flange (use flanges without seal). Because
(danger of damage to rubber parts) of the temporary settling process in the rubber flange area the
surface pressure falls under working conditions to some 50%
Use flange bolts with property class 8.8 of the final value (step III). The residual effective gripping and
(new bolts, greased). sealing force is completely sufficient and suitable for test
pressures up to 16 bar (tensile stresses from over-expansion
Step l a) insert all bolts and tighten equally are not permissible!).
by hand.
b) Fasten with about 3 crosswise and Attention: The maximum tightening torques given
uniform turns at torque step I . must not be substantially exceeded, since
Check gap width at outer an excessive load causes a constant
edge of flange. increase in the flow in elastomer and
c) Settling time 30 minutes. leads to destruction (crushing).
Step II d) Tighten all bolts crosswise by 3 Torque: Rough estimation of the final tightening
turns as per table above or 2/3 of torque for special flanges
final torque. Check gap width.
e) Settling time > 60 minutes. Rule of thumb
MA = 0.2 • FVM • d2
Step III f) Tighten crosswise 2 turns at final MA = Bolt Tightening Torque
torque. d2 = Screw Thread Flanks-Ø 1.4
DO NOT TIGHTEN FURTHER!
FVM = Installation Prestress Force = KA* • FKL
*KA = Tightening Factor ~ 1.4 greased,
Before test pressure: check torque 1 turn crosswise with
against a firm support
final value (Step III).
KA = Experimental Value = 1.0 selected flow
process in rubber flange
Later inspections: follow service manual. Only tighten flange
FKL = Clamping Force, Contact Pressure
bolts to final value (Step lll).
7 N/mm2 for total flange surface for
Type 40
FKL = ( Flange D2 - DN2 ) x πx Contact Pressure x (N)

4 Number of bolts
68
Flange Bolt Torque for Type 48, 48, 50, 51, 53, 55, 56 and 65 (table 2)
Step 1 Step 2 steü 3
DN for all for all PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 ASA 150
Nm Nm Nm Nm Nm
25 by hand 50 60 80 80 80 80
32 by hand 50 60 80 80 80 80
40 by hand 50 60 80 80 80 80
50 by hand 50 60 80 80 80 80
65 by hand 50 60 80 80 80 80
80 by hand 50 60 80 80 80 80
100 by hand 50 80 100 100 100 100
125 by hand 50 80 100 100 100 100
150 by hand 50 80 100 100 100 100
175 by hand 50 90 100 100 100 100
200 by hand 50 90 100 100 100 100
250 by hand 50 90 100 100 110 100
300 by hand 50 100 110 110 110 100
350 by hand 50 120 130 135 165 110
400 by hand 50 120 140 155 200 140
450 by hand 50 140 145 165 200 145
500 by hand 50 120 145 170 200 145
600 by hand 100 185 210 255 280 210
700 by hand 100 200 225 300 300 230
800 by hand 100 235 300 360 410 300
900 by hand 100 235 300 360 415 300
1000 by hand 100 300 360 425 525 360
See installation information.
70
WILLBRANDT Rubber Compensator Type 53
Type 53 is a low corrugated bellow compensator with good
TYPE 53
sound insulating characteristics. It is characterized by a very
high expansion capability in all three planes.
Design:
Low corrugated rubber bellow with reinforcing inserts and
integral sealing bead (therefore - self-sealing without additional
gaskets) for accommodating the steel-backed swivel flange with
solid ring support.
The flanges are provided with through holes
(PN 6, PN 10, PN 16, ASA150 lbs, etc.).
All steel parts in S 235 JRG2 (RSt 37-2) are zinc plated and
passivated.
Details for type 53
Bellow Core Reinforcing Cover Permissible operating data Hardness

colour code (inner) material (outer) shore A
bar °C bar °C bar °C
red/blue IIR-D Aramide EPDM 25 80 16 120 10 130 60

yellow /blue NBR Aramide CR 25 50 16 90 10 120 65
green/blue CSM Aramide CSM 25 50 16 90 10 120 65
Suitable for vacuum up to 8.0 bar abs., without supporting ring.
Suitable for vacuum up to 0 bar abs., with supporting ring.
Design A
Bellow Flange PN 10 Movement absorption

DN Overall length ØA ØD ØPC Ød n s ax + ax - lat ± ∠± ØC
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm °
32 130 81 140 100 18 4 15 10 20 15 20 65
40 130 86 150 110 18 4 15 10 20 15 20 74
50 130 96 165 125 18 4 15 10 20 15 20 86
65 130 110 185 145 18 4 15 10 20 15 20 105
80 130 122 200 160 18 8 15 15 20 15 20 118
100 130 142 220 180 18 8 15 15 20 15 20 137
125 130 170 250 210 18 8 18 15 20 15 20 166
150 130 196 285 240 23 8 18 15 20 15 20 192
200 130 256 340 295 23 8 20 15 20 15 15 252
250 130 306 395 350 23 12 20 15 20 15 10 304
300 130 356 445 400 23 12 22 15 20 15 10 354
Special designs
With tie-rods design B as axial stroke limitation
and for absorption of the reaction forces. With
tie-rods design C as axial stroke - and thrust
limitation, tie-rods supported in rubber bushes.
Design C Design B
31

G1280-Z-MA-001 Complete PDF - G1280-Z-MA-001 - Rev 0 - Bulk System

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

G1280-Z-MA-001 Complete PDF - G1280-Z-MA-001 - Rev 0 - Bulk System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual Bulk System

National Oilwell Varco References:

0 16-Sep-2013 For Information MADA EIMO HEOL

Vol. Chapter/ Title Remarks

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV

1 USER MANUAL INTRODUCTION.................................................................................... 4

1 USER MANUAL INTRODUCTION

1.1 General Information about the User Manual

This user manual is based on the NS 5820 (Supplier’s Documentation of Equipment)

1.2 Safety Summary

1.3 Safety and Service Bulletins (Product Information Bulletins)

1.4 Restriction in Use

1) Personnel performing maintenance or operation activities (on a daily to annual

5) No repairs, modifications, adjustments etc. beyond normal maintenance activities

7) The equipment shall be stored / transported in accordance with instructions if so

9) When defined as applicable for equipment:

1.5 Warranty Conditions

Warranty covers the following:

Qualification: Warranty claim from purchaser is accepted by National Oilwell Varco

1) Repair or replacement of a documented defect as required by the contract during

Warranty does not cover the following:

Repairs shall not be performed without written approval from NOV.

Preparation instructions are prepared in separate documents if preparation is part of

1.7 Supplier Support

Subject equipment is supplied by National Oilwell Varco Norway AS.

National Oilwell Varco Norway AS

Switchboard phone: +47 64005000

Vol. Chapter/ Title

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

2.1 Main Equipment List

RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV

0 18.07.2013 For Information HEOL EIMO HEOL

Revision Change description

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

2.2 Instrument Index

RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

West Jupiter (Seadrill 8) G1280 Bulk System

0 11.12.2012 For Information CECJ YOSE ROEK

Revision Change description

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

2.3 Valve Index

RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

West Jupiter (Seadrill 8) G1280 Bulk Systems

0 25.02.2013 For Information MADA RUPE ROEK

Revision Change description

#1 Butterfly valve Fig. 14

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

2.4 Product/Mechanical Data Sheet

RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV

0 29.11.2012 For Information ROEK ALTO ROEK

Revision Change description

1 SURGE TANK ................................................................................................................... 4

3 DUST COLLECTOR & CYCLONE

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

2.5 Instrument Data Sheet

RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

West Jupiter (Seadrill 8) G1280 Bulk System

0 11.12.2012 For Information CECJ YOSE ROEK

Revision Change description

Tag number : TBA